The URL can be used to link to this page

Contract - John King Construction - 9/9/2021 F-7-07-1-26.3 CITY OF ROUND ROCK General Services 0 • ROUND ROCK TEXAS Project Manual For: Kinningham House 1000 Southcreek Dr. Round Rock, TX 78664 September 2021 Prepared By: Eric Dady City of Round Rock Ryan Hansanuwat Mode � �, Architect APPRUV�'a.� BY RNEYNelson Ogren C � � �� 2P Consulting Civil Engineer TBPE Firm Registration No F-19351 Kinningham House 1000 Southcreek Dr. Round Rock, TX 78664 TABLE OF CONTENTS Section Description No. of Pages 00020 Notice to Bidders 1 00100 Instructions to Bidders 4 Exhibit A 1 00200 Bid Bond 2 00300 Proposal Form 4 00410 Statement of Bidder's Safety Experience 1 00500 Agreement 5 00600 Insurance & Construction Bond Forms Performance &Payment Bond Instructions 1 Insurance Instructions 1 00610 Performance Bond 2 00620 Payment Bond 2 00650 Certificate of Liability Insurance 1 00700 General Conditions 41 00800 Supplemental General Conditions 2 00900 Special Conditions 5 01000 Technical Specifications 4 02000 Plans, Details and Notes 1 8-2016 Table of Contents 00090665 Notice to Proposers Pursuant to the provisions of Texas Government Code, Section 2269.151,it is the intention of the City of Round Rock to select,via the Request for Proposal, to select a prime contractor by using the Competitive Sealed Proposal process for the construction of the Kinningham House as generally described herein. The project includes: demolition of existing structure, construction of new approximately 5,200 SF building, site work and utilities. Sealed Proposals containing one digital copy, on a USB Flash Drive, and a total of five(5)hard copies of each proposer's complete"Proposal,"(Proposal Form not required on digital copy)"Questionnaire,"and any other required or additional materials that follow the"Format of Submitted Proposal"must be submitted to Eric Dady-Project Manager, City of Round Rock, 221 East Main Street,Round Rock,Texas 78664 no later than Thursday,August 5th at 2 PM CST in an opaque envelope/packaging, sealed,and clearly marked on the outside with: Proposal to Serve as Competitive Sealed Proposal for the Kinningham House Proposals will be publicly opened and read aloud at City Hall of Round Rock, 221 E Main St,Round Rock, Texas on Thursday,August 5th at 2 PM CST.No oral, telegraphic or facsimile proposals will be accepted. No late proposals will be accepted. No proposals may be withdrawn after the scheduled proposal opening deadline. All proposals received after the scheduled proposal opening deadline will be returned unopened. Proposals are to include the specific qualification information requested in the sequence and format prescribed in the Proposal Packet that may be obtained from City of Round Rock Solicitations website: https://www.roundrocktexas.gov/businesses/solicitations/. Plans can be viewed at https://www.roundrocktexas.gov/businesses/solicitations/. The proposal packets will be available beginning Saturday, July 17, 2021. A pre-proposal meeting will be held at the project site, 1000 Southcreek Dr.,Round Rock,TX 78664 on Tuesday,July 20th at 2 PM CST. Attendance is encouraged but is not mandatory. The Architect/Engineer and the Owner's Rep will be in attendance to discuss the project. Each proposal must be accompanied by a cashier's check or acceptable bond payable to the City of Round Rock in an amount not less than five percent(5%) of the total proposed contract sum,plus alternates as submitted. The successful proposer will be required to furnish payment bonds and performance bonds in amounts equal to one hundred percent(100%)of the contract sum, in accordance with chapter 2253 of the Texas government Code,within five (5) days of award of contract. Selection of the successful Proposer will be based on the selection criteria set forth in the instructions to proposers. In case of ambiguity,duplication or obscurity in the proposals, The City of Round Rock reserves the right to reject any and/or all proposals and waive any informalities and irregularities in any and/or all proposals received. Contractors and subcontractors shall pay to laborers,workman and mechanics the prevailing wage rates as determined by the City of Round Rock Publication Dates: Austin American Statesmen Round Rock Leader 1. 7/17/2021 1.7/17/2021 2. 7/24/2021 2.7/24/2021 00100 INSTRUCTION TO PROPOSERS City of Round Rock, Texas Instructions to Proposers: Section 00100 INSTRUCTIONS TO PROPOSERS Kinningham House 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract forms, including General Conditions and Supplemental General Conditions and other specification sections, are applicable documents. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. All definitions set forth in the General Conditions and Supplemental General Conditions, in Round Rock's "Standard Form of Agreement between Owner and Contractor," and in other contract documents are applicable to these proposal documents. B. Proposal documents include the Request for Competitive Sealed Proposals for Construction Services, Instructions to Proposers, Proposal Form, sample bond and contract forms, and the proposed contract documents including any addenda issued prior to receipt of proposals. C. Addenda are written or graphic instruments issued prior to the opening of the proposals which modify or interpret the proposal documents (including drawings and specifications) by additions, deletions, clarifications or corrections. Addenda become part of the contract documents when the Standard Form of Agreement between Owner and Contractor is executed. D. The City of Round Rock may be referred to in the proposal documents as Owner. E. A proposal is a complete and properly signed proposal to do the Work for the sums stipulated therein, submitted in accordance with the proposal documents. F. The base contract sum is the sum stated in the proposal for which the Proposer offers to perform the work described in the proposal documents as the base, to which work may be added or from which work may be deleted, for sums stated in alternate proposals, if alternate proposals are required. G. An alternate proposal (or alternate) is an amount stated in the proposal to be added to or deducted from the amount of the base contract sum and the corresponding change in the work, as described in the proposal documents or in the proposed contract documents. H. A unit price is an amount stated in the proposal as a price per unit of measurement for materials or service as described in the proposal documents or in the proposed contract documents. I. A Proposer is a person or entity who submits a proposal. J. A subcontractor is a person or entity who submits a proposal to a Proposer for materials or labor for a portion of the Work. K. The Contractor is the person or entity that has been determined to provide the best value for Owner based on Owner's Selection Criteria and its ranking evaluation, and to whom Owner awards the contract. L. Contract refers to the City of Round Rock's "Standard Form of Agreement between Owner and Contractor." 1.3 EXAMINATION OF DOCUMENTS AND SITE A. Each Proposer, by making a proposal, represents that she/he has read and understands the proposal documents. B Each Proposer, by making a proposal, represents that she/he has visited the site, performed investigations and verifications as she/he deems necessary, and familiarized her/himself with the local conditions under which the Work is to be performed, and will be responsible for any and all errors in her/his proposal resulting from failure to do so. C. The location and elevations of the various utilities and pipe work included within the scope of the Work are offered as a general guide only, without guarantee as to accuracy. The Proposer shall verify and investigate to her/his own satisfaction the location and elevation of all utilities, pipe work, and the like and shall adequately inform her/himself of their relation to the work before submitting a proposal. D. Before submitting a proposal each Proposer will, at Proposer's own expense, make or obtain any additional examinations, investigations, explorations,tests and studies and obtain any additional information (surface, subsurface, and underground facilities) at or contiguous to the site, or otherwise, which may affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the Work and which Proposer deems necessary to determine her/his proposal for performing and furnishing the Work in accordance with the time, price and other terms and conditions of the contract documents. E. On request in advance, Owner will provide each Proposer access to the site to conduct explorations and tests as each Proposer deems necessary for submission of a proposal. Proposer shall fill all holes, clean up, and restore the site to its former condition upon completion of such explorations. F. The lands upon which the Work is to be performed, all rights-of way and easements for access thereto, and other lands designated for use by Contractor in performing the Work are identified in the contract documents. G. Each Proposer, by making her/his proposal, represents that her/his proposal is based upon the materials, systems, and equipment required by the proposal documents without exception. 1.4 PROPOSAL DOCUMENTS A. Complete sets of proposal documents shall be used in preparing proposals; neither Owner nor the Architect or Engineer assumes any responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from use of incomplete sets of proposal documents. B. Owner or the Architect or Engineer, in making copies of the proposal documents available on the above terms, do so only for the purpose of obtaining proposals on the Work and do not confer a license or grant for any other use. 1.5 PROPOSAL PROCEDURES A. All proposals shall be prepared on the Proposal Form provided in the proposal documents and submitted in accordance with these Instructions to Proposers. Proposers shall provide all requested information. B. A proposal is invalid if it has not been deposited at the designed location prior to the time and date for receipt of proposals indicated in the Request for Competitive Sealed Proposals for Construction Services and/or the Notice to Proposers [included at Section 00020 of the Project Manual], or prior to any extension thereof issued by addenda to the proposers. Proposals received after submission deadline shall be returned unopened and will be considered unacceptable and shall be considered void. Owner shall never be held responsible for lateness of mail, carriers, couriers, etc., and the time/date stamp clock used by the City of Round Rock shall be the official time of receipt. C. Unless otherwise provided in any supplement to these Instructions to Proposers, no proposer shall modify, withdraw or cancel her/his proposal or any part thereof for one hundred-twenty (120) days after the time designated for the receipt of proposals in the Request for Competitive Sealed Proposals for Construction Services. D. Proposals shall not contain any recapitulation of the Work to be done. E. Proposers shall make no additional stipulations on the Proposal Form, nor limit, nor qualify proposals in any other manner. Proposals so qualified will be subject to disqualification. F. Itemized Bids and listed Key Subcontractors are due three (3) business days after Thursday, August 5th at 2 PM CST. Itemized bids should include a breakdown of major divisions of construction and key Subcontractors list. Key Subcontractors can be described as a licensed trade, any Subcontract totaling 5% or more of the proposed contract sum, or a critical path Subcontractor. Itemized bids shall be submitted on Form 300A provided in the proposal documents and may be submitted by email to edadygroundrocktexas.gov on Tuesday, August loth by 2 PM CST. 1.6 DISCREPANCIES AND AMBIGUITIES A. Each proposer shall examine the proposal documents carefully and, not later than, Tuesday, July 27th at 2 PM CST, shall make written request, via email and by email only, to the Owner for questions, interpretations or corrections of any ambiguity, inconsistency, or error therein which she/he may discover to: Eric Dady EDadyroundrocktexas.gov Any interpretations, corrections and changes to proposal documents or extensions to the opening date will be made by addenda to the proposal documents by Owner and communicated publically through: https://www.roundrocktexas.gov/businesses/solicitations/ Sole authority to authorize addenda shall be vested in Owner. All responses will be sent via addenda,prior to bid opening,through the solicitations website. Proposers shall acknowledge receipt of all addenda. It shall be the Proposer's sole responsibility to insure receipt of all addenda before proposal submission. 1.7 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Each Proposer represents that her/his proposal is based upon the materials and equipment described in the proposal documents. B. No substitution will be considered unless written request has been submitted to the Owner for approval not later than Tuesday,July 27th at 2 PM CST. C. If the Architect or Engineer and Owner approve a proposed substitution, such approval will be set forth in an addendum. D. Substitutions not submitted and approved by Tuesday, July 27th at 2 PM CST may be added as a Voluntary Alternate and submitted at time of bid on the proposal form. 1.8 QUALIFICATION OF PROPOSERS A. Every Proposer shall submit with her/his proposal a properly executed Questionnaire. B. Proposers may be disqualified and their proposals not considered for, by way of illustration but not by way of limitation, any one or more of the following reasons: 1. Reasonable information or belief that collusion exists among Proposers; 2. Proposer being interested in any manner in any litigation involving Owner; 3. Proposer being in arrears on any existing contract or having defaulted on any previous contract; 4. Lack of competency as revealed by the financial statement, experience and equipment, Questionnaire, or qualification statement; 5. Uncompleted work which in the judgment of Owner will prevent or hinder the prompt completion of additional work if awarded. 1.9 PREPARATION OF PROPOSAL A. Proposer shall submit her/his proposal on the Proposal Form furnished as part of the proposal documents in the required format. All blank spaces in all forms shall be correctly filled in and the Proposer shall state the prices, written in words and in figures. Where there is a discrepancy between the price written in words and the price written in figures, the price written in words shall govern. If the proposal is submitted by an individual, that person's name must be signed by that person or by that person's duly authorized agent. If the proposal is submitted by a firm, association or partnership, the name and address of each member must be given, and the proposal must be signed by an official or duly authorized agent. Powers of Attorney which authorize agents or others to sign proposals must be properly certified and must be in writing and submitted with the proposal. 1.10 PROPOSAL SECURITY A. Each proposal must be accompanied by proposal security made payable to Owner in an amount of five percent(5%) of the Proposer's maximum proposal price; and same shall be in the form of a cashier's check or a Proposal Bond, duly executed by Proposer as principal and having as surety thereon a corporate surety authorized and admitted to do business in the state of Texas and licensed to issue such bond, as a guarantee that Proposer will enter into the City's contract and execute the required Performance and Payment Bonds within five (5) days of Owner's award of contract. B. The Proposal Security will be retained until such Proposer has executed the Standard Form of Agreement between Owner and Contractor, and furnished the required bonds, whereupon the proposal security will be returned. If Proposer fails to execute and deliver the Standard Form of Agreement between Owner and Contractor and furnish the required bonds within five (5) days of Owner's award of contract, Owner may annul the award of contract. In that event, the proposal security of that Proposer will become the property of Owner, not as a penalty but as liquidated damages. Owner reserves the right to award the contract to the next- ranking Proposer based on Owner's evaluations of the proposal, as Owner deems it to be in the best interests of Owner. The proposal security of the other proposers whom Owner believes to have a reasonable chance of receiving the award may be retained by Owner until the earlier of the seventh (7th) day after the effective date of the Standard Form of Agreement between Owner and Contractor or the ninety-fifth (95th) day after the proposal opening, whereupon the proposal security furnished by such proposers will be returned. C. Owner has the right to retain the proposal security of all Proposers until either: 1. The Standard Form of Agreement between Owner and Contractor has been executed and the bonds have been furnished, or 2. The specified time has elapsed so that proposals may be withdrawn, or 3. All proposals have been rejected. 1.11 PERFORMANCE BOND & LABOR&MATERIAL PAYMENT BOND A. Contractor shall post with Owner, within five (5) days of Owner's award of contract, a Performance Bond in the amount of one hundred percent(100%) of the total contract price in such form as is deemed satisfactory by Owner. This bond shall be executed by a corporate surety company duly authorized and admitted to do business in the state of Texas and licensed to issue such bond in the state. B. Contractor shall post with Owner, within five (5) days of Owner's award of contract, a Payment Bond in the amount of one hundred percent (100%) of the total contract price in such form as is deemed satisfactory by Owner. This bond shall be executed by a corporate surety company duly authorized and admitted to do business in the state of Texas and licensed to issue such bond in the state. C. In addition to the above requirements, if the amount of any bond exceeds One Hundred Thousand and No/100 Dollars ($100,000.00), then the surety on such bond must also: 1. Hold a certificate of authority from the United States Secretary of the Treasury to qualify as a surety on obligations permitted or required under federal law; or 2 Have obtained reinsurance for any liability in excess of$100,000.00 from a reinsurer that is authorized and admitted as a reinsurer in Texas and is the holder of a certificate of authority from the United States Secretary of the Treasury to qualify as a surety or reinsurer on obligations permitted or required under federal law. In determining whether the surety on the bond or the reinsurer holds a certificate of authority from the United States Secretary of the Treasury, Owner may conclusively rely on the list of companies holding certificates of authority as acceptable sureties on federal bonds and as acceptable reinsuring companies published in the Federal Register by the United States Department of the Treasury covering the date on which the bond was executed. D. Contractor must file, along with the Performance Bond and Payment Bond, all documents and information necessary to establish that the agent signing the bond is authorized to write the bond in the amount requested and, if applicable, that reinsurance requirements have been met, including limits and ratings or other evidence of company solvency. E. If the corporate surety company on any bond furnished by Contractor to Owner is declared bankrupt or becomes insolvent or such corporate surety company's right to do business in the state of Texas is revoked, then Contractor shall within five (5) days thereafter substitute another bond and corporate surety company, both of which must be deemed acceptable by Owner. 1.12 FILING PROPOSAL A. No proposal will be considered unless it is filed with Owner within the time limit for receiving proposals as stated in the Request for Competitive Sealed Proposals and/or the Notice to Proposers [included at Section 00020 of the Project Manual]. Each proposal shall be in a sealed envelope/packaging plainly marked as required by those documents. 1.13 MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF PROPOSAL A. No proposal may be withdrawn or modified after the proposal opening except where the award of the contract has been delayed beyond one hundred-twenty (120) days after date of proposal opening. 1.14 IRREGULAR PROPOSAL A. Proposals will not be considered if they show any omissions, alterations of form, additions, conditions not requested, unauthorized alternate proposals, or irregularities of any kind. However, Owner reserves the right to waive any irregularities and to make the award in the best interests of Owner. 1.15 REJECTION OF PROPOSAL A. Proposer acknowledges the right of Owner to reject any or all proposals and to waive any informality or irregularity in any proposal received. In addition, Proposer recognizes the right of Owner to reject a proposal if Proposer failed to furnish any required proposal security, or to submit the data required by the proposal documents, or if the proposal is any way deemed incomplete or irregular. 1.16 SELECTION CRITERIA AND OWNER EVALUATION A. Owner intends to award the contract to the Proposer whose proposal represents the best value to Owner according to the selection criteria and the relative weighting set forth herein. The selection criteria that Owner will use in selecting the successful Proposer and the relative weighting of such criteria are as follows: Selection Criteria a) Price: The quoted price, cost methodology, alternatives proposed, and markup for changes. (Total 40pts.) b) Past Projects with References Listed: 1) Has the proposer performed local projects (local is defined as the Austin-Round Rock MSA)? 2) Are there governmental clients listed (with contact information) and was the project overall a positive experience for those clients? 3) Are the projects presented equal or greater in complexity, scope, and dollar value when compared with the proposed project? 4) Was the completion of similar projects completed according to the construction schedule? (Total 20pts.) c) Company and Construction Team Qualifications: 1) Is the company competent, financially stable, and experienced to complete the proposed project? 2) Has the project manager and superintendent been successful in managing projects of similar size, complexity, and scope as the proposed project? 3) Does the construction team's resumes reflect technical knowledge and practical experience managing and constructing projects, equal to the proposed project? 4) Has the construction team worked together on multiple projects? (Total 20pts.) d) Project Plan, Approach and Quality Control: 1) Are all project steps clearly identified, in a logical order, and does the schedule meet the City's needs? 2) Does the company have a valid contingency plan if delays occur and the ability to execute that plan? 3) Can the company complete the project within the schedule and accomplish existing commitments? 4) Is the proposed program for quality control sound and specifically related to the project? (Total 20pts.) e) Compliance with Administrative Requirements and Information Requested: 1) Did the Proposer follow the Proposal Instructions and Format? (Total O-lOpts.) B. Proposals shall be publicly opened, and the names of each Proposer shall be read aloud, together with all prices stated in each proposal. C. Within forty-five (45) days after the proposals are opened, Owner or its designated representatives shall evaluate and rank each proposal submitted in relation to the published selection criteria and weighting. D. Owner will initially attempt to negotiate a contract with the first ranked Proposer. If Owner does not require any modifications to the scope, time, or price, then the first ranked Proposer shall execute the Standard Form of Agreement between Owner and Contractor, as awarded. If for any reason Owner is unable to reach contract execution with the first ranked Proposer, then Owner will give written notification to that Proposer that negotiations are ended and will then proceed to negotiate with the next ranked Proposer in the order of selection ranking until such time as a contract is reached or all proposals are rejected. Proposals may be rejected at any time. 1.17 EXECUTION OF CONTRACT A. No contract shall be binding on Owner until it has been executed by Owner or its duly authorized representative, and same delivered to Contractor. 1.18 FAILURE TO EXECUTE CONTRACT A. The failure of the Proposer to execute the required bonds or to sign the required contract within five (5) days after the Contractor is notified that the scoring committee has selected them as the 1st choice contractor shall be considered by Owner as abandonment of the proposal, and Owner may rescind the notice. 1.19 PURCHASE ORDER A. Purchase order(s) shall be generated by Owner to Contractor. The purchase order number must appear on all itemized invoices. 1.20 NOTICE TO PROCEED A. Upon the execution of bonds and contract, Owner will issue a written Notice to Proceed to Contractor requesting that she/he proceed with construction, and establishing the commencement of the contract time; thereafter, Contractor shall commence work within ten(10) calendar days after the date of Notice to Proceed. 1.21 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. The time for completion is 180 calendar days from the notice to proceed letter and such deadline for completion will be included in the Standard Form of Agreement between Owner and Contractor. 1.22 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES A. Should Contractor fail to achieve completion of the work within the specified completion schedule, then the sum of One Thousand and No/100 Dollars ($1,000.00) per calendar day of delay will be deducted from the monies due Contractor for the work, and such sums shall be reasonable liquidated damages due to the impracticability or impossibility of ascertaining the actual damages. 1.23 PERMITS A. Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all necessary permits. 1.24 MATERIALS TESTING A. Owner will be responsible for providing or contracting for inspection services and materials testing, all in accordance with Texas Local Government Code §271.116(c) and any other applicable statutes. 1.25 WAGE SCALE A. In accordance with V.T.C.A., Government Code, Title 10, §2258 "Prevailing Wage Rates," the general prevailing wage rate has been determined for this locality for the craft or type of worker needed to execute work of a similar character to the project listed herein. Contractor shall pay the prevailing wage rate in this locality to all employees and subcontractors performing work on this project, and in no event shall Contractor pay less than the rate shown in the following schedule: Except for work on legal holidays, the "General Prevailing Rate of Per Diem Wage" for the various crafts or type of workers or mechanics is the product of(a) the number of hours worked per day, except for overtime hours, times (b)the above respective rate per hour. B. For legal holidays, the "General Prevailing Rate of Per Diem Wage" for the various crafts or type of workers or mechanics is the product of(a) one and one- half times the above respective rate per hour, times (b) the number of hours worked on the legal holiday. C. For overtime work, the "General Prevailing Rate of Per Diem Wage" for the various crafts or type of workers or mechanics is the product of(a) one and one- half times the above respective rate per hour, times (b) the number of hours worked on overtime. D. Under the provisions of V.T.C.A., Government Code, Title 10, §2258 "Prevailing Wage Rates," Contractor or subcontractor of Contractor shall forfeit as a penalty to the entity on whose behalf the contract is made or awarded, the sum of Sixty and No/100 Dollars ($60.00) for each calendar day, or portion thereof, that the worker is paid less than the wage rates stipulated in the contract. E. If the construction project involves the expenditure of federal funds in excess of Two Thousand and No/100 Dollars ($2,000.00), then the minimum wages to be paid various classes of laborers and mechanics will be based upon the wages that will be determined by the Secretary of Labor to be prevailing for the corresponding classes of laborers and mechanics employed on the project of a character similar to the contract work. 1.26 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS A. Any quantities given in any portion of the contract documents, including the plans, are estimates only, and the actual amount of work required may differ somewhat from the estimates. The basis for payment shall be the actual amount of work done and/or material furnished. B. Contractor shall not commence work until she/he has furnished certification of all insurance required and such has been approved by the City of Round Rock, nor shall Contractor allow any subcontractor to commence work on her/his subcontract until proof of all similar insurance that is required of the subcontractor has been furnished and approved. The certificate of insurance form included in the contract documents must be used by Contractor's insurer to furnish proof of insurance. C. Proposals shall be submitted on a separated contract basis. No Texas sales tax shall be included in the prices proposed for materials consumed or incorporated into the finished product under this contract. This contract is issued by an organization that is qualified for exemption pursuant to the provisions of §151.309(5) of the Texas Tax Code. The City of Round Rock will issue an exemption certificate to Contractor. Contractor must then issue a resale certificate to the material supplier for materials purchased. Contractor must have a valid sales tax permit in order to issue a resale certificate. In obtaining consumable materials, Contractor will issue a resale certificate in lieu of payment of sales tax, and the following conditions shall be observed: 1. The contract will transfer title of consumable, but not incorporate, materials to the City at the time and point of receipt by Contractor; 2. Contractor will be paid for these consumable materials by the City of Round Rock as soon as is practicable. Payment will not be made directly, but considered subsidiary to the pertinent item. Contractor's monthly estimate will state that the estimate includes consumables that were received during the month covered by the estimate; and 3. The designated representative of the City of Round Rock must be notified as soon as possible of the receipt of these materials so that an inspection can be made by the City's representative. Where possible, the materials will be labeled as the property of the City of Round Rock. D. If Proposer's insurance company is authorized, pursuant to its agreement with Proposer, to arrange for the replacement of a loss rather than by making a cash payment directly to the City of Round Rock, the insurance company must furnish or have furnished by Proposer a Performance Bond in accordance with §2253.021(b), Texas Government Code, and a Payment Bond in accordance with §2253.021(c), Texas Government Code. Format of Submitted Proposal Cover Sheet Tab A. Bid Bond Tab B. Proposal Form Tab C. Questionnaire 1. Basic information 2. Organization 3. Experience Tab labeled 3.1) Insert Current Project List Tab labeled 3.2) Insert Past Project List Tab labeled 3.5) Insert Claims and Suits Explanation Tab labeled 3.6) Insert up to ten projects constructed inside Austin-Round Rock MSA Tab labeled 3.7) Insert Statement of Bidders Safety Experience; OSHA 200/300 Logs 4. Financial Information Tab labeled 4.1) Insert Financial Statement Tab labeled 4.7) Insert Certificate of Insurances) 5. Proposed Personnel Tab labeled 5.1) Insert Personnel Resumes Tab labeled 5.2) Insert Team Projects 6. Proposed Plan, Schedule, and Quality Control Program Tab labeled 6.8) Insert Construction Schedule 7. Ability to Meet Project Schedule Questionnaire Signature/Acknowledgment FORM 1295 INSTRUCTIONS Pursuant to Section 2252.90 of the Texas Government Code, as of January 1, 2016, any business entity entering into a contract with a local government that requires approval of the governing body must submit a disclosure of interested parties (Form 1295) to the local governmental prior to the execution of the contract. The Texas Ethics Commission (TEC) has created an electronic filing application for business entities to submit the required information and generate the required form. The City of Round Rock may not enter into a contract that requires the approval of the City Council until the business entity files a Form 1295 with the City Clerk. Please follow the instructions below to file your Form 1295 with the TEC and the City of Round Rock: • Upon being notified of a bid award,the award recipient("business entity")must go to the following website: https://www.ethics.state.tx.us/filinginfo/1295/and follow the login instructions on the website application to complete a Form 1295. ✓ If this is a business entity's first time logging on to the website application,the business entity must create a Username and Password and then follow the application's instructions to complete a Form 1295. ✓ The City does not have a Contract ID Number System. Please insert 000000 and the project name in this box. Do not put the resolution number of the initial agreement if this is a supplemental agreement-only put the project name. ✓ Even if a business entity has no interested parties,Form 1295 still must be completed using the website application and filed with the City Clerk. Please note that there are very few instances that a business will not have any interested parties. Visit the TEC's FAQ page for the definition of an interested party. ✓ If a business is publicly traded, they are exempt from having to complete a Form 1295. Please e-mail the City Clerk stating such. • The business entity MUST print and sign the completed Form 1295 once it has been accepted by the TEC and no longer has DRAFT stamped on it. ✓ The signed Form 1295 must be scanned and e-mailed directly to the City Clerk at swhite@roundrocktexas.gov as soon as it is completed.DO NOT send the form back to the Purchasing Department, Project Manager, or mail it with signed original agreements/contracts. ✓ The City Clerk only has 30 days from receipt to acknowledge the form in the TEC system. If you do not return it to the City Clerk promptly, and the 30 days has expired when she receives it,you WILL have to complete another one. • A new Form 1295 must be done for each contract a business entity enters into with the City, including Supplementals, Amendments, and Change Orders. • A Form 1295 cannot be handwritten. It must be completed electronically through the TEC website application. If you have any questions regarding the process of filing of Form 1295 with the City, please contact: Sara White, City Clerk Phone: (512)218-5404 E-mail: swhite@roundrocktexas.gov If you have questions regarding the actual form or the online filing application,please visit the TEC's FAQ page: https://www.ethics.state.tx.us/resources/FAQs/FAQ_Form1295.php Revised 8/2020 00150 QUESTIONNAIRE Tab C A Questionnaire 1 I Basic Information 1.1 Name of organization:John King Construction,Ltd. 1.2 Address of principal office:559 S IH35,Suite 210,Round Rock,TX 78664 1.3 Telephone number and facsimile number of principal office: Telephone number:512.836.5464 Facsimile number:512.833.1033 1.4 Form of business organization:Partnership 1.5 Year founded:1978 1.6 Individual named as primary contact:J.D.King,Head of Estimating&Pre-Construction 2 I Organization 2.1 How many years has your organization been in business in construction in its current capacity?43 Years 2.2 How many years has your organization been in business under its present name?18 Years (Organization name changes made for tax structure purposes) 2.3 Under what other former names has your organization ever operated? John King,Inc 19832O03 King Construction 19784983 2.4 If your organization is a corporation,answer the following:N/A 2.5 If your organization is a partnership,answer the following. (a)Date of Organization:May 30,2003 (b)Type of partnership:Limited (c)Name of General Partner(s):John King,LLC 2.6 If your organization is individually owned,answer the following.N/A 2.7 If the form of your organization is other than those listed above,answer the following N/A 2.8 Is your organization authorized to do business in Texas?Yes Kinningham House I Response to RFP 2021 Tab C I Questionnaire 3.1 I Current Project List JKC Projects In-Progress Project Name,for Procurement Scheduled whom Location Nature of Method&Nature of Contract Percent Pro'ect Amount Size Complete Completion Owner Architect constructed ) Services Date Ground-Up,Three 551 S IH 35,LLC Ochono Development City Centre II-551 S Round Rock,TX Story Class.A Office Negotiated,General $ 5,023,525 22,724 SF 75% Sep-21 Ingrid Crow, +Architecture,William IH 35,LLC Contractor Building 512.983.7446 I-lodge,512.710.5140 Negotiated, I ioover&Associates. Brewery-Airport Renovation& (Construction Austin 3 800 000 11 024 SF 2% Dec-21T DA Trey Ottmers, Blvd,NDA Rebuild Manager as"lei 1\ 512,467.262E Constructor Taco Bell Refresh Tacala Companies, Hoover&Associates. Program-Tacala Misc-Central Texas Remodels&Refresh Competitive Bid, $ 500,000 Misc 75% Dec-�1 n , , General Contractor Dwayne ILostlua Trey()ttmers Companies 512.423.7330 512.467.2626 Competitive Bid St.Andrews St.Andrews Construction FGM Architects, Presbyterian,St. Austin,TX Addition&Remodel $ 1,000,000 15,817 SF 22% Jan 21 Presbyterian,Steve ,, Andrews Presbyterian Manager as Landsman,512.251.0698 512.4 4.8085 Constructor Competitive Bid, Magic Architecture, Brewery-Rainey St, Austin,TX Renovation& Construction NDA Rebuild Manager as $ 1,800,000 3,034 SF 0°/o Apr-21 NDA Scott Magic, Constructor 512.994.5782 Hum Coup Development Retail Hutto,TXGround-Up Retail Negotiated,General $ 1,500,000 6,328 SF 0% Apr-21 NDA PGAZ Architects, Shell Building lb Shell Contractor 512.474.8085 Ilutto CoOp Development Retail Hutto,TX C7round-1 is Retail Negotiated,General $ 3 000,000 12 00()SF 0% Apr-21 NDA FCTM Architects, Shell Buildings 3&4 Shell Contractor 512.474.8085 Total WI P&Under Contract $ 16,623,525.00 Yam t 4 b Y - ..>.. a+. yy A x.....► VII iii r, ' r '---`---- fir, .g ., T l'il°11011 iiii '''''— ''" AllitIr -'1`;:."r'�`+ iii it . —MI. 10;""is,...„.',.::•''' ..-14iiiill-I I,,'Iliiii 'wrW'°' arm �� ► � ��: ,i►' 4�a.. �* >r� 7, - .4.4,----,- **- . tive-,-,— 1 , , ,.- ,,, ---:. ,..,‘ ' — --...,,,,,4 , • - .- Ni, .„,,, P : ' Allk tom. a ' - J!- C:zl.,Centre II-In Progress John King Construction was the general contractor for the construction of a 3-story(22,500 sgft) office building Co. central Round Rock, TX. This completed phase I of a multi-phase construction project and the plan is to continue to work with them on the next phase. Throughout the project I truly felt John King Construction acted as a partner. The cooperation and collaboration that John King Construction brought to the table every day was greatly appreciated. Their team was prompt in communicating any potential issues and providing solutions to resolve them in a timely manner. Ingrid Crow Managing Partner The Crow Group Kinningham House I Response to RFP 2021 Tab C I Questionnaire 3.2 I Past Project List Grand Lady Event Venue (a) The Grand Lady Event Venue,Westbound,LLC (b) Manor,Texas (c) New Construction (d) Negotiated (e) General Contractor (f) $1,730,552 (g) 4,000 SF (h) Original Budget: $1,730,552 I Actual Cost: $1,772,159 Difference Explained: $41,607.58 in Owner Iniated Change Orders (i) Start Date: 11.1.2020 I Completion Date: 5.20.2021 Original Construction Duration: 192 Days (j)Westbound,LLC I Katie West- 602.908.4427 (k) Archadia Design I Michael Deere - 423.298.2224 (1) PM:JD King I Superintendent: Mike Russell _�� x ��'�� a``fix�s�3�,��"�..`��' ��'� " \-__`vT \\\'��i��'�"��-� q\ ems. a� \` �g. > �k� st. ♦Y._ .rye,y- f F,c` 3,,.,. .., � .. „*.,-,;,:-1. 4110.,,,,. , itil$„ _ , ,,.. .ii,*------ __ — . .„„..,,l,ri,,,.„ :- _-, .---„,. .. -.... -7—;,-,.; ':4 ' :001e-7:-: — t £_ ' x I# III d;y.., } - ° 9. - .. , wV- _ �s ems. y .. �6.`r max. - �s b !,t.„r I. ,4 i ,• \ _�'�' V $�`' y%--.. ^by 1 , '•. Q' .: "'� A .. '�'_ •r . ':'Z.''► � Its, krr ✓V" K 4 ;-• '` i. ]p - .. .,.....• :1*;‘,4; i, ,41,....A Alk I \\ Y _ i 1 FIWI. .. 41' g j 1 iiiir,. ' ' I al/— - ...a i _ .!-- , _ : l'tv'f-.::‘":4 ii:if 1,0,, - ,i,„,iiurro Aim:: 14 CI i ormi 1.- ,, 1 L. ,,....- .,... IF.P.,7.1 81',- ist ' -- ,-,---,nyorra-mr-- - - -:Olt; --,--...._ ..., S$ Kinningham House I Response to RFP 2021 Tab C I Questionnaire 3.2 I Past Project List Hutto City Hall (a) Hutto City Hall for MA.Partners (b) Hutto,Texas (c) New Construction (d) Negotiated (e) General Contractor (f $6,483,475 (g) 37,000 SF (h) Original Budget: $6,483,475 Actual Cost: $6,614,798 Difference Explained: $131,323 in Owner/City Iniated Change Orders, 2%of Final Budget. (i) Start Date: 5.1.18 I Completion Date: 2.27.19 Original Construction Duration: 213 Days (j) MA Partners, Robert Wunsch, 512.547.7690 (k)Jackson Galloway,Bob Galloway, 512.474.8085 (1) PM:JD King I Superintendent:John Karfit t t Whether your project delivery method is competitive bid or a negotiated agreement,I believe JKC is an excellent 7, _ selection and one of the best decisions ' ' you can make to assure a successful s $.,_.c� project. . jit--..---01-..... 4; I i i il o"k;-; 4 j{ �y��y+ 1 a a} .i ��Y!�'�ii+w+ �i�I�iceWWI—� �SiSt. ��. C' ``-�F �� -- _ -. ,_ } �, f : 1. Bob Galloway(AIA) . . -'-'-r' -:. ,, '"• ' :''''''. ..,,' -VI, ,,,,,,,,,„ f,a4re, '''',,',,, , ,,,,,t,...,,, . ,, Jackson Galloway FGM Architects ,,,,,,---- _�„.,..,,, . t * .. i1 - ,_ - g s- ,-,;----- .,- ,,:i.;:-v.,-:-,-.",-;:,-;-74 .4,4--: __ ,,,.. _ .,-- '' - - . . . -- :,. . ' A ._.„..-* , , _. . , ,.,.. , 1 0.0 , .,:, _ i ..„,_,_, ‘ - ,,„,„t„,.....0..,, ,,,,,,.,,,,, , ,„ ,- . - li ''''' ,,,,,,,, '' ,_ z. - .,kn 111 1111 ,,,,, - ...,,, .. . 1 . •, _,,,,,,,,„, , ,.„,iii , .....,. _ __ ..„ :_ , 1 i . :- _. IN Aif: , ',= ''' II Iona 1-- Fitilms [ 1 simmini. 11 E -1 , _ . ..,,_r .a. ,.+- \ ,,,,,,,, -•-.. , ,...., ,, .,,.,„ ,.,.,„„ .... ,, ,..„, , _ _ate ti Kinningham House I Response to RFP 2021 Tab C I Questionnaire 3.2 I Past Project List City Centre I (a) City Centre I for The Crow Group (b) Round Rock,Texas (c) New Construction (d) Competitive Bid (e) General Contractor (f) $3,249,368 (g) 24,198 SF (h) Original Budget: $3,249,368 Actual Cost: $3,536.359 Difference Explained: Owner revised scope after the contracts were signed resulting in an 8% change to the contract. (i) Start Date: 4.12.2017 I Completion Date: 2.23.2018 Original Construction Duration: 231 Days (j) The Crow Group,Ingrid Crow, 512.983.7446 (k) Ochono Architects,`/illiam Lawrence Hodge, 512.786.9298 (1) PM:JD King I Superintendent:John Karfit IIIIIIIIIIIIIIMI x s ''''-772;';':';'' ',.\''','.,:: 'Oa ' ' - s i ---'12 ril::1:1,- Prt ,,,;11:„ o,::0, ;,,,,,„---,,,, , ..,,, -, ,-; it,,,,,, i I, '' 'IllmlliImlaillIllIllIlIllIlIllIllm' 4:. 4,i'l p .,„ , • . ,,,,,,, ..,,,, ,-, ---- u, -4,,:., ', ,, , , , - — - , , ' ". ' :' .1'- m�. t - , -„,,,'„ 0, 1 . ' ,.., , , .. a i .` !ifi # --, . iL ram , ., ih ...,„—,,,,. . , -4rn,.'--ic-,lI''-'.'.. rII-- ''''i lairli., - .„,,,, ,,,,,,_,......,.. ,,1,,_,*-,,.,,,,, p ,:,'r ii,- - � �� .t° tee' �'- i. ,,'-.-'.--..,,4,,,,,,.,,'-,-.,:i,, ,'-.-,r-,4::-.i-,,'-'._.,....., , —,i,-- '., ',1„-,..-.,j4_'),':g,:•o k,'.", ,:wt„V---.•o„-. ..,..,:i:,,:!3 -•„IIA..f..,i t p . ! .. r .. - .. ', ,3u:.; �`!,:fie" � +K!�x (..,•..-'. '.x 1 'u _—__.`+Fwr.:'. .. .,)1 4— t ! .'.._...:.':_..-.-........,' c,,,..,,,,1iNA,,‘.: ,.1/4,7,1a,,-.`..Q.,.:tzsi.4-,':. ,,...„.,-.,,.,.-,,..,,,.,,,7....„:',-,'..,-H.'-_.,-,,,- _,-,,.,,,,,..,.,;,,,,,,._...,-.-.._- ,,.„,..,'.,'..z,,,....,7._,','..„ .,5.I,,.,,,.-„.,.....,„ r, .,....: .,.': - Wed .-a. .. _...5-_ ,-ram- k -..A-' 11 �'. '� '. g , ._.-._. -. 4¢y '1 ` y,t 3laliF 17. ,! - i.a c. '4 vk . ilk, .:, ,:-...\ ' '.-- ' - . . -Ay .)-4;1111i4.1 ' ...What I appreciated the most was the honest communication and attention to a prosperous relationship with their customers. All of this resulted in a truly enjoyable working experience and a successful construction project we are proud off. I would highly recommend John king Construction to any organization." Ingrid Crow,Managing Partner The Crow Group Kinningharn House I Response to RFP 2021 Tab C I Questionnaire 3.2 I Past Project List JKC Projects Completed 2016-2021 ***On Average JKC Self-Performs 5%-10%Per Project Job Name Owner Architect Contract Completed Jo's Coffee 2nd Street Jo's LP JKC Design Build $84,777.00 Jun-21 Optical Prime Half Helen Foundation Chupik Design $123,300.00 Jun-21 Taco Bell Leander Refresh Tacala Austin Corp Hoover&Associates $92,313.00 Jun-21 Taco Bell Gatesville-Damage Tacala Austin Corp Hoover&Associates $41,932.00 Jun-21. Hutto Telco Building MA Partners FMG Architects $78,706.00 May-21 Pecan Street Earth Work Crow Group Conerstone Group $54,891.00 Apr-21 Taco Bell Mexia Tacala Austin Corp Hoover&Associates $409,350.92 Mar-21 Palm Valley Lutheran Church-Emc Palm Valley Lutheran Church JKC Design Build $157,944.00 Feb-21 Jo's Coffee-Hancock Hancock Jo's,LLC JKC Design Build $155,562.00 Jan-21 BB Shine Carwash B&B Operations,LLC ADPG $2,066,765.00 Jan-21 Palm Valley Lutheran Church-Emc Palm Valley Lutheran Church JKC Design Build $130,000.00 Jan-21 Cloud Kitchen 5610 N.IH 35,LLC Urban Foundry Architecture $4,552,889.00 Nov-20 City Centre TI The Crow Group Hodge Architect $268,809.00 Sep-20 Austin Stone TI Austin Stone Community Church. Mike Tibbetts $54,476.00 Sep-20 Southside Market&BBQ Hutto MA Partners Hoover&Associates $1,662,317.00 Sep-20 Lamar Food Store OFLP-2,ltd MAD Architecture $239,618.00 Sep-20 Quik Trip-Hwy 79 Quik Trip KDF Architects $2,790,458.00 Jul-20 Starbucks Braker/Burnet-Shell Vaquero Braker Burnet Partners Rouge Architects $497,796.00 Jun-20 Starbucks Braker/Burnet-TI Starbucks Coffee Company Rouge Architects $1,045,141.00 Jun-20 Enboarder TI(Northwestern Tenant Enboarder Hip Hop Design Studio $31,338.00 Jan-20 Taco Bell Lake Creek Tacala Austin Corp. Hoover&Associates $681,272.00 Mar-20 Northwestern TI 730 Northwestern Properties,LLI Hip Hop Design Studio $73,758.00 Jan-20 Lazarus Phase III Lazarus Brewing Co Hoover&Associates $146,140.00 Jan-20 North Austin Buisness Center Turtle Rock Holdings Thoughtbarn Studios $598,817.00 Dec-19 Southside Market BBQ-Arbor Walk Southside Market&BBQ Hoover&Associates $884,626.00 Nov-19 Dos Salsas-Domain Dos Salsas Mexican Restaurant DFD Architechts $5,598,391.00 Nov-19 Taco Bell Dripping Springs Tacala Austin Corp. Hoover&Associates $139,816.00 Sep-19 Taco Bell Temple Tacala Austin Corp. Hoover&Associates $980,568.00 Sep-19 Northwestern Avenue Office Space 730 Northwestern Properties,LL4 Hip Hop Design Studio $2,108,149.00 Aug-19 Taco Bell Conroe Tacala Austin Corp. Hoover&Associates $473,702.00 Aug-19 Belterra Ground Water Remediation Endeavor Real Estate Group Big Red.Dog Engineering $445,229.00 Aug-19 Palm Valley Lutheran Church Palm Valley Lutheran Church Hoover&Associates $323,725.00 Jul-19 Starbucks Parmer Starbucks Coffee Company CR Architecture&Design $30,654.00 May-19 Vuka/Impact Hub Co-Working Vuka Studios Thoughtbarn Studios $1,800,000.00 May-19 Oseyo Restaurant Shell&TI 1628 ECC Holdings&Oseyo Restaurant,LLC Hip Hop Design Studio $1,181,584.00 May-19 Texas Card House-Houston Austin Card Room,LLC True Interiors $537,063.00 May-19 Hutto City Hall MA Partners Jackson Galloway FMG Architects $6,614,798.00 Mar-1.9 Kinningham House I Response to RFP 2021 Tab C I Questionnaire 3.2 I Past Project List JKC Projects Completed 2016-2021 Alamo Ranch Retail&Starbucks Shell Vaquero Ventures Franz Architecture $3,614,396.00 Jan-19 McDonald's-Pleasanton McDonald's USA,LLC Castle Design Group $307,676.00 Jan-19 Lou's Bodega Bunk House Group Chioco Design,LLC $905,063.00 Dec-18 . . Taco Bell-Taylor Tacala Austin Corp Hoover&Associates $784,954.66 Dec-18 McDonald's-Cypress Creek McDonald's USA,LLC Castle Design Group $375,899.00 Nov-18 San Mart C-Store&Fuel Station Cedar Park San Mart,LLC MRA Architects $2,637,172.00 Sep-18 Taco Bell-Lockhart Tacala Austin Corp Hoover&Associates $437,057.00 Sep-18 McDonalds-Stone Oak McDonald's USA,LLC Castle Design Group $392,906.00 Sep-18 Altamira Academy Wayside Schools Rabe+Architects $14,298,227.00 Jul-18 Starbuck's San Angelo-Shell Vaquero Ventures Franz Architecture $1,082,444.00 Jul-18 McDonalds-Riverside McDonald's USA,LLC Castle Design Group I$245,795.00 Jul-18 Starbucks Shertz Shell Vaquerp Ventures Franz Architecture $1,796,605.00 Jun-18 Starbucks Shertz TI Starbucks Coffee Company Rouge Architects $350,816.00 Jun-IS McDonald's-Lake Creek .McDonald's USA,LLC Castle Design Group $247,733.00 Jun-18 . McDonald's-Leander McDonald's USA,LLC Castle Design Group $357,147.00 Jun-18 Rudy's BBQ-North Lamar K&N Management Hoover&Associates $1,841,500.00 May-18 , Taco Bell-Braker Tacala Austin Corp Hoover&Associates $380,800.00 May-18 McDonald's-Cedar Park McDonald's USA,LLC Castle Design Group $346,610.00 May-18 Starbucks-Cedar Park Starbucks Coffee Company Rouge Architects $766,230.00 Mar-18 Lazarus Brewing Co.-Phase II Lazarus Brewing Co Hoover&Associates $404,749.00 Mar-18 , . Taco Bell-Cedar Park Tacala Austin Corp Hoover&Associates $442,000.00 Mar-18 McDonald's-Parmer Lane McDonald's USA,LLC Castle Design Group i$202,388.00 Mar-18 . City Centre The Crow Group Ochono Architects $3,536,359.00 Feb-18 Texell Credit Union-Cedar Park Texell Credit Union IDG Group $355,000.00 Feb-18 Fellowship Bible Church Fellowship Bible Church Jackson Galloway $4,583,900.00 Dec-17 Triangle Shopping Center Triangle Center I,Ltd KAH Architecture $814,629.00 Dec-17 . Starbucks-San Antonio Starbucks Coffee Company Starbucks Coffee Company $1,030,000.00 Aug-17 5525 Burnet Rd Endeavor Real Estate Group Antenora Architects $1,101,000.00 Aug-17 . 5531 Burnet Rd Endeavor Real Estate Group Antenora Architects $527,401.00 Aug-17 . - Deerfield Fueling Station VH Brodie Investments,LLC Michael Imbimbi $1,207,000.00 Jun-17 Texas Card House Austin Card Room,LLC True Interiors $200,000.00 Jun-17 4 Village @ Westlake Endeavor Real Estate Group Mark Odom Studios $220,000.00 Apr-i 7 Taco Bell-Gatesville Tacala Austin Corp Hoover&Associates $628,956.00 Apr-17 Cesar Chavez Restaurant Shell 2515 ECC,LLC Dick Clark+Associates I$460,509.00 Mar-17 L Starbucks-Anderson Mill Starbucks Coffee Company Starbucks Coffee Company $300,305.00 Mar-17 . Starbucks Anderson Mill-Shell Danly Properties CTA Group 6$800,068.00 Mar-17 Fireball Grill-Dell Diamond City of Round Rock R.Gill Architects $821,806.00 Mar-17 Texell Credit Union-Georgetown Texell Credit Union IDG Group $321,249.00 Feb-17 . A. Lazarus Brewing Co Lazarus Brewing Co McCollum Studios $730,507.00 Dec-16 , . Kinningham House I Response to RFP 2021 Tab C I q uestionnaire 3.2 I Past Project List JKC Projects Completed 2016-2021 San Vicente I.S.D San Vicente I.S.D Architects Rabe+Partners $883,958.00 Dec-16 . . - , Maxwell Autos Unique Nyle Maxwell KAH Architecture $860,828.00 Nov-16 Taco Bell-Cantina Tacala Austin Corp Hoover&Associates $685,462.00 Nov-16 D Orange ih FimcsWcstleka l..•md,-r,a��i�Maximum Fitness,LLC cory a- ASD I SKY $1,001,385.00 Aug-16 . i Taco Bell-Lampasas Tacala Austin Corp Hoover&Associates $386,259.00 Jul-16 Taco Bell-Waco Tacala Austin Corp Hoover&Associates $406,002.00 Jun-16 Bastrop State Park-Warehouse Texas Parks&Wildlife Texas Parks&Wildlife $574,973.00 Mar-16 . i Taco Bell-New Bruanfels Tacala Austin Corp Hoover&Associates $430,955.00 Mar-16 Twelve20 Oaks Business Park Twelve20 Oaks,LLC Mike Tibbetts $1,527,392.00 Feb-16 River City Market Zahir Investment Group FREY Architects $293,293.00 Feb-16 Chisos Restaurant UCR JDAI $574,464.00 Feb-16 . , Kinningham House I Response to RFP 2021 Tab C I Questionnaire 3Experience Continued 3.3 List the categories of work that your organization normally performs with it's own forces: Eath Work,Demo,Concrete,Roofing,and Carpentry On this project do you propose to do any work with your own forces?No,we do not. 3.4 List any subcontractors in which your organization has some ownership and list the categories of work those subcontractors normally perform:N/A 3.5 Claims and suits. (If the answer to any of the questions below is yes,please attach details.) 3.5.1 Has your organization ever failed to complete any work awarded to it(Your answer to this question 3.5.1 must include any matters involving your organization and it's officers or principals in their current or any past positions)?No 3.5.2 Are there any pending or outstanding judgments?No 3.5.3 Are there any pending or outstanding claims?No 3.5.4 Are there any pending or outstanding arbitration proceedings?No 3.5.5 Are there any pending or outstanding lawsuits?No 3.5.6 Within the preceding five years,has your organization filed any lawsuits or requested arbitration with regard to any construction contract?No 3.5.7 Within the preceding five years,has any officer or principal of your organization ever been an officer or principal of another organization when it failed to complete a construction contract?No 'yam .�I Y } � i r xZ }p ,s a ,4-i'.:46. y. . , t s+4 , 4 +Y, R%.- '-.-- 2 s` i .. '( i �4rY5•-.h f _ ,, Yt�..-t E \ fib. a./ ' 7 ',�1�,' �7 � � +? --, * ''''.'''''''.4,,,, VilL4P : ,i' ,'* qt:',4: " ' — pl.1 '44:'''' .:*'". . * ' ''..,:i .. ,Ii,:%T.,,,,,,'1,4i ti4"4, V., ,, ”it .,, '-), ,4:- ;, ,f,,' - ....„.. b. ,,„„ , p) , „. ,',--:f ' ...„.....- 4,,...' ''' - , . t , , .... 4, up. .---; ' '', -,.:;',.::.,, t'-. 01 ' '' .''' '' 't ' jek::- ''''' ' f iyp t tti:'1' f��e4 ,' S R yp' ��,,,� {_ 1. iJ�;S' r'i� aq ' ' : 2 .:,ceet4•*. ,,, t,'!4'4111 , '-' i , °'..' ,..„. 3 , 4*-4."*-----010 ' -------„, , , .. . t , ‘,,,,, kl 1111 -v 's ems.., •, .r "' a 7 A .. � .�IIMb £, itts, + k }a .,,,.),, 4 ,..,,,f,,, :. ' ---,;-,---,... .. _ ---„-..._ , 1 ''' - ; , -- - ,.,. Ili ,yam John King Construction has been a great partner from the beginning of the projects,the team demonstrated diligence and dedication to completing the work in a timely,professional manner,while staying within budget. Their knowledge,leadership,integrity, and a proven track record were also key to the success...I would highly recommend them for any future construction projects. Victor Wang Managing Principal Latitude Development Kinningharn House I Response to RFP 2021 Tab C I Questionnaire 3.6 I Relevant Experience - Austin/RR MSA , , , . , „..,,,,,,,...7: _. ............, ....«^''..w"`"e.w-"..^' ` 'Y� Vie\"`P ��a`:::; \\\�N� ,,.;\�. �tw C.:, ,.� kC y` ,�l'+Ke .,:,L,:: Z l'' '''' \ - ' ar ''''' .: 77, _ as t.-r z� '„', 4� K u w y ff :7011"1, ,, ,... — .. ,i.,at .w .411 4"i'. tilk, r=am 1..5 Milit %Lc,\ '-, "',, ....,- ,— .40. ...- 4. .ii ---,._,,...,, ,..,...._:p'f',._. :, ,-,,- .., \,,,,, ,,,,,-'“ *, ,, Dos Salsas Domain,Austin 1 November 2019 41-Kitchen Commisary,Austin I October 2020 i,. iltki y lEii1' u n . -1 I T. r' 's a #i' eiil -es,';', '■■ - sa a r. , ii Alamo Ranch Retail Shell&SBUX Shell,SA I January 2019 Altamira Charter School,Austin I July 2018 4il'Or' ,.., Y. wAsH jii rw BB Shines Car Wash,Cedar Park I January 2021 Christ Church,Cedar Park I January 2017 �- ~` RABB N LJ/''� I �)l : f r, .are dtmM :S "._._�.-..._......._-..,......... .._., -It .._ , lita a ', . i , 1 r SA 4. rF ¢ "YkW►X.i'All` - . ..,taa -, .4, x_ - � a .. �- lam. zwc..,...... .. '::.: .arm.., Solid Ground Storage,Bastrop I January 2015 Rabb House,Round Rock May 2014 ' 7,7-, '-N‘IF:$\:,,,iNFik:li;g... .,,i''7?;',-..:1::',-- -lit it :-- ---- . lilt iiiizi ,,-, -J a— 4iiii. Nt. ,,_. ,F ,_. _.i.___.:_____ --_,_. ._,,,-71:;;,..t.„....7.-7---41 ,i. .,1 1 f-..1.. ....._, ir-7_1 7:401.t...,,,M.........3,',7 ..... ........7 ir.:::::::A: . m,: Southside Market&BBQ I September 2019 John King Construction Office,Round Rock I February 2016 Kinningham House I Response to RFP 2021 Tab C I Questionnaire 3.7 JKC Safety JKC's approach to safety management is based on the conviction that safety is everyone's responsibility:Further,a safe working environment holds these basic premises: • All incidents and injuries are preventable;no level of incident or injury is acceptable or tolerated. • Injury free operations are possible in construction;a prevailing mindset and conviction exists to do the right thing and what is necessary to achieve that state. • Elevate safety awareness daily;it is a journey of continuous improvement to advance safety and achieve a heightened state of awareness where workers choose to be responsible and accountable for their own safety and the safety of their co-workers. Enforcing our methodologies and maintaining a safe construction environment involves the entire project team.Everyone associated with your project must understand their responsibilities with regard to health and safety.As the construction manager,JKC will provide a safety specialist to perform safety observations at the project site,will hold site wide safety meetings,and will reinforce the paramount nature of safety on the job site.Our project team will work with each subcontractor to assist in maintaining a safe work site and encourage each subcontractor to bring forth any safety concerns.With the responsibilities defined,subcontractor and workers will be held accountable for their health and safety performance. Further,the construction site is on an active facility.Our safety specialist will be charged with ensuring plans are in place to protect the safety of your faculty and visitors as well as our construction personnel.Our Project Superintendent will be responsible for daily imple- mentation of these safety plans. JKC employs a third party safety consultant to enforce our safety program and conduct regular site inspections;this is how we ensure that Safety remains a top priority on all of our.projects. **Safety Manual available upon request(190 pg) EMR & OSHA 300 Log In the past three years,JKC has not incurred any work related injuries or illness resulting in time away or work restrictions in any manner. JKC's Experience Rate Modifier is Currently 0.91 WORKERS COMPENSATION EXPERIENCE RATING /VCLi Risk Name:JOHN KING CONSTRUCTION INC Risk ID: 420989768 Rating Effective Date:10122,2021 Production Date:05/19✓2021 State: TEXAS State Wt Exp Excess Expected Exp Prim Act Exc Losses Ballast Act Inc Losses Act Prim Losses Losses Losses Losses T•t 06 7.966 11.268 3.302 0 24.500 1.495 1.495 (A)(B) (C)Exp Excess (D)Expected (E)Exp Prim (F)Act Exc (G)Ballast (H)Act Inc (I)Act Prim Wt Losses(D E) Losses Losses Losses(H-I) Losses Losses 06 7.966 11,268 3.302 0 24,500 44° 448 Primary Losses Stabilizing Value Ratable Excess Totals (I) C'(I-A)+i= (A)•(F) (J) Actual 4.4e. 31.988 0 32.436 (E) C' t-A)+C (A)•(C) (K) Expected 3.302 31.988 478 35.768 ARAP FLARAP SARAP MAARAP Exp Mod (J)i(K) Factors .91 RATING REFLECTS A DECREASE OF 70%MEDICAL ONLY PRIMARY AND EXCESS LOSS DOLLARS WHERE ERA IS APPLIED. Kinningham House I Response to RFP 2021 Solicitation Requirements, Contract Forms & Conditions of Contract Statement of Bidder's Safety Experience Section 00410 Bidder must submit a signed Statement of Bidder's Safety Experience form with his Bid; failure to do so will constitute an incomplete Bid that may be rejected. In order to make a responsive Bid, Bidder must provide evidence that it meets minimum OSHA construction safety program requirements, has not been fined by OSHA for any willful safety violations in the past three years, and has a lost time injury rate that doesn't exceed the limits established below. All questions must be answered and data given must be clear and comprehensive. If necessary, questions may be answered on separate attached sheets. Company Name: John King Construction,Ltd. Address: 559 S IH 35, Suite 210, Round Rock, TX 78664 phone: 512.836.5464 Katie King 8.5.2021 Completed by: Date: 1. Does the company have a written construction Safety program? EYes ❑No 2. Does the company conduct construction safety inspections? EYes 0 No 3. Does the company have an active construction safety-training program? EYes 0 No 4. Has the company been fined by OSHA for any willful safety violations in the past DYes EINo three years? 5. Does the company have a lost time injury rate of 7.8 for SIC 15,or 7.6 for SIC 16, OYes El No or less over the past three years? Attach the company's OSHA 200/300 logs for the past three years. 6. Does the company or affected subcontractors have competent persons in the following Areas? A. Scaffolding [ Yes ONo ON/A B. Excavation 0 Yes ONo ❑N/A C. Cranes 0 Yes ONo El N/A D. Electrical 0 Yes ONo ON/A E. Fall Protection 0 Yes ONo 0 N/A F. Confined Spaces El Yes ONo ❑N/A I hereby certify that the above information is true and correct. 41. / 40.7. President Signature Title Page 1 00410 8-2014 Statement of Bidder's Safety Experience 00090654 Tab C I Questionnaire 4 I Financial Information 4.1 Please see attached financial statement on USB and corresponding financial information. 4.2 Name and address of firm preparing attached financial statement and date thereof: Mary K. Glover CPA,20021 Lookout Springs,Hockley,TX 77447 4.3 is the attached financial statement for the identical organization named under Question 1.1 above?Yes 4.4 Will the organization whose financial statement is attached act as a guarantor of the proposed contract for construction?N/A 4.5 Provide name,address,contact person,and phone number for your bank reference. Horizon Bank (ATTN Bailey Rollo) 12007 Techology Blvd,Austin,TX 78727 512.836.4602 4.6 Surety and Agent: Provide the: (a) name of your bonding company;and (b) the name and address of your agent. Scott Chapman,USI Insurance Services,LLC,25025 N. IH-45,Suite 525,The Woodlands,TX 77380 832.702.8344 As a growing organization with tight construction timelines largely build around school breaks and summer,having a construction parter that can deliver a building on time and in budget is crucial.John and his team has yet to let us down." Matt Abbott,Superintendent&CEO Wayside Schools Kinningham House Response to RFP 2021 Tab C jQuestionnaire 4.7 I Certificate of Insurance 'Act)RE:* CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE DATE(NIAAtODIYYYY) 1/21/2021 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER.THIS CERTIFICATE DOSS NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S),AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER,AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. IMPORTANT: If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED,the policy(ies)must have ADDITIONAL INSURED provisions or be endorsed. If SUBROGATION IS WANED,subject to the terms and conditions of the policy,certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on his certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). PRODUCER CONT'A& NAME: Kathenne George Brown&Brown of Austin PHONE Fax 8000 Centre Park Dr.,Suite 370 ,�►cc .Extr1/4 512-617-5832 �s,�c,No):5124461736 Austin TX 75754 ADDRESS: kgeorge ?bbtexas.com 1NSURERi9)AFFORDING COVERAGE aaIc INSURER A:Valley Forge Insurance Co 20508 INSURED JoHNK a INSURER B:Continental Casualty Company 20443 John King Construction Ltd INSURER c 559 S IH 35,Ste.210 Round Rock TX 78664 INSURER Q INSURER E INSURES!F; COVERAGES CERTIFICATE NUMBER:558923203 REVISION NUMBER: THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT,TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN,THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES.LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. I� � M� TYPE OF INSURANCE ��n Y auM��t .� PQ�1 POLICY UMITS A X COMMERCIAL QENERAI.LABILITY 6043086911 10/22/2020 10/22/2021 EACH OCCURRENCE i 1,000,000 (CLAIMS-MADE n OCCUR PAMISES MMO occurrence) $100,000 MED EXP(Any one person) $15,000 PERSONAL&ADV INJURY $1,000,000 GEM.AGGREGATE OMIT APPLIES PER: C3ENERAI.AGGREGATE $2,000,000 PoUCY I X,78: Fl LOC PRODUCTS-COMP/OP AGG $2,000,000 OTHER: • • A •AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY 6043086925 90/22/2020 10/22/2021 COMBINED LIMIT I$1,000,000 X ANY AUTO BODILY INJURY(Per person) $ OWNED SCHEDULED BODILY INJURY(Per accident) $ AUTOS ONLY AUTOS HIRED NON-OWNED PROPERTY[DAMAGE $ AUTOS ONLY AUTOS ONLY (Per accident) B X UMBRELLA UAB X OCCUR 6043086939 10/22/2020 10/22/2021 EACH OCCURRENCE $5,000,000 EXCESS UAB CLAIMS-MADE AGGREGATE $5,000,000 ,DED X RETENTIONS 4nApp $ A 1NbRKERS COMPENSATION 6043367557 10/22/2020 10/22/2021 X j ra I I R AND EMPLOYERS'LIABILITY ANYPROPRIETORIPARTT�ER!EXECUTIVE Y/N El. /A � ,EACH ACCIDENT $1,000,000 �FICERlMEMBEREXCLUOED? (IlAandatay In NH) E.L.DISEASE-EA EMPLOYEE $1,400,000 Ify�s,describe nder D�SCFi1PT10N u OF OPERATIONS below E.L.DISEASE-POLICY LIMIT $1,000,000 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS/LOCATIONS I VEHICLES(ACORD 101,Additional Remarks Sdhedule,may be attached If more space Is required) Some policies include blanket endorsements that provide status to the certificate holder ONLY when there is a written contract between the named Insured and the certificate holder requiring the status. GENERAL LIABILITY CNA75079XX 0115 Blanket Additional Insured-Owners,Lessees or Contractors with Products-Completed Operations CNA747O5XX 0115 Contractors General Liability Extension Form: Blanket Adidtional Insured as Required by Written Contract Lessor of Equipment fee Attached... CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POUCIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DEUVERED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. INSURED COPY FOR INFORMATION PURPOSES ONLY AUTHO r4 o REPRESENTATIVE )0'0000(XX)0000( ©1988-2015 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. ACORD 25(2016/03) The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD Kinningharn House I Response to RFP 2021_ "Fab' ' --='-.-.ai-e Sol Personnel J.D. IAustinp '...,^`` `. Head of Estimating&Pre-Construction High4�-`�.r,.�rs-�^stv'vz Ye�s Grand dy Event Venue-$13177231000 Co ssary Kitchen-$4,551,000 Southside Market&BBQ Hutto-$116901827 Hutto City Hall-$6,614,798 Northwestern Offices-$252341743 5531&5525 Burnet Rd Office Remodel-$13628)401 Alamo Ranch Re Center&Starbucks Shell-$331614)396 Shertz Ret Center,Starbucks Shell& $1,140,365 City Centre Office Building-$3,536,359 Fellowship Bible Church-$4,35832900 Starbucks San Antonio-$110301000 WesKoenig ` Austin, TX 0 9 Senior c- o/.'a»ag`' 50%Assi*gned to Proj*ect Hi*ghfighv�d,__`��.�-L'st FhTe Yeazs City Centre II(In-Progress)-$5,023,524 St.Andrews Presbyterian(In-Progress)-$1,118,690 Austin Dis ery-$6,500,00 St.Vincents Nlixed Use Development $4,400,00 l...-.``,..'g.'Blair.Sampson-$```,-' UT Doty Fine Art Lbrary Renovation $1,300,000 Tech Ridge CSW $1,200,00 UT Public Area Renovation-Geogre Sanchez Building $800,5000 ------------------------------- .'''` Russell (100% AssignedtoProject)'.^`` . Senior Superintendent 100%Assigned to Project HighllghtcO Proi Last Five Years Grand Lady Event Venue-!,772,000 Southside Market&BBQ Hutto-$1,690,827 Northwestern Offices am$2312343743 5531 &5525 Burnet Rd Office Remodel-$1,96281)401 Alamo Ranch Re Center&Starbucks Shell-$3116141396 Shertz,Ret Center,Starbucks Shell& $1,140,365 Starbucks San Antonio $15030-00 Starbucks Andersonmill-$130281594 Kinninghani House Response to RFP 2021 Tab C I Questionnaire 5.2 I ProjectTeam Experience I IL est.JOHN KIN Cf*, NSTIR:1 T e AN 9 , ,, \ UILDING SOLI John N. King Founder&President Mike Russell Berg Compliance Solutions J.D. King Wes Koenig _ Superintendent Safety Consultants Head of Estimating&Pre- Construction Senior PM Shannon Chapa Project Coordinator The team we have selected for Kinningham House brings over 100 years of construction experience to this project. They have completed many successful project together with JD&Mike completeing over 15 signifcant proj- ects as a PM&Superintendent team.Wes joined JKC in January and has already made a huge impact on the projects he's been involved with. Please references below for this team. References of Projects Completed in Last Two Years � 1. Robert D.Wunsch I VP Austin Acquisition Development of MA Partners bob@water.stconedevelopment.com Projects:JKC:was the General Contractor on two projects for MA Partners, Hutto City Hall and Southside Market and BBC) Hutto Co-Op. 2.Victor Wang I Managing Principal, Latitude Development victor.@latitude-re.ccom Projects: Oseyo Restaurant& Northwestern Ave Office Space 3. Ingrid Crow I AAIanaging Director of The Crow Group ingrid thecrowgroup.net Projects: City Centre 1(3-Story Office Complex) &Three Texas Card I louse Locations, Office~I"I 4.Tim Cormier I Construction tanager, Gommissay_y Kitchen tim.cormier@csscompany.com Projects: Commissary Kitchen 5.Tom Abney I Director of New Development, Southside Market }..Barbeque tabnevgsouthsidemarket.com Projects: 2 Ground-Up& 1 Finish Out Southside Market&Barbeque Ta, C I Questionnaire 6 I Proposed Plan, Schedule & QualityProgram 6.1 Describe your proposal work plan for this project: Every successful project starts with meticulously"buying out"the project in the procurement stage.The Pre- construction phase allows us to on-board our Subcontractors and Vendors to ensure that all team members have a complete understanding of the scope of work and time line.One of the most important benefits of the Pre-construction phase is connecting our team with the Owner/Designer/Property Management team and those that will be utilizing the facility.This phase also allows for the"work plan"to be developed in a collaborative way. JKC will be laser focused on Safety&Business Disruption given the location of this project.Additional controls and site management will be utilized to this end to mitigate dust control,business disruption and most importantly, Safety for those outside of the job site. 6.2 Describe your construction management approach and ability to coordinate work with all subcontractors and suppliers in order to meet the deadlines established in the submittal construction schedule. In addition to the explanation given in 6.1,we utilize the most sophisticated Project Management(Procore)and Estimating(Timberline/Sage)software in the world.These tools equip us to insure'Clear Direction'while combining a checks and balance system of timely critical communication.Including and most importantly the Submittal approval schedule.A trustworthy quote;"You can't Build It unless you can Buy It". 6.3 Describe your ability to complete the project within the schedule taking into account existing commitments. JKC is very conservative on project work load.We choose to bid projects that align with our capacity and allow us to successfuly deliver every project we commit to. 6.4 Describe your ability to identify and resolve potential issues,delays,etc. We at JKC pride ourselves on the"Plan B".We have over Forty-years of experience working collaborativly with Ownership,Design,and Subcontractor teams to identify and solve issues to avoid delays and deliver a seamless experience. 6.5 Describe your back up/contingency plan for any unanticipated delays. Referring back to 6.1,the Pre-construction Phase is our contingency plan as most unanticipated delays are identified during the exercises in this phase.Our job is to make the"Unknown,Known".Also see 6.4 regarding"Plan B". Additionally,we have a dedicated following of Subcontractors and Venders that believe as we do and thrive on the ability to get things done and solve problems. lioweve;unprecedented and unpredictable weather delays,like last Fall are almost impossible to make up the lost time without increasing the budget.We do not have a contingency for this. CC The subcontractors used by John King Construction are of the highest caliber In the few Instances that we have had an issue with any product or installation thereof,they have been addressed expeditiously and to our complete satisfaction.JKC's subcontractors are willing to attend meetings to value engineer the design in a way that we were able to keep the integrity of the project without letting of design attributes that we valued. This can be especially beneficial in remodels because you will eventually dig or demolish into something the architects missed in the design stage." Teresa Elliot Chief Operating Officer Wayside Schools Kinningham House I Response to RFC 2021 Tab C f tuestionnaire 6.6 Describe your quality control program: The City of Round Rock has right to expect the highest quality in every aspect of the Kinningham House JKC is committed to the quality of every project through shared management and belief that quality is a value,not compromised by cost or schedule. ForJKC quality work holds the following premi ces: • Conformance to all contractual requirements,specifications,applicable standards and JKC's quality control process. • Compile accurate records of inspections,tests,certifications and other required documentation. • Notify City of Round Rock of quality discrepancies for immediate corrective action. Assure corrective action is implemented timely and properly. • Defect free operations are possible in construction;a prevailing mindset and conviction exists to do the right thing and what is necessary to achieve that state. • Evaluate quality awareness daily;a journey of continuous improvement to advance quality and achieve a heightened state of awareness. • Forwnatl JKC's Building Science Applications have evolved and improved over the years.Unfortnately,there are no perfect set of plans or in some cases the Design community is not caught up to some of the Science that JKC is most concerend about.To this end JKC has retained experts in the following areas: -Building commisioning,particulary HVAC -ADA,pre-inspections before wall coverings Vater Proofing/Flashings JKC's quality control process involver the following steps: • Ensuring the construction team fully understands contract requirements. • Inspection of first delivery of material and equipment. • Inspect first equipment in place. • In-wall and above ceiling acceptance. • Activation,start-up and acceptance of all systems. • Providing the construction team with quality control support. • First inspection and acceptance,and punch list. • Contract close-out. Providing our construction team with specialized quality control support is a strength of the JKC process. We support our team with Texas registered professional engineers for critical facility elements such as structural andmechanical systems. As an example,for the Bastrop Southside Market and Barbeque we brought onto the project a MEP consultant,KWR Engineering Services,with whom we have successfully worked with on other projects. Our consultant recommended corrective actions for the HVAC system that increased the systems energy efficiency,achieved the required humidity-control,and enabled the system to be balance. JKC will provide this same level of quality control for the Fire Station 3-La Frontera. 6.7 Describe how your quality control team will measure the quality of construction performed by subcontractors on this project, and how will you address non-conforming work. JKC will leverage two means of measuring the quality of the Subcontractors on this project.Our team will send out daily progress reports to the design team.This report includes on-site images,progress details,etc.This report has proved to be a great way to keep everyone in the loop and make sure nothing is missed.Our team will also schedule routine on-site progress meetings with the Design Team,General Contractor,and Owner.If any of these measures find the quality of our Subcontractors lacking or not up to par,JKC will act immediatly to repair or bring the quality up to agreed standards. Kinningham House I Response to RFP 2021 Kinnington Park /114ill irlill JKC ID % ask Name 'Duration (Start Finish Predecessors ( mi Jul i Jul I Jul Jul.Au,A,A,A,Avs Sep Sep Sep Sep 04 04 9,4 0ct 9,No;I Nov Not Noi Dec De Dey D Ian Jani Lan:Jane Jan Fed Fe'Feb Fed Mai Ma.Mai M.AF,v A,Apr Ap,M.Mai M.Ma,Ma.tun 1 INGTON PARK 222 Thu 8/5/21 Fri 6/10/22 ! 1 2 r°% FiiNAL PT!C NG1 day Thu 8/5/21 Thu 8/5/21 F 3 NTP RELEASED 1 day Tue 8/24/21 Tue 8/24/21 2F5+7 days 4 0% JKC PRESCONSTRUCTION 9 days Tue 8/24/21 Fri 9/3/21 3S5 ►1i 6 SUBMITTAL PROCESSING =106 days Mon 9/13/21 Mon 2/7/22 1 I 7 0% CONCRETE/REINFORCING 23 days Mon 9/13/21 Wed 10/13/21 1' '1 12 0% SITE UTILITIES 43 days Mon 9/13/21 Wed 11/10/21 I 1 27 0% GLUELAM/WOOD 40 days Mon 9/13/21 Fri 11/5/21 / 1 32 l96 FIRE ALARM 13 days Mon 9/13/21 Wed 9/29/21 1-1 37 0% SPRINKLERS 46 days Mon 9/13/21 Mon 11/15/21 I 1 42 I0% HVAC 46 days Mon 9/13/21 Mon 11/15/21 I 1 47 0% ELECTRICAL/COMMUNICATION 51 days Mon 9/13/21 Mon 11/22/21 I 1 52 0% EXTERIOR FINISHES 51 days Mon 9/13/21 Mon 11/22/21 I 1 I ~-57 0% LIGHTING 51 days Mon 9/13/21 Mon 11/22/21 I 1 62 '0% STOREFRONT 71 days Mon 9/13/21 Mon 12/20/21 1 !I 67 0% DOORS,FRAMES,HARDWARE 46 days Mon 9/13/21 Mon 11/15/21 I 1 _ 72 0% ROOFING 46 days Mon 9/13/21 Mon 11/15/21 I 1 77 0% PLUMBING 51 days Mon 9/13/21 Mon 11/22/21 1' -- 1 -82 '0% GARAGE DOORS 102 days Mon 9/13/21 Tue 2/1/22 r 17 0% STRUCTURAL STEEL 42 days Thu 10/21/21 Fri 12/17/21 1 1 22 0% METAL DECKING MATERIAL 78 days Thu 10/21/21 Mon 2/7/22 1 I 5 0% CONTRACT SIGNED 1 day Fri 9/3/21 Fri 9/3/21 3F5+7 days �87- -, CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES 200 day Mon 9/6/21 Fri 6/10/22 I 1 88 0% JKC MOBILIZATION/SWPPP INSTALLATION 2 day Mon 9/6/21 Tue 9/7/21 5 89 0% SET CONSTRUCTION TRAILER 1 day Mon 9/6/21 Mon 9/6/21 88SS s 90 0% TEMPORARY FENCING 2 days Mon 9/6/21 Tue 9/7/21 88SS h 91 0% CITY OF RR SITE PRE-CON 1 day Wed 9/8/21 Wed 9/8/21 88 t Page 1 Kinnington Park P1141,1 611111 J KC ID % ask Name Duration Start Finish Predecessors Comp n J.uI i Jul Jul Jul.Auc Au5 Auc Auc A,Jc Sea Se Sep Sep Oct Oct Oct Oct Oct No,No,No,Not Dec Dec DIe.,S`De+Janis Jan Jan;lan Jan.'Fe4.Feb Feb Fet1 Md Me r.1a Ce.Ap,A,Apr Ap•Mal Mal Me M,n Me Jun 92 SITE INNEINININVINIIIrr ' -" - baays,,: Thu 9/9/21 Thu 12/2/21 1 1 94 0% SAWCU I/'-,L VC tx,1,1,,R'9 IBC LS, 3 days Thu 9/9/21 Moe 9/13/21 91,89,90 't•. 93 0% DEMO EXISTING CONDITIONS 12 days Fri 9/10/21 Mon 9/27/21 91FS+1 day 1 95 0% SURVEY PROPERTY LINES 2 days Tue 9/28/21 Wed 9/29/21 93 I jilhil 96 0% CLEAR AND GRUB 3 days Thu 9/30/21 Mon 10/4/21 93,95 1 97 0% EXCAVATE SITE TO SUBGRADE 3 days Tue 10/5/21 Thu 10/7/21 96 98 0% PROOF ROLL PARKING LOT 1 day Fri 10/8/21 Fri 10/8/21 97 99 0% DENSITY TEST PAVING SUBGRADE 1 day Mon 10/11/21 Mon 10/11/21 98 100 0% EXCAVATE REMAINING BUILDING PAD 3 days Tue 10/12/21 Thu 10/14/21 9941 101 0% DENSITY TEST BUILDING PAD SUBGRADE 1 day Fri 10/15/21 Fri 10/15/21 100 102 0% INSTALL STRUCTURAL FILL AT PAD 5 days Mon 10/18/21 Fri 10/22/21 101 -- 103 0% LAYOUT BUILDING CORNERS 1 day Mon 10/25/21 Mon 10/25/21 102 104 0% INSTALL BATTER BOARDS 1 day Mon 10/25/21 Mon 10/25/21 103SS 105 0% FINAL GRADING AT EXISTING PARKING LOT 2 days Wed 12/1/21 Thu 12/2/21 112 i I (DEMO PORTION) 106 ES' SITE UTILITIES Mon 10/18/21 Wed 12/8/21 1 107 0% UTILITYSITEWORK PRE-CON 1 day Mon 10/18/21 Mon 10/18/21 94,93,102FS-5 da+ ►w+ 108 0% SITE WATER DISTRIBUTION(DOMESTIC 8 days Thu 11/11/21 Mon 11/22/21 107,102FS-5 WATERLINE/FIRELINE) days,16 109 0% WATERLINE/FIRELINE STUB INTO BUILDING 5 days Tue 11/23/21 Mon 11/29/21 108 ; 110 0% SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM 5 days Tue 11/30/21 Mon 12/6/21 108,109 111 0% SET FIRE HYDRANTS ONSITE 2 days Tue 11/30/21 Wed 12/1/21 109 r 112 0% BACKFILL/COMPACT SITE WATER 1 day Tue 11/30/21 Tue 11/30/21 108,109 113 0% BACKFILL SANITARY SEWER 2 days Tue 12/7/21 Wed 12/8/21 110 1,, CONCRETE WORK .32 days' ue 10/26/21 Wed 12/8/21 i 1 1 ,,—z.__ III 116 0% INSTALL UNDER SLAB PLUMBING 5 days Tue 10/26/21 Mon 11/1/21 103,104 117 0% BACKFILL&COMPACT 1 day Tue 11/2/21 Tue 11/2/21 116 Page 2 Kinnington Park /PAP 1114 JKC iii, % f!ask Name Duration Start Finish Predecessors , I Com i P n,J I J t i Au Au Au A nFebFeb �hi�tt A v A v .M u�u.Jul Jul�Au uc Se Se Se S O Oct)O��O Oci No No No Noy Dec Dec Dec DeC Jan: Jan Jan Jan Fe eb Feb Feb M.,�Ma, a �� A a•Mr Ma Mac M r. 118 0% EXCAVATE GRADE BEAMS 4 days Wed 11/3/21 Mon 11/8/21 117,11 119 0% FORM SLAB ON GRADE 3 days Tue 11/9/21 Thu 11/11/21 118 120 0% INSTALL REBAR 2 days Fri 11/12/21 Mon 11/15/21 119 w 121-0% POUR SLAB ON GRADE 1 day Tue 11/16/21 Tue 11/16/21 120 115 0% FORM/POUR BACK EXISTING PARKING LOT 4 days Fri 12/3/21 Wed 12/8/21 105 r41F•----'•` 122 10% VERTRICAL/EXTERIOR BUILD 106 days Mon 12/20/21 Mon 5/16/22 I t 1 123 0% STRUCTURAL STEEL/WOOD DELIVERY 1 day Mon 12/20/21 Mon 12/20/21 21,121,115 '1 124 0% GLUELAM/WOOD COLUMN ERECTION 7 days Tue 12/21/21 Wed 12/29/21 31,121,123 1 —12-5—0% STRUCTURAL STEEL ERECTION 15 days Tue 12/21/21 Mon 1/10/22 123,121 N1 126 0% INSTALL STEEL STAIRCASE 2 days Tue 1/11/22 Wed 1/12/22 125 127 0% DECKING ROOF 8 days Tue 2/8/22 Thu 2/17/22 125,26 I I I 128 0% BUILDING WELDED OUT 1 day Fri 2/18/22 Fri 2/18/22 127 I, 132 0% ROOF 6 days Fri 2/18/22 Fri 2/25/22 127 INSULATION/SHEATHING/UNDERLAYMENT 129 0% CFMF EXTERIOR/2ND FLOOR DECK 12 days Mon 2/21/22 Tue 3/8/22 125,128,126,71 1 130 10% SHEATHE EXTERIOR 10 days Fri 3/4/22 Thu 3/17/22 129F5-3 days 131 0% WATERPROOF EXTERIOR/FLASHINGS 10 days Tue 3/15/22 Mon 3/28/22 130FS-3 days,132 133 0% BRICK INSTALL 5 days Tue 3/29/22 Mon 4/4/22 124,131 134 0% WINDOW FRAMES/GLASS 12 days Tue 3/29/22 Wed 4/13/22 66,131 135 0% GARAGE DOOR INSTALL 5 days Tue 3/29/22 Mon 4/4/22 86,131 )Anii-- I 136 0% CEMENT BOARD SIDING/FASCIA INSTALL 15 days Thu 4/14/22 Wed 5/4/22 131,56,135,134 137':,0% EXTERIOR SOFFIT 10 days Wed 4/20/22 Tue 5/3/22 145 1 138 10% STANDING SEAM METAL 8 days Thu 5/5/22 Mon 5/16/22 136,133,76 ROOF/SHEETMETAL 139 I INTERIORS 66 d,„ays Wed 3/9/22 Wed 6/8/22 1 140 0% INTERIOR WALL LAYOUT/FRAMING 10 days Wed 3/9/22 Tue 3/22/22 129 j --. 141 0% PLUMBING ROUGH AND TOP OUT 8 days Wed 3/23/22 Fri 4/1/22 140,81 1. Page 3 Kinnington Park PIP 64 JKC ilD % j+ask Name Duration 'Start Finish Predecessors Coe P • 4.1.,?!kti Jui Jul Auk Aug Au0 Auc Auc SeP Seq Sep Sep OcC Ocx Ocp 5 9, 10J Nov Nor No0 3,5 Dec Dec Det tan Jan Jan Jan Jan Feb Feh Feb Feb Mar Ma.Ma.Mai Apr Ar,r Apr Aix Ma!Mal Ma,Ma,Ma Air. t9R ,1�tRfa11 +?1 _. , �rrtr ..... _.� ,�5.7�FlnP?ra* 142 % MECHANICAL ROUGH BACK OF HOUSE 10 days Wed 3/23/22 Tue 4/5/22 140,46 . ' 143 j0% SPRINKLER MAIN/RISER&BRANCH LINES 10 days Wed 3/23/22 Tue 4/5/22 140,41 j ++a ? 145 0% ELECTRICAL OVERHEAD ROUGH IN 20 days Wed 3/23/22 Tue 4/19/22 140 iAi U,AUiO' 146 0% ELECTRICAL WALL ROUGH 12 days Wed 3/23/22 Thu 4/7/22 140 153 0% INSTALL/CONNECT FCU'S 10 days Wed 3/23/22 Tue 4/5/22 142SS ; i 157 0% SET CU UNITS 2 days Wed 3/23/22 Thu 3/24/22 153SS i — I 144 10% STACK RISER 3 days Wed 4/6/22 Fri 4/8/22 143 g 149 0% INSULATE WALLS 3 days Thu 4/14/22 Mon 4/18/22 146,140,141,134 150;0% TWO SIDE DRYWALL 7 days Tue 4/19/22 Wed 4/27/22 149 1 147 j0% T&G SOFFIT 15 days Wed 4/20/22 Tue 5/10/22 145 151 0% FRAME HARD CEILINGS 4 days Wed 4/20/22 Mon 4/25/22 145 152 0% SPRINKLER DROPS 2 days Tue 4/26/22 Wed 4/27/22 151 71 156'0% SHEETROCK CEILINGS 5 days Thu 4/28/22 Wed 5/4/22 145,151,152 154 0% BUILD OUT ELECTRICAL SERVICE 10 days Thu 5/5/22 Wed S/18/22 136,51 . 158 0% TAPE,FLOAT,PRIME MECH/RESTROOMS 10 days Thu 5/5/22 Wed 5/18/22 150,156 148 0% MECHANICAL ROUGH AT ASSEMBLY 10 days Wed 5/11/22 Tue 5/24/22 147 155 0% PERMANENT POWER 5 days Thu 5/19/22 Wed 5/25/22 154 159 0% CONCRETE FLOORING SEALED AND FRP 7 days Thu 5/19/22 Fri 5/27/22 158 WALLS II 164 0% HVAC STARTUP 3 days Thu 5/26/22 Mon 5/30/22 153,157,155 1 160 0% ELECTRICAL TRIM OUT 8 days Mon 5/30/22 Wed 6/8/22 158,159,137,61 161 0% PLUMBING FIXTURES 3 days Mon 5/30/22 Wed 6/1/22 158,159 1 162 0% MECHANICAL TRIM OUT 8 days Mon 5/30/22 Wed 6/8/22 158,159 l 163.0% DOORS AND HARDWARE 5 days Mon 5/30/22 Fri 6/3/22 158,159 165 Thu 5/19/22 Fri 6/3/22 j 1"—'"'1 166'0% IRRIGATION SLEEVES 1 day Thu 5/19/22 Thu 5/19/22 158 C r f ; 167 0% FINAL GRADING PARKING LOT 2 days Fri 5/20/22 Mon 5/23/22 166,113 168 0% FINAL GRADING SIDEWALKS 2 days Fri 5/20/22 Mon 5/23/22 167SS Page 4 Kinnington Park PAPP Iiiih JKC ID % bask Name Duration ;Start Finish Predecessors Com E 1 n. + Au Au A A M � A ��A �P Jul Jul i Jul.,Jul g,g AA.A!..Auc SeQ Sep Sep S�Oct Oct;Oct Oct Oc[No,NOSE Noy NoW DeC De�D, Det Jan tan Jan;lan Jan FetY Feh Feb Fe4 I..+t.+ JI h dl{x Aµ. a Apr Mai Mai Mai Ma Mai iun 1...... -........................................................................ .:..., , 169 0% FORM/REBAR/POUR NEW PARKING LOT 4 days Tue 5/24/22 Fri 5/27/22 167 t- ADDITION 170—0% POUR SITE SIDEWALKS 3 days Mon 5/30/22 Wed 6/1/22 169,168 I 171 0% BACKFILL CURBS 2 days Thu 6/2/22 Fri 6/3/22 169,170 i 7 172 FINAL INSPECTIONS 7 days Thu 6/2/22 Fri 6/10/22 r"—i 174 0% PLUMBING FINAL 1 day Thu 6/2/22 Thu 6/2/22 161 177 0% FIRE FINAL 1 day Mon 6/6/22 Mon 6/6/22 163,144 173 0% HVAC FINAL 1 day Thu 6/9/22 Thu 6/9/22 162,164,140 �a 175 0% ELECTRICAL FINAL 1 day Thu 6/9/22 Thu 6/9/22 160 3 176 0% BUILO(NG FINAL/C OF 0 1 day Fri 6/10/22 Fri 6/10/22 177,138,173,174, *; Page 5 Tab C I Questionnaire 7 I Ability to Meet Project Schedule 7.1 Do you foresee any problem meeting the project schedule?Currently thr project schedule shows a notice to proceed of 8/24/21,depending on the actual NTP date will determine if the project can be completed within 180 days or not,this due to the fact that metal decking materials are out between January and February delivery dates,which is driving the projects critical path 7.2 Does the stipulated time of 180 calendar days seem reasonable for this project?Yes,it does seem reasonable,the biggest obstacle will be Metal Decking Materials. 7.3 Does the stipulated time effect cost of project and if so please explain?No,it does not 7.4 Describe scheduling techniques,including any project management software you would employ on this project: We provide Critical Path Scheduling with Microsoft Project scheduling software.We manage the job through Procore Project Management Software.Additionally we provide an updated 3-Week look ahead schedule at weekly meetings. 7.6 Has your organization been assessed any liquidated damages or other damages for delay on any project during the last five years? No. C I have found them(JKC)to be professional,dedicated and quality driven.They are true professionals in that they will drive the project to completion in accordance with the Owner's needs/desires. They keep the Owner informed and enthusiastically work to resolve the inevitable problems with minimal impact to quality,schedule or Gadget." B.K.Browning,PE 68142 Vice President KWR Engineering Services,LLC Kinningham House I Response to RFP 2021 Tab C I Questionnaire 7 I Questionnaire Signature/ Acknowledgement By execution hereof the undersigned warrants and represents that the foregoing answers to this Questionnaire are true and correct Signature of Proposer John N.King Printed Name of Proposer President Title John King Construction,Ltd. Name of Firm 559 S IH 35,Suite 210,Round Rock,TX 78664 Address of Firm 512.836.5464 Telephone Number of Firm 512.833.1033 Facsimile Kinningham House I Response to RFP 2021 00200 BID BOND BID BOND THE STATE OF TEXAS § KNOW ALL BY THESE PRESENTS: COUNTY OF WILLIAMSON 5 That John King Construction, Ltd of the City of Round Rock County of Williamson State of Texas as Principal, and Merchants Bonding Company(Mutual) authorized under the laws of the State of Texas to act as surety on bonds for principals, are held and firmly bound unto the CITY OF ROUND ROCK, TEXAS ("Owner"), in the penal sum of Five Percent(5%) of the total amount of the Bid of the Principal submitted to the Owner,for the Work described below;for the payment whereof,well and truly to be made, and the said Principal and Surety do herby bind themselves and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns,jointly and severally, as follows: In no case shall the liability of the Surety hereunder exceed the sum of(Five Percent of the Greatest Amount Bid Dollars($ 5%G.A.B. ). THE CONDITIONS OF THIS OBLIGATION ARE SUCH that,whereas,the Principal has submitted the above-referenced Bid to the Owner, for construction of the Work under the "Specifications for Construction of Kinningham House for which Bids are to be opened at the office of Owner on the 5th day of August , 20 21 . NOW, THEREFORE, if the Principal is awarded the Contract, and within the time and manner required under the "Instructions to Bidders," after the prescribed forms are presented to her/him for signature,enters into a written Agreement substantially in the form contained in the Bid Documents, in accordance with the Bid, and files the two (2) bonds with the Owner, one to guarantee faithful performance and the other to guarantee payment for labor and materials,then this obligation shall be null and void; otherwise, it shall be and remain in full force and effect. In the event that suit is brought upon this Bond by the Owner and judgment is recovered,said Surety shall pay all costs incurred by the Owner in such suit,including a reasonable attorney's fee to be fixed by the Court. IN WITNESS WHEREOF,the said Principal and Surety have signed this instrument on this the 5th day of the month of August 20 21 . John King Construction, Ltd Merchants Bonding Company(Mutual) Principal Surety • H-rdki&- _ Scott D. Chapman Printed Name Printe I ame By: r Title: -Fe 1 •,i. -: Attorney-in-Fact Address: 559 S lH 35, Ste. 210 Address: 9500 Arboretum BIvdi Ste. 100 Round Rock,TX 78664 Austin,TX 78759 eiN 00200 9-2015 Page 1 Bid Bond 00090652 Residen gent ignature Kevin McQ ain Printed N• �e 7600-C N. Capital of Texas Highway, Ste. 200 Street Address Austin,TX 78731 City, State, Zip Page 00200 9-2015 Bid Bond 00090652 1 MERCHAT5 BONDING COMPANY, WW� POWER OF ATTORNEY Know All Persons By These Presents,that MERCHANTS BONDING COMPANY(MUTUAL)and MERCHANTS NATIONAL BONDING,INC., both being corporations of the State of Iowa(herein collectively called the"Companies")do hereby make,constitute and appoint,individually, Bryan Lewis;Cheryl R Colson;Cynthia Haslam;Elaine Lewis;Jeanne M Buchan;Kevin McQuain;Malia E Mann;Misty Witt;Rosalyn D Hassell; Scott D Chapman;Timothy J Maley their true and lawful Attorneys)-in-Fact, to sign its name as surety(ies)and to execute, seal and acknowledge any and all bonds, undertakings, contracts and other written instruments in the nature thereof, on behalf of the Companies in their business of guaranteeing the fidelity of persons, guaranteeing the performance of contracts and executing or guaranteeing bonds and undertakings required or permitted in any actions or proceedings allowed by law. This Power-of-Attorney is granted and is signed and sealed by facsimile under and by authority of the following By-Laws adopted by the Board of Directors of Merchants Bonding Company(Mutual)on April 23,2011 and amended August 14, 2015 and adopted by the Board of Directors of Merchants National Bonding,inc.,on October 16,2015. "The President, Secretary, Treasurer, or any Assistant Treasurer or any Assistant Secretary or any Vice President shall have power and authority to appoint Attorneys-in-Fact, and to authorize them to execute on behalf of the Company, and attach the seal of the Company thereto, bonds and undertakings,recognizances,contracts of indemnity and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof." "The signature of any authorized officer and the seal of the Company may be affixed by facsimile or electronic transmission to any Power of Attorney or Certification thereof authorizing the execution and delivery of any bond, undertaking, recognizance, or other suretyship obligations of the Company,and such signature and seal when so used shall have the same force and effect as though manually fixed." In connection with obligations in favor of the Florida Department of Transportation only,it is agreed that the power and aut hority hereby given to the Attorney-in-Fact includes any and all consents for the release of retained percentages and/or final estimates on engineering and construction contracts required by the State of Florida Department of Transportation. It is fully understood that consenti ng to the State of Florida Department of Transportation making payment of the final estimate to the Contractor and/or its assignee, shall not relieve this surety company of any of its obligations under its bond. In connection with obligations in favor of the Kentucky Department of Highways only,it is agreed that the power and authority hereby given to the Attorney-in-Fact cannot be modified or revoked unless prior written personal notice of such intent has been given to the Commissioner- Department of Highways of the Commonwealth of Kentucky at least thirty(30)days prior to the modification or revocation. In Witness Whereof,the Companies have caused this instrument to be signed and sealed this 31st day of August , 2018 .........,,,, /10 N4 • AG *4. ‹A, ..-0A,.. ••.-7, zejs0.00145:*.Q..p; �•d�.'• �pQg•.,� MERCHANTS BONDING COMPANY(MUTUAL) C) :�; �•�,o '� .4.; MERCHANTS NATIONAL BONDING,INC. -0- 0.0: 0 fro; • : „,, • 2003 L •Q• 1933 •�• By t) • %.1• •IS° • N * � • ..... ,�s�•• .*• �•• '`1+. President STATEOFIOWA .1111$**t'`' •`''•'',• COUNTY OF DALLAS ss. On this this 31st day of August 2018 , before me appeared Larry Taylor, to me personally known,who being by me duly sworn did say that he is President of MERCHANTS BONDING COMPANY (MUTUAL)and MERCHANTS NATIONAL BONDING, INC.; and that the seals affixed to the foregoing instrument are the Corporate Seals of the Companies;and that the said instrument was signed and sealed in behalf of the Companies by authority of their respective Boards of Directors. ,��-�i�4� ALICIA K.GRAM �= � o Commission dumber 767430 z My Commission Expires {o � Agri!1,2020 Notary Public (Expiration of notary's commission does not invalidate this instrument) I,William Warner,Jr.,Secretary of MERCHANTS BONDING COMPANY(MUTUAL)and MERCHANTS NATIONAL BONDING,INC.,do hereby certify that the above and foregoing is a true and correct copy of the POWER-OF-ATTORNEY executed by said Companies,which is still in full force and effect and has not been amended or revoked. In Witness Whereof,I have hereunto set my hand and affixed:tbe eaI of the Companies on this 5th day of August ,2021 10 Noi #* ' •tiik-‘0,6:CO-.Z'% --, 4,, *444+ *P 0 f* **Oik **- = �/ • � � � s v v S �"«: - _ MERCHAN --Mumma BONDING COMPAN-Y-4 P.O... . .-rC``''s BO''/o`o~,^'/°..T.``' MERCHANTS``- BONDING,v''' INC'`'D�''"'�``n.^ ..` .,,_''.,`�,. Please sen.� .' notices� of ..-, ..,' merchants BondIng -_ on ...._ .-`.`- "'^-`.-``...``."a/./Merchants Natt"onal Bondi*ng, Inc. P.O. Box 14498 It Des Moines, Iowa 50306-3498 (515) AlOW43-8171 (800) 678,,8171 Physical `^.]res.. ''('�``'`v�`'- West Des Moines., Iowa 50266 ~=�. 00300 PROPOSAL FORM Request for Competitive Sealed Proposals for Construction Services PROPOSAL FORM PROJECT NAME: Kinningham House PROJECT LOCATION: lOdO Southcreek Dr.,Round Rock,TX 78664 PROJECT OWNER: City of Round Rock,Texas DATE: 8/512021 PROPOSER: Firm Name: Sohn King Construction, Ltd. Principal Office Address: 559 S IH 35, Suite 210, Round Rock, TX 78664 Telephone Number: 512.836.5464 Facsimile Number: 512.833.0133 Primary Contact Name: J.D. King Primary Contact Title: Project Manager I Estimating ADDENDA ACKNOWLEDGMENT: The undersigned Proposer acknowledges receipt of the following addenda: Addendum No. 1 dated 7/23/2021 Date Received W23/2021 Addendum No. 2 dated 7/29/2021 Date Received 7/29/2021 Addendum No. 3 dated 7/30/2021 Date Received 7/30/2021 Addendum No.4 dated 7/30/2021 Date Received 7/30/2021 NO MODIFICATIONS.ADDITIONS.DELETIONS OR ATTACHMENTS SHALL BE MADE TO THIS PROPOSAL FORM. IN SUBMITTING TNIS PROPOSAL, THE PROPOSER REPRESENTS THAT ALL LABOR. MATERLS__EOUIPMENT AND SERVICES ASSOCIATED WITH THE WORK, AS WELL AS THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE PROPOSED CONTRACT,SHALL BE IN STRICT CONFORMANCE WITH THE CONTRACT, DOCUMENTS ON WHICH THIS PROPOSAL IS BASED. CONTRACTOR PROPOSES: In response to the Request for Competitive Sealed Proposals for Construction Services for the execution of the work described by the contract documents for the about-described project, and having examined the site where the work is to be performed,and being familiar with local conditions as they might in any way affect the cost and/or time for execution of the work,and having carefully examined all of the contract documents and addenda thereto, the undersigned Proposer agrees to perform all of the work, to provide all services,to furnish all necessary superintendence,tabor,machinery,equipment,tools,materials, insurance and miscellaneous items,including transportation and other facilities as may be required for the complete and satisfactory and timely execution of the work for which this proposal is submitted,as provided by the attached supplemental specifications and as shown on the plans for the construction of the project, all for the lump-sum consideration stated as follows: TOTAL PROPOSED CONTRACT SUM to include Owner's Betterment Allowance of$25OOOQ TOTAL PROPOSED CONTRACT SUM: k.4o m:\\ion.�YQ.e hor�Y�cd S�V.achausa�ncl��r�t wtir.A slk��ev� Dollars($ _ U4,. op VOLUNTARY ALTERNATE SUM:(Attach description on separate sheet if needed) Dollars($_____ } The undersigned Proposer agrees to commence work within ten(10)days after the date of written "Notice to Proceed." The undersigned Proposer further agrees to complete the work in full within 180 calendar days after the date of the written"Notice to Proceed,"subject to any extensions of time allowed by the contract documents,and in phases as indicated on the drawings. The undersigned Proposer and the Owner agree that for each and every calendar day on which the work,or any portion thereof,remains incomplete after the stated calendar-day period,the Proposer shall pay the amount of One Thousand Dollars($1,000.00)per calendar day as liquidated damages,not as a penalty but for delay damages to the Owner. Such amount shall be deducted by the Owner from any payment due to the Proposer. The undersigned Proposer agrees that this proposal shall be good for and may not be withdrawn for a period of one hundred-twenty(120)calendar days after closing deadline for receiving proposals. The undersigned Proposer agrees,if notified of the acceptance of this proposal within one hundred- twenty(1 20)days of the time set for opening of proposals,to execute and deliver to the Owner within five (5) days from the date of such notification the required construction contract, a performance bond and a payment bond for the total amount of the construction agreement, and a certificate of insurance, all as stipulated in the contract documents. The undersigned Proposer agrees to attach to this proposal a certified check, cashier's check or proposal bond in the amount of five percent(5%)of the total proposed contract sum. Also accompanying this proposal is all information required in the"Instruction to Proposers." It is understood and agreed by and between the parties that the proposal security accompanying this proposal will be returned to the Proposer, except in the following instance: in the event of acceptance of this proposal, if the Proposer fails to execute the required construction agreement and deliver the required performance and payment bonds within five (5) days after acceptance, then the proposal security shall become the property of the Owner and shall be considered as liquidated damages for the delay and other inconveniences suffered by the Owner because of such failure of the Proposer. The undersigned Proposer acknowledges that the Owner reserves the right to reject any and/or all proposals covered in this Request for Competitive Sealed Proposals and that the Owner has the right to waive any informalities and/or defects in proposals or to accept such proposals as it shall deem to be in the best interests of the Owner. In submitting this proposal, the Proposer represents that no person or company other than the Proposer listed below or otherwise indicated hereinafter has any interest whatsoever in this proposal or the construction agreement that may be entered into as a result hereof. The undersigned Proposer certifies that the proposed contract sum and all prices contained in this proposal have been carefully checked and are submitted as correct and final. The undersigned Proposer further certifies that the unit prices have been shown in words and figures for each item listed in this proposal; and it is understood and agreed that,in the event of a discrepancy,the words shall govern. The undersigned Proposer affirms that she/helthey are duly authorized to execute this proposal,and that this company, corporation, firm, partnership, and/or individual has not prepared this proposal in collusion with any other Proposer. The undersigned Proposer affirms that the content of this proposal as to prices, terms, and conditions has not been communicated by the undersigned nor by any agents or employees of the undersigned to any other person engaged in this type of business, prior to the official public opening of this proposal. This Proposal Form shall be signed by the Proposer as follows: J. Sole Proprietorship: Signature of sole proprietor in the presence of a notary public who will also sign and affix seal, printed name, and printed title (if any). Insert the printed words "Sole Proprietor"under the signature. K. Partnership or Joint Venture: Signature of all partners or joint venturers in the presence of a notary public who will also sign and affix seal,printed name,and printed title(if any). Insert the printed words"Partner"or"Joint Venturer"under each signature. L. Corporation:Signature of duly authorized signing officers,printed names,and printed titles. Under each such signature, insert the capacity in which the signing officer acts. Affix the corporate seal. de'? 1P4 Signa re of Proposer John N. King Printed Name of Proposer President Title John King Construction, Ltd. Name of Firm ��- ` 559 S 1H 35, Suite 210, Round Rock, TX 78664 Address of Fin 512w836n5464 Telephone Nu ber of F1' .. 51208331910133 Facsimile Number of Firm [Co orate Seal if a corporation] ACKNOWLEDGMENT THE STATE OF TEXAS . . � �^ COUNTY OF � SUBSCRIBED AND SWORN TO BEFORE ME on this the "5—' day^(,h~.o''�.' _ 2021. |.... and for the pu oses 'indicated,, � '~ ` Nota ubli'c Stat of Texas CYNTHIA L HEMPEL . ' Notary^'`.'276 �7 My."'-�--'.'� MyCo,�' i«^`o 1~^2`��. ___-__`__ ^ ' 003000a Itemized Proposa f;om CORR Kinninq m I "A INSERT PROPOSER <---BASE CONTRACT ITEMS---> TOTAL SPEC SEQ PAY TOTAL ALT# ALT#2 AMOUNT W/ REFER NO# ITEM ITEMS OF WORK AND MATERIALS QTY UNIT UNIT PRICE AMOUNT Voluntary- ALTS. 01 GENERAL CONDITIONS 1 LSUM 507,883 $507,883 0 0 0 $507,883 02 EXISTING CONDITIONS 1 LSUM 33,725 $33,725 0 0 0 $33,725 03 CONCRETE 1 LSUM 102,060 $102,060 0 0 0 $102,060 04 MASONRY 1 LSUM 8,400 $8,400 0 0 0 $8,400 05 METALS 1 LSUM 342,300 $342,300 0 0 0 $342,300 06 WOOD,PLASTIC,COMPOSITES 1 , LSUM 136,270 $136,270 0 0 0 $136,270 07 THERMAL MOISTURE PROTECTION 1 LSUM 142,062 $142,062 0 0 0 $142,062 08 OPENINGS 1 LSUM 89,445 $89,445 0 0 0 $89,445 09 FINISHES 1 LSUM 197,125 $197,125 0 0 0 $197,125 10 SPECIALTIES 1 LSUM 20,019 $20,019 0 0 0 $20,019 11 EQUIPMENT(Contractor Furnish&Install) 1 LSUM ' 700 $700 0 0 0 $700 12 FURNISHINGS 1 LSUM 0 $0 0 0 0 $0 14 CONVEYING EQUIPMENT 1 LSUM 0 $0 0 0 0 $0 21 FIRE SUPPRESSION 1 LSUM 23,721 $23,721 0 0 0 $23,721 22 PLUMBING 1 LSUM 94,550 $94,550 0 0 0 $94,550 23 MECHANICAL 1 LSUM 109,770 $109,770 0 0 0 $109,770 26 ELECTRICAL 1 LSUM 118,000 $118,000 0 0 0 $118,000 27 COMMUNICATIONS 1 LSUM 0 $0 0 0 0 $0 28 ELECTRONIC SAFETY&SECURITY 1 LSUM 9,000 $9,000 0 0 0 $9,000 31 EARTHWORK , 1 LSUM 162,820 $162,820 0 0 0 $162,820 32 EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 1 LSUM 43,267 $43,267 0 0 0 $43,267 33 UTILITIES 1 LSUM 165,000 $165,000 0 0 0 $165,000 TOTAL $2,306,117 $0 $0 $0 $2,306,117 I I l I 1 NOTES and EXCEPTIONS: 1 Unfortunately,due to fluctuating construction cost,this bid is only good for 30 days'will work to try and keep all pricing current. Excluded-Signage,low voltage(other than Fire Alarm),permitting,third party testing,impact fees,utility fees(including ONCOR relocation work),utility disconnects(to be completed 2 by owner before mobilization), landscape(including re-vegetation),asbestos abatement 3.Job is bid at 180 days for the construction schedule.Additional pre con time may be required due to long lead times. 4 5 ADDENDUMS: # I DESCRIPTION I ISSUED DATE 1 Bidding Questions 7/23/2021 2 Bidding Questions 7/29/2021 3 Updated Civil Sheets 7/30/2021 4 Redline clarifications pertaining to ductwork 7/30/2021 8/23/2021 00300A Itemized Proposal Form Ver 1JKC PAGE 1 of 23 PAGES City of Round Rock Kinningham House-Subcontractor Qualification Matrix ROUND ROOK TEXAS ae��vRrn c2� The Competitive Sealed Proposal scoring is primarily based on a Prime Contractor.However,the City of Round Rock Building Construction Division recognizes that Subcontractors(Trade Partners)are an intergral part of the team. ACTIVITY PERFORMANCE RELATIONSHIP GENERAL CONTRACTOR/SUBCONTRACTOR ITEM DIVISION/SUBCONTRACTOR YEARS OF CERTIFICATIONS PAST PROJECTS GC-SUB YEARS WORKING REASON FOR SELECTING THIS SUB ADITIONAL REMARKS/COMMENTS BY GC EXPERIENCE WITH GC 03-Concrete David Abernethy Const. 04-Masonry Rock Solid 05-Metals Joe Bush/Rogue 07-Thermal and Moisture Protection State Capitol Roofing 08-Openings Morris Glass Overhead Doors of Austin Arch Dvi 8 09-Finishes B&G Drywall Slater Painting 10-Specialties 11 Equipment CFCI 14 Conveying Equipment 21-Fire Supression Fire King 22-Plumbing Cox Plumbing 23-HVAC Gemini Mechanical • r 26-Electrical Gerald Nunn 28-Fire Alarm Fire King 31-Earthwork Champion Site Prep I I 32-Exterior improvments Champion Site Prep David Abernethy Const. Contractors Asphalt 33-Utilites Cox Plumbing KINNINGHAM HOUSE—DIVISION 01 GENERAL CONDITIONS SPEC REFER DESCRIPTION QUANTITY UNIT UNIT PRICE AMOUNT NOTES/COMMENTS 0 LS $0.00 $0 Project Management&Project Superintendence 1 LS $72,930 Fuel Expenses $0 Bonds $22,083 Liability Insurance _ $10,494 Permit Fees $0 BY OWNER Temporary Protection $1,700 Construction Debris Haul Off $10,400 Final Cleaning $2,596 Overhead and Profit $109,815 $27,865 Owner's Betterment Allowance $250,000 SUBTOTAL $507,883 SUBTOTAL BASE PROJECT $507,883 Bid Alternate Additions ALTERNATE#1 $0 ALTERNATE#2 $0 ALTERNATE-VOLUNTARY $0 SUBTOTAL of all ALTERNATES $0 0%DESIGN&CONSTRUCTION CONTINGENCY $0 ADDED AT SUMMARY LEVEL GRAND TOTAL $507,883 8/23/2021 00300A Itemized Proposal Form Ver 1JKC PAGE 4 of 23 PAGES KINNINGHA QU =IVISION 02 EXISTING CONDITIONS SPEC REFER DESCRIPTION QUANTITY UNIT UNIT PRICE AMOUNT NOTES/COMMENTS 0 XX $0.00 $0 Civil Sheets Site Demo,Clearing,and Grubbing 1 Is $28,225.00 $28,225 Construction Staking 1 Is $5,500.00 $5,500 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 SUBTOTAL $33,725 SUBTOTAL BASE PROJECT $33,725 Bid Alternate Additions ALTERNATE#1 $0 ALTERNATE#2 $0 ALTERNATE-VOLUNTARY $0 SUBTOTAL of all ALTERNATES $0 0%DESIGN&CONSTRUCTION CONTINGENCY $0 ADDED AT SUMMARY LEVEL GRAND TOTAL $33,725 8/23/2021 00300A Itemized Proposal Form Ver 1JKC PAGE 5 of 23 PAGES KINNINGHAM HOUSE-DIVISION 03 CONCRETE SPEC REFER DESCRIPTION QUANTITY UNIT UNIT PRICE AMOUNT NOTES/COMMENTS 0 XX $0.00 $0 033053 Miscellaneous Cast-In-Place Concrete 6,804 sf $15.00 $102,060 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 SUBTOTAL $102,060 SUBTOTAL BASE PROJECT $102,060 Bid Alternate Additions ALTERNATE#1 $0 ALTERNATE#2 $0 ALTERNATE-VOLUNTARY $0 SUBTOTAL of all ALTERNATES $0 0%DESIGN&CONSTRUCTION CONTINGENCY $0 ADDED AT SUMMARY LEVEL GRAND TOTAL $102,060 8/23/2021 00300A Itemized Proposal Form Ver 1JKC PAGE 6 of 23 PAGES KINNINGHAM HOUSE-DIVISION 04 MASONRY SPEC REFER DESCRIPTION QUANTITY UNIT I UNIT PRICE AMOUNT I NOTES/COMMENTS 0 XX $0.00 $0 044313.13 Anchored Stone Masonry Veneer 1 Is $8,400.00 $8,400 047200 Cast Stone Masonry $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 SUBTOTAL $8,400 SUBTOTAL BASE PROJECT $8,400 Bid Alternate Additions ALTERNATE#1 $0 ALTERNATE#2 $0 ALTERNATE-VOLUNTARY $0 SUBTOTAL of all ALTERNATES $0 0%DESIGN&CONSTRUCTION CONTINGENCY $0 ADDED AT SUMMARY LEVEL GRAND TOTAL $8,400 8/23/2021 00300A Itemized Proposal Form Ver 1JKC PAGE 7 of 23 PAGES KINNINGHAM HOUSE-DIVISION 05 METALS SPEC REFER j DESCRIPTION QUANTITY UNIT UNIT PRICE AMOUNT I NOTES/COMMENTS 0 XX $0.00 $0 055000 Metal Fabrications 1 Is $342,300.00 $342,300 055300 Metal Gratings $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 SUBTOTAL $342,300 SUBTOTAL BASE PROJECT $342,300 Bid Alternate Additions ALTERNATE#1 $0 ALTERNATE#2 $0 ALTERNATE-VOLUNTARY $0 SUBTOTAL of all ALTERNATES $0 0%DESIGN&CONSTRUCTION CONTINGENCY $0 ADDED AT SUMMARY LEVEL GRAND TOTAL $342,300 8/23/2021 00300A Itemized Proposal Form Ver 1JKC PAGE 8 of 23 PAGES KINNINGHAM HOUSE-DIVISION 06 WOOD,PLASTIC,COMPOSITES SPEC REFER DESCRIPTION QUANTITY UNIT UNIT PRICE AMOUNT I NOTES/COMMENTS 0 XX $0.00 $0 061053 Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry 1 Is $53,254.00 $53,254 062013 Wood Ceiling 1 Is $50,425.00 $50,425 064116 Plastic-Laminate-Clad Architectural Cabinets 1 Is $17,012.00 $17,012 066400 Plastic Paneling 1 Is $15,579.00 $15,579 $0 $0 $0 SUBTOTAL $136,270 SUBTOTAL BASE PROJECT $136,270 Bid Alternate Additions ALTERNATE#1 $0 ALTERNATE#2 $0 ALTERNATE-VOLUNTARY $0 SUBTOTAL of all ALTERNATES $0 0%DESIGN&CONSTRUCTION CONTINGENCY $0 ADDED AT SUMMARY LEVEL GRAND TOTAL $136,270 8/23/2021 00300A Itemized Proposal Form Ver 1JKC PAGE 9 of 23 PAGES KINNINGHAM HOUSE-DIVISION 07 THERMAL MOISTURE PROTECTION SPEC REFER 1 DESCRIPTION QUANTITY UNIT I UNIT PRICE AMOUNT NOTES/COMMENTS 0 XX $0.00 $0 072100 Thermal Insulation 1 Is $4,492.00 $4,492 072500 Weather Barriers 1 Is $8,984.00 $8,984 074113.16 Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels 1 Is $69,465.00 $69,465 074600 Siding 1 Is $48,871.00 $48,871 076200 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 1 Is $6,500.00 $6,500 079200 Joint Sealants 1 Is $3,750.00 $3,750 $0 $0 $0 $0 SUBTOTAL $142,062 SUBTOTAL BASE PROJECT $142,062 Bid Alternate Additions ALTERNATE#1 $0 ALTERNATE#2 $0 ALTERNATE-VOLUNTARY $0 SUBTOTAL of all ALTERNATES $0 0%DESIGN&CONSTRUCTION CONTINGENCY $0 ADDED AT SUMMARY LEVEL GRAND TOTAL $142,062 8/23/2021 00300A Itemized Proposal Form Ver 1JKC PAGE 10 of 23 PAGES KINNINGHAM HOUSE-DIVISION 08 OPENINGS SPEC REFER DESCRIPTION QUANTITY'UNIT UNIT PRICE AMOUNT I NOTES/COMMENTS 0 XX $0.00 $0 081113 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 1 Is $22,791.00 $22,791 083600 Sectional Overhead Doors 1 Is $53,659.00 $53,659 085113 Aluminum Windows 1 Is $12,995.00 $12,995 087100 Door Hardware $0 included in doors and frames $0 $0 $0 $0 SUBTOTAL $89,445 SUBTOTAL BASE PROJECT $89,445 Bid Alternate Additions ALTERNATE#1 $0 ALTERNATE#2 $0 ALTERNATE-VOLUNTARY $0 SUBTOTAL of all ALTERNATES $0 0%DESIGN&CONSTRUCTION CONTINGENCY $0 ADDED AT SUMMARY LEVEL GRAND TOTAL $89,445 8/23/2021 00300A Itemized Proposal Form Ver 1JKC PAGE 11 of 23 PAGES %'!% NNINGNA HOUSE DIVIS SPEC REFER I DESCRIPTION QUANTITY UNIT UNIT COST I AMOUNT NOTES/COMMENTS 0 XX $0.00 $0 092216 Non-Structural Metal Framing 1 Is $145,725.00 $145,725 092900 Gypsum Board $0 096513 Resilient Base and Accessories 1 Is $1,200.00 $1,200 099113 Exterior Painting 1 Is $43,100.00 $43,100 includes interior and extrior 099123 Interior Painting $0 099300 Staining and Transparent Finishing $0 Sealed Concrete Floors 1 Is $7,100.00 $7,100 SUBTOTAL $197,125 SUBTOTAL BASE PROJECT $197,125 Bid Alternate Additions ALTERNATE#1 $0 ALTERNATE#2 $0 ALTERNATE-VOLUNTARY $0 SUBTOTAL of all ALTERNATES $0 0%DESIGN&CONSTRUCTION CONTINGENCY $0 ADDED AT SUMMARY LEVEL GRAND TOTAL $197,125 Unit Price Description QUANTITY UNIT UNIT PRICE Moisture Vapor Emmission Control System $0 8/23/2021 00300A Itemized Proposal Form Ver 1JKC PAGE 12 of 23 PAGES KINNINGHAM HOUSE-DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES SPEC REFER DESCRIPTION I QUANTITY UNIT UNIT PRICE AMOUNT NOTES/COMMENTS 0 XX $0.00 $0 101419 Dimensional Letter Signage 1 Is $2,500.00 $2,500 allowance 101423 Panel Signage $0 excluded 102113.19 Plastic Toilet Compartments 1 Is $7,987.00 $7,987 102800 Toilet,Bath,and Laundry Accessories 1 Is $8,534.00 $8,534 104413 Fire Protection Cabinets 1 Is $998.00 $998 104416 Fire Extinguishers $0 included in cabinets $0 SUBTOTAL $20,019 SUBTOTAL BASE PROJECT $20,019 Bid Alternate Additions ALTERNATE#1 $0 ALTERNATE#2 $0 ALTERNATE-VOLUNTARY $0 SUBTOTAL of all ALTERNATES $0 0%DESIGN&CONSTRUCTION CONTINGENCY $0 ADDED AT SUMMARY LEVEL GRAND TOTAL $20,019 8/23/2021 00300A Itemized Proposal Form Ver 1JKC PAGE 13 of 23 PAGES KINNINGHAM HOUSE-DIVISION 11 CFCI EQUIPMENT SPEC REFER I I DESCRIPTION I QUANTITY UNIT_ UNIT PRICE AMOUNT NOTES/COMMENTS 0 XX $0.00 $0 113013 Residential Appliances-Unload and Installation Only 1 Is $700.00 $700 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 SUBTOTAL $700 SUBTOTAL BASE PROJECT $700 Bid Alternate Additions ALTERNATE#1 $0 ALTERNATE#2 $0 ALTERNATE-VOLUNTARY $0 SUBTOTAL of all ALTERNATES $0 0%DESIGN&CONSTRUCTION CONTINGENCY $0 ADDED AT SUMMARY LEVEL GRAND TOTAL $700 8/23/2021 00300A Itemized Proposal Form Ver 1JKC PAGE 14 of 23 PAGES Round Rock Public Library-DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS =` SPEC REFER DESCRIPTION QUANTITY'UNIT UNIT COST AMOUNT NOTES/COMMENTS 0 XX $0.00 $0 123616 Metal Countertops $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 SUBTOTAL $0 SUBTOTAL BASE PROJECT $0 Bid Alternate Additions ALTERNATE#1 $0 ALTERNATE#2 $0 ALTERNATE-VOLUNTARY $0 SUBTOTAL of all ALTERNATES $0 0%DESIGN&CONSTRUCTION CONTINGENCY $0 ADDED AT SUMMARY LEVEL GRAND TOTAL $0 8/23/2021 00300A Itemized Proposal Form Ver 1JKC PAGE 15 of 23 PAGES KINNINGHAM HOUSE-DIVISION 21 FIRE SUPPRESSION SPEC REFER l DESCRIPTION ,QUANTITY UNIT UNIT COST AMOUNT NOTES/COMMENTS 0 XX $0.00 $0 211313 Wet Pipe Sprinkler Systems 1 Is $23,721.00 $23,721 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 I $o $0 $0 SUBTOTAL $23,721 SUBTOTAL BASE PROJECT $23,721 Bid Alternate Additions ALTERNATE#1 $0 ALTERNATE#2 $0 _ALTERNATE-VOLUNTARY $0 SUBTOTAL of all ALTERNATES $0 0%DESIGN&CONSTRUCTION CONTINGENCY $0 ADDED AT SUMMARY LEVEL GRAND TOTAL $23,721 8/23/2021 00300A Itemized Proposal Form Ver 1JKC PAGE 16 of 23 PAGES KINNINGHAM HOUSE-DIVISION 22 PLUMBING SPEC REFER DESCRIPTION l QUANTITY UNIT UNIT PRICE AMOUNT NOTES/COMMENTS 0 XX $0.00 $0 220000 General Plumbing Requirements 1 Is $94,550.00 $94,550 220529 Hangars and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment $0 220553 Plmbing Identification $0 220719 Plumbing Insulation $0 221005 Plumbing Piping $0 224000 Plumbing Fixtures $0 $0 $0 $0 SUBTOTAL $94,550 SUBTOTAL BASE PROJECT $94,550 Bid Alternate Additions ALTERNATE#1 $0 ALTERNATE#2 $0 ALTERNATE-VOLUNTARY $0 SUBTOTAL of all ALTERNATES $0 0%DESIGN&CONSTRUCTION CONTINGENCY $0 ADDED AT SUMMARY LEVEL GRAND TOTAL $94,550 8/23/2021 00300A Itemized Proposal Form Ver 1JKC PAGE 17 of 23 PAGES KINNINGHAM HOUSE-DIVISION 23 MECHANICAL SPEC REFER DESCRIPTION QUANTITY UNIT UNIT PRICE AMOUNT NOTES/COMMENTS 0 XX $0.00 $0 230000 General Mechanical Requirements 1 Is $109,770.00 $109,770 230529 Hangars and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment $0 230553 Mechanical Identification $0 230593 HVAC Testing,Adjusting,Balancing $0 230719_Mechanical Insulation $0 233100 Hvac Ductowrk $0 233400 HVAC Fans $0 233700 Air Outlets and Inlets $0 238126 Split-System Air Conditioners $0 $0 $0 SUBTOTAL $109,770 SUBTOTAL BASE PROJECT $109,770 Bid Alternate Additions ALTERNATE#1 $0 ALTERNATE#2 $0 ALTERNATE-VOLUNTARY $0 SUBTOTAL of all ALTERNATES $0 0%DESIGN&CONSTRUCTION CONTINGENCY $0 ADDED AT SUMMARY LEVEL GRAND TOTAL $109,770 8/23/2021 00300A Itemized Proposal Form Ver 1JKC PAGE 18 of 23 PAGES KINNINGHAM HOUSE-DIVISION 26 ELECTRICAL SPEC REFER DESCRIPTION QUANTITY UNIT UNIT PRICE AMOUNT NOTES/COMMENTS _ 0 XX $0.00 $0 260000 Erlectrical General Conditions 1 Is $118,000.00 $118,000 _ 260519 Conductors and Cables 600V and less $0 260526 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems _ $0 260529 Hangars and Supports for Electrical Systems $0 260533 Raceway and Boxes for Eletrical Systems $0 260553 Identification for Electrical Systems $0 262416 Panelboards $0 262726 Wiring Devices $0 262819 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers $0 265100 Lighting $0 $0 $0 SUBTOTAL $118,000 SUBTOTAL BASE PROJECT $118,000 Bid Alternate Additions ALTERNATE#1 $0 ALTERNATE#2 $0 ALTERNATE-VOLUNTARY $0 SUBTOTAL of all ALTERNATES $0 0%DESIGN&CONSTRUCTION CONTINGENCY $0 ADDED AT SUMMARY LEVEL GRAND TOTAL $118,000 8/23/2021 00300A Itemized Proposal Form Ver 1JKC PAGE 19 of 23 PAGES KINNINGHAM HOUSE-DIVISION 28 ELECTRONIC SAFETY&SECURITY SPEC REFER DESCRIPTION QUANTITY UNIT UNIT PRICE AMOUNT NOTES/COMMENTS 0 XX $0.00 $0 283100 Fire Alarm System 1 Is $9,000.00 $9,000 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 SUBTOTAL $9,000 SUBTOTAL BASE PROJECT $9,000 Bid Alternate Additions ALTERNATE#1 $0 ALTERNATE#2 $0 ALTERNATE-VOLUNTARY $0 SUBTOTAL of all ALTERNATES $0 0%DESIGN&CONSTRUCTION CONTINGENCY $0 ADDED AT SUMMARY LEVEL GRAND TOTAL $9,000 8/23/2021 00300A Itemized Proposal Form Ver 1JKC PAGE 20 of 23 PAGES KINNINGHAM HOUSE--DIVISION 31 EARTHWORK SPEC REFER DESCRIPTION 'QUANTITY UNIT UNIT PRICE AMOUNT NOTES/COMMENTS 0 XX $0.00 $0 Civil/Geotech Excavating,Backfilling and Compacting for the Building Pad 1 Is $76,500.00 $76,500 Civil/Geotech Excavating,Backfilling and Compacting for the site paving 1 Is $76,370.00 $76,370 includes asphalt SWPPP 1 Is $9,150.00 $9,150 Termite Spray 1 Is $800.00 $800 $0 $0 r $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 SUBTOTAL $162,820 SUBTOTAL BASE PROJECT $162,820 Bid Alternate Additions ALTERNATE#1 $0 ALTERNATE#2 $0 ALTERNATE-VOLUNTARh $0 SUBTOTAL of all ALTERNATES $0 0%DESIGN&CONSTRUCTION CONTINGENCY $0 GRAND TOTAL $162,820 Unit Price Description Unit Price-Driller Piers QUANTITY UNIT UNIT PRICE 18" 24" 30" 36" 42" Unit Price-Pier Casing QUANTITY UNIT UNIT PRICE 18" 24" 30" 36" 42" 8/23/2021 00300A Itemized Proposal Form Ver 1JKC PAGE 21 of 23 PAGES KINNINGHAM HOUSE-DIVISION 32 EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS SPEC REFER( DESCRIPTION QUANTITY UNIT' UNIT PRICE AMOUNT NOTES/COMMENTS 0 XX $0.00 $0 Civil Sheets Pavement Markings 1 Is $1,200.00 $1,200 Civil Sheets Dumpster Enclosure 1 Is _ $7,317.00 $7,317 Site Concrete 1 Is $34,750.00 $34,750 $0 SUBTOTAL $43,267 SUBTOTAL BASE PROJECT $43,267 Bid Alternate Additions ALTERNATE#1 $0 ALTERNATE#2 $0 ALTERNATE-VOLUNTARY $0 SUBTOTAL of all ALTERNATES $0 0%DESIGN&CONSTRUCTION CONTINGENCY $0 ADDED AT SUMMARY LEVEL GRAND TOTAL $43,267 8/23/2021 00300A Itemized Proposal Form Ver 1JKC PAGE 22 of 23 PAGES "'KINNINGHA ,OUSE-DIVISION 33 UTILIT /i/ /4 SPEC REFER I DESCRIPTION QUANTITY UNIT UNIT PRICE AMOUNT NOTES/COMMENTS 0 XX $0.00 $0 Civil Sheets Water Utilities 1 Is $165,000.00 $165,000 includes all utilities Civil Sheets Sanitary Sewer Utilities $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 SUBTOTAL $165,000 SUBTOTAL BASE PROJECT $165,000 Bid Alternate Additions ALTERNATE#1 $0 ALTERNATE#2 $0 ALTERNATE-VOLUNTARY $0 SUBTOTAL of all ALTERNATES $0 0%DESIGN&CONSTRUCTION CONTINGENCY $0 ADDED AT SUMMARY LEVEL GRAND TOTAL $165,000 8/23/2021 00300A Itemized Proposal Form Ver 1JKC PAGE 23 of 23 PAGES 00410 STATEMENT OF BIDDER'S SAFETY EXPERIENCE Page 1 00410 8-2014 Statement of Bidder's Safety Experience 00090654 Solicitation Requirements, Contract Forms & Conditions of Contract Statement of Bidder's Safety Experience Section 00410 Bidder must submit a signed Statement of Bidder's Safety Experience form with his Bid; failure to do so will constitute an incomplete Bid that may be rejected. In order to make a responsive Bid, Bidder must provide evidence that it meets minimum OSHA construction safety program requirements, has not been fined by OSHA for any willful safety violations in the past three years, and has a lost time injury rate that doesn't exceed the limits established below. All questions must be answered and data given must be clear and comprehensive. If necessary, questions may be answered on separate attached sheets. Company Name: John King Construction,Ltd. Address: 559 S IH 35, Suite 210, Round Rock, TX 78664 phone: 512.836.5464 Katie King 8.5.2021 Completed by: Date: 1. Does the company have a written construction Safety program? EYes ❑No 2. Does the company conduct construction safety inspections? Eres No 3. Does the company have an active construction safety-training program? IYes ❑No 4. Has the company been fined by OSHA for any willful safety violations in the past DYes ElNo three years? 5. Does the company have a lost time injury rate of 7.8 for SIC 15,or 7.6 for SIC 16, EYes El No or less over the past three years? Attach the company's OSHA 200/300 logs for the past three years. 6. Does the company or affected subcontractors have competent persons in the following Areas? A. Scaffolding Yes ONo ON/A B. Excavation ❑✓ Yes ONo El N/A C. Cranes E Yes ONo ❑N/A D. Electrical ❑✓ Yes ONo ON/A E. Fall Protection ❑✓ Yes ONo ❑N/A F. Confined Spaces ID Yes ONo ❑N/A I hereby certify that the above information is true and correct. /1). / i.q- President Signature Title Page 1 00410 8-2014 Statement of Bidder's Safety Experience 00090654 00500 AGREEMENT City of Round Rock, Texas Contract Forms Standard Form of Agreement for Competitive Sealed Proposal: Section 00500 City of Round Rock, Texas Standard Form of Agreement between 4,1 Owner and Contractor .. tils 40- gag. AGREEMENT made as of the - (2.:..)day • �.� i,,,,k the year 2021. BETWEEN the Owner: City of Round Rock,Texas(hereafter"Owner"or"City") 221 East Main Street Round Rock,Texas 78664 and the Contractor: John King Construction,Ltd. ("Contractor) 559 S IH 35,Suite 210 Round Rock,Texas 78664 The Project is described as: Round Rock Kinningham House 1000 Southcreek Drive Round Rock,Texas 78664 The Architect is: MODE Design Company 103 Wood Lane Cedar Park,Texas 78613 For and in consideration of the mutual terms, conditions and covenants of this Agreement and all accompanying documents between Owner and Contractor, the receipt and sufficiency of which are hereby acknowledged,Owner and Contractor agree as follows: ARTICLE I THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The Contract Documents consist of this Agreement, Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and other Conditions), Drawings, Specifications, Addenda issued prior to execution of this Agreement, other documents listed in this Agreement and Modifications issued after execution of this Agreement; these form the Contract and are as fully a part of the Contract as if attached to this Agreement or repeated herein. The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations, representations or agreements, either written or oral. An enumeration of the Contract Documents, other than Modifications,appears in Article 7. ARTICLE 2 THE WORK OF THIS CONTRACT Contractor shall fully execute the Work described in the Contract Documents, except to the extent specifically indicated in the Contract Documents to be the responsibility of others. 00500 Page 1 of 6 Standard Form of Agreement 00479740/ss2 ARTICLE 3 DATE OF COMMENCEMENT;DATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION;DATE OF FINAL COMPLETION 3.1 The date of commencement of the Work shall be the date of this Agreement unless a different date is stated below or provision is made for the date to be fixed in a Notice to Proceed issued by Owner. 3.2 The Contract Time shall be measured from the date delineated in the Notice to Proceed. 3.3 Contractor shall commence Work within ten (JSD calendar days from the date delineated in the Notice to Proceed. 3.4 Contractor shall achieve Substantial Completion of the entire Work no later than Two Hundred Ten(210) calendar days from issuance by Owner of Notice to Proceed, subject to adjustments of this Contract Time as provided in the Contract Documents. 3.5 If Contractor fails to achieve Substantial Completion of the Work(or any portion thereof)on or before the date(s) specified for Substantial Completion in the Agreement, Contractor shall pay to Owner, as liquidated damages, the sum of One Thousand and No/100 Dollars ($1,000.00) for each calendar day that Substantial Completion is delayed after the date(s)specified for Substantial Completion. It is hereby agreed that the liquidated damages to which Owner is entitled hereunder are a reasonable forecast of just compensation for the harm that would be caused by Contractor's failure to achieve Substantial Completion of the Work(or any portion thereof)on or before the date(s)specified for Substantial Completion in the Agreement.It is agreed that the harm that would be caused by such failure, which includes loss of expected use of the Project areas, provision of alternative storage facilities and rescheduling of moving and occupancy dates, is one that is incapable or very difficult of accurate estimation.It is hereby agreed that if Substantial Completion of the Work(or any portion thereof)is not achieved on or before thirty (30)days after the date(s) specified for Substantial Completion in the Agreement,the Owner shall have the option to either collect liquidated damages as set forth herein or to thereafter rely on its remedies under the Contract Documents and at law and in equity, including without limitation, the recovery of actual damages. The date(s)specified for Substantial Completion of the Work(or any portion thereof in the Agreement shall be subject to adjustment as provided in the Contract Documents. 3.6 Contractor shall achieve Final Completion of the entire Work no later than Two Hundred Forty (240) calendar days from issuance by Owner of Notice to Proceed. ARTICLE 4 CONTRACT SUM 4.1 Owner shall pay Contractor the Contract Sum in current funds for Contractor's performance of the Contract. The Contract Sum shall be Two Million Three Hundred Six Thousand One Hundred Sixteen and No/100 Dollars($2,306,116.00),subject to additions and deductions as provided in the Contract Documents. 4.2 The Contract Sum is based upon the following alternates which are described in the Contract Documents and are hereby accepted by Owner: None ARTICLE 5 PAYMENTS 5.1 PROGRESS PAYMENTS 5.1.1 Based upon Applications for Payment submitted to Architect and Owner by Contractor,and Certificates for Payment issued by Architect and not disputed by Owner and/or Owner's lender, Owner shall make progress Page 2 of 6 payments on account of the Contract Sum to Contractor as provided below,in Article 14 of the City of Round Rock General Conditions,and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 5.1.2 The period covered by each Application for Payment shall be one calendar month ending on the last day of the month. 5.1.3 Provided that an Application for Payment is received by Architect and Owner, and Architect issues a Certificate of Payment not later than the tenth(loth)day of a month,Owner shall make payment to Contractor not later than the tenth(loth)day of the next month.If an Application for Payment is received by Architect and Owner after the application date fixed above,payment shall be made by Owner not later than one month after the Architect issues a Certificate for Payment. 5.1.4 Each Application for Payment shall be based on the most recent schedule of values submitted by Contractor in accordance with the Contract Documents. The schedule of values shall allocate the entire Contract Sum among the various portions of the Work.The schedule of values shall be prepared in such form and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as Architect and Owner may require. This schedule, unless objected to by Architect or Owner,shall be used as a basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment. 5.1.5 Applications for Payment shall warrant the percentage of completion of each portion of the Work as of the end of the period covered by the Application for Payment. 5.1.6 Subject to other provisions of the Contract Documents, the amount of each progress payment shall be computed as provided in Article 14 of the City of Round Rock General Conditions. 5.1.7 Except with Owner's prior written approval, Contractor shall not make advance payments to suppliers for materials or equipment which have not been delivered and stored at the site. 5.2 FINAL PAYMENT 5.2.1 Final payment, constituting the entire unpaid balance of the Contract Sum, shall be made by Owner to Contractor when: .1 Contractor has fully performed the Contract except for Contractor's responsibility to correct Work,and to satisfy other requirements,if any,which extend beyond final payment;and .2 a final Certificate for Payment has been issued by Architect. 5.2.2 Owner's final payment to Contractor shall be made no later than thirty (30) days after the issuance of Architect's final Certificate for Payment. In no event shall final payment be required to be made prior to thirty(30) days after all Work on the Contract has been fully performed.Defects in the Work discovered prior to final payment shall be treated as non-conforming Work and shall be corrected by Contractor prior to final payment, and shall not be treated as warranty items. ARTICLE 6 TERNIINATION OR SUSPENSION 6.1 The Contract may be terminated by Owner or Contractor as provided in Article 15 of the City of Round Rock General Conditions. 6.2 The Work may be suspended by Owner as provided in Article 15 of the City of Round Rock General Conditions. Page 3 of 6 ARTICLE 7 ENUMERATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 7.1 The Contract Documents, except for Modifications issued after execution of this Agreement, are enumerated as follows: 7.1.1 The Agreement is this executed version of the City of Round Rock, Texas Standard Form of Agreement between Owner and Contractor for Competitive Sealed Proposals,as modified. 7.1.2 The General Conditions are the "City of Round Rock Contract Forms 00700," General Conditions, as modified. 7.1.3 The Supplementary, Special, and other Conditions of the Contract are those contained in the Project Manual dated September 2021. 7.1.4 The Specifications are those contained in the Project Manual dated September 2021. 7.1.5 The Drawings,if any,are those contained in the Project Manual dated September 2021. 7.1.6 The Insurance&Construction Bond Forms of the Contract are those contained in the Project Manual dated September 2021. 7.1.7 The Notice to Proposers, Instructions to Proposers, Proposal Form, and Addenda, if any, are those contained in the Project Manual dated September 2021. 7.1.8 If this Agreement covers construction involving federal funds, thereby requiring inclusion of mandated contract clauses, such federally required clauses are those contained in the "City of Round Rock Contract Forms 03000,"Federally Required Contract Clauses,as modified. 7.1.9 Other documents,if any,forming part of the Contract Documents are as follows: Kinningham Construction Documents Architectural and MEP 6/23/2021,Civil 7/14/2021 ARTICLE 8 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 8.1 Where reference is made in this Agreement to a provision of any document, the reference refers to that provision as amended or supplemented by other provisions of the Contract Documents. 8.2 Owner's representative is: Eric Dady Project Manager General Services Department 212 Commerce Road Round Rock,Texas 78664 8.3 Contractor's representative is: John King,President John King Construction,Ltd. 559 S IH 35,Suite 210 Round Rock,Texas 78664 8.4 Neither Owner's nor Contractor's representative shall be changed without ten (10)days' written notice to the other party. 8.5 Waiver of any breach of this Agreement shall not constitute waiver of any subsequent breach. Page 4 of 6 8.6 Owner agrees to pay Contractor from available funds for satisfactory performance of this Agreement in accordance with the proposal submitted therefor, subject to proper additions and deductions, all as provided in the General Conditions, Supplemental Conditions, and Special Conditions of this Agreement, and Owner agrees to make payments on account thereof as provided therein. Lack of funds shall render this Agreement null and void to the extent funds are not available. This Agreement is a commitment of City of Round Rock's current revenues only. 8.7 Although this Agreement is drawn by Owner, both parties hereto expressly agree and assert that, in the event of any dispute over its meaning or application,this Agreement shall be interpreted reasonably and fairly,and neither more strongly for nor against either party. 8.8 In accordance with Chapter 2271, Texas Government Code, a governmental entity may not enter into a contract with a company for goods or services unless the contract contains written verification from the company that it: (1) does not boycott Israel; and (2) will not boycott Israel during the term of this contract. The signatory executing this Agreement on behalf of Contractor verifies Contractor does not boycott Israel and will not boycott Israel during the term of this Agreement. 8.9 This Agreement shall be enforceable in Round Rock,Texas,and if legal action is necessary by either party with respect to the enforcement of any or all of the terms or conditions herein,exclusive venue for same shall lie in Williamson County, Texas. This Agreement shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws and court decisions of the State of Texas. 8.10 Both parties hereby expressly agree that no claims or disputes between the parties arising out of or relating to this Agreement or a breach thereof shall be decided by an arbitration proceeding, including without limitation, any proceeding under the Federal Arbitration Act(9 USC Section 1-14)or any applicable state arbitration statute. 8.11 The parties, by execution of this Agreement, bind themselves, their heirs, successors, assigns, and legal representatives for the full and faithful performance of the terms and provisions hereof. [Signatures on the following page.] Page 5 of 6 This Agreement is entered into as of the day and year first written above and is executed in at least two(2) original copies,of which one is to be delivered to Owner. OWNER CONTRACTOR V-\.* CITY OF ROUND R CK,T AS JOHN KING C STRUCTION,LTD. NJ Printed Name: 1 Printed Name: ✓ "'v / iN is Title: 1041YTitle: /Ze5 Date Signed: 10.4.21 Date Signed: " 2 3 2 / ATTEST: it A L - Alf "IP City Clerk FOR CITY,APPROVED AS TO FORM: Adir ity Attorney Page 6 of 6 00600 INSURANCE AND CONSTRUCTION BOND FORMS BONDS AND INSURANCE INSTRUCTIONS Instruction Sheet 1. Insurance Company must be licensed by State of Texas. 2. Agent signing bonds must be licensed in Texas. 3. Agent signing bonds must have Power of Attorney on behalf of insurance company. 4. If Agent signing bonds has Power of Attorney, but not licensed in Texas, then the bond must be counter-signed by Texas local recording agent. ALL THE ABOVE INFORMATION CAN BE FOUND AT Texas Department of Insurance website—www.tdi.state.tx.us 5. Make sure the dollar amount on both Performance and Payment Bonds match the amount of the Agreement& Bid Form Sheet. 6. Both Performance and Payment Bonds should be signed by Authorized Person. If the contractor is a corporation, then it should be signed by the President or the Vice-President. If the contractor is not incorporated, then it may be signed by the Owner. Please state the title of the authorized person. Bond No. TXC614631 PERFORNIANCE BOND THE STATE OF TEXAS KNOW ALL BY THESE PRESENTS: COUNTY OF WILLIAMSON § That _ John King Construction, Ltd. of the City of _ Round Rock , County of Williamson , and State of Texas , as Principal, and Merchants Bonding Company(Mutual) authorized under the law of the State of Texas to act as surety on bonds for principals, are held and firmly bound unto THE CITY OF ROUND ROCK,TEXAS, (Owner),in the penal sum of Two Million Three Hundred Six Thousand One Hundred Sixteen and No/100 Dollars ($ 2,306,116.00---- ) for the payment whereof, well and truly to be made the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns,jointly and severally, by these presents: WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written Agreement with the Owner dated the 44.1 day of s4 , 2021 to which the Agreement is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein consisting of: Round Rock Kinningham House, 1000 Southcreek Drive, Round Rock,TX (Name of the Project) NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITIONS OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall faithfully perform said Agreement and shall, in all respects, duly and faithfully observe and perform all and singular the covenants, conditions and agreements in and by said Agreement, agreed and covenanted by the Principal to be observed and performed, including but not limited to, the repair of any and all defects in said work occasioned by and resulting from defects in materials furnished by or workmanship of, the Principal in performing the Work covered by said Agreement and occurring within a period of twelve (12) months from the date of Final Completion and all other covenants and conditions, according to the true intent and meaning of said Agreement and the Plans and Specifications hereto annexed, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect; PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Chapter. 2253, Texas Government code, as amended, and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in. accordance with the provisions of said Chapter 2253 to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. Page 1 00610 7-2009 Performance Bond 00090656 PERFORMANCE BOND (continued) Surety, for value received, stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the term of the Agreement, or to the Work performed thereunder, or the Plans, Specifications, or drawings accompanying the same, shall in anywise affect its obligation on this bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Agreement, or to the work to be performed thereunder. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal and Surety have signed and sealed this instrument this 23rd day of August , 20 21 John King Construction, Ltd. Merchants Bonding Company(Mutual) Principal Surety p-f Ai At Ai 6 Scott D. Chapman Printed Name Printed Name By: 0/"7 Title: Peer:. Title: Attorney-in-Fact Address: 559 S IH 35, Suite 210 Address: 9500 Arboretum Blvd., Ste. 100 Round Rock,TX 78664 Austin,TX 78759 Resident Agent of Surety: Signature Scott D. Chapman % USI Insurance Services, LLC Printed Name 25025 N145 Frwy., Ste. 525 Street Address The Woodlands,TX 77380 City, State& Zip Code Page 2 006 10 7-2009 Performance Bond 00090656 Bond No. TXC614631 PAYMENT BOND THE STATE OF TEXAS KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: COUNTY OF WILLIAMSON § That John King Construction, Ltd. of the City of Round Rock , County of Williamson , and State of _ Texas as Principal, and Merchants Bonding Company(Mutual) authorized under the laws of the State of Texas to act as Surety on Bonds for Principals, are held and firmly bound unto THE CITY OF ROUND ROCK, (OWNER), and all subcontractors, workers, laborers, mechanics and suppliers as their interest may appear, all of whom shall have the right to sue upon this bond, in the penal sum of Two Million Three Hundred Six Thousand One Hundred Sixteen and No/100 Dollars ($ 2,306,116.00---- ) for the payment whereof, well and truly be made the said Principal and Surety bind themselves and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors, and assigns,jointly and severally,by these presents: WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written Agreement with the Owner, dated the '' th- day of , 20 21 , to which Agreement is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein consisting of: Round Rock Kinningham House, 1000 Southcreek Drive, Round Rock,TX (Name of the Project) NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall well and truly pay all subcontractors, workers, laborers, mechanics, and suppliers, all monies to them owing by said Principals for subcontracts, work, labor, equipment, supplies and materials done and furnished for the construction of the improvements of said Agreement, then this obligation shall be and become null and void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Chapter 2253, Texas Government code, as amended, and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Chapter 2253 to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. Page 1 00620 7-2009 Payment Bond 00090656 PAYMENT BOND (continued) Surety, for value received, stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Agreement, or to the Work performed thereunder, or the plans, specifications or drawings accompanying the same shall in anywise affect it's obligation on this bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract, or to the work to be performed thereunder. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal and Surety have signed and sealed this Instrument this 23rd day of August , 20 21 John King Construction, Ltd. Merchants Bonding Company(Mutual) Principal Surety ice A- 4, Scott D. Chapman Printed Name Printed Name By: /7 B Title: Pe er. Title: Attorney-in-Fact Address: 559 S IH 35, Suite 210 Address: 9500 Arboretum Blvd., Ste. 100 Round Rock,TX 78664 Austin,TX 78759 esident Agent of Surety: Signature Scott Scott D. Chapman % USI Insurance Services, LLC Printed Name 25025 N 145 Frwy. Ste. 525 Street Address The Woodlands,TX 77380 Page 2 00620 7-2009 Payment Bond 00090656 0 MERCHANTEN BONDING COMPANYTM POWER OF ATTORNEY Know All Persons By These Presents,that MERCHANTS BONDING COMPANY(MUTUAL)and MERCHANTS NATIONAL BONDING, INC., both being corporations of the State of Iowa(herein collectively called the"Companies")do hereby make,constitute and appoint,individually, Bryan Lewis;Cheryl R Colson;Cynthia Haslam;Elaine Lewis;Jeanne M Buchan;Kevin McQuain;Malia E Mann;Misty Witt;Rosalyn D Hassell; Scott D Chapman;Timothy J Maley their true and lawful Attorneys)-in-Fact, to sign its name as surety(ies) and to execute, seal and acknowledge any and all bonds, undertakings, contracts and other written instruments in the nature thereof, on behalf of the Companies in their business of guaranteeing the fidelity of persons, guaranteeing the performance of contracts and executing or guaranteeing bonds and undertakings required or permitted in any actions or proceedings allowed by law. This Power-of-Attorney is granted and is signed and sealed by facsimile under and by authority of the following By-Laws adopted by the Board of Directors of Merchants Bonding Company(Mutual)on April 23, 2011 and amended August 14, 2015 and adopted by the Board of Directors of Merchants National Bonding,Inc.,on October 16,2015. "The President, Secretary, Treasurer, or any Assistant Treasurer or any Assistant Secretary or any Vice President shall have power and authority to appoint Attorneys-in-Fact, and to authorize them to execute on behalf of the Company, and attach the seal of the Company thereto, bonds and undertakings,recognizances,contracts of indemnity and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof." "The signature of any authorized officer and the seal of the Company may be affixed by facsimile or electronic transmission to any Power of Attorney or Certification thereof authorizing the execution and delivery of any bond, undertaking, recognizance, or other suretyship o bligations of the Company,and such signature and seal when so used shall have the same force and effect as though manually fixed." In connection with obligations in favor of the Florida Department of Transportation only,it is agreed that the power and aut hority hereby given to the Attorney-in-Fact includes any and all consents for the release of retained percentages and/or final estimates on engineering and construction contracts required by the State of Florida Department of Transportation. It is fully understood that consenti ng to the State of Florida Department of Transportation making payment of the final estimate to the Contractor and/or its assignee, shall not relieve this surety company of any of its obligations under its bond. In connection with obligations in favor of the Kentucky Department of Highways only,it is agreed that the power and authority hereby given to the Attorney-in-Fact cannot be modified or revoked unless prior written personal notice of such intent has been given to the Commissioner- Department of Highways of the Commonwealth of Kentucky at least thirty(30)days prior to the modification or revocation. In Witness Whereof,the Companies have caused this instrument to be signed and sealed this 31st day of August , 2018 .0.......... ......... .**„'1%0 Nil i.... •c4G COA:. %+. POft ..%\ �•` �' •'� 4MERCHANTS BONDING COMPANY(MUTUAL) i...IC)� ��'';'y� • �:•VO 9"�,�.�,�; MERCHANTSNATIONALBONDING,INC. • �•0 • ��ij. to. ":4 i ,,- ,-•:...,: •.....:_... -o- :z: •='. .....:...,• *"*".a a• :%*** 2003 '0: •til,„e:. 1933 i :1 By e , , 7 .....0: ...„. . .....__• • ***1• .* : •0`. • • , ....S.'s% ..„,i, .- • 4,4i... •j..,�••••.��••:0',�� a i•� '•!•' l�+« President * . STATE OF IOWA •�'''•'■•'''�� •'•'`' • COUNTY OF DALLAS ss. On this this 31st day of August 2018 , before me appeared Larry Taylor, to me personally known, who being by me duly sworn did say that he is President of MERCHANTS BONDING COMPANY (MUTUAL)and MERCHANTS NATIONAL BONDING, INC.; and that the seals affixed to the foregoing instrument are the Corporate Seals of the Companies;and that the said instrument was signed and sealed in behalf of the Companies by authority of their respective Boards of Directors. ,��1�z� AUCIA K.GRAB � ��' � Commission Number 767430 '� ,„-: � My Commission Expires__ . ki.NP- April 1,2020 ...... V..... C‘ip—ck,..----- Notary Public (Expiration of notary's commission does not invalidate this instrument) I,William Warner,Jr.,Secretary of MERCHANTS BONDING COMPANY(MUTUAL)and MERCHANTS NATIONAL BONDING,INC.,do hereby certify that the above and foregoing is a true and correct copy of the POWER-OF-ATTORNEY executed by said Companies,which is still in full force and effect and has not been amended or revoked. In Witness Whereof,I have hereunto set my hand and affixed the seal of the Companies on this 23rd day of August ,2021 %•*11%0 N 4,••• ••.00. C 0 4,;,•• "\av, ..... ,,.. • 4..•• •••. A* --`ei.POlio..•Q. .I. •Co.* 004%...9• 114%)..° 46:1G: :44:C.,.CI' 4 **,, -..14 s..A.0 dt0/0e:dive<te:#64...,, 0/0:e.. ...00oat ::Zil "PO''' Ig\trit :11(211 -°- Vp.:....: a:4E E •1""" •=4: a• :_: :z: ;Ate 1933 �c• Secretary • 2003 • • � •. •0• .* y %d.j.%. • POA 0018 (3/17) .' `�`` '� ,'`-'`�''~'-'». m `, - .. -.--.... '._—'`'__` ..ON-`I `.._ COMPANYMPU MERCHANTS BONDING COMPANY(MUTUAL)a MERCHANTS NATIONAL BONDING INC.-FAX 0 le e se.r., all ces P o�`.A,�., ,,, th*' bo d to, Me''^..�` (Mutual)/Mei-lchants National Bonding, Inc. P-.0, Box 1 98 Des`i^.=u. ...a,.3..-_'., (515) 243-w8171 (800) 6784w8171 Physic al Address,* 6700 Westown Parkway, West Des Moines, Iowa 50266 AC�• DATE(MAAIDD/VYYY) CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE 8/20/2021 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S), AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER,AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. IMPORTANT: If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED,the policy(ies)must have ADDITIONAL INSURED provisions or be endorsed. If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED,subject to the terms and conditions of the policy,certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). PRODUCER CONTANAME:CT Katherine George Brown&Brown of Austin PHONE Fax 8000 Centre Park Dr.,Suite 370 (A/C,No,Ext):5126175832 (NC,No):5123461736 Austin TX 75754 n�oRess: kgeorge@bbtexas.com INSURER(S)AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC# INSURER A:Valley Forge Insurance Co 20508 INSURED JOHNK-2 INSURER B:Continental Casualty Company 20443 John King Construction Ltd 559 S IH 35,Ste.210 INSURER C Round Rock TX 78664 INSURER D INSURER E INSURER F COVERAGES CERTIFICATE NUMBER:55039800 REVISION NUMBER: THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES.LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. INSR TYPE OF INSURANCE ADDL SUER POLICY EFF POLICY EXP LIMITS LTRINSD WVD POLICY NUMBER .(MM/DDIYYYY) (MM/DD/YYYY) A X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY 6043086911 10/22/2020 10/22/2021 EACH OCCURRENCE $1,000,000 DAMAGE TO CLAIMS-MADE X OCCUR PREMISES(EaNTED occurrence) $100,000 MED EXP(Any one person) $15,000 PERSONAL&ADV INJURY $1,000,000 GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: GENERAL AGGREGATE $2,000,000 X POLICY X jE a LOC PRODUCTS-COMP/OP AGG $2,000,000 OTHER: $ A AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY 6043086925 10/22/2020 10/22/2021 COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT $1,000,000 (Ea accident) X ANY AUTO BODILY INJURY(Per person) $ OWNED SCHEDULED BODILY INJURY(Per accident) $ AUTOS ONLY AUTOS HIRED NON-OWNED PROPERTY DAMAGE $ AUTOS ONLY AUTOS ONLY (Per accident) B X UMBRELLA LIAB X OCCUR 6043086939 10/22/2020 10/22/2021 EACH OCCURRENCE $5,000,000 EXCESS LIAB CLAIMS-MADE AGGREGATE $5,000,000 DED X RETENTION$ nPpO $ A WORKERS COMPENSATION 6043367557 10/22/2020 10/22/2021 X AND EMPLOYERS'LIABILITY STATUTE OTH- ER Y/N ANYPROPRIETORARTNER/EXECUTIVE/P E.L.EACH ACCIDENT $1,000,000 OFFICER/MEMBER EXCLUDED? N I A (Mandatory In NH) E.L.DISEASE-EA EMPLOYEE $1,000,000 If yes,describe under DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS below E.L.DISEASE-POLICY LIMIT $1,000,000 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS/LOCATIONS/VEHICLES(ACORD 101,Additional Remarks Schedule,may be attached H more space Is required) Some policies include blanket endorsements that provide status to the certificate holder ONLY when there is a written contract between the named insured and the certificate holder requiring the status. GENERAL LIABILITY CNA75079XX 0115 Blanket Additional Insured-Owners,Lessees or Contractors with Products-Completed Operations CNA74705XX 0115 Contractors General Liability Extension Form: Blanket Adidtional Insured as Required by Written Contract Lessor of Equipment See Attached... CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN City of Round Rock ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. City Manager 221 E.Main St. AUTHOR D REPRESENTATIVE Round Rock TX 78664 � ©1988-2015 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. ACORD 25(2016/03) The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD AGENCY CUSTOMER ID: JOHNK-2 LOC#: ARD ADDITIONAL REMARKS SCHEDULE Page 1 of 1 AGENCY NAMED INSURED Brown&Brown of Austin John King Construction Ltd 559 S IH 35,Ste.210 POLICY NUMBER Round Rock TX 78664 CARRIER NAIC CODE EFFECTIVE DATE: ADDITIONAL REMARKS THIS ADDITIONAL REMARKS FORM IS A SCHEDULE TO ACORD FORM, FORM NUMBER: 25 FORM TITLE: CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE State or Governmental Agency,Subdivision or Political Subdivisions-Permits Primary Non-Contributory for Additional Insured as Required by Written Contract General Aggregate Per Project Blanket Waiver of Subrogation as Required by Written Contract CNA74702XX 0115 30 day Notice of Cancellation per Schedule on File BUSINESS AUTO CNA63359XX 0412 Contractors Extended Coverage Endorsement-Business Auto Plus Blanket Additional Insured as Required by Written Contract Blanket Waiver of Subrogation as Required by Written Contract Primary Non-contributory for addidtional insured CNA72315XX 0213 Notice of Cancellation or Material Change-Designated Person or Organization per Schedule on File with Company WORKERS COMPENSATION WC423046 0614 Blanket Waiver of Subrogation as Required by Written Contract CC68021A 0213 day Notice of Cancellation; 10 day for non-payment UMBRELLA CNA75504XX 0315-Policy Form Includes Per Project Aggregate Includes Primary Non-Contributory RE:Kinningham House, 1000 Southcreek Dr.,Round Rock,TX 78664 ACORD 101(2008/01) ©2008 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD ARD DATEDD ) EVIDENCE OF COMMERCIAL PROPERTY INSURANCE 9/23/2021 THIS EVIDENCE OF COMMERCIAL PROPERTY INSURANCE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE ADDITIONAL INTEREST NAMED BELOW.THIS EVIDENCE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND,EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. THIS EVIDENCE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S),AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER,AND THE ADDITIONAL INTEREST. PRODUCER NAME, PHONE CONTACT PERSON AND ADDRESS (NC.No,Ext):512-343-0000 COMPANY NAME AND ADDRESS NAIL NO:20443 Brown&Brown of Austin Continental Casualty Company 8000 Centre Park Dr.,Suite 370 Austin,TX 78754 FAX E-MAIL IF MULTIPLE COMPANIES,COMPLETE SEPARATE FORM FOR EACH (NC.Na►:512-346-1736 ADDRESS: CODE: SUB CODE: POLICY TYPE AGENCY OPEN REPORING FORM BUILDERS RISK CUSTOMER ID#: NAMED INSURED AND ADDRESS LOAN NUMBER POLICY NUMBER John King Construction Ltd 559 S IH 35,Ste.210 C6043333442 Round Rock TX 78664 EFFECTIVE DATE EXPIRATION DATE CONTINUED UNTIL 10/22/2020 10/22/2021 TERMINATED IF CHECKED ADDITIONAL NAMED INSURED(S) THIS REPLACES PRIOR EVIDENCE DATED: PROPERTY INFORMATION (ACORD 101 may be attached if more space is required) U BUILDING OR BUSINESS PERSONAL PROPERTY LOCATION/DESCRIPTION Construction projects where insured serves as general contractor or construction manager at risk. THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT,TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS EVIDENCE OF PROPERTY INSURANCE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN,THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS,EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. COVERAGE INFORMATION PERILS INSURED BASIC BROAD X SPECIAL COMMERCIAL PROPERTY COVERAGE AMOUNT OF INSURANCE: $ DED:2,500 YES NO N/A ED BUSINESS INCOME RENTAL VALUE X If YES,LIMIT: Actual Loss Sustained;#of months: BLANKET COVERAGE X If YES,indicate value(s)reported on property identified above:$ TERRORISM COVERAGE X Attach Disclosure Notice/DEC IS THERE A TERRORISM-SPECIFIC EXCLUSION? X IS DOMESTIC TERRORISM EXCLUDED? X LIMITED FUNGUS COVERAGE X If YES,LIMIT: DED: FUNGUS EXCLUSION(If"YES",specify organization's form used) X REPLACEMENT COST X AGREED VALUE X COINSURANCE X If YES, EQUIPMENT BREAKDOWN(If Applicable) X If YES,LIMIT: DED: ORDINANCE OR LAW -Coverage for loss to undamaged portion of bldg X If YES,LIMIT:7,000,000 DED:2,500 -Demolition Costs X If YES,LIMIT:250,000 DED:2,500 -Incr.Cost of Construction X If YES,LIMIT:250 000 DED:2,500 EARTH MOVEMENT(If Applicable) X If YES,LIMIT:1,000,000 DED:25,000 FLOOD(If Applicable) X If YES,LIMIT:1,000,000 DED:25,000 WIND/HAIL INCL E]YES ❑NO Subject to Different Provisions: X If YES,LIMIT: DED: NAMED STORM INCL IX]YES EJ NO Subject to Different Provisions: X If YES,LIMIT: DED: PERMISSION TO WAIVE SUBROGATION IN FAVOR OF MORTGAGE X HOLDER PRIOR TO LOSS CANCELLATION SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. ADDITIONAL INTEREST CONTRACT OF SALE LENDER'S LOSS PAYABLE LOSS PAYEE LENDER SERVICING AGENT NAME AND ADDRESS MORTGAGEE NAME AND ADDRESS City of Round Rock City Manager AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE 221 E.Main St. Round Rock,TX 78664 ©2003-2015 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. ACORD 28(2016/03) The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD AGENCY CUSTOMER ID: LOC#: ,i '''''."" ARD 0 ADDITIONAL REMARKS SCHEDULE Page 1 of 1 AGENCY NAMED INSURED Brown&Brown of Austin John King Construction Ltd 559 S IH 35,Ste.210 POLICY NUMBER Round Rock TX 78664 C6043333442 CARRIER NAIC CODE Continental Casualty Company 20443 EFFECTIVE DATE:10/22/2020 ADDITIONAL REMARKS THIS ADDITIONAL REMARKS FORM IS A SCHEDULE TO ACORD FORM, FORM NUMBER: 28 FORM TITLE: EVIDENCE OF COMMERCIAL PROPERTY INSURANCE REMARKS: Limits: $7,000,000(ISO Construction Class 3-6);$2,5000,000(foisted Masonry ISO 02);$1,000,000(Frame,ISO 01,Protection Class 1-7);$500,000(Frame,ISO 01,PC 8-10) Debris Removal$250,000;Josite Trailers$50,000;Tempoarary Structures$250,000(ACV) Exclusions: Wind/Hail for projects located in Tier One counties,on barrier islands,or within 1,000 feet of bay,ocean,gulf or seacoast. Moderate to high risk flood or earthquake hazard areas-applies to flood and earthquake coverage only RE:Kinningham House,1000 Southcreek Dr.,Round Rock,TX 78664 ACORD 101 (2008/01) 0 2008 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD 00700 GENERAL CONDITIONS City of Round Rock Contract Forms General Conditions Section 00700 TABLE OF CONTENTS OF GENERAL CONDITIONS Article Page Number& Title Number 1. DEFINITIONS.................................................................................................................................................2 2. PRELIMINARY MATTERS.............................................................................................................................5 3. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT,AMENDING, REUSE........................................................................7 4. AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS..........................................................................................................8 5. BONDS AND INSURANCE............................................................................................................................10 6. CONTRACTO .......................................................................16 7. OTHERWORK...........................................................................................................................24... .....................................................................24 8. OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITIES.......................................................................................................................25.................................................... ............25 9. ENGINEER/ARCHITECT' CONSTRUCTION................................................................26...............................26 10. CHANGES IN THE WORK........................................................................................27...................................................................27 11. CHANGEOFCONTRACTAMOUNT.............................................................................................................28............................................................................................................28 12. CHANGE OF CONTRACT TIMES.................................................................................................................31 13. TESTS AND INSPECTIONS;AND CORRECTION OR REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE WORK...................... ............................32 14. PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION....................................................................................35.................................................................................35 15. SUSPENSION OF WOR ......................................................39 16. DISPUTE RESOLUTION...........................................................................................................41..........................................................................41 17 RIGHT TO AUDIT....................................................................................................................................42......... ...............................................................................................................................42 18. MISCELLANEOUS.........................................................................................................................................43 00700 04-2020 Page 1 General Conditions 00443641 GENERAL CONDITIONS ARTICLE 1 -DEFINITIONS Whenever used in these General Conditions or in the other Contract Documents,the term printed with initial capital letters or all capital letters, including the term's singular and plural forms, will have the meaning indicated in the definitions below or as defined in these General Conditions or other Contract Documents: 1.1 Addenda - Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the receipt of Proposals or the opening of Bids that clarify, correct or change the proposal or bidding requirements or the Contract Documents. 1.2 Agreement-Prescribed form, referenced as Section 00500. 1.3 Alternative Dispute Resolution-The process by which a disputed Claim may be settled if the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR cannot reach an agreement between themselves, as an alternative to litigation. 1.4 Bid - Proposal of bidder on prescribed forms setting forth prices for performing the Work described in the Contract Documents. 1.5 Bid Documents-The advertisement or invitation for bids, instructions to bidders,the bid form,the Contract Documents and Addenda. 1.6 Calendar Day-Any day of the week; no days being excepted. Work on Saturdays, Sundays, and/or Legal Holidays shall only be conducted with prior express written consent of the OWNER. 1.7 Chanqe Directive-A written directive to the CONTRACTOR, signed by the OWNER, ordering a change in the Work and stating a proposed basis for adjustment, if any, in the Contract Amount or Contract Time, or both. A Change Directive may be used in the absence of total agreement on the terms of a Change Order. A Change Directive does not change the Contract Amount or Contract Time, but is evidence that the parties expect that the change directed or documented by a Change Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued Change Order. 1.8 Change Orders - Written agreements entered into between the CONTRACTOR and the OWNER authorizing an addition,deletion,or revision to the Contract, issued on or after the Execution Date of the Agreement and within the Contract term. 1.9 Claim - A written demand seeking, as a matter of right, adjustment or interpretation of Contract terms, payment of money, extension of time or other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. 1.10 Contract - The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR for performance of the Work, as evidenced by the Contract Documents. 1.11 Contract Amount-The amount payable by the OWNER to the CONTRACTOR for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.12 Contract Documents - Includes the Invitation to Bid, Instructions to Bidders, Agreement, General Conditions, Supplemental General Conditions, Special Conditions, Specifications, Project Manual, Drawings, Addenda and Change Orders. 1.13 Contract Time-The number of days allowed for completion of the Work as defined by the Contract.When any period is referred to in days, it will be computed to exclude the first and include the last day of such period. A day of twenty-four(24)hours measured from midnight to the next midnight will constitute a day. 1.14 CONTRACTOR - The individual, firm, corporation, or other business entity with whom the OWNER has entered into the Contract. 00700 04-2020 Page 2 General Conditions 1.15 Drawings - Those portions of the Contract Documents which are graphic representations of the scope, extent and character of the Work to be furnished and performed by the CONTRACTOR and which have been approved by the OWNER. Drawings may include plans, elevations, sections, details, schedules and diagrams. Shop Drawings are not Drawings as so defined. 1.16 Engineer/Architect (E/A) - The OWNER's design professional identified as such in the Agreement. The titles of"Architect/Engineer,""Architect"and "Engineer" used in the Contract Documents shall be read the same as Engineer/Architect (E/A). Nothing contained in the Contract Documents shall create any contractual or agency relationship between E/A and the CONTRACTOR. 1.17 Equal-The terms"equal"or"approved equal"shall have the same meaning. 1.18 Execution Date- Date of last signature of the parties to the Agreement. 1.19 Field Order- A written order issued by Owner's Representative which orders minor changes in the Work and which does not involve a change in the Contract Amount or the Contract Time. 1.20 Final Acceptance-The stage in the Contract process when, in the OWNER's opinion, Final Completion of the Work has been attained and a Certificate of Acceptance approved by the OWNER is issued. 1.21 Final Completion -The stage in the progress of the Work when, in the OWNER's opinion, the entire Work has been completed, the CONTRACTOR's obligations under the Contract Documents have been fulfilled, and the OWNER is processing or has made final payment to the CONTRACTOR, as evidenced by a Certificate of Acceptance approved by the OWNER. 1.22 Inspector-The authorized representative of any regulatory agency that has jurisdiction over any portion of the Work. 1.23 Legal Holidays 1.23.1 The following are recognized by the OWNER: Holiday Date Observed New Year's Day January 1 Martin Luther King, Jr.'s Birthday Third Monday in January President's Day Third Monday in February Memorial Day Last Monday in May Independence Day July 4 Labor Day First Monday in September Veteran's Day November 11 Thanksgiving Day Fourth Thursday in November Friday after Thanksgiving Friday after Thanksgiving Christmas Eve December 24 Christmas Day December 25 00700 04-2020 Page 3 General Conditions 1.23.2 If a Legal Holiday falls on Saturday, it will be observed on the preceding Friday. If a Legal Holiday falls on Sunday, it will be observed on the following Monday. 1.23.3 If Christmas Eve falls on a Saturday or a Sunday, the preceding Friday is observed as the Christmas Eve holiday. 1.23.4 If Christmas Day falls on a Saturday or a Sunday, the following Monday is observed as the Christmas Day holiday. 1.24 Milestones-A significant event specified in the Contract Documents relating to an intermediate completion date or time prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work. 1.25 Notice to Proceed - A Written Notice given by the OWNER to the CONTRACTOR notifying the CONTRACTOR to commence the Work and which may also fix the date on which the Contract Times will commence to run and on which the CONTRACTOR shall start to perform the CONTRACTOR's obligations under the Contract Documents. 1.26 OWNER-The City of Round Rock,Texas, a municipal corporation, home-rule city and political subdivision organized and existing under the laws of the State of Texas, acting through the City Manager or his/her designee, officers, agents or employees to administer design and construction of the Project. 1.27 Owner's Representative-The designated representative of the OWNER. 1.28 Partial Occupancy or Use - Use by the OWNER of a partially completed part of the Work for the purpose for which it is intended (or a related purpose)prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work. 1.29 Project- The total construction of which the Work to be provided under the Contract Documents may be the whole, or a part, as indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 1.30 Project Manual - That portion of the Contract Documents which may include the following: introductory information; bidding requirements, Contract forms and General and Supplemental General Conditions; General Requirements; Specifications; Drawings; Project Safety Manual; and Addenda. 1.31 Proposal-Proposal of Offeror, on prescribed forms setting forth prices for performing the Work described in the Contract Documents. 1.32 Proposal Documents-The advertisement or invitation for Proposals, Instruction to Offerors, the Proposal form, the Contract Documents and Addenda. 1.33 Resident Project Representative -The authorized representative of EtA who may be assigned to the site or any part thereof. 1.34 Shop Drawings -All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules and other data or information which are specifically prepared or assembled by or for the CONTRACTOR and submitted by the CONTRACTOR as required by the Contract Documents. 1.35 Specifications - Those portions of the Contract Documents consisting of written technical descriptions as applied to the Work, which set forth to the CONTRACTOR, in detail, the requirements which must be met by all materials, equipment, construction systems, standards,workmanship, equipment and services in order to render a completed and useful project. 1.36 Substantial Completion - The stage in the progress of the Work when the Work, or designated portions thereof,may still require minor modifications or adjustments but, in the OWNER's opinion,the Work has progressed to the point such that all parts of the Work under consideration are fully operational and the beneficial use and occupancy of which can be assumed by the Owner, as evidenced by a Certificate of Substantial Completion approved by the OWNER. 00700 04-2020 Page 4 General Conditions 1.37 Subcontractor-An individual, firm, or corporation having a direct contract with the CONTRACTOR for the performance of a part of the Work. 1.38 Sub-subcontractor-A person or entity who has a direct or indirect contract with a Subcontractor or a Sub- subcontractor of any tier to perform a portion of the Work. 1.39 Superintendent - The representative of the CONTRACTOR authorized in writing to receive and fulfill instructions from Owner's Representative, and who shall supervise and direct construction of the Work. 1.40 Supplemental General Conditions-The part of the Contract Documents which either amends or supplements the General Conditions. All General Conditions which are not so amended or so supplemented shall be considered as remaining in full force and effect. 1.41 Supplier-An individual or entity having a direct contract with the CONTRACTOR or with any Subcontractor or Sub-subcontractor to furnish materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work by the CONTRACTOR or any Subcontractor. 1.42 Time Extension Request-An approved request for time extension on a form acceptable to the OWNER. 1.43 Work -The entire completed construction, or the various separately identifiable parts thereof, required to be furnished under the Contract Documents. 1.44 Working Day - Any day of the week, not including Saturdays, Sundays, or Legal Holidays, in which conditions not under the CONTRACTOR's control will permit work for at least seven(7)hours of the Working Times. Upon authorization by the Owner's Representative, work on Saturdays, Sundays and/or Legal Holidays may be allowed and, in that event, a Working Day will be counted for each such day. 1.45 Working Times -Times of day(s) during which work may be performed. Unless authorized by Owner's Representative, all Work shall be performed between 7:00 a.m. and 6:00 p.m. on weekdays and, if previously authorized as provided for in paragraph 1.44 or paragraph 1.6 herein, as applicable, between 9:00 a.m. and 6:00 p.m. on Saturdays, Sundays or Legal Holidays. When the CONTRACTOR has been authorized to perform Work during hours outside Working Times, such hours shall be considered time worked on Working Day contracts. Notwithstanding the preceding, emergency work may be done without prior permission only as provided in paragraph 6.11.5 herein. 1.46 Written Notice-Written communication between the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR. Written Notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to Owner's Representative or to the CONTRACTOR's duly authorized representative, or if such Written Notice is delivered to or sent by registered or certified mail to the attention of Owner's Representative or to the CONTRACTOR's duly authorized representative at the last business address known to the party giving notice. ARTICLE 2 -PRELIMINARY MATTERS 2.1 Delivery of Agreement, Bonds, Insurance, and Other Documentation: Within ten(10)Calendar Days after written notification of award of Contract,the CONTRACTOR shall deliver to the OWNER signed Agreement, Bond(s), Insurance Certificates) and other documentation required for execution of the Contract. 2.2 Copies of Documents: The OWNER shall furnish to the CONTRACTOR two (2) copies of the Contract Documents unless otherwise specified. 00700 04-2020 Page 5 General Conditions 2.3 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed: The Contract Time(s) commence on the date indicated in the Agreement or in the Notice to Proceed. Notice to Proceed will be given at any time within sixty(60)Calendar Days after the Execution Date of the Agreement, unless extended by written agreement of the parties. 2.4 Before Starting Construction: 2.4.1 No Work shall be done at the site prior to the preconstruction conference without the OWNER's approval. Before undertaking each part of the Work, the CONTRACTOR shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents and check and verify pertinent figures shown thereon and all applicable field measurements. The CONTRACTOR shall promptly report in writing to Owner's Representative any conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy which the CONTRACTOR may discover and shall obtain a written interpretation or clarification from Owner's Representative before proceeding with any Work affected thereby. The CONTRACTOR shall be liable to the OWNER for failure to report any conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy in the Contract Documents of which the CONTRACTOR knew or reasonably should have known. 2.4.2 The CONTRACTOR shall submit the following to Owner's Representative for review and approval no later than the preconstruction conference: .1 a preliminary progress schedule indicating the times (number of days or dates) for starting and completing the various stages of the Work, including any Milestones specified in the Contract Documents, identifying when all Subcontractors will be utilized, and taking into consideration any limitations on Working Hours; .2 a preliminary schedule of Shop Drawing and sample submittals; .3 a preliminary schedule of values for all of the Work, subdivided into component parts in sufficient detail to serve as the basis for progress payments during construction.Such prices will include an appropriate amount of overhead and profit applicable to each item of Work. The preliminary schedule of values submitted by the CONTRACTOR should include a reasonable estimation of value of each item included and shall not contain disproportionate values assigned to any item or items; .4 a letter designating CONTRACTOR's Superintendent; .5 a letter from the CONTRACTOR and Subcontractor(s) listing any salaried specialists; .6 if applicable, a letter designating the "Competent Person(s)" on general safety and trench safety measures; .7 if applicable, a trench safety system plan; .8 if applicable, a plan illustrating proposed locations of temporary facilities; .9 if applicable, a traffic control plan; .10 a completed Non-Use of Asbestos Affidavit(Prior to Construction); and .11 if applicable, a letter designating the Texas Registered Professional Land Surveyor for layout of the Work. 2.5 Preconstruction Conference: Prior to commencement of Work at the site,a preconstruction conference attended by the CONTRACTOR,Owner's Representative and others will be held. 00700 04-2020 Page 6 General Conditions 2.6 Initially Acceptable Schedules: Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the CONTRACTOR shall obtain approval of Owner's Representative on final versions of the schedules submitted in accordance with paragraph 2.4.2 before the first progress payment will be made to the CONTRACTOR. The progress schedule must provide for an orderly progression of the Work to completion within any specified Milestones and Contract Times. Acceptance of the schedule by Owner's Representative will neither impose on Owner's Representative responsibility for the sequencing, scheduling or progress of the Work nor interfere with or relieve the CONTRACTOR from the CONTRACTOR's full responsibility therefor. The CONTRACTOR's schedule of Shop Drawings and sample submissions must provide an arrangement agreeable to the parties for reviewing and processing the required submittals. 2.7 Electronic Transmittals: 2.7.1 Except as otherwise stated elsewhere in the Contract Documents, the OWNER, E/A, and CONTRACTOR may transmit,and shall except, Project-related correspondence,texts,data,documents,drawings, information,and graphics, including but not limited to Shop Drawings and other submittals,in electronic media or digital format,either directly, or through access to a secure Project website. 2.7.2 When transmitting items in electronic media or digital format, the transmitting party makes no representations as to long term compatibility, usability, or readability of the items resulting from the recipient's use of software application packages,operating systems,or computer hardware differing from those used in the drafting or transmittal of the items. ARTICLE 3 -CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT,AMENDING, REUSE 3.1 Intent: 3.1.1 The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all information necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work by the CONTRACTOR.The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all. In cases of disagreement, the following order of precedence shall govern (top item receiving priority of interpretation): Change Orders Modifications to the Contract Documents made after the Execution Date Signed Agreement Addenda to the Contract Documents Special Conditions Supplemental General Conditions General Conditions Other Bidding Requirements and Contract Forms Special Provisions to the Standard Technical Specifications Special Specifications Standard Technical Specifications Drawings (figured dimensions shall govern over scaled dimensions) Project Safety manual, if applicable 3.1.2 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents,words which have well-known technical or construction industry meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meanings. 3.2 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies: Prior to commencing the Work, the CONTRACTOR shall review the Contract Documents for the purpose of discovering any conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy in the Contract Documents. If, at any time, the CONTRACTOR discovers any conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy within the Contract Documents or between the Contract Documents and any provisions of any such law or regulation applicable to the performance of the Work 00700 04-2020 Page 7 General Conditions or of any such standard, specification, manual or code or instructions of any Supplier, the CONTRACTOR shall immediately report it to Owner's Representative in writing,and the CONTRACTOR shall not proceed with the Work affected thereby until an amendment or supplement to the Contract Documents has been issued by one of the methods indicated in paragraph 3.3.1 or paragraph 3.3.2. The CONTRACTOR shall be liable to the OWNER for failure to report any such conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy of which the CONTRACTOR knew or reasonably should have known. 3.3 Amending and Supplementing Contract Documents: 3.3.1 The Contract Documents may be amended to provide for additions, deletions and revisions in the Work or to modify the terms and conditions thereof in one or more of the following ways: .1 Change Order. .2 Change Directive. 3.3.2 In addition, the requirements of the Contract Documents may be supplemented, and minor variations and deviations in the Work may be authorized, in one or more of the following ways: .1 Field Order. .2 Review of a Shop Drawing or sample. .3 Written interpretation or clarification. 3.4 Reuse of Documents Prohibited: The CONTRACTOR and any Subcontractor or Supplier or other person or organization performing or furnishing any of the Work under a direct or indirect contract with the OWNER: (I) shall not have or acquire any title to or ownership rights in any of the Drawings, Specifications or other documents (or copies of any thereof)prepared by or bearing the seal of E/A or E/A's consultants, and (ii)shall not reuse any of such Drawings, Specifications, other documents or copies on extensions of the Project or any other project without written consent of the OWNER and E/A. ARTICLE 4-AVAILABILITY OF LANDS;SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS 4.1 Availability of Lands: The OWNER shall furnish, as indicated in the Contract Documents, all required rights to use the lands upon which the Work is to be performed, rights-of-way and easements for access thereto, and such other lands which are designated for the use of the CONTRACTOR. The OWNER shall identify any encumbrances or restrictions not of general application but specifically related to use of lands so furnished with which the CONTRACTOR will have to comply in performing the Work. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing facilities will be obtained and paid for by the OWNER, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. If the OWNER fails to furnish these lands, rights-of-way or easements in a timely manner,the CONTRACTOR may make a Claim for adjustments in the Contract Times.The CONTRACTOR shall provide for all additional lands and access thereto that may be required for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment. 4.2 Subsurface and Physical Conditions: 4.2.1 The CONTRACTOR hereby covenants that it has examined the site of the proposed Work and is familiar with all of the conditions surrounding construction of the Project, having conducted all inquiries, tests and investigations deemed necessary and proper. Unless the CONTRACTOR, prior to the execution of the Agreement, has notified the OWNER in writing of any condition of the site of the proposed Work that would adversely impact 00700 04-2020 Page 8 General Conditions the performance of the Work by the CONTRACTOR, CONTRACTOR covenants that there are no conditions at the site of the proposed work which would adversely impact the performance of Work by the CONTRACTOR. 4.2.2 If conditions are encountered at the site which are (1) subsurface or otherwise concealed physical conditions that differ materially from those indicated in the Contract Documents or(2)unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature, that differ materially from those normally encountered in the type of work being performed under this Contract,then notice by the observing party shall be given to the other party promptly before conditions are disturbed and in no event later than seven (7) calendar days after first observance of the conditions. Owner's Representative will promptly investigate such conditions with E/A and,if they differ materially and cause an increase or decrease in the CONTRACTOR's cost of,or time required for, performance of any part of the Work, OWNER will consider an equitable adjustment in the Contract Amount or Contract Time, or both. If Owner's Representative determines that the conditions at the site are not materially different from those indicated in the Contract Documents and that no change in the terms of the Contract is justified, the CONTRACTOR shall be notified in writing, stating the reasons. Any disputes arising from Owner's Representative's determination shall be resolved in accordance with Article 16. 4.2.3 Notwithstanding any other provision of this Contract,the CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for the location and protection of any and all public lines and utility customer service lines in the Work area. For the purposes of this section, "public lines"means the utility distribution and supply system within public rights-of-way or easements, and "utility customer service lines" (service) means any utility line connecting a utility customer to the utility distribution system. Generally, existing service connections within right-of-way or easements are not shown on the Drawings.The CONTRACTOR shall notify the OWNER and"One Call"and exercise due care to locate and to mark, uncover or otherwise protect all such lines in the construction zone and any of the CONTRACTOR's work or storage areas. The CONTRACTOR's obligation hereunder shall be primary and nondelegable. The CONTRACTOR shall indemnify or reimburse the OWNER for such expenses or costs (including fines that may be levied against the OWNER) that may result from unauthorized or accidental damage to all public lines and utility customer service lines in the Work area.The OWNER reserves the right to repair such damage the CONTRACTOR may cause, at the CONTRACTOR's expense. 4.2.4 The CONTRACTOR shall take reasonable precaution to avoid disturbing primitive records and antiquities of archaeological, paleontological or historical significance. No objects of this nature shall be disturbed without written permission of the OWNER and the Texas Department of Antiquities Protection. When such objects are uncovered unexpectedly, the CONTRACTOR shall stop all Work in close proximity and notify Owner's Representative and the Texas Department of Antiquities Protection of their presence and shall not disturb them until written permission and permit to do so is granted.All primitive rights and antiquities uncovered on the OWNER's property shall remain property of the State of Texas,the Texas Department of Antiquities Protection conforming to the Texas Natural Resources Code. If it is determined by the OWNER, in consultation with the Texas Department of Antiquities Protection,that exploration or excavation of primitive records or antiquities on Project site is necessary to avoid loss, the CONTRACTOR shall cooperate in salvage work attendant to preservation. If the Work stoppage or salvage work causes an increase in the CONTRACTOR's cost of, or time required for, performance of the Work, the Contract Amount and/or Contract Time may be equitably adjusted. 4.3 Reference Points: Unless otherwise specified, the OWNER will furnish all reference points, benchmarks, survey monuments, and control points which,in the OWNER's opinion,are suitable for laying out the Work. Such benchmarks and reference points will be placed at intervals not to exceed 1,500 feet. All reference points, benchmarks, survey monuments and control points shall be carefully preserved by the CONTRACTOR by use of flags, laths or other appropriate measures and, in case of destruction or removal by the CONTRACTOR or its employees, such reference points, benchmarks, survey monuments,and control points shall be replaced by a Registered Professional Land Surveyor at the CONTRACTOR's expense. When reference points, benchmarks, survey monuments, or control points are in conflict with the Work, then reestablishment will be the OWNER's responsibility during or upon completion of the Work. 4.4 Hazardous Materials: 00700 04-2020 Page 9 General Conditions 4.4.1 The OWNER shall be responsible for any hazardous material uncovered or revealed at the site which was not shown, indicated or identified in the Contract Documents to be within the scope of the Work and which may present a substantial danger to persons or property exposed thereto in connection with the Work at the site. The CONTRACTOR shall immediately notify Owner's Representative of any suspected hazardous materials encountered before or during performance of the Work and shall take all necessary precautions to avoid further disturbance of the materials. 4.4.2 The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for any hazardous materials brought to the site by the CONTRACTOR, Subcontractor, Suppliers or anyone else for whom the CONTRACTOR is responsible. 4.4.3 No asbestos-containing materials shall be incorporated into the Work or brought on the Project site without prior approval of the OWNER. 4.4.4 TO THE FULLEST EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAWS AND REGULATIONS, CONTRACTOR SHALL INDEMNIFY AND HOLD HARMLESS OWNER,AND ITS COUNCIL MEMBERS, EMPLOYEES,AGENTS, AND CONSULTANTS FROM AND AGAINST ALL CLAIMS, COSTS, LOSSES, AND DAMAGES (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ALL FEES AND CHARGES OF ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, ATTORNEYS, AND OTHER PROFESSIONALS AND ALL COURT OR ARBITRATION OR OTHER DISPUTE RESOLUTION COSTS)ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO FAILURE TO CONTROL, CONTAIN OR REMOVE A HAZARDOUS MATERIAL BROUGHT TO THE SITE BY CONTRACTOR OR BY ANYONE FOR WHOM CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE, OR TO A HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION CREATED BY CONTRACTOR OR BY ANYONE FOR WHOM CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE. ARTICLE 5-BONDS AND INSURANCE 5.1 Surety and Insurance Companies: All bonds and insurance required by the Contract Documents shall be obtained from solvent surety or insurance companies that are duly licensed by the State of Texas and authorized to issue bonds or insurance policies for the limits and coverages required by the Contract Documents.The bonds shall be in a form acceptable to the OWNER and shall be issued by a surety which complies with the requirements of Chapter 3503, Texas Insurance Code (2005)and which is otherwise acceptable to the OWNER. OWNER may require the surety to obtain reinsurance for any portion of the risk that exceeds 10% of the surety's capital and surplus. For bonds exceeding $100,000, the surety must also hold a certificate of authority from the U.S. Secretary of the Treasury or have obtained reinsurance from a reinsures that is authorized as a reinsures in Texas and holds a certificate of authority from the U.S. Secretary of the Treasury. 5.2 Workers'Compensation Insurance Coverage: 5.2.1 Definitions: .1 Certificate of coverage ("certificate") -A copy of a certificate of insurance, a certificate of authority to self-insure issued by the commission, or a coverage agreement showing statutory workers' compensation insurance coverage for the person's or entity's employees providing services on the Project,for the duration of the Project. .2 Duration of the Project - includes the time from the beginning of the Work on the Project until the CONTRACTOR'S/person's Work on the Project has been completed and accepted by the OWNER. .3 Persons providing services on the Project ("subcontractor" herein) - includes all persons or entities performing all or part of the services the CONTRACTOR has undertaken to perform on the Project, regardless of whether that person contracted directly with the CONTRACTOR and regardless of whether that person has employees. This includes, by way of illustration and not of limitation, 00700 04-2020 Page 10 General Conditions independent contractors, Subcontractors, leasing companies, motor carriers, owner-operators, employees of any such entity, or employees of any entity which furnishes persons to provide services on the Project. "Services" include, without limitation, providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor, transportation, or other service related to a project. "Services"does not include activities unrelated to the Project, such as food/beverage vendors, office supply deliveries, and delivery of portable toilets. 5.2.2 The CONTRACTOR shall provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44)for all employees of the CONTRACTOR providing services on the Project, for the duration of the Project. 5.2.3 The OWNER will not execute the Contract prior to the CONTRACTOR providing all required certificates of coverage. 5.2.4 If the coverage period shown on the CONTRACTOR's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project, the CONTRACTOR must, prior to the end of the coverage period, file a new certificate of coverage with the OWNER showing that coverage has been extended. 5.2.5 The CONTRACTOR shall obtain from each person providing services on the Project, and provide to the OWNER: .1 a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning Work on the Project, so the OWNER will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the Project; and .2 no later than seven(7)days after receipt by the CONTRACTOR,a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project. 5.2.6 The CONTRACTOR shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the Project and for one(1)year thereafter. 5.2.7 The CONTRACTOR shall notify the OWNER in writing by certified mail or personal delivery within ten (10) days after the CONTRACTOR knew or should have known of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the Project. 5.2.8 The CONTRACTOR shall post at its office or on each Project site a notice, in the text, form and manner prescribed by the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission, informing all persons providing services on the Project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify coverage and report lack of coverage. 5.2.9 The CONTRACTOR shall contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a Project to: .1 provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44)for all of its employees providing services on the Project, for the duration of the Project; .2 provide to the CONTRACTOR, prior to that person beginning Work on the Project, a certificate of coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all employees of the person providing services on the Project,for the duration of the Project; .3 provide the CONTRACTOR, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project; 00700 04-2020 Page 11 General Conditions .4 obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the CONTRACTOR: a) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning Work on the Project; and b) a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, prior to the end of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project; .5 retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the Project and for one (1) year thereafter; .6 notify the OWNER in writing by certified mail or personal delivery within ten (10)days after the person knew or should have known of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the Project; and .7 contractually require each person with whom it contracts,to perform as required by paragraphs 5.2.9.1 - 5.2.9.7, with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. 5.2.10 By signing this Contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the CONTRACTOR is representing to the OWNER that all employees of the CONTRACTOR who will provide services on the Project will be covered by workers'compensation coverage for the duration of the Project,that the coverage will be based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts,and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self-insured, with the commission's Division of Self-Insurance Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the CONTRACTOR to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions. 5.2.11 The CONTRACTOR's failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of Contract by the CONTRACTOR which entitles the OWNER to declare the Contract void if the CONTRACTOR does not remedy the breach within ten (10)days after receipt of notice of breach from the OWNER. 5.3 Contractor Insurance Requirements: For specific bond requirements and additional insurance requirements, refer to the Supplemental General Conditions. 5.3.1.1 General Requirements: .1 CONTRACTOR shall carry insurance in the types and amounts indicated below for the duration of the Contract, which shall include items owned by OWNER in the care, custody and control of CONTRACTOR prior to and during construction and warranty period. .2 CONTRACTOR must complete and forward the required Certificates of Insurance to OWNER before the Contract is executed as verification of coverage required below. CONTRACTOR shall not commence Work until the required insurance is obtained and until such insurance has been reviewed by OWNER. Approval of insurance by OWNER shall not relieve or decrease the liability of CONTRACTOR hereunder and shall not be construed to be a limitation of liability on the part of CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR must also complete and forward the required Certificates of Insurance to OWNER whenever a previously identified policy period has expired as verification of continuing coverage. .3 CONTRACTOR's insurance coverage is to be written by companies licensed to do business in the State of Texas at the time the policies are issued and shall be written by companies with A.M. Best ratings of B+Vll or better, except for hazardous material insurance which shall be written by companies with A.M. Best ratings of A-or better. 00700 04-2020 Page 12 General Conditions .4 All endorsements naming the OWNER as additional insured, waivers, and notices of cancellation endorsements as well as the Certificate of Insurance shall indicate: City of Round Rock, 221 E. Main St., Round Rock,Texas 78664. .5 The "other" insurance clause shall not apply to the OWNER where the OWNER is an additional insured shown on any policy. It is intended that policies required in the Contract, covering both OWNER and CONTRACTOR, shall be considered primary coverage as applicable. .6 If insurance policies are not written for amounts specified below, CONTRACTOR shall carry Umbrella or Excess Liability Insurance for any differences in amounts specified. If Excess Liability Insurance is provided, it shall follow the form of the primary coverage. .7 OWNER shall be entitled, upon request and without expense,to receive certified copies of policies and endorsements thereto and may make any reasonable requests for deletion or revision or modification of particular policy terms, conditions, limitations, or exclusions except where policy provisions are established by law or regulations binding upon either of the parties hereto or the underwriter on any such policies. .8 OWNER reserves the right to review the insurance requirements set forth during the effective period of this Contract and to make reasonable adjustments to insurance coverage, limits, and exclusions when deemed necessary and prudent by OWNER based upon changes in statutory law, court decisions, the claims history of the industry or financial condition of the insurance company as well as CONTRACTOR. .9 CONTRACTOR shall not cause any insurance to be canceled nor permit any insurance to lapse during the term of the Contract or as required in the Contract. .10 CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for premiums, deductibles and self-insured retentions, if any, stated in policies. All deductibles or self-insured retentions shall be disclosed on the Certificate of Insurance. .11 CONTRACTOR shall provide OWNER thirty (30) days written notice of erosion of the aggregate limits below occurrence limits for all applicable coverages indicted within the Contract. .12 If OWNER-owned property is being transported or stored off-site by CONTRACTOR, then the appropriate property policy will be endorsed for transit and storage in an amount sufficient to protect OWNER's property. .13 The insurance coverages required under this contract are required minimums and are not intended to limit the responsibility or liability of CONTRACTOR. 5.3.1.2 Business Automobile Liability Insurance. Provide coverage for all owned, non-owned and hired vehicles. The policy shall contain the following endorsements in favor of OWNER: a) Waiver of Subrogation endorsement TE 2046A; b) 30 day Notice of Cancellation endorsement TE 0202A; and c) Additional Insured endorsement TE 9901 B. Provide coverage in the following types and amounts: 00700 04-2020 Page 13 General Conditions .1 A minimum combined single limit of$500,000 per occurrence for bodily injury and property damage. Alternate acceptable limits are $250,000 bodily injury per person, $500,000 bodily injury per occurrence and at least$100,000 property damage liability each accident. 5.3.1.3 Workers'Compensation and Employers' Liability Insurance: Coverage shall be consistent with statutory benefits outlined in the Texas Workers' Compensation Act (Section 401). CONTRACTOR shall assure compliance with this Statute by submitting two(2)copies of a standard certificate of coverage (e.g. ACCORD form) to Owner's Representative for every person providing services on the Project as acceptable proof of coverage. The required Certificate of Insurance must be presented as evidence of coverage for CONTRACTOR. Workers' Compensation Insurance coverage written by the Texas Workers Compensation Fund is acceptable to OWNER. CONTRACTOR's policy shall apply to the State of Texas and include these endorsements in favor of OWNER: a) Waiver of Subrogation,form WC 420304; and b) 30 day Notice of Cancellation,form WC 420601. The minimum policy limits for Employers' Liability Insurance coverage shall be as follows: .1 $100,000 bodily injury per accident, $500,000 bodily injury by disease policy limit and $100,000 bodily injury by disease each employee. 5.3.1.4 Commercial General Liability Insurance. The Policy shall contain the following provisions: a) Blanket contractual liability coverage for liability assumed under the Contract and all contracts relative to this Project. b) Completed Operations/Products Liability for the duration of the warranty period. c) Explosion, Collapse and Underground (X, C&U)coverage. d) Independent Contractors coverage. e) Aggregate limits of insurance per project, endorsement CG 2503. f) OWNER listed as an additional insured, endorsement CG 2010. g) 30 day notice of cancellation in favor of OWNER, endorsement CG 0205. h) Waiver of Transfer of Recovery Against Others in favor of OWNER, endorsement CG 2404. Provide coverages A&B with minimum limits as follows: .1 A combined bodily injury and property damage limit of$500,000 per occurrence. 5.3.1.5 Builders' Risk Insurance. CONTRACTOR shall maintain Builders' Risk Insurance or Installation Insurance on an all risk physical loss form in the Contract Amount. Coverage shall continue until the Work is accepted by OWNER. OWNER shall be a loss payee on the policy. If off site storage is permitted,coverage shall include transit and storage in an amount sufficient to protect property being transported or stored. 5.4 Bonds: 00700 04-2020 Page 14 General Conditions 5.4.1 General. .1 Bonds, when required, shall be executed on forms furnished by or acceptable to OWNER. All bonds signed by an agent must be accompanied by a certified copy of such agent's authority to act. .2 If the surety on any bond furnished by CONTRACTOR is declared bankrupt or becomes insolvent or its right to do business is terminated in the State of Texas or it ceases to meet the requirements of the preceding paragraph, CONTRACTOR shall within ten(10)days thereafter substitute another bond and surety, both of which must be acceptable to OWNER. .3 When Performance Bonds and/or Payment Bonds are required,each shall be issued in an amount of one hundred percent (100%) of the Contract Amount as security for the faithful performance and/or payment of all CONTRACTOR's obligations under the Contract Documents. Performance Bonds and Payment Bonds shall be issued by a solvent surety company authorized to do business in the State of Texas, and shall meet any other requirements established by law or by OWNER pursuant to applicable law. Any surety duly authorized to do business in Texas may write Performance and Payment Bonds on a project without reinsurance to the limit of 10 percent of its capital and surplus. Such a surety must reinsure any obligations over 10 percent. .4 If CONTRACTOR has failed to obtain or maintain a required bond, OWNER may exclude the CONTRACTOR from the site of the Project and exercise OWNER's suspension and/or termination rights under the Contract Documents. 5.4.2 Performance Bond. .1 If the Contract Amount exceeds $100,000, CONTRACTOR shall furnish OWNER with a Performance Bond in the form set out by OWNER. .2 If the Contract Amount exceeds $25,000 but is less than or equal to $100,000, CONTRACTOR shall furnish OWNER with a Performance Bond in the form set out by OWNER, unless the original Contract Time is 60 Calendar Days/40 Working Days or less, in which case CONTRACTOR can agree to the following terms and conditions for payment in lieu of providing a Performance Bond: no money will be paid to CONTRACTOR until completion and acceptance of the Work by OWNER; CONTRACTOR shall be entitled to receive 95%of the Contract Amount following Final Completion, and the remaining 5%of the Contract Amount following the one year warranty period. .3 If the Contract Amount is less than or equal to $25,000, CONTRACTOR will not be required to furnish a Performance Bond; provided that no money will be paid to CONTRACTOR until completion and acceptance of the Work by OWNER under the following terms and conditions: CONTRACTOR shall be entitled to receive 95%of the Contract Amount following Final Completion, and the remaining 5%of the Contract Amount following the one year warranty period. .4 If a Performance Bond is required to be furnished, it shall extend for the one year warranty period. 5.4.3 Payment Bond. .1 If the Contract Amount exceeds $50,000, CONTRACTOR shall furnish OWNER with a Payment Bond in the form set out by OWNER. .2 If the Contract Amount is less than or equal to $50,000, CONTRACTOR will not be required to furnish a Payment Bond; provided that no money will be paid to CONTRACTOR until completion and acceptance of the Work by OWNER under the terms and conditions specified in paragraph 5.4.2.3. 00700 04-2020 Page 15 General Conditions ARTICLE 6-CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES 6.1 Supervision and Superintendence: 6.1.1 The CONTRACTOR shall supervise,inspect and direct the Work competently and efficiently,devoting such attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Unless otherwise directed by the OWNER in the Contract Documents, the CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract Documents. 6.1.2 The CONTRACTOR shall have an English-speaking, competent Superintendent on the Work at all times that work is in progress. Upon request of Owner's Representative, the CONTRACTOR shall present the resume of the proposed Superintendent to Owner's Representative showing evidence of experience and successful superintendence and direction of work of a similar scale and complexity. If, in the opinion of Owner's Representative, the proposed Superintendent does not indicate sufficient experience in line with the Work, he/she will not be allowed to be the designated Superintendent for the Work. The Superintendent shall not be replaced without Written Notice to Owner's Representative. If the CONTRACTOR deems it necessary to replace the Superintendent, the CONTRACTOR shall provide the necessary information for approval, as stated above, on the proposed new Superintendent. A qualified substitute Superintendent may be designated in the event that the designated Superintendent is temporarily away from the Work, but not to exceed a time limit acceptable to Owner's Representative. The CONTRACTOR shall replace the Superintendent upon the OWNER's request in the event the Superintendent is unable to perform to the OWNER's satisfaction. The Superintendent will be the CONTRACTOR's representative on the Work and shall have the authority to act on behalf of the CONTRACTOR. All communications given to the Superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the CONTRACTOR. Either the CONTRACTOR or the Superintendent shall provide an emergency and home telephone number at which one or the other may be reached if necessary when work is not in progress. 6.2 Labor, Materials and Equipment: 6.2.1 The CONTRACTOR agrees to employ only orderly and competent workers, skillful in performance of the type of Work required under this Contract. The CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors, and their employees may not use or possess any firearms, alcoholic or other intoxicating beverages, illegal drugs or controlled substances while on the job or on the OWNER's property, nor may such workers be intoxicated,or under the influence of alcohol or drugs, on the job. If the OWNER or Owner's Representative notifies the CONTRACTOR that any worker is incompetent, disorderly or disobedient, has knowingly or repeatedly violated safety regulations, has possessed any firearms, or has possessed or was under the influence of alcohol or drugs on the job, the CONTRACTOR shall immediately remove such worker from performing Contract Work, and may not employ such worker again on Contract Work without the OWNER's prior written consent. The CONTRACTOR shall at all times maintain good discipline and order on or off the site in all matters pertaining to the Project. The CONTRACTOR shall pay workers no less than the wage rates established in Section 00900, and maintain weekly payroll reports as evidence thereof. 6.2.2 Unless otherwise specified, the CONTRACTOR shall provide and pay for all materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and machinery, tools, appliances,fuel, power, light, heat,telephone,water, sanitary facilities, temporary facilities and all other facilities and incidentals necessary for the furnishing, performance, re-testing of defective work, start-up and completion of the Work. 6.2.3 All materials and equipment shall be of good quality and new (including new products made of recycled materials), except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. If required by Owner's Representative, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish satisfactory evidence (reports of required tests, manufacturer's certificates of compliance with material requirements, mill reports, etc.) as to the kind, quantity and quality of materials and equipment. All materials and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned and conditioned in accordance with instructions of the applicable Supplier,except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 00700 04-2020 Page 16 General Conditions 6.2.4 Substitutes and "Approved Equal" Items: 6.2.4.1 Whenever an item of material or equipment is specified or described in the Contract Documents by using the name of a proprietary item or the name of a particular Supplier, the specification or description is intended to establish the type,function and quality required. Unless the specification or description contains words reading that no like, equivalent or"approved equal" item or no substitution is permitted, other items of material or equipment of other Suppliers may be submitted to Owner's Representative under the following circumstances: .1 "Approved Equal": If, in the OWNER's sole discretion, an item of material or an item of equipment proposed by the CONTRACTOR is functionally equal to that named and sufficiently similar so that no change in related Work will be required, it may be considered by the OWNER as an "approved equal" item, in which case review of the proposed item may, in the OWNER's sole discretion, be accomplished without compliance with some or all of the requirements for evaluation of proposed substitute items. The CONTRACTOR shall provide the OWNER with the documentation required for the OWNER to make its determination. .2 Substitute Items: If, in the OWNER's sole discretion, an item of material or an item of equipment proposed by the CONTRACTOR does not qualify as an "approved equal" item under paragraph 6.2.4.1.1, then it will be considered a proposed substitute item. The CONTRACTOR shall submit sufficient information to allow the OWNER to determine that the item of material or item of equipment proposed is essentially equivalent to that named and a substitute therefor. 6.2.4.2 Substitute Construction Methods and Procedures: If a specific means, method, technique, sequence or procedure of construction is shown or indicated in and expressly required by the Contract Documents, the CONTRACTOR may with prior approval of the OWNER furnish or utilize a substitute means, method, technique, sequence, or procedure of construction. The CONTRACTOR shall submit sufficient information to Owner's Representative to allow the OWNER, in the OWNER's sole discretion,to determine that the substitute proposed is equivalent to that expressly called for by the Contract Documents. 6.2.4.3 OWNER's Evaluation: The OWNER will be allowed a reasonable time within which to evaluate each proposal or submittal made pursuant to paragraph 6.2.4.1.1 and paragraph 6.2.4.1.2. The OWNER will be the sole judge of acceptability. No"approved equal"or substitute shall be ordered, installed, or utilized until the OWNER's review is complete, which will be evidenced by either a Change Order or completion of the Shop Drawing review procedure. The OWNER may require the CONTRACTOR to furnish at the CONTRACTOR's expense a special performance guarantee or other surety bond with respect to any"approved equal"or substitute. The OWNER shall not be responsible for any delay due to review time for any"approved equal"or substitute. 6.2.4.4 CONTRACTOR's Expense: All data to be provided by the CONTRACTOR in support of any proposed "approved equal"or substitute item will be at the CONTRACTOR's expense. 6.2.5 The CONTRACTOR agrees to assign to the OWNER any rights it may have to bring antitrust suits against its Suppliers for overcharges on materials incorporated in the Project growing out of illegal price fixing agreements. The CONTRACTOR further agrees to cooperate with the OWNER should the OWNER wish to prosecute suits against Suppliers for illegal price fixing. 6.3 Progress Schedule: Unless otherwise directed, the CONTRACTOR shall adhere to the progress schedule established in accordance with paragraph 2.6 as it may be adjusted from time to time as provided below: .1 The CONTRACTOR shall submit to Owner's Representative for acceptance proposed adjustments in the progress schedule that will not change the Contract Times or Milestones. Such adjustments will conform generally to the progress schedule then in effect. 00700 04-2020 Page 17 General Conditions .2 Proposed adjustments in the progress schedule that will change the Contract Times or Milestones shall be submitted in accordance with the requirements of Article 12. Such adjustments may only be made by a Change Order or Time Extension Request in accordance with Article 12. 6.4 Concerning Subcontractors,Suppliers and Others: 6.4.1 Assignment: The CONTRACTOR agrees to retain direct control of and give direct attention to the fulfillment of this Contract. The CONTRACTOR agrees not to,by Power of Attorney or otherwise,assign said Contract without the prior written consent of the OWNER. 6.4.2 Award of Subcontracts for Portions of the Work: The CONTRACTOR shall not employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization, whether initially or as a substitute, against whom the OWNER may have reasonable objection. The CONTRACTOR must provide the OWNER with a list of all Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other persons or organizations it will use in the Work, and such list must be provided prior to the preconstruction conference. Should the OWNER have objections,the OWNER will communicate such objections by Written Notice. If the OWNER requires a change without good cause of any Subcontractor, person or organization previously accepted by OWNER,the Contract Amount may be increased or decreased by the difference in the cost occasioned by any such change, and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued. The CONTRACTOR shall not substitute any Subcontractor, person or organization that has been accepted by the OWNER, unless the substitute has been accepted in writing by the OWNER. No acceptance by the OWNER of any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization shall constitute a waiver of any right of the OWNER to reject defective Work. 6.4.3 The CONTRACTOR shall enter into written agreements with all Subcontractors and Suppliers which specifically bind the Subcontractors or Suppliers to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract Documents for the benefit of the OWNER and E/A. The OWNER reserves the right to specify that certain requirements shall be adhered to by all Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors as indicated in other portions of the Contract Documents and these requirements shall be made a portion of the agreement between the CONTRACTOR and Subcontractor or Supplier. 6.4.4 The CONTRACTOR shall be fully responsible to the OWNER for all acts and omissions of the Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons and organizations performing or furnishing any of the Work under a direct or indirect contract with the CONTRACTOR just as the CONTRACTOR is responsible for the CONTRACTOR's own acts and omissions. Nothing in the Contract Documents shall create for the benefit of any such Subcontractor,Supplier or other person or organization any contractual relationship between the OWNER and any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization, nor shall it create any obligation on the part of the OWNER or E/A to pay or to see to the payment of any amounts due any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization except as may otherwise be required by laws and regulations. 6.4.5 The CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating the Work of Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons and organizations performing or furnishing any of the Work under a direct or indirect contract with the CONTRACTOR. The CONTRACTOR shall require all Subcontractors, Suppliers and such other persons and organizations performing or furnishing any of the Work to communicate with Owner's Representative through the CONTRACTOR. 6.4.6 The divisions and sections of the Specifications and the identifications of any Drawings shall not control the CONTRACTOR in dividing or delineating the Work to be performed by any specific trade. 6.4.7 The CONTRACTOR shall pay each Subcontractor and Supplier their appropriate share of payments made to the CONTRACTOR not later than ten(10)Days after the CONTRACTOR's receipt of payment from the OWNER. 6.5 Patent Fees and Royalties: 6.5.1 The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible at all times for compliance with applicable patents or copyrights encompassing, in whole or in part, any design, device, material, or process utilized, directly or indirectly, in the performance of the Work or the formulation or presentation of its Bid. 00700 04-2020 Page 18 General Conditions 6.5.2 The CONTRACTOR shall pay all royalties and license fees and shall provide, prior to commencement of Work hereunder and at all times during the performance of same, for lawful use of any design, device, material or process covered by letters, patent or copyright by suitable legal agreement with the patentee, copyright holder, or their duly authorized representative whether or not a particular design, device, material, or process is specified by the OWNER. 6.5.3 The CONTRACTOR shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent or copyright and shall indemnify and save the OWNER harmless from any and all claims,costs, losses,expenses and damages(including but not limited to attorneys fees and consultant fees),direct or indirect,arising with respect to the CONTRACTOR's process in the formulation of its bid or the performance of the Work or otherwise arising in connection therewith. The OWNER reserves the right to provide its own defense,with counsel of its own choosing,to any suit or claim of infringement of any patent or copyright in which event the CONTRACTOR shall indemnify and save harmless the OWNER from all costs and expenses of such defense as well as satisfaction of all judgments entered against the OWNER. 6.5.4 The OWNER shall have the right to stop the Work and/or terminate this Agreement at any time in the event the CONTRACTOR fails to disclose to the OWNER that the CONTRACTOR's work methodology includes the use of any infringing design, device, material or process. 6.6 Permits, Fees: Unless otherwise provided in the Supplemental General Conditions, the CONTRACTOR shall obtain and pay for all construction permits, licenses and fees required for prosecution of the Work. OWNER will obtain and pay for the following permits, licenses and/or fees, if required: .1 Site Development Permit. .2 Building Permit(s). .3 Texas Department of Transportation permit for work in State rights-of-way. .4 Railroad Utility License Agreement. 6.7 Laws and Regulations: 6.7.1 The CONTRACTOR shall give all notices and comply with all laws and regulations applicable to furnishing and performing the Work. Except where otherwise expressly required by applicable laws and regulations, neither the OWNER nor E/A shall be responsible for monitoring the CONTRACTOR's compliance with any laws and regulations. 6.7.2 The CONTRACTOR shall plan and execute its operations in compliance with all applicable Federal, State and local laws and regulations, including those concerning control and abatement of water pollution and prevention and control of air pollution. 6.7.3 If the CONTRACTOR performs any Work that it is contrary to laws or regulations,then the CONTRACTOR shall bear and shall indemnify, defend and hold OWNER harmless from all claims, costs, losses and damages arising therefrom; however, it shall not be the CONTRACTOR'S primary responsibility to make certain that the Specifications and Drawings are in accordance with laws and regulations, but this does not relieve the CONTRACTOR of the CONTRACTOR's obligations under Article 3. 6.8 Taxes: 6.8.1 The CONTRACTOR shall pay all sales, consumer, use and other similar taxes required to be paid by the CONTRACTOR in accordance with the laws and regulations of the State of Texas. 00700 04-2020 Page 19 General Conditions 6.8.2 The OWNER is an exempt organization as defined by Chapter 1 1 of the Property Tax Code of Texas and is thereby exempt from payment of Sales Tax under Chapter 151, Limited Use Sales, Excise and Use Tax, Texas Tax Code, and Chapter 321,Texas Tax Code. 6.9 Use of Premises: 6.9.1 The CONTRACTOR shall confine construction equipment,the storage of materials and equipment and the operations of workers to the site and land and areas identified in and permitted by the Contract Documents and other land and areas permitted by laws and regulations, rights-of-way, permits and easements, and shall not unreasonably encumber the premises with construction equipment or other materials or equipment. The CONTRACTOR shall assume full responsibility for any damage to any such land or area, or to the owner or occupant thereof or of any adjacent land or areas, resulting from the performance of the Work. Should any claim be made by any such owner or occupant because of the performance of the Work, the CONTRACTOR shall promptly settle with such other party by negotiation or otherwise resolve the claim by dispute resolution proceeding or at law. The CONTRACTOR shall indemnify,defend and hold harmless the OWNER, E/A, E/A's consultants and anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses and damages (including court costs and reasonable attorneys'fees)arising out of or resulting from any claim or action, legal or equitable, brought by any such owner or occupant against the OWNER, E/A or any other party indemnified hereunder to the extent caused by or based upon performance of the Work or failure to perform the Work. 6.9.2 During the progress of the Work and on a daily basis, the CONTRACTOR shall keep the premises free from accumulations of waste materials, rubbish and other debris resulting from the Work. At the completion of the Work, the CONTRACTOR shall remove all waste materials, rubbish and debris from and about the premises as well as all tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery and surplus materials. The CONTRACTOR shall leave the site clean and ready for occupancy by the OWNER at Substantial Completion of the Work. The CONTRACTOR shall, at a minimum, restore to original condition all property not designated for alteration by the Contact Documents. 6.9.3 The CONTRACTOR shall not load nor permit any part of any structure to be loaded in any manner that will endanger the structure, nor shall the CONTRACTOR subject any part of the Work or adjacent property to stresses or pressures that will endanger it. 6.10 Record Documents: The CONTRACTOR shall maintain in a safe place at the site, or other location acceptable to the OWNER, one (1) record copy of all Drawings,Specifications,Addenda,Change Orders,Change Directives, Field Orders and written interpretations and clarifications (issued pursuant to paragraph 9.5) in good order and annotated to show all changes made during construction. These record documents, together with all final samples and all final Shop Drawings,will be available to the OWNER and E/A for reference during performance of the Work. Upon Substantial Completion of the Work, these record documents, samples and Shop Drawings showing the final "as built' construction of the Project shall be promptly delivered to Owner's Representative. 6.11 Safety and Protection: 6.11.1 The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. Upon request,and prior to installation of measures,the CONTRACTOR shall submit a site security and safety plan for approval by the OWNER. By reviewing the plan or making recommendations or comments, the OWNER will not assume liability nor will the CONTRACTOR be relieved of liability for damage, injury or loss. The CONTRACTOR shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of and shall provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: .1 all persons on the Work site or who may be affected by the Work; .2 all the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site; and 00700 04-2020 Page 20 General Conditions .3 other property at the site or adjacent thereto, including but not limited to, trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures, utilities and underground facilities not designated for removal, relocation or replacement in the course of construction. 6.11.2 The CONTRACTOR shall comply with all applicable laws and regulations of any public body having jurisdiction for safety of persons or property or to protect them from damage, injury or loss; and shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection. The CONTRACTOR shall notify owners of adjacent property and of underground facilities, and utility owners when prosecution of the Work may affect them, and shall cooperate with them in the protection, removal, relocation and replacement of their property. All damage, injury or loss to any property referred to in paragraph 6.11.1.2 and paragraph 6.11.1.3 caused,directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, by the CONTRACTOR, Subcontractor, Supplier or any person or organization directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the Work or anyone for whose acts any of them may be responsible, shall be remedied by the CONTRACTOR (except damage or loss attributable to the fault of Drawings or Specifications or to the acts or omissions of the OWNER, or F/A, or F/A's consultant or anyone employed by any of them or anyone for whose acts any of them may be responsible, and not attributable, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, to the faults or negligence of the CONTRACTOR or any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization directly or indirectly employed by any of them). The CONTRACTOR's duties and responsibilities for safety and protection of the Work shall continue until such time as all the Work is completed and Owner's Representative has issued a notice to the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR in accordance with Article 14 that the Work is acceptable(except as otherwise expressly provided in connection with Substantial Completion). 6.11.3 Safety Representative: The CONTRACTOR shall designate a qualified and experienced safety representative at the site whose duties and responsibilities shall be the prevention of accidents and the maintaining and supervising of safety precautions and programs. Upon request of the OWNER, the CONTRACTOR shall provide certifications or other documentation of the safety representative's qualifications. At a minimum,the safety representative shall have received the OSHA thirty (30) hour training and a certificate evidencing that the safety representative has received such training within the last five (5) years shall be provided to the OWNER's representative. 6.11.4 Hazard Communication Programs: The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for coordinating any exchange of material safety data sheets or other hazard communication information required to be made available to or exchanged between or among employers at the site in accordance with laws and regulations. 6.11.5 Emergencies: 6.11.5.1 In emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work at the site or adjacent thereto, the CONTRACTOR, without special instruction or authorization from the OWNER or E/A, is obligated to act reasonably to prevent threatened damage, injury or loss and to mitigate damage or loss to the Work. The CONTRACTOR shall give Owner's Representative prompt written notice if the CONTRACTOR believes that any significant changes in the Work or variations from the Contract Documents have been caused thereby. If Owner's Representative determines that a change in the Contract Documents is required because of the action taken by the CONTRACTOR in response to such an emergency,a Change Directive or Change Order will be issued to document the consequences of such action; otherwise the OWNER will not be responsible for the CONTRACTOR's emergency action. 6.11.5.2 Authorized agents of the CONTRACTOR shall respond immediately to call-out at any time of any day or night when circumstances warrant the presence on Project site of the CONTRACTOR or its agent to protect the Work or adjacent property from damage, restriction or limitation or to take such action or measures pertaining to the Work as may be necessary to provide for the safety of the public. Should the CONTRACTOR and/or its agent fail to respond and take action to alleviate such an emergency situation, the OWNER may direct other forces to take action as necessary to remedy the emergency condition,and the OWNER will deduct any cost of such remedial action from the funds due to the CONTRACTOR under this Contract. 6.11.5.3 In the event there is an accident involving injury to any individual on or near the Work, the CONTRACTOR shall notify Owner's Representative within twenty-four (24) hours of the event and shall be responsible for recording the location of the event and the circumstances surrounding the event through 00700 04-2020 Page 21 General Conditions photographs, interviewing witnesses, obtaining medical reports and other documentation that describes the event. Copies of such documentation shall be provided to Owner's Representative, for the OWNER's and E/A's records, within forty-eight(48)hours of the event. 6.12 Continuing the Work: The CONTRACTOR shall carry on the Work and adhere to the progress schedule during all disputes or disagreements with the OWNER. No Work shall be delayed or postponed pending resolution of any disputes or disagreements, except as the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR may agree in writing. 6.13 CONTRACTOR's General Warranty and Guarantee: 6.13.1 The CONTRACTOR warrants and guarantees to the OWNER that all Work will be performed in a good and workmanlike manner in accordance with the Contract Documents and will not be defective. The CONTRACTOR's warranty and guarantee hereunder excludes defects or damage caused by: .1 abuse, modification or improper maintenance or operation by persons other than the CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors or Suppliers;or .2 normal wear and tear under normal usage. 6.13.2 The CONTRACTOR's obligation to perform and complete the Work in a good and workmanlike manner in accordance with the Contract Documents shall be absolute. None of the following will constitute acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents or a release of the CONTRACTOR's obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents: .1 observations by Owner's Representative and/or E/A; .2 recommendation of any progress or final payment by Owner's Representative; .3 the issuance of a certificate of Substantial Completion or any payment by the OWNER to the CONTRACTOR under the Contract Documents; .4 use or occupancy of the Work or any part thereof by the OWNER; .5 any acceptance by the OWNER or any failure to do so; .6 any review of a Shop Drawing or sample submittal; .7 any inspection, test or approval by others; or .8 any correction of defective Work by the OWNER. .9 the failure of the OWNER, E/A or any other person or entity acting on behalf of the OWNER or E/A to observe, detect or discover any defect in the Work or any non-conformance of the Work with any requirement of the Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR hereby waives any claim or defense to any claim by the OWNER that any failure by the OWNER, E/A, or any other person or entity acting on behalf of the OWNER or E/A to observe, detect or discover any defect in the Work relieves or releases, in whole or in part, CONTRACTOR from any obligations or responsibility for the correction of such defects or any other obligation of CONTRACTOR under the Contract Documents. 6.14 Indemnification: 00700 04-2020 Page 22 General Conditions 6.14.1 TO THE FULLEST EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW,AND IN ADDITION TO ANY OTHER OBLIGATIONS OF CONTRACTOR UNDER THE CONTRACT OR OTHERWISE, CONTRACTOR SHALL INDEMNIFY,DEFEND AND HOLD HARMLESS OWNER, ITS COUNCIL MEMBERS , EMPLOYEES, AGENTS, AND CONSULTANTS INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE E/A (THE "INDEMNIFIED PARTIES" OR INDEMNIFIED PARTY", FROM AND AGAINST ALL CLAIMS, COSTS, LOSSES, AND DAMAGES (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ALL FEES AND CHARGES OF ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, ATTORNEYS, CONSULTANTS, EXPERTS AND OTHER PROFESSIONALS AND ALL COURT OR ARBITRATION OR OTHER DISPUTE RESOLUTION COSTS) ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO THE PERFORMANCE OF THE WORK, REGARDLESS OF WHETHER SUCH CLAIMS, COSTS, LOSSES, AND DAMAGES ARE CAUSED, IN WHOLE OR IN PARTY BY THE ACTS, ACTIONS, ERRORS OR OMISSIONS OF AN INDEMNIFIED PARTY. BECAUSE OWNER IS A MUNICIPALITY,THE TERMS AND PROVISIONS OF SUBCHAPTER C OF CHAPTER 151 OF THE TEXAS INSURANCE CODE ("CHAPTER 151") DOES NOT APPLY TO THE OWNER. IF, HOWEVER, ANY PROVISION OF CHAPTER 151 APPLIES TO THE OWNER, IT IS THE INTENT OF THE OWNER THAT IF THE PROVISIONS OF CHAPTER 151 DO APPLY, NOTHING HEREIN SHALL IMPOSE ANY REQUIREMENTS ON CONTRACTOR THAT ARE PROHIBITED BY CHAPTER 151 AND THAT ANY OF THE PROVISIONS HEREOF THAT ARE NOT PROHIBITED BY CHAPTER 151 SHALL REMAIN IN FULL FORCE AND EFFECT. ACCORDINGLY, IN THE EVENT THAT IN CONSTRUING AND INTERPRETING THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, A COURT OF COMPETENT JURISDICTION OR, IF APPLICABLE, AN ARBITRATOR, DETERMINES THAT CHAPTER 151 APPLIES TO THE OWNER, THEN THE COURT OR ARBITRATOR SHALL REFORM THE PROVISIONS HEREOF SO AS TO COMPLY WITH CHAPTER 151 AND SUCH REFORMATION SHALL NOT AFFECT THE VALIDITY OF ANY PROVISIONS HEREOF THAT ARE NOT PROHIBITED BY CHAPTER 151. 6.14.2 The indemnification obligation under paragraph 6.14.1 shall not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of damages, or compensation or benefits payable by or for the CONTRACTOR or any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization under workers'compensation acts,disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts. 6.14.3 The obligations of the CONTRACTOR under paragraph 6.14.1 shall not extend to the liability of the OWNER, E/A, E/A's consultants, and their officers, directors, partners, employees or agents caused primarily by negligent preparation of maps, drawings, surveys, designs or specifications upon which is placed the applicable state-authorized design professional seal of the OWNER's, E/A's or E/A's consultant's officers, directors, partners, employees or agents. 6.14.4 In the event the CONTRACTOR fails to follow the OWNER's directives concerning use of the site, scheduling or course of construction, or engages in other conduct which proximately causes damage to property based on inverse condemnation or otherwise, then and in that event, the CONTRACTOR shall indemnify the OWNER against all costs resulting from such claims. 6.14.5 In the event the CONTRACTOR unreasonably delays progress of the work being done by others on the site so as to cause loss for which the OWNER becomes liable, then the CONTRACTOR shall reimburse the OWNER for such loss. 6.15 Survival of Obligations: All representations, indemnifications,warranties and guarantees made in, required by or given in accordance with the Contract Documents,as well as all continuing obligations indicated in the Contract Documents,will survive final payment, completion and acceptance of the Work and termination or completion of the Agreement. 6.16 Losses from Natural Causes: Unless otherwise specified, all loss or damage to the CONTRACTOR arising out of the nature of the Work to be done or from action of the elements,floods or from unforeseeable circumstances in prosecution of the Work or from 00700 04-2020 Page 23 General Conditions unusual obstructions or difficulties which may be encountered in prosecution of the Work, shall be sustained and borne by the CONTRACTOR at its own cost and expense. 6.17 Notice of Claim: Should the CONTRACTOR suffer injury or damage to person or property because of any error, omission or act of the OWNER or of any of the OWNER's employees or agents or others for whose acts the OWNER is liable,a Claim will be made to the other party within thirty (30) calendar days of the event giving rise to such injury or damage. The provisions of this paragraph 6.17 shall not be construed as a substitute for or a waiver of the provisions of any applicable statute of limitations, statute of repose, or any other provision of the Contract Documents. 6.18 Liquidated Damages: At set forth in the Agreement,paragraph 1.2,the CONTRACTOR or its Surety shall be liable for Liquidated Damages for the CONTRACTOR's failure to timely complete the Work or any portion thereof within the Contract Time. See Supplemental Conditions for amount of Liquidated Damages. ARTICLE 7 -OTHER WORK 7.1 The OWNER may perform other work related to the Project at the site by the OWNER's own forces, or let other contracts therefor, or have other work performed by utility owners. If the CONTRACTOR believes that delay or additional cost is involved because of such action by the OWNER, the CONTRACTOR may make a Claim as provided in Article 11 or Article 12. 7.2 The CONTRACTOR shall afford other contractors who are in a contract with the OWNER and each utility owner(and the OWNER, if the OWNER is performing the additional work with the OWNER's employees) proper and safe access to the site and a reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of materials and equipment and the execution of such other work and shall properly connect and coordinate the Work with theirs. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the CONTRACTOR shall do all cutting, fitting and patching of the Work that may be required to make its several parts come together properly and integrate with such other work. The CONTRACTOR shall not endanger any work of others by cutting, excavating or otherwise altering their work and will only cut or alter their work with the written consent of Owner's Representative and the other contractors whose work will be affected. The CONTRACTOR shall promptly remedy damage caused by the CONTRACTOR to completed or partially completed construction or to property of the OWNER or separate contractors. 7.3 If the proper execution or results of any part of the CONTRACTOR's Work depends upon work performed by others under this Article 7, the CONTRACTOR shall inspect such other work and promptly report to Owner's Representative in writing any delays, defects or deficiencies in such other work that render it unavailable or unsuitable for the proper execution and results of the CONTRACTOR's Work. The CONTRACTOR'S failure to report will constitute an acceptance of such other work as fit and proper for integration with the CONTRACTOR'S Work except for latent or non-apparent defects and deficiencies in such other work. 7.4 The OWNER shall provide for coordination of the activities of the OWNER's own forces and of each separate contractor with the Work of the CONTRACTOR, who shall cooperate with them. The CONTRACTOR shall participate with other separate contractors and Owner's Representative in reviewing their construction schedules when directed to do so. The CONTRACTOR shall make any revisions to the construction schedule deemed necessary after a joint review and mutual agreement. The construction schedules shall then constitute the schedules to be used by the CONTRACTOR, separate contractors and the OWNER until subsequently revised. 7.5 Unless otherwise stated herein, costs caused by delays or by improperly timed activities or defective construction shall be borne by the party responsible therefor. 7.6 If CONTRACTOR damages,delays,disrupts or interferes with the work of any other contractor,or any utility owner performing other work at or adjacent to the site of the Project, through CONTRACTOR's failure to take reasonable and customary measures to avoid such impacts, or if any claim arising out of CONTRACTOR's actions, 00700 04-2020 Page 24 General Conditions inactions or negligence in performance of the Work at or adjacent to the site of the Project is made by any such other contractor or utility owner against CONTRACTOR, OWNER, or E/A, then CONTRACTOR shall (1)promptly attempt to settle the claim as to all parties through negotiations with such other contractor or utility owner, or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or other dispute resolution proceeding or at law,and(2)INDEMNIFY AND HOLD HARMLESS THE INDEMNIFIED PARTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE E/A FROM AND AGAINST ANY SUCH CLAIMS,AND AGAINST ALL COSTS,LOSSES,AND DAMAGES(INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ALL FEES AND CHARGES OF ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, ATTORNEYS, AND OTHER PROFESSIONALS AND ALL COURT OR ARBITRATION OR OTHER DISPUTE RESOLUTION COSTS) ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO SUCH DAMAGE, DELAY, DISRUPTION, OR INTERFERENCE. ARTICLE 8 -OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITIES 8.1 Prior to the start of construction, the OWNER will designate in writing a person or entity to act as Owner's Representative during construction. Except as otherwise provided in these General Conditions,the OWNER shall issue all communications to the CONTRACTOR through Owner's Representative. 8.2 The OWNER will not supervise, direct, control or have authority over or be responsible for the CONTRACTOR's means,methods,techniques,sequences or procedures of construction or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto. The OWNER is not responsible for any failure of the CONTRACTOR to comply with laws and regulations applicable to furnishing or performing the Work. The OWNER is not responsible for the CONTRACTOR's failure to perform or furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Failure or omission of the OWNER to discover, or object to or condemn any defective Work or material shall not release the CONTRACTOR from the obligation to properly and fully perform the Contract. 8.3 The OWNER is not responsible for the acts or omissions of the CONTRACTOR, or of any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or of any other person or organization performing or furnishing any of the Work. 8.4 Information or services under the OWNER's control shall be furnished by the OWNER with reasonable promptness to avoid delay in the orderly progress of the Work. 8.5 The foregoing are in addition to other duties and responsibilities of the OWNER enumerated herein and especially those in respect to Article 4 (Availability of Lands; Subsurface and Physical Conditions; Reference Points), Article 7(Other Work)and Article 14 (Payments to the CONTRACTOR and Completion). 8.6 Notice of Claim: Should the OWNER suffer injury or damage to person or property because of any error, omission or act of the CONTRACTOR or of any of the CONTRACTOR's employees or agents or others for whose acts the CONTRACTOR is liable, a notice of such injury or damage will be sent to the CONTRACTOR within thirty (30) calendar days of the event giving rise to such injury or damage. The provisions of this paragraph 8.6 shall not be construed as a substitute for or a waiver of the provisions of any applicable statute of limitations or statute of repose. 8.7 The OWNER is not responsible for the CONTRACTOR's failure to perform or furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. The failure or omission of the OWNER, E/A or any other person or entity acting on behalf of the OWNER or the E/A to observe,detect,discover,or object to or condemn any defective Work or material shall not release the CONTRACTOR from CONTRACTOR's obligation to properly and fully perform the Work pursuant to the Contract Documents. The OWNER shall not be responsible for the acts, errors or omissions of the CONTRACTOR, or any Subcontractor, Supplier or any other person or entity performing or furnishing any of the Work on behalf of the CONTRACTOR. ARTICLE 9 -ENGINEER/ARCHITECT'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION 9.1 EIA's Authority and Responsibilities: 9.1.1 The duties and responsibilities and the limitations of authority of E/A during construction are set forth in the Contract Documents and shall not be extended without written consent of the OWNER and E/A. The assignment 00700 04-2020 Page 25 General Conditions of any authority, duties or responsibilities to E/A under the Contract Documents, or under any agreement between the OWNER and E/A, or any undertaking, exercise or performance thereof by E/A, is intended to be for the sole and exclusive benefit of the OWNER and is not for the benefit of the CONTRACTOR, Subcontractor, Sub- subcontractor, Supplier,or any other person or organization,or for any surety or employee or agent of any of them. 9.1.2 E/A will not supervise, direct, control or have authority over or be responsible for the CONTRACTOR's means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto. E/A is not responsible for any failure of the CONTRACTOR to comply with laws and regulations applicable to the furnishing or performing the Work. E/A is not responsible for the CONTRACTOR's failure to perform or furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Failure or omission of E/A to discover, or object to or condemn any defective Work or material shall not release the CONTRACTOR from the obligation to properly and fully perform the Work. 9.1.3 E/A is not responsible for the acts or omissions of the CONTRACTOR, or of any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or of any other person or organization performing or furnishing any of the Work. 9.1.4 If the OWNER so directs, E/A will review the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation and all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds and certificates of inspection,tests and approvals and other documentation required to be delivered by Article 14,but only to determine generally that their content complies with the requirements of, and in the case of certificates of inspections, tests and approvals that the results certified indicate compliance with,the Contract Documents. 9.1.5 The limitations upon authority and responsibility set forth in this paragraph 9.1 shall also apply to E/A's Consultants, Resident Project Representative and assistants. 9.2 E/A as Owner's Representative: 9.2.1 E/A may be designated as Owner's Representative under paragraph 8.1. 9.3 Visits to Site: If the OWNER so directs, E/A will make visits to the site at intervals appropriate to the various stages of construction as is necessary in order to observe as an experienced and qualified design professional the progress that has been made and the quality of the various aspects of the CONTRACTOR's executed Work. Based on information obtained during such visits and observations, E/A will endeavor for the benefit of the OWNER to determine if the Work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents. E/A will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work. E/A's efforts will be directed toward providing for the OWNER a greater degree of confidence that the completed Work will conform to the Contract Documents. On the basis of such visits and on-site observations, E/A will keep the OWNER informed of the progress of the Work and will endeavor to guard the OWNER against defective Work. EtA's visits and on-site observations are subject to all the limitations on E/A's authority and responsibility set forth in paragraph 9.1. 9.4 Project Representative: If the OWNER and E/A agree, E/A will furnish a Resident Project Representative to assist E/A in providing more continuous observation of the Work. The responsibilities and authority and limitations of any such Resident Project Representative and assistants will be as provided in paragraph 9.1 and in the Supplemental General Conditions. The OWNER may designate another representative or agent to represent the OWNER at the site who is not E/A, E/A's consultant, agent or employee. 9.5 Clarifications and Interpretations: E/A may determine that written clarifications or interpretations of the requirements of the Contract Documents (in the form of drawings or otherwise) are necessary. Such written clarifications or interpretations will be consistent with the intent of and reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents,will be issued with reasonable promptness by Owner's Representative and will be binding on the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR. If the OWNER or the 00700 04-2020 Page 26 General Conditions CONTRACTOR believes that a written clarification or interpretation justifies an adjustment in the Contract Amount or the Contract Times, the OWNER or the CONTRACTOR may make a Claim therefor as provided in Article 11 or Article 12. 9.6 Rejecting Defective Work: E/A may recommend that the OWNER disapprove or reject Work which E/A believes to be defective, or believes will not produce a completed Project that conforms to the Contract Documents or will prejudice the integrity of the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 10 -CHANGES IN THE WORK 10.1 Changes: 10.1.1 Without invalidating the Contract and without notice to any surety, the OWNER, at any time or from time to time, may order additions, deletions or revisions in the Work. Such changes in the Work will be authorized by Change Order, Change Directive or Field Order. 10.1.2 Changes in the Work shall be performed under applicable provisions of the Contract Documents, and the CONTRACTOR shall proceed promptly, unless otherwise provided in the Change Order, Change Directive or Field Order. 10.1.3 The CONTRACTOR shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Amount or an extension of the Contract Times with respect to any Work performed that is not required by the Contract Documents as amended, modified and supplemented as provided in paragraph 3.3.1 and paragraph 3.3.2, except in the case of an emergency as provided in paragraph 6.11.5 or in the case of uncovering Work as provided in paragraph 13.4. 10.1.4 Except in the case of an emergency as provided in paragraph 6.11.5, a Change Order or Change Directive is required before the CONTRACTOR commences any activities associated with a change in the Work which, in the CONTRACTOR's opinion,will result in a change in the Contract Amount and/or Contract Times. 10.1.5 If notice of any change affecting the general scope of the Work or the provisions of the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, Contract Amount or Contract Times) is required by the provisions of any Bond to be given to a surety, the giving of any such notice will be the CONTRACTOR's responsibility, and the amount of each applicable Bond will be adjusted accordingly. 10.2 Change Orders: 10.2.1 The OWNER and the CONTRACTOR shall execute appropriate written Change Orders covering: .1 a change in the Work; .2 the amount of the adjustment in the Contract Amount, if any; and .3 the extent of the adjustment in the Contract Time, if any. 10.2.2 An executed Change Order shall represent the complete, equitable, and final amount of adjustment in the Contract Amount and/or Contract Time owed to the CONTRACTOR or the OWNER as a result of the occurrence or event causing the change in the Work encompassed by the Change Order. 10.3 Change Directives: 10.3.1 The OWNER may by written Change Directive,without invalidating the Contract,order changes in the Work within the general scope of the Contract consisting of additions, deletions or other revisions, the Contract Amount 00700 04-2020 Page 27 General Conditions and Contract Time being adjusted as necessary. A Change Directive shall be used in the absence of complete and prompt agreement on the terms of a Change Order. 10.3.2 If the Change Directive provides for an adjustment to the Contract Amount,the adjustment shall be based on the method provided for in paragraph 11.5. 10.3.3 A Change Directive shall be recorded later by preparation and execution of an appropriate Change Order. 10.3.4 Upon receipt of a Change Directive, CONTRACTOR shall promptly proceed with the change in the Work involved. 10.4 Field Order: 10.4.1 Owner's Representative may authorize minor variations in the Work from the requirements of the Contract Documents which do not involve an adjustment in the Contract Amount or the Contract Times and are compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. These shall be accomplished by written Field Order and shall be binding on the OWNER and on the CONTRACTOR who shall perform the Work involved promptly. 10.4.2 If the CONTRACTOR believes that a Field Order would require an adjustment in the Contract Amount and/or Contract Times, the CONTRACTOR shall make written request to Owner's Representative for a Change Order. Any request by the CONTRACTOR for an adjustment in Contract Amount and/or Contract Times shall be made in writing prior to beginning the work covered by the Field Order. 10.5 No Damages for Delay: Except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the CONTRACTOR shall receive no compensation for delays or hindrances to the Work. If delay is caused by specific orders given by the OWNER to stop Work for reasons for which the CONTRACTOR is not responsible, or such delay is not caused by active interference in the Work by OWNER for reasons for which the CONTRACTOR is not responsible, then such delay will entitle the CONTRACTOR only to an equivalent extension of time,the CONTRACTOR's application for which shall, however, be subject to approval of the OWNER. No such extension of time shall release the CONTRACTOR or surety on its performance bond from all the CONTRACTOR's obligations hereunder which shall remain in full force until discharge of the Contract. ARTICLE 11 -CHANGE OF CONTRACT AMOUNT 11.1 The Contract Amount is stated in the Agreement and, including authorized adjustments, is the total amount payable by the OWNER to the CONTRACTOR for performance of the Work under the Contract Documents. 11.2 The original Contract Amount may not be increased by more than twenty-five percent(25%)and it may not be decreased more than twenty-five percent(25%)without the consent of the CONTRACTOR to such decrease. 11.3 The Contract Amount shall only be changed by a Change Order. Any claim for an adjustment in the Contract Amount shall be made by Written Notice delivered by the party making the Claim to the other party promptly (but in no event later than thirty(30)calendar days)after the start of the occurrence or event giving rise to the Claim and stating the general nature of the Claim. Notice of the amount of the Claim with supporting data shall be delivered within thirty(30)calendar days after Written Notice of Claim is delivered by claimant, and shall represent that the adjustment claimed covers all known amounts to which claimant is entitled as a result of said occurrence or event. If the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR cannot otherwise agree, all Claims for adjustment in the Contract Amount shall be determined as set out in Article 16. 11.4 Determination of Value of Work: 00700 04-2020 Page 28 General Conditions 11.4.1 The value of any Work covered by a Change Order or of any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Amount will be determined by one or more of the following methods: .1 by application of unit prices contained in the Contract Documents to the quantities of the items involved. .2 by a mutually agreed lump sum properly itemized and supported by sufficient substantiating data to permit evaluation. .3 by cost of Work plus the CONTRACTOR's fee for all overhead costs and profit(determined as provided in paragraph 11.5). 11.4.2 Before using the method described in paragraph 11.4.1.3, the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR agree to negotiate a Change Order using the methods identified in paragraph 11.4.1.1 and paragraph 11.4.1.2, as appropriate,to determine the adjustment in the Contract Amount. 11.5 Cost of Work: If neither of the methods defined in paragraph 11.4.1.1 or paragraph 11.4.1.2 can be agreed upon before a change in the Work is commenced which will result in an adjustment in the Contract Amount, the OWNER may issue a Change Directive to the CONTRACTOR. If the OWNER elects to issue a Change Directive, CONTRACTOR shall perform the Changed Work and payment will be made as follows: .1 For all personnel, the CONTRACTOR will receive the rate or wage specified in the prevailing wage rates established in Section 00900 for each hour that said personnel are actually engaged in such Work, to which will be added an amount equal to twenty-five percent (25%) of the sum thereof as compensation for the CONTRACTOR's and any affected Subcontractor's total overhead and profit. No separate charge will be made by the CONTRACTOR for organization or overhead expenses. For the cost of premiums on public liability insurance, workers' compensation insurance, social security and unemployment insurance, an amount equal to fifty-five percent (55%) of the wages paid personnel, excluding the twenty-five(25%)compensation provided above,will be paid to the CONTRACTOR. The actual cost of the CONTRACTOR's bond(s) on the extra Work will be paid based on invoices from surety. No charge for superintendence will be made unless considered necessary and ordered by the OWNER. .2 The CONTRACTOR will receive the actual cost, including freight charges, of the materials used on such Work, to which costs will be added a sum equal to twenty-five percent (25%) thereof as compensation for the CONTRACTOR's and any affected Subcontractor's total overhead and profit. In case material invoices indicate a discount may be taken,the actual cost will be the invoice price minus the discount. .3 For machinery,trucks, power tools,or other similar equipment agreed to be necessary by the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR, the OWNER will allow the CONTRACTOR the rate as given in the latest edition of the Associated General Contractors of America "Contractor's Equipment Cost Guide" as published by Dataquest for each hour that said tools or equipment are in use on such work,which rate includes the cost of fuel, lubricants and repairs. No additional compensation will be allowed on the equipment for the CONTRACTOR's overhead and profit. .4 The compensation, as herein provided for, shall be received by the CONTRACTOR and any affected Subcontractor as payment in full for work done by Change Directive and will include use of small tools, and total overhead expense and profit. The CONTRACTOR and the Owner's Representative shall compare records of work done by Change Directive at the end of each day. Copies of these records will be made upon forms provided for this purpose by the OWNER and signed by both Owner's Representative and the CONTRACTOR,with one (1)copy being retained by the OWNER and one(1) by the CONTRACTOR. Refusal by the CONTRACTOR to sign these records within two (2)working days of presentation does not invalidate the accuracy of the record. 00700 04-2020 Page 29 General Conditions 11.6 Unit Price Work: 11.6.1 Where the Contract Documents provide that all or part of the Work is to be unit price Work, initially the Contract Amount will be deemed to include for all unit price work an amount equal to the sum of the established unit price for each separately identified item of unit price work times the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Bid. The estimated quantities of items of unit price work are not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of comparison of Bids and determining an initial Contract Amount. Determinations of the actual quantities and classifications of unit price work performed by the CONTRACTOR will be made by Owner's Representative. Owner's Representative will review with the CONTRACTOR the preliminary determinations on such matters before rendering a written decision thereon (by recommendation of an Application for Payment or otherwise). 11.6.2 When "plan quantity" is indicated for a bid item, the CONTRACTOR shall be paid the amount specified in the Contract Documents without any measurements. 11.6.3 Each unit price will be deemed to include an amount considered by the CONTRACTOR to be adequate to cover the CONTRACTOR'S overhead and profit for each separately identified item. 11.6.4 A Major Item is any individual bid item in the Bid that has a total cost equal to or greater than five percent (5%) of the original Contract Amount or $50,000, whichever is greater, computed on the basis of bid quantities and Contract unit prices. 11.6.5 The OWNER or the CONTRACTOR may make a Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Amount in accordance with Article 1 1 if: .1 the actual quantity of any Major Item should become as much as twenty percent (20%) more than or twenty percent(20%)less than in the Bid; or .2 The CONTRACTOR presents proper documentation contesting the accuracy of"plan quantity," and Owner's Representative verifies quantity and determines original quantity is in error by five percent (5%)or more. 11.6.E Right to Verify Information: The CONTRACTOR agrees that any designated representative of the OWNER shall have the right to examine the CONTRACTOR's records to verify the accuracy and appropriateness of the pricing data used to price change proposals. Even after a Change Order Proposal has been approved, the CONTRACTOR agrees that if the OWNER later determines the cost and pricing data submitted was inaccurate, incomplete, not current or not in compliance with the terms of this Agreement regarding pricing of change orders, then an appropriate contract price reduction will be made. 11.6.7 Pricing Information Requirements: The CONTRACTOR agrees to provide and require all subcontractors to provide a breakdown of allowable labor and labor burden cost information as outlined herein. This information will be used to evaluate the potential cost of labor and labor burden related to change order work. It is intended that this information represent an accurate estimate of the CONTRACTOR's actual labor and labor burden cost components. This information is not intended to establish fixed billing or change order pricing labor rates. However, at the time change orders are priced the submitted cost data for labor rates may be used to price change order work. The accuracy of any such agreed-upon labor cost components used to price change orders will be subject to later audit. Approved change order amounts may be adjusted later to correct the impact of inaccurate labor cost components if the agreed-upon labor cost components are determined to be inaccurate. ARTICLE 12-CHANGE OF CONTRACT TIMES 12.1 Working Day and Calendar Day Contracts: 12.1.1 The Contract Times (or Milestones) shall only be changed by Change Order or Time Extension Request duly executed by both the CONTRACTOR and Owner's Representative. Any claim for an adjustment of the Contract Times(or Milestones)shall be made by Written Notice delivered by the party making the Claim to the other 00700 04-2020 Page 30 General Conditions party promptly(but in no event later than thirty(30)calendar days)after the start of the occurrence or event giving rise to the delay and stating the general nature of the delay. Notice of the extent of the delay with supporting data shall be delivered within thirty (30) calendar days after Written Notice of Claim is delivered by claimant, and shall represent that the adjustment claimed is the entire adjustment to which claimant is entitled as a result of said occurrence or event. If the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR cannot otherwise agree, all Claims for adjustment in the Contract Times (or Milestones)shall be determined as set out in Article 16. No Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Times(or Milestones)will be valid if not submitted in accordance with the requirements of this paragraph. 12.1.2 When the CONTRACTOR is at fault and the OWNER stops the Work so that corrections in the Work can be made by the CONTRACTOR, then no extension in time will be allowed. 12.1.3 When the CONTRACTOR is prevented from completing any part of the Work within the Contract Times(or Milestones)due to delay for which the CONTRACTOR is not responsible, an extension of the Contract Times (or Milestones)in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay will be considered by OWNER. Any extension of the Contract Time shall be the CONTRACTOR's sole and exclusive remedy for such delay. However, adverse weather shall not be considered justification for extension of Contract Times on Calendar Day contracts, except as provided for in paragraph 12.2. 12.1.4 The OWNER will consider time extension requests and may grant the CONTRACTOR an extension of time because of: .1 Changes ordered in the Work which justify additional time. .2 Failure of materials or products being at the Project site due to delays in transportation or failures of Suppliers,for which the CONTRACTOR,a Subcontractor or a Supplier is not responsible. The request for an extension of time shall be supported by a recitation of acts demonstrating that such delays were beyond the control of the CONTRACTOR, a Subcontractor or a Supplier including but not limited to, the CONTRACTOR's, the Subcontractor's or the Supplier's efforts to overcome such delays documented as follows: a) Copy of purchase order for delayed item(s) indicating date ordered by the CONTRACTOR/Subcontractor and date purchase order received by Supplier. b) If item(s) require Shop Drawings or other submittal information in accordance with the Contract Documents, provide record of date submittal(s) forwarded to Owner's Representative, date submittal(s)returned to the CONTRACTOR, and date submittal(s)forwarded to Supplier. c) Copy of document(s) from Supplier, on Supplier's letterhead, indicating date(s) item(s) would be ready for shipment and/or actual shipment date(s). d) Copies of all correspondence between the CONTRACTOR/Subcontractor and Supplier indicating the CONTRACTOR/Subcontractor's efforts to expedite item(s). e) If item(s) are being purchased by a Subcontractor, provision of meeting notes, correspondence, and the like which reflect the CONTRACTOR's efforts with the Subcontractor to expedite delivery of the item(s). .3 When acts of the OWNER, E!A, utility owners or other contractors employed by the OWNER delay progress of work through no fault of the CONTRACTOR. .4 When the CONTRACTOR is delayed by strikes, lockouts, fires, losses from natural causes, or other unavoidable cause or causes beyond the CONTRACTOR's control. 12.2 Calendar Day Contracts: 00700 04-2020 Page 31 General Conditions Under a Calendar Day Contract,the CONTRACTOR may also be granted an extension of time because of unusual inclement weather that is beyond the normal weather expected for the Williamson and Travis Counties,Texas area. Normal weather which prevents the CONTRACTOR from performing Work is expected during a Calendar Day Contract, and is not a justification for an extension of time. The following delineates the number of days per month for which,for purpo ontracts, expected normal weather will prevent performance of Work: January...............7 days February........................... 7 days March... 7 days April.......................... .7 days May............................... .8 days June................................. 6 days July................................. 6 days August.. 5 days September...................... 7 days October. 7 days November...................... 7 days December...................... 7 days Days per month exceeding the number shown above may be credited as Rain Days if a Claim is made in accordance with paragraph 12.1.1 and meets the following definition: a"Rain Day" is any day in which a weather event occurs at the site and is sufficient to prevent the CONTRACTOR from performing units of Work critical to maintaining the project schedule during the entire day. ARTICLE 13 -TESTS AND INSPECTIONS; AND CORRECTION OR REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE WORK 13.1 Notice of Defects: Prompt notice of all defective Work of which the OWNER or E/A has actual knowledge will be given to the CONTRACTOR. All defective Work may be rejected or corrected as provided for in Article 13. 13.2 Access to Work: The OWNER, E/A, E/A's Consultants, other representatives and personnel of the OWNER, independent testing laboratories and governmental agencies having jurisdiction will have unrestricted physical access to the Work site for observing, inspecting and testing. The CONTRACTOR shall provide them proper and safe conditions for such access, and advise them of the CONTRACTOR's site safety procedures and programs so that they may comply therewith as applicable. 13.3 Tests and Inspections: 13.3.1 The CONTRACTOR shall give timely notice of readiness of the Work for all required inspections, tests or approvals, and shall cooperate with inspection and testing personnel to facilitate required inspections or tests. 13.3.2 The OWNER shall employ and pay for services of an independent testing laboratory to perform all inspections,tests or approvals required by the Contract Documents except: .1 for inspections,tests or approvals covered by paragraph 13.3.3 below; .2 for reinspecting or retesting defective Work; and .3 as otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents. All testing laboratories shall be those selected by the OWNER. 00700 04-2020 Page 32 General Conditions 13.3.3 If laws or regulations of any public body having jurisdiction require any Work(or part thereof)specifically to be inspected, tested or approved by an employee or other representative of such public body, the CONTRACTOR shall assume full responsibility for arranging and obtaining such inspections, tests or approvals, pay all costs in connection therewith and furnish Owner's Representative the required certificates of inspection or approval. The CONTRACTOR shall also be responsible for arranging and obtaining and shall pay all costs in connection with any inspections, tests or approvals required for the OWNER's and E/A's review of materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work, or of materials, mix designs or equipment submitted for review prior to the CONTRACTOR's purchase thereof for incorporation in the Work. 13.4 Uncovering Work: 13.4.1 If any Work (or the work of others) that is to be inspected, tested or approved is covered by the CONTRACTOR without concurrence of Owner's Representative, or if any Work is covered contrary to the written request of Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by Owner's Representative, be uncovered and recovered at the CONTRACTOR's expense. 13.4.2 If Owner's Representative considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed, inspected or tested, the CONTRACTOR shall uncover, expose or otherwise make available for observation, inspection or testing that portion of the Work in question, furnishing all necessary labor, material and equipment. If it is found that such Work is defective,the CONTRACTOR shall pay all claims,costs, losses and damages caused by, arising out of or resulting from such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection and testing and of satisfactory replacement or reconstruction (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others); and the OWNER shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Amount, and may make a Claim therefor as provided in Article 11. If, however, such Work is not found to be defective,the CONTRACTOR shall be allowed an increase in the Contract Amount or an extension of the Contract Times (or Milestones), or both, directly attributable to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, testing, replacement and reconstruction; and the CONTRACTOR may make a Claim therefor as provided in Article 11 and Article 12. 13.5 OWNER May Stop the Work: 13.5.1 If the Work is defective,or the CONTRACTOR fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment, or fails to furnish or perform the Work in such a way that the completed Work will conform to the Contract Documents,the OWNER may order the CONTRACTOR to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however,this right of the OWNER to stop the Work shall not give rise to any duty on the part of the OWNER to exercise this right for the benefit of the CONTRACTOR or any surety or other party. 13.5.2 If the CONTRACTOR fails to correct defective Work or submit a satisfactory plan to take corrective action, with procedure and time schedule, the OWNER may order the CONTRACTOR to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until cause for such order has been eliminated,or take any other action permitted by this Contract. A notice to stop the Work, based on defects, shall not stop calendar or working days charged to the Project. 00700 04-2020 Page 33 General Conditions 13.6 Correction or Removal of Defective Work: If required by the OWNER,the CONTRACTOR shall promptly,as directed,either correct all defective Work,whether or not fabricated, installed or completed, or, if the Work has been rejected by Owner's Representative, remove it from the site and replace it with Work that is not defective.The CONTRACTOR shall correct or remove and replace defective Work, or submit a plan of action detailing how the deficiency will be corrected, within the time frame identified in the notice of defective Work. The CONTRACTOR shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or resulting from such correction or removal(including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others), including but not limited to all consultant, engineering, expert and attorney's fees incurred by the OWNER as a result of such defective work or as necessary for OWNER to investigate such defective Work and/or to determine the appropriate means or methods to address or correct such defective Work. The OWNER shall have the right, in OWNER's sole discretion, to have the E/A or other consultant specify the means and methods that will be followed to correct or address any defective Work. If the OWNER specifies a means or method by which the defective Work will be addressed or corrected, the CONTRACTOR shall perform the specified work necessary to address or correct the defective Work at CONTRACTOR's sole cost and expense. 13.7 Warranty period: 13.7.1 If, at any time after the date of Substantial Completion or such longer period of time as may be prescribed by laws or regulations or by the terms of any applicable special guarantee required by the Contract Documents or by any specific provision of the Contract Documents, any Work is found to be defective, the CONTRACTOR shall promptly,without cost to the OWNER and in accordance with the OWNER's written instructions: (I) correct such defective Work, or, if it has been rejected by the OWNER, remove it from the site and replace it with Work that is not defective, and (ii) satisfactorily correct or remove and replace any damage to other Work or the work of others resulting therefrom. If the CONTRACTOR does not promptly comply with the terms of such instructions, or in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage, the OWNER may have the defective Work corrected or the rejected Work removed and replaced, and all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or resulting from such removal and replacement (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others and all consultant, expert and attorney's fees incurred by OWNER)will be paid by the CONTRACTOR. 13.7.2 In special circumstances where a particular item of equipment is placed in continuous service before Substantial Completion of all the Work, the warranty period for that item may start to run from an earlier date if so provided in the Contract Documents and agreed to by OWNER. 13.8 OWNER May Correct Defective Work: If the CONTRACTOR fails within a reasonable time after Written Notice of the OWNER to correct defective Work, or to remove and replace rejected Work, or if the CONTRACTOR fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or if the CONTRACTOR fails to comply with any other provision of the Contract Documents, the OWNER may, after seven (7) calendar days' Written Notice to the CONTRACTOR, correct and remedy any such deficiency. If, in the opinion of Owner's Representative, significant progress has not been made during this seven(7)calendar day period to correct the deficiency,the OWNER may exercise any actions necessary to remedy the deficiency. In exercising the rights and remedies under this paragraph,the OWNER shall proceed expeditiously. In connection with such corrective and remedial action, the OWNER may exclude the CONTRACTOR from all or part of the site, take possession of all or part of the Work, and suspend the CONTRACTOR's services related thereto, and incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the site or for which the OWNER has paid the CONTRACTOR but which are stored elsewhere. The CONTRACTOR shall allow the OWNER, its agents and employees,the OWNER's other contractors, E/A and E/A's consultants access to the site to enable the OWNER to exercise the rights and remedies under this paragraph. All claims, costs, losses and damages incurred or sustained by the OWNER in exercising such rights and remedies will be charged against the CONTRACTOR and a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the 00700 04-2020 Page 34 General Conditions Work. Such claims, costs, losses and damages will include but not be limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal or replacement of the CONTRACTOR'S defective Work and any and all consultant,expert and attorneys fees incurred by OWNER as a result of OWNER's correction of defective WORK. The CONTRACTOR shall not be allowed an extension of the Contract Times(or Milestones), or claims of damage because of any delay in the performance of the Work attributable to the exercise by the OWNER of the OWNER's rights and remedies hereunder. 13.9 ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK If, instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of defective Work, OWNER prefers to accept it, OWNER may do so. CONTRACTOR shall pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages attributable to OWNER'S evaluation of and determination to accept such defective Work, including but not limited to any expert, engineering or other consultant's fees incurred by the OWNER to investigate such defective Work and/or to determine the appropriate means or methods and work necessary to allow OWNER to accept the defective Work and CONTRACTOR shall pay for all work required to be performed to allow OWNER to accept the defective Work and any estimated costs, expenses and damages OWNER may sustain in the future as a result of accepting the defective Work, including any diminution in value of the Project as a result of accepting the defective Work. If any such acceptance occurs prior to final payment, the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work shall be incorporated in a Change Order. If the parties are unable to agree as to the decrease in the Contract Price, then OWNER may impose a reasonable set-off against payments due under the Contract Documents. If the acceptance of defective Work occurs after final payment, CONTRACTOR shall pay to OWNER the above described costs, expenses and damages incurred by OWNER as a result of OWNER's acceptance of defective Work. ARTICLE 14-PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION 14.1 Application for Progress Payment: 14.1.1 Not more than once per month, the CONTRACTOR shall submit to Owner's Representative for review an Application for Payment, in a form acceptable to the OWNER,filled out and signed by the CONTRACTOR covering the Work completed as of the date of the Application and accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents or as required by OWNER. 14.1.2 Such applications shall not include requests for payment on account of changes in the Work which have been properly authorized by Change Directives but not yet included in Change Orders. 14.1.3 Such applications shall not include requests for payment of amounts the CONTRACTOR does not intend to pay to a Subcontractor or Supplier because of a dispute or other reason. 14.1.4 Owner will not pay for materials or equipment not incorporated in the Work but delivered and suitably stored at the site or at another location. Payment will be made by Owner only for Work completed in accordance with the Contract Documents. 14.1.5 Where the original Contract Amount is less than$400,000, the OWNER will pay to the CONTRACTOR the total amount of approved Application for Payment, less ten percent(10%)of the amount thereof,which ten percent (10%)will be retained until final payment, less all previous payments and less all sums that may be retained by the OWNER under the terms of this Agreement. Where the original Contract Amount is$400,000 or more,the OWNER will pay to the CONTRACTOR the total amount of approved Application for Payment, less five percent(5%)of the amount thereof,which five percent(5%)will be retained until final payment, less all previous payments and less all sums that may be retained by the OWNER under the terms of this Agreement. In either case, if the Work is near completion and delay occurs due to no fault or neglect of the CONTRACTOR, the OWNER may pay a portion of the retained amount to the CONTRACTOR. The CONTRACTOR, at the OWNER's option, may be relieved of the obligation to complete the Work and, thereupon, the CONTRACTOR shall receive payment of the balance due under the Contract subject to the conditions stated under paragraph 15.2. 00700 04-2020 Page 35 General Conditions 14.1.E Applications for Payment shall include the following documentation: .1 updated progress schedule; .2 monthly subcontractor report; and .3 any other documentation required under the Supplemental General Conditions. 14.2 CONTRACTOR's Warranty of Title: The CONTRACTOR warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials and equipment covered by any Application for Payment,whether incorporated in the Project or not,will pass to the OWNER not later than the time of payment to the CONTRACTOR free and clear of all liens. 14.3 Review of Applications for Progress Payment: 14.3.1 Owner's Representative will, within seven (7)calendar days after receipt of each Application for Payment, either indicate a recommendation for payment and forward the Application for processing by the OWNER,or return the Application to the CONTRACTOR indicating Owner's Representative's reasons for refusing to recommend payment. In the latter case,the CONTRACTOR may make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. 14.3.2 Owner's Representative's recommendation of any payment requested in an Application for Payment will constitute a representation by Owner's Representative, based upon Owner's Representative's on-site observations of the executed Work and on Owner's Representative's review of the Application for Payment and the accompanying data and schedules,that to the best of Owner's Representative's knowledge, information and belief: .1 the Work has progressed to the point indicated; and .2 the quality of the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents (subject to an evaluation of the Work as a functioning whole prior to or upon Substantial Completion, to the results of any subsequent tests called for in the Contract Documents, to a final determination of quantities and classifications for unit price Work, and to any other qualifications stated in the recommendation). 14.3.3 By recommending any such payment, Owner's Representative will not thereby be deemed to have represented that: .1 inspections have been made to check the quality or the quantity of the Work or that the Work has been performed in accordance with the Contract Documents; .2 examination has been made to ascertain how or for what purpose the CONTRACTOR has used money previously paid on account of the Contract Amount; .3 the CONTRACTOR's construction means, methods,techniques, sequences or procedures have been reviewed; or .4 that there may not be other matters or issues between the parties that might entitle the CONTRACTOR to be paid additionally by the OWNER or entitle the OWNER to withhold payment to the CONTRACTOR. 14.4 Decisions to Withhold Payment: 14.4.1 The OWNER may withhold or nullify the whole or part of any payment to such extent as may be necessary on account of: .1 defective Work not remedied; 00700 04-2020 Page 36 General Conditions .2 reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of the Contract Amount; .3 damage to the OWNER or another contractor; .4 reasonable evidence that the Work will not be completed within the Contract Time,and that the unpaid balance would not be adequate to cover actual or liquidated damages for the anticipated delay; .5 failure of the CONTRACTOR to submit a schedule of values in accordance with the Contract Documents; .6 failure of the CONTRACTOR to submit a submittal schedule in accordance with the Contract Documents; .7 failure of the CONTRACTOR to submit or update construction schedules in accordance with the Contract Documents; .8 failure of the CONTRACTOR to maintain a record of changes on drawings and documents; .9 failure of the CONTRACTOR to maintain weekly payroll reports; .10 failure of the CONTRACTOR to submit monthly subcontractor reports; .11 the CONTRACTOR'S neglect or unsatisfactory prosecution of the Work, including failure to clean up; or .12 failure of the CONTRACTOR to comply with any provision of the Contract Documents. .13 OWNER's disagreement with the recommendation of the Owner's Representative, provided the OWNER has provided a Written Notice to the CONTRACTOR specifying the reasons why OWNER does not agree with such recommendation. 14.4.2 When the above reasons for withholding payment are removed, the CONTRACTOR shall resubmit a statement for the value of Work performed. Payment will be made within thirty (30) calendar days of receipt of approved Application for Payment. 14.5 Delayed Payments: Should the OWNER fail to make payment to the CONTRACTOR of a sum named in any Application for Payment with which OWNER agrees and has approved for payment within thirty (30) calendar days after the day on which the OWNER received the mutually acceptable Application for Payment, then the OWNER will pay to the CONTRACTOR, in addition to the sum shown as due by such Application for Payment, interest thereon at the rate of one percent (1%) per month from date due until fully paid, which shall fully liquidate any injury to the CONTRACTOR growing out of such delay in payment. 14.6 Arrears: No money shall be paid by the OWNER upon any claim, debt, demand or account whatsoever,to any person, firm or corporation who is in arrears to the OWNER;and the OWNER shall be entitled to counterclaim and offset against any such debt, claim,demand or account so in arrears and no assignment or transfer of such debt, claim,demand or account, shall affect the right of the OWNER to so offset said amounts, and associated penalties and interest if applicable, against the same. 00700 04-2020 Page 37 General Conditions 14.7 Substantial Completion: 14.7.1 If a Certificate of Occupancy is required by public authorities having jurisdiction over the Work, said certificate shall be issued before the Work or any portion thereof is considered substantially complete. When the CONTRACTOR considers that the Work, or a portion thereof which the OWNER agrees to accept separately, is substantially complete, the CONTRACTOR shall notify Owner's Representative and request a determination as to whether the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete. If Owner's Representative does not consider the Work substantially complete, Owner's Representative will notify the CONTRACTOR giving reasons therefor. Failure on the OWNER's part to list a reason does not alter the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. After satisfactorily completing items identified by Owner's Representative, the CONTRACTOR shall then submit another request for Owner's Representative to determine substantial completion. If Owner's Representative considers the Work substantially complete, Owner's Representative will prepare and deliver a certificate of Substantial Completion which shall establish the date of Substantial Completion,shall include a punch list of items to be completed or corrected before final payment, shall establish the time within which the CONTRACTOR shall finish the punch list, and shall establish responsibilities of the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR for security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work, warranty and insurance. Failure to include an item on the punch list does not alter the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. The certificate of Substantial Completion shall be signed by the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR to evidence acceptance of the responsibilities assigned to them in such certificate. 14.7.2 The OWNER shall have the right to exclude the CONTRACTOR from the Work after the date of Substantial Completion, but the OWNER will allow the CONTRACTOR reasonable access to complete or correct items on the punch list. 14.8 Partial Utilization: The OWNER, at the OWNER's sole option, shall have the right to take possession of and use any completed or partially completed portion of the Work regardless of the time for completing the entire Work. The OWNER's exercise of such use and possession shall not be construed to mean that the OWNER acknowledges that any part of the Work so possessed and used is substantially complete or that it is accepted by OWNER, and the OWNER's exercise of such use and possession shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR of its responsibility to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 14.9 Final Inspection: Upon Written Notice from the CONTRACTOR that the entire Work or an agreed portion thereof is complete,Owner's Representative will make a final inspection with the CONTRACTOR and provide Written Notice of all particulars in which this inspection reveals that the Work is incomplete or defective. The CONTRACTOR shall immediately take such measures as are necessary to complete such Work or remedy such deficiencies. 14.10 Final Application for Payment: The CONTRACTOR may make application for final payment following the procedure for progress payments after the CONTRACTOR has completed all such corrections to the satisfaction of Owner's Representative and delivered the following documents: .1 Three (3)complete operating and maintenance manuals, each containing maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, and other documentation required by the Contract Documents; .2 Record documents(as provided in paragraph 6.10); .3 Consent of surety, if any, to final payment. If surety is not provided, complete and legally effective releases or waivers (satisfactory to the OWNER) of all claims arising out of or filed in connection with the Work; 00700 04-2020 Page 38 General Conditions .4 Certificate evidencing that insurance required by the Supplemental General Conditions will remain in force after final payment and through any warranty period; .5 Non-Use of Asbestos Affidavit(After Construction); and .6 Any other documentation called for in the Contract Documents. 14.11 Final Payment and Acceptance: 14.11.1 If, on the basis of observation of the Work during construction, final inspection, and review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation as required by the Contract Documents, Owner's Representative is satisfied that the Work has been completed and the CONTRACTOR's other obligations under the Contract Documents have been fulfilled, Owner's Representative will recommend the final Application for Payment and thereby notify the OWNER. If the OWNER agrees with the recommendation of the Owner's Representative, the OWNER will pay to the CONTRACTOR the balance due the CONTRACTOR under the terms of the Contract. 14.11.2 As Contract Time is measured to Final Completion, Owner's Representative will issue a letter of final acceptance to the CONTRACTOR which establishes the Final Completion date and initiates any warranty period. 14.11.3 Final payment is considered to have taken place when the CONTRACTOR or any of its representatives negotiates the OWNER's final payment check, whether labeled final or not, for cash or deposits check in any financial institution for its monetary return. 14.12 Waiver of Claims: The making and acceptance of final payment will constitute: .1 a waiver of claims by the OWNER against the CONTRACTOR, except claims arising from unsettled claims, from defective Work appearing after final inspection, from failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of any warranty specified therein, or from the CONTRACTOR's continuing obligations under the Contract Documents; and .2 a waiver of all claims by the CONTRACTOR against the OWNER other than those previously made in writing and still unsettled. ARTICLE 15-SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION 15.1 OWNER May Suspend Work Without Cause and for Convenience: At any time and without cause and for convenience,the OWNER may suspend the Work or any portion thereof for a period of not more than ninety(90)calendar days by written agreement or by Written Notice to the CONTRACTOR which will fix the date on which the Work will be resumed. The CONTRACTOR shall resume the Work on the date so fixed. The CONTRACTOR may be allowed an adjustment in the Contract Amount or an extension of the Contract Times,or both,directly attributable to any such suspension if the CONTRACTOR makes an approved Claim therefor as provided in Article 11 and Article 12. 15.2 OWNER May Terminate Without Cause: Upon seven(7)calendar days'Written Notice to the CONTRACTOR,the OWNER may,without cause and without prejudice to any right or remedy of the OWNER, elect to terminate the Agreement. In such case, the CONTRACTOR shall be paid (without duplication of any items): .1 for completed and acceptable Work executed in accordance with the Contract Documents prior to the effective date of termination; 00700 04-2020 Page 39 General Conditions .2 for all claims incurred in settlement of terminated contracts with Suppliers, Subcontractors,and others. The CONTRACTOR agrees to negotiate in good faith with Subcontractors, Suppliers and others to mitigate the OWNER's cost CONTRACTOR shall include in any subcontract or purchase order language that provides that if the Agreement is terminated without cause, the Subcontractor and Suppliers will only be paid for work performed or materials and equipment supplied and shall not have any other claims against CONTRACTOR or OWNER; CONTRACTOR shall not be paid for any profit or overhead for Work not completed. 15.3 OWNER May Terminate With Cause: 15.3.1 Upon the occurrence of any one or more of the following events: .1 if the CONTRACTOR persistently fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents; .2 if the CONTRACTOR disregards laws or regulations of any public body having jurisdiction; .3 if the CONTRACTOR disregards the authority of Owner's Representative; .4 if the CONTRACTOR makes fraudulent statements; .5 if the CONTRACTOR fails to maintain a work force adequate to accomplish the Work within the Contract Time; .6 if the CONTRACTOR fails to make adequate progress and endangers successful completion of the Contract; or .7 if the CONTRACTOR otherwise violates any provisions of the Contract Documents; The OWNER may, after giving the CONTRACTOR(and the surety, if any)seven (7)calendar days'Written Notice terminate the services of the CONTRACTOR. The OWNER,at its option, may proceed with negotiation with surety for completion of the Work. Alternatively,the OWNER may under these circumstances exclude the CONTRACTOR from the site and take possession of the Work (without liability to the CONTRACTOR for trespass or conversion), incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the site or for which the OWNER has paid the CONTRACTOR but which are stored elsewhere,and finish the Work as the OWNER may deem expedient. In such case the CONTRACTOR shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the Work is finished. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Amount exceeds all claims, costs, losses and damages sustained by the OWNER arising out of or resulting from completing the Work,such excess will be paid to the CONTRACTOR. If such claims,costs, losses and damage exceed such unpaid balance, the CONTRACTOR or surety shall pay the difference to the OWNER. 15.3.2 Where the CONTRACTOR's services have been so terminated by the OWNER, the termination will not affect any rights or remedies of the OWNER against the CONTRACTOR and surety then existing or which may thereafter accrue. Any retention or payment of amounts due the CONTRACTOR by the OWNER will not release the CONTRACTOR from liability. In the event the OWNER terminates the Contract with cause, the OWNER may reject any and all bids submitted by the CONTRACTOR for up to three(3)years. 00700 04-2020 Page 40 General Conditions 15.4 CONTRACTOR May Stop Work or Terminate: If through no act or fault of the CONTRACTOR,the Work is suspended for a period of more than ninety(90)calendar days by the OWNER or under an order of court or other public authority, or (except during disputes) Owner's Representative fails to forward for processing any mutually acceptable Application for Payment within thirty (30) calendar days after it is submitted, or(except during disputes)the OWNER fails for sixty(60)calendar days after it is submitted to pay the CONTRACTOR any sum finally determined by the OWNER to be due, then the CONTRACTOR may, upon seven(7)calendar days'Written Notice to the OWNER,and provided the OWNER does not remedy such suspension or failure within that time, terminate the Agreement and recover from the OWNER payment on the same terms as provided in paragraph 15.2. In lieu of terminating the Agreement and without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if(except during disputes)Owner's Representative has failed to forward for processing any mutually acceptable Application for Payment within thirty(30)calendar days after it is submitted, or (except during disputes) the OWNER has failed for sixty (60) calendar days after it is submitted to pay the CONTRACTOR any sum finally determined by the OWNER to be due, the CONTRACTOR may upon seven (7) calendar days' Written Notice to the OWNER stop the Work until payment of all such amounts due the CONTRACTOR, including interest thereon. The provisions of this paragraph 15.4 are not intended to preclude the CONTRACTOR from making a Claim under Article 11 and Article 12 for an increase in Contract Amount or Contract Times or otherwise for expenses or damage directly attributable to the CONTRACTOR's stopping Work as permitted by this paragraph. ARTICLE 16-DISPUTE RESOLUTION 16.1 Filing of Claims: 16.1.1 Claims arising from the circumstances identified in paragraphs 3.2, 4.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.4, 6.4.2, 6.11.5.2, 6.17, 7.5, 8.6,9.5, 10.4.2, 13.8, 15.1, 15.2, 15.3,or 15.4,or other occurrences or events,shall be made by Written Notice delivered by the party making the Claim to the other party within thirty (30) calendar days after the start of the occurrence or event giving rise to the Claim and stating the general nature of the Claim. Notice of the amount of the Claim with supporting data shall be delivered within thirty (30) calendar days after Written Notice of Claim is delivered by claimant and shall represent that the adjustment claimed covers all known amounts to which claimant is entitled. 16.1.2 Within thirty(30)calendar days of receipt of notice of the amount of the Claim with supporting data,Owner's Representative and the CONTRACTOR shall meet to discuss the Claim, after which an offer of settlement or notification of no settlement offer will be made to claimant. If claimant is not satisfied with the proposal presented, claimant shall have thirty(30)calendar days in which to: .1 submit additional supporting data requested by the other party; .2 modify the initial Claim; or .3 request Alternative Dispute Resolution. 16.2 Alternative Dispute Resolution: 16.2.1 If a dispute exists concerning a Claim, the parties agree to use the following procedure prior to pursuing any other available remedies. The OWNER reserves the right to include E/A as a party. 16.2.2 Negotiating with Previously Uninvolved Personnel: Either party may make a written request for a meeting to be held between representatives of each party within fourteen (14) calendar days of the request or such later period that the parties may agree to. Each party shall endeavor to include, at a minimum, one (1) previously uninvolved senior level decision maker empowered to negotiate on behalf of their organization. The purpose of this and subsequent meetings will be good faith negotiations of the matters constituting the dispute. Negotiations shall be concluded within thirty(30)calendar days of the first meeting, unless mutually agreed otherwise. This step may 00700 04-2020 Page 41 General Conditions be waived by written agreement of both parties, in which event the parties may proceed directly to mediation as described below. 16.2.3 Mediation: 16.2.3.1 If the procedure described in paragraph 16.2.2 proves unsuccessful or is waived pursuant to its terms, the parties shall initiate the mediation process. The parties agree to select within thirty(30)calendar days one (1) mediator trained in mediation skills, to assist with resolution of the dispute. The OWNER and the CONTRACTOR agree to act in good faith in the selection of the mediator and to give consideration to qualified individuals nominated to act as mediator. Nothing in this agreement prevents the parties from relying on the skills of a person who also is trained in the subject matter of the dispute and/or a contract interpretation expert. 16.2.3.2 Mediation is a forum in which an impartial person, the mediator, facilitates communication between parties to promote reconciliation, settlement, or understanding among them. The parties hereby agree that mediation, at a minimum, shall provide for 1)conducting an on-site investigation, if appropriate, by the mediator for fact-gathering purposes, 2) a meeting of all parties for the exchange of points of view and 3) separate meetings between the mediator and each party to the dispute for the formulation of resolution alternatives. The parties agree to participate in mediation in good faith for up to thirty(30)calendar days from the date of the first mediation session, unless mutually agreed otherwise. Should the parties fail to reach a resolution of the dispute through mediation, then each party is released to pursue other remedies available to them. ARTICLE 17-RIGHT TO AUDIT 17.1 Right to Audit: Whenever the OWNER enters into any type of contractual arrangement with the CONTRACTOR, then the CONTRACTOR's "records" shall upon reasonable notice be open to inspection and subject to audit and/or reproduction during normal business working hours. The OWNER's representative, or an outside representative engaged by the OWNER, may perform such audits. The CONTRACTOR shall maintain all records relating to this Agreement for four (4) years from the date of final payment under this Agreement, or until pending litigation has been completely and fully resolved, whichever occurs later. 17.1.1 The OWNER shall have the exclusive right to examine the records of the CONTRACTOR. The term "records"as referred to herein shall include any and all information, materials and data of every kind and character, including without limitation records, books, papers, documents,contracts,schedules,commitments,arrangements, notes, daily diaries, reports, drawings, receipts, vouchers and memoranda, and any and all other agreements, sources of information and matters that may, in the OWNER's judgment, have any bearing on or pertain to any matters, rights, duties or obligations under or covered by any contract document. Such records shall include(hard copy, as well as computer-readable data if it can be made available),written policies and procedures,time sheets, payroll registers, cancelled checks, personnel file data, correspondence, general ledger entries, and any other record in the CONTRACTOR's possession which may have a bearing on matters of interest to the OWNER in connection with the CONTRACTOR's dealings with the OWNER(all of the foregoing are hereinafter referred to as "records"). In addition,the CONTRACTOR shall permit interviews of employees as well as agents, representatives, vendors, subcontractors and other third parties paid by the CONTRACTOR to the extent necessary to adequately permit evaluation and verification of the following: a) The CONTRACTOR's compliance with contract requirements; b) The CONTRACTOR's compliance with the OWNER'S business ethics policies; and c) If necessary, the extent of the Work performed by the CONTRACTOR at the time of contract termination. 17.1.2 The CONTRACTOR shall require all payees(examples of payees include subcontractors,insurance agents, material suppliers, etc.) to comply with the provisions of this Article 17 by securing the requirements hereof in a 00700 04-2020 Page 42 General Conditions written agreement between the CONTRACTOR and payee. Such requirements include a flow-down right of audit provision in contracts with payees that also apply to subcontractors and sub-subcontractors, material suppliers,etc. The CONTRACTOR shall cooperate fully and shall require Related Parties and all of the CONTRACTOR's subcontractors to cooperate fully in furnishing or in making available to the OWNER from time to time whenever requested, in an expeditious manner, any and all such information, materials, and data. 17.1.3 The OWNER's authorized representative or designee shall have reasonable access to the CONTRACTOR's facilities, shall be allowed to interview all current or former employees to discuss matters pertinent to the performance of this Agreement, and shall be provided adequate and appropriate work space in order to conduct audits in compliance with this Article 17. 17.1.4 If an audit inspection or examination in accordance with this Article 17 discloses overpricing or overcharges of any nature by the CONTRACTOR to the OWNER in excess of one-half of one percent(.5%)of the total contract billings, then the reasonable actual cost of the OWNER's audit shall be reimbursed to the OWNER by the CONTRACTOR. Any adjustments and/or payments,which must be made as a result of any such audit or inspection of the CONTRACTOR's invoices and/or records, shall be made within a reasonable amount of time(not to exceed 90 days)from presentation of the OWNER's findings to the CONTRACTOR. 17.1.5 The CONTRACTOR shall take reasonable actions to prevent any actions or conditions which could result in a conflict with the OWNER's best interests. These obligations shall apply to the activities of the CONTRACTOR's employees, agents, subcontractors, etc. in their dealings and relations with the OWNER's current and former employees and their relatives. For example,the CONTRACTOR's employees,agents or subcontractors should not make or provide to be made any employment, gifts, extravagant entertainment, payments, loans or other considerations to the OWNER's representatives, employees or their relatives. 17.1.E It is also understood and agreed by the CONTRACTOR that any solicitation of gifts or any other item of value by anyone representing the OWNER is to be reported within two (2) business working days to the OWNER at the following telephone number: 512-218-5401. Failure to report any such solicitations or offers shall be deemed a material breach of contract entitling the OWNER to pursue damages resulting from the failure to comply with this provision. ARTICLE 18-MISCELLANEOUS 18.1 Venue: In the event of any suit at law or in equity involving the Contract, venue shall be in Williamson County, Texas and the laws of the state of Texas shall apply to Contract interpretation and enforcement. 18.2 Extent of Agreement: This Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR and supersedes all prior negotiations, representations or agreements,either written or oral. 18.3 Cumulative Remedies: The rights and remedies available to the parties are not to be construed in any way as a limitation of any rights and remedies available to any or all of them which are otherwise imposed or available by laws or regulations, by special warranty or guarantees or by other provisions of the Contract Documents, and the provisions of this paragraph will be as effective as if repeated specifically in the Contract Documents in connection with each particular duty, obligation, right and remedy to which they apply. 00700 04-2020 Page 43 General Conditions 18.4 Severability: If any word, phrase, clause, sentence or provision of the Contract, or the application of same to any person or set of circumstances is for any reason held to be unconstitutional, invalid or unenforceable,that finding shall only effect such word, phrase, clause, sentence or provision, and such finding shall not effect the remaining portions of this Contract; this being the intent of the parties in entering into the Contract; and all provisions of the Contract are declared to be severable for this purpose. 18.5 Independent Contractor The Contract shall not be construed as creating an employer/employee relationship,a partnership,or a joint venture. The CONTRACTOR's services shall be those of an independent contractor. The CONTRACTOR agrees and understands that the Contract does not grant any rights or privileges established for employees of the OWNER. 18.6 Prohibition of Gratuities The OWNER may, by Written Notice to the CONTRACTOR, terminate the Contract without liability if is determined by the OWNER that gratuities were offered or given by the CONTRACTOR or any agent or representative of the CONTRACTOR to any officer or employee of the OWNER with a view toward securing the Contract or securing favorable treatment with respect to the awarding or amending or the making of any determinations with respect to the performing of such Contract. In the event the Contract is terminated by the OWNER pursuant to this provision, the OWNER shall be entitled, in addition to any other rights and remedies, to recover or withhold the amount of the cost incurred by the CONTRACTOR in providing such gratuities. 18.7 Prohibition Against Personal Interest in Contracts No officer,employee, independent consultant,or elected official of the OWNER who is involved in the development, evaluation, or decision-making process of the performance of any solicitation shall have a financial interest, direct or indirect, in the Contract resulting from that solicitation. Any violation of this provision, with the knowledge, expressed or implied, of the CONTRACTOR shall render the Contract voidable by the OWNER. End of General Conditions 00700 04-2020 Page 44 General Conditions 00800 SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL CONDITIONS City of Round Rock Contract Forms Supplemental General Conditions Section 00800 SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL CONDITIONS TO AGREEMENT FOR CONSTRUCTION SERVICES The Supplemental General Conditions contained herein shall amend or supplement the General Conditions, Section 00700. ARTICLE 1 -DEFINITIONS 1.16 Engineer/Architect(E/A): Add the following: Name (Representative): Ryan Hansanuwat Firm: Mode Design Company Address: 103 Woods Lane City, States Zip: Cedar Park,TX 78613 Telephone: 512-553-6016 Facsimile: Email. ryan@modedc.us 1.27 Owner's Representative: Add the following: Name. Eric Dady Title: Project Manager Address: 212 Commerce Blvd. City, State, Zip: Round Rock,TX 78664 Telephone: 512-688-0350 Facsimile: Email. edady@roundrocktexas.gov ARTICLE 6-CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES 6.18 Liquidated Damages Add the following: 1. CONTRACTOR SHALL PAY LIQUIDATED DAMAGES IN THE AMOUNT OF One Thousand AND NO/I 00 DOLLARS $1,000.00 PER DAY FOR EACH DAY BEYOND THE DATE ESTABLISHED THEREFOR THAT THE CONTRACTOR FAILS TO ACHIEVE SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION, AND FOR WHICH OWNER IS UNABLE TO UTILIZE THE IMPROVEMENTS AND FACILITIES DUE TO THE FAILURE OF CONTRACTOR TO HAVE ACHIEVED SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE CONTRACT. END OF SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 1 00800 10-2015 Supplemental General Conditions 00090669 00900 SPECIAL CONDITIONS SECTION 01-INFORMATION 01-01 COPIES OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS FURNISHED The Agreement will be prepared in not less than two (2) (original signed) sets. The OWNER will furnish to the CONTRACTOR one (1) copy of conforming Contract Documents and Specifications unless otherwise requested. 01-02 GOVERNING CODES All construction as provided for under the Contract Documents shall be governed by any existing Resolutions, Codes and Ordinances,and any subsequent amendments or revisions thereto as set forth by the OWNER. 01-03 LOCATION The location of work shall be as set forth in the Notice to Bidders and as indicated in the Contract Documents. 01-04 USAGE OF WATER All water used during construction shall be provided by the OWNER and shall be metered. The OWNER shall specify the location from which the CONTRACTOR is to procure water. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for obtaining a bulk water permit from the OWNER and providing all apparatus necessary for procuring,storing, transporting and using water during construction. The CONTRACTOR shall strive to use no more water than reasonable to perform the work associated with this Contract and shall avoid waste.The CONTRACTOR will be required to pay for all water used if it is found that waste is occurring during construction. SECTION 02-SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS 02-01 CROSSING UTILITIES Prior to commencing the Work associated with this Contract, it shall be the CONTRACTOR's responsibility to make arrangements with the owners of utility companies to uncover their particular utility lines or otherwise confirm their location. Certain utility companies perform such services at their own expense,however,where such is not the case, the CONTRACTOR will cause such work to be done at his own expense. 02-02 UTILITY SERVICES FOR CONSTRUCTION The CONTRACTOR will be responsible for providing its own utility services while performing the Work associated with this Contract. Provision of said utility services shall be subsidiary to the various bid items and no additional payment will be made for this item. 00900-4-2020 Page 1 Special Conditions 00443643 02-03 WAGE RATES Wage Rates(Information From Chapter 2258,Texas Government Code Title 10) 2288.021.Duty of Government Entity to Pay Prevailing Wage Rates a. The State or any political subdivision of the State shall pay a worker employed by it or on behalf of it: (1) not less than the general prevailing rate of per diem wages for work of a similar character in the locality in which the work is performed; and (2) not less than the general prevailing rate of per diem wages for legal holiday and overtime work. b. Subsection(a)does not apply to maintenance work. c. A worker is employed on a public work for the purposes of this section if a Contractor or Subcontractor in the execution of a contract for the public work with the State, a political subdivision of the.State or any officer or public body of the State or a political subdivision of the State, employs the worker. 2258.023. Prevailing Wage Rates to be Paid by Contractor and Subcontractor; Penalty a. The contractor who is awarded a contract by a public body,or a Subcontractor of the Contractor, shall pay not less than the rates determined under Section 2258.022 to a worker employed by it in the execution of the contract. b. A Contractor or Subcontractor who violates this section shall pay to the state or a political subdivision of the state on whose behalf the contract is made,$60 for each worker employed for each calendar day or part of the day that the worker is paid less than the wage rates stipulated in the contract.A public body awarding a contract shall specify this penalty in the contract. c. A contractor or subcontractor does not violate this section if a public body awarding a contract does not determine the prevailing wage rates, and specify the rates in the contract as provided by Section 2258.022. d. The public body shall use any money collected under this section to offset the costs incurred in the administration of this chapter. e. A municipality is entitled to collect a penalty under this section only if the municipality has a population of more than 10,000. OO9OO4-2O2O Page 2 Special Conditions 00443643 2258.051.Duty of Public Body to Hear Complaints and Withhold Payment A public body awarding a contract, and an agent or officer of the public body, shall: 1. take cognizance of complaints of all violations of this chapter committed in the execution of the contract; and 2. withhold money forfeited or required to be withheld under this Chapter from the payments to the Contractor under the contract, except that the public body may not withhold money from other than the final payment without determination by the public body that there is good cause to believe that the Contractor has violated this chapter. Applicable wage rates to be used in Williamson and/or Travis County may be obtained from the U.S. Department of Labor website at the following web addresses: Construction Types: Heavy (Sewer/Water Treating Plant and Sewer/Incidental to Highway) http://wvvw.wdol.gov/wdol/scafiles/davisbacon/TX3 3.dvb?v=0 Construction Types: Heavy and Highway http://www.wdol.gov/wdol/scafiles/davisbacon/TX 16.dvb?v=0 Construction Type: Building http://www.wdol.gov/wdol/scafiles/davisbacon/TX76.dvb?v=1 02-04 LIMIT OF FINANCIAL RESOURCES The OWNER has a limited amount of financial resources committed to this Project; therefore, it shall be understood by all bidders that the OWNER may be required to change and/or delete any items which it may feel is necessary to accomplish all or part of the scope of work within its limit of financial resources. CONTRACTOR shall be entitled to no claim for damages or anticipated profits on any portion of work that may be omitted. At any time during the duration of this contract, the OWNER reserves the right to omit any work from this contract. Unit prices for all items previously approved in this contract shall be used to delete or add work per change order. 02-05 LIMITS OF WORK AND PAYMENT It shall be the obligation of the CONTRACTOR to complete all work included in this Contract, so authorized by the OWNER, as described in the contract documents and technical specifications. All items of work not specifically paid for in the bid proposal shall be included in the unit price bids. Any question arising as to the limits of work shall be left up to the interpretation of the E/A. 00900-4-2020 Page 3 Special Conditions 00443643 02-06 LAND FOR WORK OWNER provides, as indicated on Drawings, land upon which work is to be done, right-of-way for access to same and such other lands that are designated for the use of the CONTRACTOR.CONTRACTOR provides,at his expense and without liability of OWNER, any additional land and access thereto that may be required for his construction operations, temporary construction facilities, or for storage of materials. 02-07 DEVIATIONS OCCASIONED BY UTILITY STRUCTURES Whenever existing utilities, not indicated on the Drawings, present obstructions to grade and alignment of proposed improvements immediately notify engineer, who without delay, will determine if existing utilities are to be relocated, or grade and alignment of proposed improvements changed. Where necessary to move existing utilities and appurtenances as determined by the E/A, the E/A and CONTRACTOR will make relocation arrangements with the utility owner. The OWNER will not be liable for delay costs or damages due to relocations of utilities which hinder progress of the work. 02-08 CONSTRUCTION STAKING All construction staking required to complete the work associated with this contract shall be provided by the CONTRACTOR. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for determining the layout and extent of staking necessary to construct the improvements to the lines and grades shown in the Drawings and such staking shall be satisfactory to the E/A. The CONTRACTOR shall consult with the E/A and Owners Representative in the field for assistance as necessary. Sufficient staking materials and equipment shall be provided by the CONTRACTOR including but not limited to:paint, flagging,laths,hubs,blue tops,nails,hammers,measuring chains or tapes,transits and levels. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for setting and marking control and off-set points for measuring distances and angles,for shooting levels,and for any other items pertaining to construction staking. This item shall not be paid for separately and shall be considered subsidiary to other bid items. OO9OO4-2O2O Page 4 Special Conditions 00443643 SECTION 03-ACCESS AND TRAFFIC CONTROL Access shall be provided for the public and emergency vehicles at all possible times. When it becomes necessary to restrict access, the CONTRACTOR shall notify the OWNER and coordinate with the OWNER, all applicable agencies (i.e. Fire Department,E.M.S.,Public Works,etc.),residents,and affected parties.If emergency access is required during the work and such access is being hindered by the work,the CONTRACTOR will suspend the work if necessary, and otherwise endeavor to assist emergency personnel in accessing a location restricted by the work. Unless otherwise approved by the E/A, at the end of each day all lanes of traffic shall be opened to the public. The CONTRACTOR shall ensure compliance at all times with the accepted Traffic Control Plan for the project and shall be responsible for all maintenance, signing and safety precautions necessary for traffic control. These items shall be included in the bid item Traffic Control. 00900-4-2020 Page 5 Special Conditions 00443643 01000 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ITEM 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK The Work covered by these Specifications consists of furnishing all labor, equipment, appliances, materials and performing all operations in connection with the inspection and testing, complete in accordance with the Plans, and subject to the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. 1.02 GOVERNING TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS STREET, WATER, SEWER AND DRAINAGE IMPROVEMENTS The Round Rock Standard Specification Criteria Manual is hereby referred to and included in this contract as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein, and shall be applied to this project unless modified elsewhere as discussed below. The aforementioned Criteria Manual is the"Standard Specifications"section of the City of Round Rock Design and Construction Standards. The Standard Specifications may be accessed from the City of Round Rock website (www.roundrocktexas.gov) at the following web address: www.roundrocktexas.gov/dacs. Any adjustments, alterations,or additional information regarding Governing Technical Specifications are contained in the Plans (Drawings), Details and Notes described in Section 02000 of the Project Manual or are included in Attachment A at the end of this Technical Specifications Section. ITEM 2 CONTROL OF WORK 2.01 CLEAN-UP 2.01.1 CONSTRUCTION SITE During construction, the CONTRACTOR shall keep the site free and clean from all rubbish and debris and shall clean-up the site promptly when notified to do so by the E/A. The CONTRACTOR shall,at its own expense,maintain the streets and roads free from dust, mud, excess earth or debris which constitutes a nuisance or danger to the public using the thoroughfare, or the occupants of adjacent properties. Care shall be taken to prevent spillage on streets and roads over which hauling is done, and any such spillage or debris deposited on streets, due to the CONTRACTOR's operations, shall be immediately removed. Page 1 01000-4-2020 Technical Specifications 00443645 2.01.2 BACKWORK The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate his operations in such a manner as to prevent the amount of clean-up and completion of back works from becoming excessive. Should such a condition exist,the E/A may order all or portions of the work to cease and refuse to allow any work to commence until the back work is done to the Elks satisfaction. 2.02 GRADING The CONTRACTOR shall do such grading in and adjacent to the construction area associated with this contract as may be necessary to leave such areas in a neat and satisfactory condition approved by the E/A. ITEM 3 EXAMINATION AND REVIEW 3.01 EXAMINATION OF WORK The work covered under this Contract shall be examined and reviewed by the E/A, representatives of all governmental entities which have jurisdiction, and the Owner's Representative. The quality of material and the quality of installation of the improvements shall be to the satisfaction of the E/A. It shall be the CONTRACTOR'S responsibility for the construction methods and safety precautions in the undertaking of this Contract. 3.02 NOTIFICATION The E/A and the OWNER must be notified a minimum of 24-hours in advance of beginning construction,testing,or requiring presence of the E/A,Owner's or Owner's Representative. 3.03 CONSTRUCTION STAKING The E/A shall furnish the CONTRACTOR reference points and benchmarks that, in the E/A's opinion, provide sufficient information for the CONTRACTOR to perform construction staking. 3.04 PROTECTION OF STAKES,MARKS,ETC. All engineering and surveyor's stakes,marks,property comers, etc., shall be carefully preserved by the CONTRACTOR, and in case of destruction or removal during the course of this project, such stakes, marks, property comers, etc., shall be replaced by the CONTRACTOR at the CONTRACTOR's sole expense. Page 2 01000-4-2020 Technical Specifications 00443645 ITEM 4 PROTECTION AND PRECAUTION 4.01 WORK IN FREEZING WEATHER Portions of the work may continue as directed by the E/A. 4.02 PROTECTION OF TREES, PLANTS AND SHRUBS The CONTRACTOR shall take necessary precautions to preserve all existing trees, plants and shrubs but where it is justifiable and necessary the CONTRACTOR may remove trees and plants for construction right-of-way but only with approval of the E/A. 4.03 TRAFFIC CONTROL MEASURES AND BARRICADES Traffic control measures and barricades shall be installed in accordance with the Texas Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices and in other locations deemed necessary by the E/A, for the protection life and property. Under no circumstances will any existing road be permitted to remain closed over a weekend. No separate pay will be made for this item. Costs for this item shall be subsidiary to other items of work. 4.04 PROPERTY LINES AND MONUMENTS The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the protection,reference and resetting of property corner monuments if disturbed. 4.05 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS MATERIAL The CONTRACTOR shall at his own expense, make arrangement for the disposal of surplus material, such as rock,trees,brush and other unwanted backfill materials. 4.06 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES The Contractor shall,at his own expense,provide additional space as necessary for his operations and storage of materials. ITEM 5 MATERIALS 5.01 TRADE NAMES Except as specified otherwise, wherever in the specifications an article or class of material is designated by a trade name or by the name or catalog number of any maker, patentee,manufacturer,or dealer,such designations shall be taken as intending to mean and specify the articles described or another equal thereto in quality, finish, and serviceability for the purpose intended, as may be determined and judged by the E/A in his sole discretion. 5.02 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP No material which has been used by the CONTRACTOR for any temporary purpose whatever is to be incorporated in the permanent structure without the written consent of the E/A. Where materials or equipment are specified by a trade or brand name, it is not the intention of the OWNER to discriminate against an equal product of another Page 3 01000-4-2020 Technical Specifications 00443645 manufacturer, but rather to set a definite standard of quality for performance, and to establish an equal basis for the evaluation of bids. Where the words "equivalent", "proper"or"equal to"are used,they shall be understood to mean that the item referred to shall be "proper", the "equivalent" of, or"equal to" some other item, in the opinion or judgment of the E/A. Unless otherwise specified, all materials shall be the best of their respective kinds and shall be in all cases fully equal to approved samples. Notwithstanding that the words "or equal to" or other such expressions may be used in the specifications in connection with a material, manufactured article or process, the material, article or process specifically designated shall be used, unless a substitute is approved in writing by the E/A, and the E/A will have the right to require the use of such specifically designated material, article or process. Page 4 01000-4-2020 Technical Specifications 00443645 02000 PLANS, DETAILS AND NOTES If applicable, insert reference(s) to project plans; details; and notes Plans and specifications can be found on City of Round Rock Solicitations website. https://www.roundrocktexas.govfbusinesses/solicitations/ K1NNINGHAM HOUSE CITY OF ROUND ROCK PROJECT MANUAL ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS Table of n Co tents SPECIFICATIONS GROUP General Requirements Subgroup DIVISION 01 - I ENERAL REQUIREMENTS Facility Construction Subgroup DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE DIVISION 04 - MASONRY 044313.13 - Anchired Stone Masonry Veneer Pg. 1 047200 - Cast 'tone Masonry Pg. 12 DIVISION OS - ETALS 055000 - Metal Fabrications Pg. 21 055300 - Metal Gratings pg. 29 DIVISION 06 - OOD,PLASTICS,AND COMPOSITES 061053 - Misc-I laneous Rough Carpentry Pg. 35 064116 - Plastic,-Laminate-Faced Architectural Cabinets Pg. 42 DIVISION 07 - HERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 072500 - Weat er Barriers Pg. 49 074113.16 - Stan ng-Seam Metal Roof Panels Pg. 51 074600 - Siding Pg. 59 076200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Pg. 63 079200 - Joint Sealants pg. 72 DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS 081113 - Hollo Metal Doors and Frames Pg. 78 083513 - Folding Doors Pg. 86 087100 - Door Hardware Pg. 92 DIVISION 09 - FINISHES 092216 - Non-Structural Metal Framing Pg. 102 092900 - Gypsum Board Pg. 107 096513 - Resilient Base and Accessories Pg. 113 099113 - Exterior Painting Pg. 117 099123 - Interior Painting Pg. 125 099300 - Staining and Transparent Finishing Pg. 133 DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 101419 - Dimensional Letter Signage Pg. 138 101423 - Panel Signage Pg. 144 102113.19 - Plastic Toilet Compartments Pg. 149 102800 - Toilet,Bath,and Laundry Accessories Pg. 154 104413 - Fire Protection Cabinets Pg. 157 104416 - Fire Extinguishers Pg. 160 CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 SECTION 04,313.13-ANCHORED STONE MASONRY VENEER PART 1 -GE ERAL 1.1 REL A TED DOCUMENTS A. Dra � ings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Sup;elementary Conditions and Division OlSpecification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SU MARY A. Sec tion Includes: 1. I Stone masonry anchored to unit masonry backup. B. Rel.ted Requirements: 1. Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for exposed sheet metal flashing. 1.3 AC ION SUBMITTALS A. Prof uct Data: For each variety of stone, stone accessory, and manufactured product. B. Sa ples for Initial Selection: For colored mortar and other items involving color sele tion. 1.4 QU LITY ASSURANCE A. Inst Iler Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs experienced stonemasons and stone fitters. B. Mo kups: Build mockups to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for aterials and execution. 1. Build mockup of typical wall area as shown on Drawings. 2. Build mockups for each type of stone masonry in sizes approximately 48 inches (1200 mm) long by 48 inches (1200 mm) high by full thickness, including face and backup wythes and accessories. a. Include stone coping at top of mockup. b. Include a sealant-filled joint at least 16 inches (400 mm) long in mockup. c. Include through-wall flashing installed for a 24-inch (600-mm) length in corner of mockup approximately 16 inches (400 mm) down from top of mockup, with a 12-inch (300-mm) length of flashing left exposed to view (omit stone masonry above half of flashing). ANCHORED STONE 044313.13 MASONRY VENEER CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 3. Protect accepted mockups from the elements with weather-resistant membrane. 4. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 5. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp. B. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided. C. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for use with dispensing silos. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms, under cover, in a dry location, or in covered weatherproof dispensing silos. D. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Protection of Stone Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each days work. Cover partially completed stone masonry when construction is not in progress. 1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm) down both sides and hold cover securely in place. B. Stain Prevention: Immediately remove mortar and soil to prevent them from staining stone masonry face. 1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and mortar splatter using coverings spread on the ground and over the wall surface. 2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. 3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral finishes, from mortar droppings. 4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at end of each day to prevent rain from splashing mortar and dirt on completed stone masonry. C. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace stone masonry damaged by frost or freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. ANCHORED STONE 044313.13 MASONRY VENEER CITYOFR UND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F (4 deg C) and above and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than seven days after completing cleaning. D. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Advise installers of other work about specific requirements for placement of reinforcement, veneer anchors, flashing, and similar items to be built into stone masonry. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations for Stone: Obtain stone, from single quarry with resources to provide materials of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties. B. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of uniform quality for eac cementitious component from single manufacturer and each aggregate from sin le source or producer. C. Vari ties and Sources: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide stone of varieties and from sources complying with Section 044200 "Exterior Stone Cladding." 2.2 LIM ESTONE A. Material Standard: Comply with ASTM C 568. B. Varieties and Sources: Subject to compliance with requirements, Basis of Design stone: 1. Limestone (Ashlar): Cobra Stone Grey Lueders. 2. Limestone (Field): Cobra Stone Yellow Flagstone 2.3 MORTAR MATERIALS A. Regional Materials: Aggregate for mortar and grout shall be extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site. B. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction; natural color or white cement may be used as required to produce mortar color indicated. 1. Low-Alkali Cement: Not more than 0.60 percent total alkali when tested according to ASTM C 114. C. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. ANCHORED STONE 044313.13 MASONRY VENEER CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 D. Aggregate: ASTM C 144 and as follows: 1. For pointing mortar, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing No. 16 (1.18-mm)sieve. 2. White Aggregates: Natural white sand or ground white stone. 3. Colored Aggregates: Natural-colored sand or ground marble, granite, or other sound stone; of color necessary to produce required mortar color. E. Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in masonry mortar of composition indicated. F. Water: Potable. 2.4 VENEER ANCHORS A. Materials: 1. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M; with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2. B. Size: Sufficient to extend at least halfway, but not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm), through stone masonry and with at least a 5/8-inch (16-mm) cover on exterior face. C. Wire Veneer Anchors: Wire ties formed from W1.7 or 0.I48-inch-(3.8-mm-)diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire. 1. Ties are bent in the form of loops with legs not less than 15 inches (381 mm) in length and with last 2 inches (50 mm) bent at 90 degrees. 2. Ties are bent in the form of rectangular loops with ends bent downward for inserting into eyes projecting from masonry joint reinforcement specified in Section 042000 "Unit Masonry." 3. Ties are bent in the form of triangular loops designed to be attached to masonry joint reinforcement specified in Section 042000 "Unit Masonry" with vertical wires passing through ties and through eyes projecting from masonry joint reinforcement. D. Corrugated-Metal Veneer Anchors: Not less than 0.030-inch-(0.76-mm-) thick by 7/8- inch-(22-mm-)wide hot-dip galvanized -steel sheet with corrugations having a wavelength of 0.3 to 0.5 inch (7.6 to 13 mm) and an amplitude of 0.06 to 0.10 inch (1.5 to 2.5 mm). 2.5 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS A. Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing complying with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual " and as follows: 1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304, 0.016 inch (0.4 mm)thick. 2. Copper: ASTM B 370, Temper HOO or H01, cold-rolled copper sheet, I 0-oz.Isq. ft. (3-kg/sq. m)weight or 0.0135 inch (0.34 mm) thick for fully concealed flashing; I 6-oz./sq. ft. (5-kg/sq. m)weight or 0.0216 inch (0.55 mm)thick elsewhere. ANCHORED STONE 044313.13 MASONRY VENEER CITY OF RO ND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 3. Fabricate continuous flashings in sections 96 inches (2400 mm) long minimum, but not exceeding 12 feet (3.6 m). Provide splice plates at joints of formed, smooth metal flashing. 4. Fabricate through-wall metal flashing embedded in masonry from stainless steel, with ribs at 3-inch (75-mm) intervals along length of flashing to provide an integral mortar bond. 5. , Fabricate through-wall flashing with snaplock receiver on exterior face where indicated to receive counterfiashing. 6. i Fabricate through-wall flashing with drip edge unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate by extending flashing 1/2 inch (13 mm) out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30 degrees and hemmed. 7. ' Fabricate through-wall flashing with sealant stop unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate by bending metal back on itself 3/4 inch (19 mm) at exterior wall face and down into joint 3/8 inch (10 mm) to form a stop for retaining sealant backer rod. 8. Fabricate metal drip edges for ribbed metal flashing from plain metal flashing of same metal as ribbed flashing and extending at least 3 inches (75 mm) into wall with hemmed inner edge to receive ribbed flashing and form a hooked seam. Form hem on upper surface of metal so that completed seam will shed water. 9. , Metal Drip Edges: Fabricate from stainless steel. Extend at least 3 inches (75 mm) into wall and 1/2 inch (13 mm) out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30 degrees and hemmed. 10. Metal Sealant Stops: Fabricate from stainless steel. Extend at least 3 inches (75 mm) into wall and out to exterior wall face. At exterior wall face, bend metal back on itself for 3/4 inch (19 mm) and down into joint 3/8 inch (10 mm) to form a stop for retaining sealant backer rod. 11. Metal Expansion-Joint Strips: Fabricate from stainless steel to shapes indicated. 2.6 MISI ELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES A. Co 'I pressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1; com.ressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neorene, urethane, or PVC. B. Ce entitious Dampproofing for Limestone: Cementitious formulation recommended by ILI .nd nonstaining to stone, compatible with joint sealants, and noncorrosive to veneer anc ors and attachments. C. We:pNent Products: Use the following unless otherwise indicated: 1. Aluminum Weep Holes/Vents: One-piece, L-shaped units made from sheet aluminum, designed to fit into head joint and consisting of vertical channel with louvers stamped in web and with top flap to keep mortar out of head joint; painted to comply with Section 099113 - Exterior Painting, before installation, in color approved by Architect to match that of mortar. ANCHORED STONE 044313.13 MASONRY 'ENEER CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 2.7 MASONRY CLEANERS A. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing mortar and grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from stone masonry surfaces without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces; expressly approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and stone producer. 2.8 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate stone units in sizes and shapes required to comply with requirements indicated. 1. For limestone, comply with recommendations in ILI's "Indiana Limestone Handbook." B. Dress joints (bed and vertical) straight and at right angle to face unless otherwise indicated. Shape beds to fit supports. C. Cut and drill sinkages and holes in stone for anchors and supports. D. Carefully inspect stone at quarry or fabrication plant for compliance with requirements for appearance, material, and fabrication. Replace defective units before shipment. 1. Clean sawed backs of stone to remove rust stains and iron particles. E. Thickness of Stone: Provide thickness indicated, but not less than the following: 1. Thickness: 4 inches (100 mm) plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm) 2.9 MORTAR MIXES A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not use calcium chloride. 2. Use Portland cement-lime mortar unless otherwise indicated. 3. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be exposed to view, regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent. 4. Mixing Pointing Mortar: Thoroughly mix cementitious and aggregate materials together before adding water. Then mix again, adding only enough water to produce a damp, unworkable mix that will retain its form when pressed into a ball. Maintain mortar in this dampened condition for one to two hours. Add remaining water in small portions until mortar reaches required consistency. Use mortar within 30 minutes of final mixing; do not retemper or use partially hardened material. ANCHORED STONE 044313.13 MASONRY VENEER CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces indicated to receive stone masonry, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of stone masonry. B. Examine substrate to verify that dovetail slots, inserts, reinforcement, veneer anchors, flashing, and other items installed in substrates and required for or extending into stone masonry are correctly installed. C. Examine wall framing, sheathing, and weather-resistant sheathing paper to verify that stud locations are suitable for spacing of veneer anchors and that installation will result in a weatherproof covering. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Accurately mark stud centerlines on face of weather-resistant sheathing paper before beginning stone installation. B. Coat concrete and unit masonry backup with asphalt dampproofing. C. Clean dirty or stained stone surfaces by removing soil, stains, and foreign materials before setting. Clean stone by thoroughly scrubbing with fiber brushes and then drenching with clear water. Use only mild cleaning compounds that contain no caustic or harsh materials or abrasives. 3.3 SE1TING STONE MASONRY A. Perrm necessary field cutting and trimming as stone is set. 1. Use power saws to cut stone that is fabricated with saw-cut surfaces. Cut lines straight and true, with edges eased slightly to prevent snipping. 2. Use hammer and chisel to split stone that is fabricated with split surfaces. Make edges straight and true, matching similar surfaces that were shop or quarry fabricated. 3. Pitch face at field-split edges as needed to match stones that are not field split. B. Sort stone before it is placed in wall to remove stone that does not comply with requirements relating to aesthetic effects, physical properties, or fabrication, or that is otherwise unsuitable for intended use. C. Set stone to comply with requirements indicated on Drawings. Install supports, fasteners, and other attachments indicated or necessary to secure stone masonry in place. Set stone accurately in locations indicated with edges and faces aligned according to established relationships and indicated tolerances. D. Provide sealant joints of widths and at locations indicated. ANCHORED STONE 044313.13 MASONRY VENEER CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 1. Keep sealant joints free of mortar and other rigid materials. 2. Sealing joints is specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants." E. Install embedded flashing and weep holes at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated. 1. At sills, extend flashing not less than 4 inches (100 mm) at ends. 2. At ends of head and sill flashing, turn up not less than 2 inches (50 mm) to form end dams. 3. Interlock end joints of ribbed sheet metal flashing by overlapping ribs not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) or as recommended by flashing manufacturer, and seal lap with elastomeric sealant complying with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for application indicated. 4. Install metal drip edges and sealant stops with ribbed sheet metal flashing by interlocking hemmed edges to form hooked seam. Seal seam with elastomeric sealant complying with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for application indicated. 5. Extend sheet metal flashing 1/2 inch (13 mm) beyond masonry face at exterior, and turn flashing down to form a drip. 6. Install metal drip edges beneath flexible flashing at exterior wall face. Stop flexible flashing 1/2 inch (13 mm) back from exterior wall face and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal drip edge. 7. Install metal flashing termination beneath flexible flashing at exterior wall face. Stop flexible flashing 1/2 inch (13 mm) back from exterior wall face and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal flashing termination. F. Place weep holes and vents in joints where moisture may accumulate, including at base of cavity walls, above shelf angles, and at flashing. 1. Use aluminum weep holes/vents to form weep holes. 2. Space weep holes 16 inches (400 mm)o.c. 3. Place pea gravel in cavities as soon as practical to a height of not less than 2 inches (50 mm) above top of flashing, to maintain drainage. 4. Place cavity drainage material in cavities to comply with configuration requirements for cavity drainage material in "Miscellaneous Masonry Accessories"Article. G. Install vents in head joints at top of each continuous cavity at spacing indicated. Use aluminum weep holes/vents to form vents. 1. Close cavities off vertically and horizontally with blocking in manner indicated. Install through-wall flashing and weep holes above horizontal blocking. 3.4 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES A. Variation from Plumb: For vertical lines and surfaces, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), 3/8 inch in 20 feet (10 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch in 40 feet (13 mm in 12 m) or more. For external corners, expansion joints, control joints, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m) or 1/2 inch in 40 feet(13 mm in 12 m) or more. ANCHORED STONE 044313.13 MASONRY VENEER CITY OF RO ND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 B. Van tion from Level: For bed joints and lines of exposed lintels, sills, parapets, hori zontal grooves, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm n 6 m) or 1/2 inch in 40 feet(13 mm in 12 m)or more. C. Varition of Linear Building Line: For position shown in plan, do not exceed 1/2 inch in 20 f:et(13 mm in 6 m) or 3/4 inch in 40 feet (19 mm in 12 m) or more. D. Mea.ure variation from level, plumb, and position shown in plan as a variation of the aver:ge plane of each stone face from level, plumb, or dimensioned plane. E. Vari;tion in Mortar-Joint Thickness: Do not vary from joint size range indicated. F. Varia tion in Plane between Adjacent Stones: Do not exceed one-half of tolerance spe'ified for thickness of stone. 3.5 INS ALLATION OF ANCHORED STONE MASONRY A. Anc or stone masonry to concrete with corrugated-metal veneer anchors unless othei ise indicated. Secure anchors by inserting dovetailed ends into dovetail slots in con a rete. B. Anc or stone masonry to unit masonry with corrugated-metal veneer anchors unless otherwise indicated. Embed anchors in unit masonry mortar joints or grouted cells at a dist6nce of at least one-half of unit masonry thickness. C. Em1ed veneer anchors in mortar joints of stone masonry at least halfway, but not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm), through stone masonry and with at least a 5/8-inch (16- mm cover on exterior face. 1. Install continuous wire reinforcement in horizontal joints and attach to seismic veneer anchors as stone is set. D. Spa e anchors to provide not less than one anchor per 2 sq. ft. (0.2 sq. m) of wall area. Inst. II additional anchors within 12 inches (300 mm) of openings, sealant joints, and peri, eter at intervals not exceeding 12 inches (300 mm). E. Anc or stone trim with stone trim anchors where indicated. Install anchors by fastening to s bstrate and inserting tabs and dowels into kerfs and holes in stone units. Provide com.ressible filler in ends of dowel holes and bottoms of kerfs to prevent end bearing of d.wels and anchor tabs on stone. Fill remainder of anchor holes and kerfs with mo ar. F. Set tone in full bed of mortar with full head joints unless otherwise indicated. Build anc ors into mortar joints as stone is set. 1. ' Slope beds toward cavity to minimize mortar protrusions into cavity. 2. Do not attempt to trowel or remove mortar fins protruding into cavity. G. Rak' out joints for pointing with mortar to depth of not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) before setting mortar has hardened. Rake joints to uniform depths with square bottoms and clean sides. ANCHOREDSTONE 044313.13 MASONRY ;ENEER CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 3.6 POINTING A. Prepare stone-joint surfaces for pointing with mortar by removing dust and mortar particles. Where setting mortar was removed to depths greater than surrounding areas, apply pointing mortar in layers not more than 3/8 inch (10 mm) deep until a uniform depth is formed. B. Point stone joints by placing and compacting pointing mortar in layers of not more than 3/8 inch (10 mm) deep. Compact each layer thoroughly and allow to it become thumbprint hard before applying next layer. C. Tool joints, when pointing mortar is thumbprint hard, with a smooth jointing tool to produce the following joint profile: 1. Joint Profile: Concave. 3.7 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace stone masonry of the following description: 1. Broken, chipped, stained, or otherwise damaged stone. Stone may be repaired if methods and results are approved by Architect. 2. Defective joints. 3. Stone masonry not matching approved samples and mockups. 4. Stone masonry not complying with other requirements indicated. B. Replace in a manner that results in stone masonry matching approved samples and mockups, complying with other requirements, and showing no evidence of replacement. C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean stone masonry as work progresses. Remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean stone masonry as follows: 1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. 2. Test cleaning methods on mockup; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before cleaning stone masonry. 3. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent, polyethylene film, or waterproof masking tape. 4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaner; remove cleaner promptly by rinsing thoroughly with clear water. 5. Clean stone masonry by bucket and brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical Note No. 20, Revised II, using job-mixed detergent solution. 6. Clean stone masonry with proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. ANCHORED STONE 044313.13 MASONRY VENEER CITY OF RO ND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 7. ', Clean limestone masonry to comply with recommendations in ILI's "Indiana Limestone Handbook." 3.8 EX ESS MATERIALS AND WASTE A. Exc:ss Stone: Stack excess stone where directed by Owner for Owner's use. B. Disppsal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including mortar and excess or sdil-contaminated sand, by crushing and mixing with fill material as fill is placed. 1. Crush masonry waste to less than 4 inches (100 mm) in greatest dimension. 2. Mix masonry waste with at least 2 parts of specified fill material for each part of masonry waste. Fill material is specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving." 3. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches (450 mm) of finished grade. C. Excss Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, s described above, and other waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property. END OF SECTION 044313.13 ANCHORED..STONE 044313.13 MASONRY ENEER CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 SECTION 047200- CAST STONE MASONRY PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Cast-stone trim including the following: a. Column covers. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 042000 "Unit Masonry"for installing cast-stone units in unit masonry. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. For cast-stone units, include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for cast-stone units. Include dimensions, details of reinforcement and anchorages if any, and indication of finished faces. 1. Include building elevations showing layout of units and locations of joints and anchors. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For colored mortar. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer of cast-stone units similar to those indicated for this Project, that has sufficient production capacity to manufacture required units, and is a plant certified by the Cast Stone Institute, the Architectural Precast Association, or the Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute for Group A, Category AT. B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated. CAST STONE MASONRY 047200 CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockup of typical wall area. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Coo dinate delivery of cast stone with unit masonry work to avoid delaying the Work and to minimize the need for on-site storage. B. Pac , handle, and ship cast-stone units in suitable packs or pallets. 1. Lift with wide-belt slings; do not use wire rope or ropes that might cause staining. Move cast-stone units if required, using dollies with wood supports. 2. Store cast-stone units on wood skids or pallets with nonstaining, waterproof covers, securely tied. Arrange to distribute weight evenly and to prevent damage to units. Ventilate under covers to prevent condensation. C. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp. D. Store mortar aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination can be avoided. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements in TMS 602/ACl 530.1/ASCE 6. 1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F (4 deg C) and above and will remain so until cast stone has dried, but no fewer than seven days after completing cleaning. B. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations for Cast Stone: Obtain cast-stone units from single source from single manufacturer. B. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color, from one manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one source or producer for each aggregate. 2.2 CAST-STONE MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 1364. CAST STONE MASONRY 047200 CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 B. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I or Type III, containing not more than 0.60 percent total alkali when tested according to ASTM C 114. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce cast-stone color indicated. C. Coarse Aggregates: Granite, quartz, or limestone complying with ASTM C 33/C 33M; gradation and colors as needed to produce required cast-stone textures and colors. D. Fine Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone complying with ASTM C 33/C 33M, gradation and colors as needed to produce required cast-stone textures and colors. E. Color Pigment: ASTM C 979/C 979M, synthetic mineral-oxide pigments or colored water-reducing admixtures; color stable, nonfading, and resistant to lime and other alkalis. F. Admixtures: Use only admixtures specified or approved in writing by Architect. 1. Do not use admixtures that contain more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious materials. Do not use admixtures containing calcium chloride. 2. Use only admixtures that are certified by manufacturer to be compatible with cement and other admixtures used. 3. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260/C 260M. 4. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 5. Water-Reducing, Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. 6. Water-Reducing, Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type E. G. Reinforcement: Deformed steel bars complying with ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420). Use galvanized or epoxy-coated reinforcement when covered with less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm)of cast-stone material. 1. Epoxy Coating: ASTM A 775/A 775M. 2. Galvanized Coating: ASTM A 767/A 767M. 2.3 CAST-STONE UNITS A. Cast-Stone Units: Comply with ASTM C 1364. 1. Units shall be manufactured using the wet-cast method. 2. Units shall be resistant to freezing and thawing as determined by laboratory testing according to ASTM C 666/C 666M, Procedure A, as modified by ASTM C 1364. B. Fabricate units with sharp arris and accurately reproduced details, with indicated texture on all exposed surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 1. Slope exposed horizontal surfaces 1:12 to drain unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide raised fillets at backs of sills and at ends indicated to be built into jambs. 3. Provide drips on projecting elements unless otherwise indicated. C. Fabrication Tolerances: CAST STONE MASONRY 047200 CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 1. Variation in Cross Section: Do not vary from indicated dimensions by more than 1/8 inch (3 mm). 2. Variation in Length: Do not vary from indicated dimensions by more than 1/360 of the length of unit or 1/8 inch (3 mm), whichever is greater, but in no case by more than 1/4 inch (6 mm). 3. Warp, Bow, and Twist: Not to exceed 1/360 of the length of unit or 1/8 inch (3 mm), whichever is greater. 4. Location of Grooves, False Joints, Holes, Anchorages, and Similar Features: Do not vary from indicated position by more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) on formed surfaces of units and 3/8 inch (10 mm) on unformed surfaces. D. Cure Units as Follows: 1. Cure units in enclosed, moist curing room at 95 to 100 percent relative humidity and temperature of 100 deg F (38 deg C) for 12 hours or 70 deg F (21 deg C)for 16 hours. 2. Keep units damp and continue curing to comply with one of the following: a. No fewer than five days at mean daily temperature of)70 deg F (21 deg C) or above. b. No fewer than six days at mean daily temperature of 60 deg F (16 deg C) or above. c. No fewer than seven days at mean daily temperature of 50 deg F (10 deg C) or above. d. No fewer than eight days at mean daily temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg C) or above. E. Acid etch units after curing to remove cement film from surfaces to be exposed to view. F. Col rs and Textures: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. G. Col rs and Textures: Provide units with fine-grained texture and buff color resembling smooth-finished Indiana limestone. H. Colqrs and Textures: Provide units with fine texture and red-brown color resembling brovinstone on adjacent buildings. 2.4 MORTAR MATERIALS A. Provide mortar materials that comply with Section 042000 "Unit Masonry." B. Regional Materials: Aggregate for mortar shall be manufactured within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site from materials that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within 500 miles (800 km)of Project site. C. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated. D. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. CAST STONE MASONRY 047200 CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 E. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime containing no other ingredients. F. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91/C 91M. G. Colored Cement Product: Packaged blend made from portland cement and hydrated lime and mortar pigments, all complying with specified requirements, and containing no other ingredients. 1. Formulate blend as required to produce color indicated or, if not indicated, as selected from manufacturer's standard colors. 2. Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of portland cement by weight. 3. Pigments shall not exceed 5 percent of masonry cement by weight. H. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144. 1. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or crushed stone. 2. For joints less than 1/4 inch (6 mm)thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve. 3. White-Mortar Aggregates: Natural white sand or crushed white stone. 4. Colored Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone of color necessary to produce required mortar color. I. Water: Potable. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Anchors: Type and size indicated, fabricated from Type 304 stainless steel complying with ASTM A 240/A 240M, ASTM A 276, or ASTM A 666. B. Dowels: 1/2-inch-(1 2-mm-)diameter round bars, fabricated from Type 304 stainless steel complying with ASTM A 240/A 240M, ASTM A 276, or ASTM A 666. C. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use by cast-stone manufacturer and expressly approved by cleaner manufacturer for use on cast stone and adjacent masonry materials. 2.6 MORTAR MIXES A. Comply with requirements in Section 042000 "Unit Masonry"for mortar mixes. B. Do not use admixtures including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. CAST STONE MASONRY 047200 CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 2. Use portland cement-lime mortar unless otherwise indicated. C. Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. 1. For setting mortar, use Type N. 2. For pointing mortar, use Type N. 2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Engage a qualified independent testing agency to sample and test cast-stone units according to ASTM C 1364. 1. Include one test for resistance to freezing and thawing. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 SETTING CAST STONE IN MORTAR A. Install cast-stone units to comply with requirements in Section 042000 "Unit Masonry." B. Set cast stone as indicated on Drawings. Set units accurately in locations indicated, with edges and faces aligned according to established relationships and indicated tolerances. 1. Install anchors, supports, fasteners, and other attachments indicated or necessary to secure units in place. 2. Coordinate installation of cast stone with installation of flashing specified in other Sections. C. Wet joint surfaces thoroughly before applying mortar or setting in mortar. D. Set units in full bed of mortar with full head joints unless otherwise indicated. 1. Set units with joints 1/4 to 3/8 inch (6 to 10 mm)wide unless otherwise indicated. 2. Build anchors and ties into mortar joints as units are set. 3. Fill dowel holes and anchor slots with mortar. 4. Fill collar joints solid as units are set. 5. Build concealed flashing into mortar joints as units are set. 6. Keep head joints in copings and between other units with exposed horizontal surfaces open to receive sealant. 7. Keep joints at shelf angles open to receive sealant. CAST STONE MASONRY 047200 CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINN INGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 E. Rake out joints for pointing with mortar to depths of not less than 3/4 inch (19 mm). Rake joints to uniform depths with square bottoms and clean sides. Scrub faces of units to remove excess mortar as joints are raked. F. Point mortar joints by placing and compacting mortar in layers not greater than 3/8 inch (10 mm). Compact each layer thoroughly and allow it to become thumbprint hard before applying next layer. G. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard. Use a smooth plastic jointer larger than joint thickness. H. Rake out joints for pointing with sealant to depths of not less than 3/4 inch (19 mm). Scrub faces of units to remove excess mortar as joints are raked. I. Point joints with sealant to comply with applicable requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants." 1. Prime cast-stone surfaces to receive sealant and install compressible backer rod in joints before applying sealant unless otherwise indicated. J. Provide sealant joints at head joints of copings and other horizontal surfaces; at expansion, control, and pressure-relieving joints; and at locations indicated. 1. Keep joints free of mortar and other rigid materials. 2. Build in compressible foam-plastic joint fillers where indicated. 3. Form joint of width indicated, but not less than 3/8 inch (10 mm) 4. Prime cast-stone surfaces to receive sealant and install compressible backer rod in joints before applying sealant unless otherwise indicated. 5. Prepare and apply sealant of type and at locations indicated to comply with applicable requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants." 3.3 SETTING ANCHORED CAST STONE WITH SEALANT-FILLED JOINTS A. Set cast stone as indicated on Drawings. Set units accurately in locations indicated, with edges and faces aligned according to established relationships and indicated tolerances. 1. Install anchors, supports, fasteners, and other attachments indicated or necessary to secure units in place. 2. Shim and adjust anchors, supports, and accessories to set cast stone in locations indicated with uniform joints. B. Keep cavities open where unfilled space is indicated between back of cast-stone units and backup wall; do not fill cavities with mortar or grout. C. Fill anchor holes with sealant. 1. Where dowel holes occur at pressure-relieving joints, provide compressible material at ends of dowels. CAST STONE MASONRY 047200 CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 D. Set cast stone supported on clip or continuous angles on resilient setting shims. Use matrial of thickness required to maintain uniform joint widths. Hold shims back from fac; of cast stone a distance at least equal to width of joint. E. Keep joints free of mortar and other rigid materials. Remove temporary shims and spay ers from joints after anchors and supports are secured in place and cast-stone unit. are anchored. Do not begin sealant installation until temporary shims and spacers are emoved. 1. Form open joint of width indicated, but not less than 3/8 inch (10 mm) F. Pri �e cast-stone surfaces to receive sealant and install compressible backer rod in join is before applying sealant unless otherwise indicated. G. Pre,'Iare and apply sealant of type and at locations indicated to comply with applicable req i irements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants." 3.4 INS ALLATION TOLERANCES A. Varia tion from Plumb: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum. B. Varia tion from Level: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum. C. Varktion in Joint Width: Do not vary joint thickness more than 1/8 inch in 36 inches (3 mm in 900 mm) or one-fourth of nominal joint width, whichever is less. D. Varition in Plane between Adjacent Surfaces (Lipping): Do not vary from flush alig ment with adjacent units or adjacent surfaces indicated to be flush with units by mor- than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm), except where variation is due to warpage of units within tole ances specified. 3.5 AD LISTING AND CLEANING A. Re ove and replace stained and otherwise damaged units and units not matching approved Samples. Cast stone may be repaired if methods and results are approved by Archi tect. B. Rep ace units in a manner that results in cast stone matching approved Samples, co plying with other requirements, and showing no evidence of replacement. C. In-PI ogress Cleaning: Clean cast stone as work progresses. 1. Remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. 2. Remove excess sealant immediately, including spills, smears, and spatter. D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed cast stone as folio s: 1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. CAST STON MASONRY 047200 CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 2. Test cleaning methods on sample; leave one sample uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of cast stone. 3. Protect adjacent surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape. 4. Wet surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing thoroughly with clear water. 5. Clean cast stone by bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical Notes 20. 6. Clean cast stone with proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 047200 CAST STONE MASONRY 047200 CITY OF RO ND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 SECTION 05.000 - METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 -GE, ERAL 1.1 RE TED DOCUMENTS A. Dra ings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supsiementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Seciion. 1.2 SU MARY A. Secion Includes: 1. ', Steel framing and supports for overhead doors. 2. Shelf angles. 3. Metal downspout boots. B. Pro'ucts furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following: 1. Loose steel lintels. 2. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, and wedge-type inserts indicated to be cast into concrete or built into unit masonry. 3. � Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete for applications where they are not specified in other Sections. C. Rel.ted Requirements: 1. I Section 042000 "Unit Masonry"for installing loose lintels, anchor bolts, and other items built into unit masonry. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coo dinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop pri ers and topcoats are compatible with one another. B. Coo'dinate installation of metal fabrications that are anchored to or that receive other wor . Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, inch.ding sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are o be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for i stallation. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code- Steel." 2. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code-Aluminum." 3. AWS D1.6/D1.6M, "Structural Welding Code- Stainless Steel." 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METALS A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes. B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. C. Stainless-Steel Sheet, Strip, and Plate: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304. D. Stainless-Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 304. E. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D. F. Rolled-Stainless-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 793. G. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500/A 500M, cold-formed steel tubing. H. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Standard Weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated. I. Zinc-Coated Steel Wire Rope: ASTM A 741. 1. Wire-Rope Fittings: Hot-dip galvanized-steel connectors with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to minimum breaking strength of wire rope with which they are used. J. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M, unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 FASTENERS A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941 M), Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. 1. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum. 2. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening stainless steel. 3. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening nickel silver. 4. Provide bronze fasteners for fastening bronze. B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568V, Property Class 4.6); with hex nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and, where indidated, flat washers. C. Steq Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 325, Type 3 (ASTM A 325FA, Type 3); with hex nuts, ASTM A 563, Grade C3 (ASTM A 563M, Class 8S3); and, where indicated, flat washers. D. Stai less-Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless-steel bolts, AS 'M F 593 (ASTM F 738M); with hex nuts, ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 836M); and, where indi.ated, flat washers; Alloy Group (1) Al E. Anc or Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A 563(ASTM A 563M); and, where indicated, flat washers. 1. i Hot-dip galvanize or provide mechanically deposited, zinc coating where item being fastened is indicated to be galvanized. F. Anc ors, General: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six time. the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed whe installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488/E 488 , conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. G. Cas -in-PIace Anchors in Concrete: Either threaded type or wedge type unless othrwise indicated; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, all hot-'ip galvanized per ASTM F 2329. H. Pos -lnstalled Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors. 1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941 M), Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy Group (1) Al stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M), and nuts, ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 836M). I. Slotted-Channel Inserts: Cold-formed, hot-dip galvanized-steel box channels (struts) corrplying with MFMA-4, 1-5/8 by 7/8 inches (41 by 22 mm) by length indicated with ancifior straps or studs not less than 3 inches (75 mm) long at not more than 8 inches (200 mm) o.c. Provide with temporary filler and tee-head bolts, complete with washers and nuts, all zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, as needed for fast Wing to inserts. METAL FAB (CATIONS 055000 CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Section 099113 "Exterior Painting." B. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat. 1. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc-rich primer. C. Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Primer formulated for exterior use over zinc-coated metal and compatible with finish paint systems indicated. D. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it. E. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M. F. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. G. Concrete: Comply with requirements in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi (20 MPa). 2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. D. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges. E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or welds where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous. G. Fabricate seams and other connections that are exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, scretNs and similar items. I. Pro\4ide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anc1oring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated load . J. Whre units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with interalIy welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches (3.2 by 38 mm), with a mininum 6-inch (150-mm) embedment and 2-inch (50-mm) hook, not less than 8 inch s (200 mm) from ends and corners of units and 24 inches (600 mm) o.c., unless oth rwise indicated. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. Genral: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to cdmplete the Work. B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless othrwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction. 1. Fabricate units from slotted channel framing where indicated. 2. Furnish inserts for units installed after concrete is placed. C. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated. D. Prime miscellaneous framing and supports with zinc-rich primer where indicated. 2.6 SHELF ANGLES A. Fabricate shelf angles from steel angles of sizes indicated and for attachment to conrete framing. Provide horizontally slotted holes to receive 3/4-inch (19-mm) bolts, spaed not more than 6 inches (150 mm) from ends and 24 inches (600 mm) o.c., unlss otherwise indicated. 1. Provide mitered and welded units at corners. 2. Provide open joints in shelf angles at expansion and control joints. Make open joint approximately 2 inches (50 mm) larger than expansion or control joint. B. For cavity walls, provide vertical channel brackets to support angles from backup ma onry and concrete. METAL FAB (CATIONS 055000 CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 C. Galvanize shelf angles located in exterior walls. D. Furnish wedge-type concrete inserts, complete with fasteners, to attach shelf angles to cast-in-place concrete. 2.7 METAL DOWNSPOUT BOOTS A. Provide downspout boots made from cast iron in heights indicated with inlets of size and shape to suit downspouts. Provide units with flanges and holes for countersunk anchor bolts. 1. Outlet: At 35 degrees from horizontal, to discharge onto splash block or pavement. B. Prime cast-iron downspout boots with zinc-rich primer. 2.8 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Finish metal fabrications after assembly. B. Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend into surrounding surface. 2.9 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products. 1. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint adhesion. B. Preparation for Shop Priming Galvanized Items: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean railings of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with metallic phosphate process. C. Shop prime iron and steel items not indicated to be galvanized unless they are to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated. 1. Shop prime with universal shop primer D. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel,"for shop painting. 1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 CITY OF RO ND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 PART 3 - EX: CUTION 3.1 INS I ALLATION, GENERAL A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for instIling metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and mea.ured from established lines and levels. B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that :re not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-Al ip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. C. Fiel., Welding: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. � Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. D. Fasening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where met.;I fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide thre:ded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolt, lag screws, wood screws, and other connectors. E. Pro ide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction. F. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that come into contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with the following: 1. Cast Aluminum: Heavy coat of bituminous paint. 2. Extruded Aluminum: Two coats of clear lacquer. 3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings. B. Anchor supports for overhead doors securely to, and rigidly brace from, building structure. C. Support steel girders on solid grouted masonry, concrete, or steel pipe columns. Secure girders with anchor bolts embedded in grouted masonry or concrete or with bolts through top plates of pipe columns. METAL FAB (CATIONS 055000 CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINN INGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 1. Where grout space under bearing plates is indicated for girders supported on concrete or masonry, install as specified in "Installing Bearing and Leveling Plates" Article. D. Install pipe columns on concrete footings with grouted baseplates. Position and grout column baseplates as specified in "Installing Bearing and Leveling Plates"Article. 1. Grout baseplates of columns supporting steel girders after girders are installed and leveled. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. 1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mu (0.05-mm) dry film thickness. B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting." C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M. END OF SECTION 055000 METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 CITY OF RO ND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 SECTION 05.300 - METAL GRATINGS PART 1 -GE ERAL 1.1 REL TED DOCUMENTS A. Dra ings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Sup'lementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Sec ion. 1.2 SU MARY A. Sec'ion Includes: 1. , Metal bar gratings. 1.3 QU LITY ASSURANCE A. Met;I Bar Grating Standards: Comply with NAAMM MBG 531, "Metal Bar Grating Manual B. Wel'ing Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS Dl. /DI.1 M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." C. WeI'ing Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code -Steel." 2. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code -Aluminum." 3. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code- Sheet Steel." 4. � AWS D1.6, "Structural Welding Code- Stainless Steel." 1.4 PRtJECT CONDITIONS A. Field, Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with gratings by field measurements before fabrication. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Cools dinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop pri ers and topcoats are compatible with one another. B. Cooi dinate installation of anchorages for gratings, grating frames, and supports. Fur ish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including METAL GR INGS 055300 CITY OF ROUND ROCK KI NN INGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FERROUS METALS A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. B. Steel Bars for Bar Gratings: ASTM A 36/A 36M or steel strip, ASTM A 1011/A 1011M or ASTM A 1018/A 1018M. C. Wire Rod for Bar Grating Crossbars: ASTM A 510 (ASTM A 510M). D. Uncoated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, structural steel, Grade 30 (Grade 205). E. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural quality, Grade 33 (Grade 230), with G90 (Z275) coating. 2.2 FASTENERS A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941 M), Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. 1. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum. 2. Provide stainless steel fasteners for fastening stainless steel. B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with hex nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and, where indicated, flat washers. C. Stainless-Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless-steel bolts, nuts, and, where indicated, flat washers; ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M) for bolts and ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 836M)for nuts, Alloy Group (1) Al D. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and, where indicated, flat washers. 1. Hot-dip galvanize or provide mechanically deposited, zinc coating where item being fastened is indicated to be galvanized. E. Plain Washers: Round, ASME B18.22.1 (ASME B18.22M). F. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, ASME B18.21.1 (ASME B18.21.2M). METAL GRATINGS 055300 CITY OF RO ND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 G. Pos I Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors cap.ble of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when inst-fled in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as 0etermined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified inde.endent testing agency. 1. I Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel is Indicated: Alloy Group (1) Al stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M), and nuts, ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 836M). 2.3 MIS ELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Weloing Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal allo that is welded. B. Uni ersal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat. 1. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc-rich primer. C. Gal anizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and;compatible with paints specified to be used over it. D. Bitu l inous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. 2.4 FA:RlCATlON A. Sho. Assembly: Fabricate grating sections in shop to greatest extent possible to mini' ize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined piec s. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. B. Cut, drill, and punch material cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a ra ius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or r ugh areas on exposed surfaces. C. For from materials of size, thickness, and shapes indicated, but not less than that nee ed to support indicated loads. D. Fit xposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. E. Wel ing: Comply with AWS recommendations and the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. METAL GR TINGS 055300 CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 F. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Fabricate and space the anchoring devices to secure gratings, frames, and supports rigidly in place and to support indicated loads. 1. Fabricate toeplates to fit grating units and weld to units in shop unless otherwise indicated. 2. Fabricate toeplates for attaching in the field. 3. Toeplate Height: 4 inches (100 mm) unless otherwise indicated. 2.5 METAL BAR GRATINGS A. Welded Steel Grating: 1. Bearing Bar Spacing: 1-3/16 inches (30 mm)o.c. 2. Bearing Bar Depth: 1 inch (25 mm). 3. Bearing Bar Thickness: 3/16 inch (4.8 mm). 4. Crossbar Spacing: [2 inches (51 mm)][4 inches (102 mm)] o.c. 5. Grating Mark W-19-4 (1-1/4 x 3/16) STEEL: 1-1/4-by-3116-inch (32-by-4.8-mm) bearing bars at 1-3/16 inches (30 mm) o.c., and crossbars at 4 inches (102 mm) o.c. 6. Grating Mark: As indicated. 7. Traffic Surface: Plain 8. Steel Finish: Hot-dip galvanized with a coating weight of not less than 1.8 oz./sq. ft. (550 glsq. m)of coated surface. 2.6 GRATING FRAMES AND SUPPORTS A. Frames and Supports for Metal Gratings: Fabricate from metal shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive gratings. Miter and weld connections for perimeter angle frames. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware and similar items. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate from same basic metal as gratings. 2. Equip units indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry with integrally welded anchors. Unless otherwise indicated, space anchors 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. and provide minimum anchor units in the form of steel straps 1-1/4 inches (32 mm)wide by 1/4 inch (6 mm)thick by 8 inches (200 mm) long. B. Galvanize steel frames and supports in the following locations: 1. Exterior. 2. Interior 2.7 STEEL FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. METAL GRATINGS 055300 CITY OF ROB ND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 B. FinLh gratings, frames, and supports after assembly. C. Gal ,anizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for -teel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron pro.iucts. 1. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint adhesion. PART 3 - EX CUTION 3.1 INS ALLATION, GENERAL A. Fasening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where nec:issary for securing gratings to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for con�rete and masonry inserts, through-bolts, lag bolts, and other connectors. B. Cutt ng, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for inst.lung gratings. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured fro established lines and levels and free of rack. C. Pro ide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into con rete or masonry. D. Fit xposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. 1. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade the surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. E. Attach toeplates to gratings by welding at locations indicated. F. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. G. Corosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will come into contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of biturninous paint. 3.2 INS]IALLING METAL BAR GRATINGS A. Gereral: Install gratings to comply with recommendations of referenced metal bar grating standards that apply to grating types and bar sizes indicated, including installation clearances and standard anchoring details. METAL GRATINGS 055300 CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 B. Attach removable units to supporting members with type and size of clips and fasteners indicated or, if not indicated, as recommended by grating manufacturer for type of installation conditions shown. C. Attach nonremovable units to supporting members by welding where both materials are same; otherwise, fasten by bolting as indicated above. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION 055300 METAL GRATINGS 055300 CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 SECTION 061053 - MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Se9ion Includes: 1. Framing with dimension lumber. 2. Plywood backing panels. 1.3 DE INITIONS A. Boards or Strips: Lumber of less than 2 inches nominal (38 mm actual) size in least dimension. B. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal (38 mm actual) or greater size but less than 5 inches nominal (114 mm actual) size in least dimension. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stalk lumber flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect lumber from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules- writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an age�cy certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rule indicated. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH 061053 CARPENTRY CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, omit grade stamp and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by grading agency] 3. Dress lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 15 percent for 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness or less, 19 percent for more than 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U 1; Use Category UC2 for interior construction not in contact with ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with ground. 1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. Do not use inorganic boron (SBX) for sill plates. 2. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, chemical formulations shall not require incising, contain colorants, bleed through, or otherwise adversely affect finishes. B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material. C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review. 1. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, omit marking and provide certificates of treatment compliance issued by inspection agency. D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following: 1. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. 2. Wood framing members that are less than 18 inches (460 mm) above the ground in crawlspaces or unexcavated areas. 3. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade. 2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, materials shall comply with requirements in this article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with fire-test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency. MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH 061053 CARPENTRY CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 B. Fire Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flam -spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 inutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet (3.2 m) beyond the enterline of the burners at any time during the test. 1. Treatment shall not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. 2. Exterior Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above for fire-retardant-treated lumber and plywood by pressure process after being subjected to accelerated weathering according to ASTM D 2898. Use for exterior locations and where indicated. 3. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less when tested according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where exterior type is not indicated. 4. Design Value Adjustment Factors: Treated lumber shall be tested according to ASTM D 5664, and design value adjustment factors shall be calculated according to ASTM D 6841. C. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. D. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing agency. 1. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of each piece E. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, chemical formulations shall not bleed through, contain colorants, or otherwise adversely affect finishes. F. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following: 1. Plywood backing panels. 2.4 DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING A. Non-Load-Bearing Interior Partitions: Construction or No. 2 grade of any species. B. OthOr Framing: Construction or No. 2 species: 1. Southern pine; SPIB. 2. Southern pine or mixed southern pine; SPIB. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. Ge eral: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of o her construction, including the following: 1. Blocking. 2. Nailers. 3. Furring. MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH 061053 CARPENTRY CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 4. Grounds. 5. Utility shelving. B. Dimension Lumber Items: Construction or No. 2 grade lumber of any species C. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will interfere with its attachment and purpose. D. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work. E. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling. 2.6 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS A. Equipment Backing Panels: Plywood, DOC PS 1, Exterior, A-C in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 1/2-inch (13-mm) nominal thickness. 1. Plywood shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers." 2.7 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. 1. Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667. C. Screws for Fastening to Metal Framing: ASTM C 1002 length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened. D. Power-Driven Fasteners: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70. 2.8 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180) coating designation. 1. Use for interior locations unless otherwise indicated. MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH 061053 CARPENTRY CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 B. Hot-Dip, Heavy-Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M; Structural Steel (SS), high-strength low-alloy steel Type A (HSLAS Type A), or high-strength low-alloy steel Type B (HSLAS Type B); G185 (Z550) coating designation; and not less than 0.036 inch (0.9 mm)thick. 1. Use for wood-preservative-treated lumber and where indicated. C. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, [Type 304][Type 316]. 1. Use for exterior locations and where indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated. B. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit carpentry accurately to other construction. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. C. Install plywood backing panels by fastening to studs; coordinate locations with utilities requiring backing panels. D. Install metal framing anchors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install fastOners through each fastener hole. E. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated. F. Pro ide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. 1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. G. Pro ide fire blocking in furred spaces, stud spaces, and other concealed cavities as indi ated and as follows: 1. Fire block furred spaces of walls, at each floor level, at ceiling, and at not more than 96 inches (2438 mm) o.c. with solid wood blocking or noncombustible materials accurately fitted to close furred spaces. 2. Fire block concealed spaces of wood-framed walls and partitions at each floor level, at ceiling line of top story, and at not more than 96 inches (2438 mm) o.c. Where fire blocking is not inherent in framing system used, provide closely fitted solid wood blocks of same width as framing members and 2-inch nominal (38- mm actual) thickness. MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH 061053 CARPENTRY CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 3. Fire block concealed spaces between floor sleepers with same material as sleepers to limit concealed spaces to not more than 100 sq. ft. (9.3 sq. m) and to solidly fill space below partitions. 4. Fire block concealed spaces behind combustible cornices and exterior trim at not more than 20 feet (6 m) o.c. H. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics do not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. I. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative- treated lumber. 1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water. 2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water. J. Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking. K. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code. 2. Table R602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table R602.3(2), "Alternate Attachments," in ICC's International Residential Code for One- and Two-Family Dwellings. 3. ICC-ES evaluation report for fastener. L. Use steel common nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood. Drive nails snug but do not countersink nail heads unless otherwise indicated. 3.2 WOOD BLOCKING AND NAILER INSTALLATION A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved. B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH 061053 CARPENTRY CITY OF ROI ND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 bor.,e treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered labe . B. Protct miscellaneous rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, misàellaneous rough carpentry becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Appl borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label. END OF SECTION 061053 MISCELLAN OUS ROUGH 061053 CARPENTR' CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 SECTION 064116 - PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Plastic-laminate-faced architectural cabinets. 2. Wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing plastic-laminate- faced architectural cabinets unless concealed within other construction before cabinet installation. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large- scale details, attachment devices, and other components. 1. Show details full size. 2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. 3. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for electrical switches and outlets, and other items installed in architectural plastic-laminate cabinets. 4. Apply AWI Quality Certification Program label to Shop Drawings. B. Samples for Initial Selection: 1. Plastic laminates. 2. Exposed cabinet hardware and accessories, one unit for each type and finish. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver cabinets until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If cabinets must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field Conditions"Article. PLASTIC-LAM I NATE-FACED 064116 ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cabinets until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Fiel1 Measurements: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support cabinets by field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. C. Established Dimensions: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, establish dimensions for areas where cabinets are to fit. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that cabinets can be supported and installed as indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for grades of architectural plastic-laminate cabinets indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. 1. The Contract Documents contain selections chosen from options in the quality standard and additional requirements beyond those of the quality standard. Comply with those selections and requirements in addition to the quality standard. B. Grade: Premium C. Type of Construction: Frameless D. Cabinet, Door, and Drawer Front Interface Style: Flush overlay E. Reveal Dimension: 1/2 inch (13 mm) F. Hig Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or if not indi crated, as required by woodwork quality standard. G. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED 064116 ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 H. Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces: 1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: High-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade VGS 2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Solid-hardwood lumber 3. Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood. I. Dust Panels: 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments and drawers unless located directly under tops. J. Concealed Backs of Panels with Exposed Plastic-Laminate Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade BKL. K. Drawer Construction: Fabricate with exposed fronts fastened to subfront with mounting screws from interior of body. 1. Join subfronts, backs, and sides with glued rabbeted joints supplemented by mechanical fasteners or glued dovetail joints. L. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: 1. As indicated by laminate manufacturer's designations. 2. Match Architect's sample. 2.2 WOOD MATERIALS A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated. 1. Wood Moisture Content: 5 to 10 percent. B. Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated. 1. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130 2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS A. Fire-Retardant-Treated Materials, General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with requirements in this article that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and with fire-test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency. PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED 064116 ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 1. Use treated materials that comply with requirements of referenced woodworking standard. Do not use materials that are warped, discolored, or otherwise defective. 2. Use fire-retardant-treatment formulations that do not bleed through or otherwise adversely affect finishes. Do not use colorants to distinguish treated materials from untreated materials. 3. Identify fire-retardant-treated materials with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing agency in the form of removable paper label or imprint on surfaces that will be concealed from view after installation. B. Fire Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood: Products with a flame-spread index of 25 or I ss when tested according to ASTM E 84, with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet (3.2 m) beyond the centerline of the burriers at any time during the test. 1. Kiln dry lumber and plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 and 15 percent, respectively. 2. For items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use organic resin chemical formulation. 3. Mill lumber after treatment within limits set for wood removal that do not affect listed fire-test-response characteristics, using a woodworking shop certified by testing and inspecting agency. 4. Mill lumber before treatment and implement special procedures during treatment and drying processes that prevent lumber from warping and developing discolorations from drying sticks or other causes, marring, and other defects affecting appearance of treated woodwork. 2.4 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES A. Ge eral: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets except for items specified in Section 087111 "Door Hardware (Descriptive Specification)." B. Butt Hinges: 2-3/4-inch (70-mm), five-knuckle steel hinges made from 0.095-inch-(2.4- mm-)thick metal, and as follows: 1. Semiconcealed Hinges for Flush Doors: BHMA A156.9, B01361. 2. Semiconcealed Hinges for Overlay Doors: BHMA A156.9, B01521. C. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, 135 degrees of opening, self-closing. D. Back-Mounted Pulls: BHMA A156.9, B02011. E. Wirol Pulls: Back mounted, solid metal, 4 inches (100 mm) long, 5/16 inch (8 mm) in diameter. F. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: BHMA A156.9, B04071; with shelf rests, B04081 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED 064116 ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 G. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9. 1. Grade 1 HD-100 and Grade 1 HD-200: Side mounted; full-extensiontype; zinc- plated-steel ball-bearing slides. H. Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121. I. Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041. J. Door and Drawer Silencers: BHMA A156.16, L03011. K. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated. 1. Dark, Oxidized, Satin Bronze, Oil Rubbed: BHMA 613 for bronze base; BHMA 640 for steel base; match Architect's sample. 2. Bright Brass, Clear Coated: BHMA 605 for brass base; BHMA 632 for steel base. 3. Bright Brass, Vacuum Coated: BHMA 723 for brass base; BHMA 729 for zinc- coated-steel base. 4. Satin Brass, Blackened, Bright Relieved, Clear Coated: BHMA 610 for brass base; BHMA 636 for steel base. 5. Satin Chromium Plated: BHMA 626 for brass or bronze base; BHMA 652 for steel base. 6. Bright Chromium Plated: BHMA 625 for brass or bronze base; BHMA 651 for steel base. 7. Satin Stainless Steel: BHMA 630. L. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class requirements in BHMA A156.9. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post-installed anchors. Use nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls and at floors. B. Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde. 2.6 FABRICATION A. Sand fire-retardant-treated wood lightly to remove raised grain on exposed surfaces before fabrication. B. Fabricate cabinets to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. C. Complete fabrication, including assembly and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED 064116 ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times woodwork fabrication will be complete. 2. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements before disassembling for shipment. D. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Before installation, condition cabinets to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas. B. Be-We installing cabinets, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required. 3.2 INS ALLATION A. Gra e: Install cabinets to comply with same grade as item to be installed. B. Ass mble cabinets and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent that it was not completed in the shop. C. Inst II cabinets level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm). D. Scribe and cut cabinets to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts. E. Anchor cabinets to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. SecOre with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use fine finishing nails for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork. 1. Use filler matching finish of items being installed. F. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED 064116 ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. 2. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, and at ends not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for not less than 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) penetration into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective cabinets, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. C. Clean cabinets on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. END OF SECTION 064116 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED 064116 ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS Copyright 2013 AIA MasterSpec Premium 06/13 SECTION 072500 - WEATHER BARRIERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Sectlion. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Building wrap. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. For building wrap, include data on air and water-vapor permeance based on testing according to referenced standards. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WATER-RESISTIVE BARRIER A. Buil(ping Wrap: ASTM E 1677, Type I air barrier; with flame-spread and smoke- developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, when tested according to AS11M E 84; UV stabilized; and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Water-Vapor Permeance: Not less than 75 perms (4300 ng/Pa x s x sq. m) per ASTM E 96/E 96M, Desiccant Method (Procedure A). 2. Air Permeance: Not more than 0.004 cfm/sq. ft. at 0.3-inch wg (0.02 L/s x sq. m at 75 Pa) when tested according to ASTM E 2178. 3. Allowable UV Exposure Time: Not less than three months. 4. Fire Propagation Characteristics: Passes NFPA 285 testing as part of an approved assembly. B. Building-Wrap Tape: Pressure-sensitive plastic tape recommended by building-wrap manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in building wrap. 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Butyl rubber, Flexible Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable, butyl rubber compound, bonded to a high-density polyethylene film, WEATHER BARRIERS 072500 Copyright 2013 AIA MasterSpec Premium 06/13 aluminum foil, or spunbonded polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch (0.6 mm) B. Primer for Flexible Flashing: Product recommended by manufacturer of flexible flashing for substrate. C. Nails and Staples: ASTM F 1667. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 WATER-RESISTIVE BARRIER INSTALLATION A. Cover exposed exterior surface of sheathing with water-resistive barrier securely fastened to framing immediately after sheathing is installed. B. Cover sheathing with water-resistive barrier as follows: 1. Cut back barrier 1/2 inch (13 mm) on each side of the break in supporting members at expansion- or control-joint locations. 2. Apply barrier to cover vertical flashing with a minimum 4-inch (100-mm) overlap unless otherwise indicated. C. Building Wrap: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Seal seams, edges, fasteners, and penetrations with tape. 2. Extend into jambs of openings and seal corners with tape. 3.2 FLEXIBLE FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Apply flexible flashing where indicated to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Prime substrates as recommended by flashing manufacturer. 2. Lap seams and junctures with other materials at least 4 inches (100 mm) except that at flashing flanges of other construction, laps need not exceed flange width. 3. Lap flashing over water-resistive barrier at bottom and sides of openings. 4. Lap water-resistive barrier over flashing at heads of openings. 5. After flashing has been applied, roll surfaces with a hard rubber or metal roller to ensure that flashing is completely adhered to substrates. END OF SECTION 072500 WEATHER BARRIERS 072500 CITY ROUN ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 SECTION 0 113.16- STANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RE A TED DOCUMENTS A. Dra ings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Sup•lementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Sec ion. 1.2 SU MARY A. Sec ion includes standing-seam metal roof panels. 1.3 AC ION SUBMITTALS A. Pro uct Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of panel and accessory. B. Sho. Drawings: 1. � Include fabrication and installation layouts of metal panels; details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment system, trim, flashings, closures, and accessories; and special details. 2. Accessories: Include details of the flashing, trim, and anchorage systems, at a scale of not less than 1-1/2 inches per 12 inches (1:10). 1.4 lNF RMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qu.lification Data: For Installer. B. Prom uct Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by a qualified testing age cy. C. Fieli quality-control reports. D. Sa Warranties: For special warranties. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Mai tenance Data: For metal panels to include in maintenance manuals. STANDING- .EAM METAL 074113.16 ROOF PAN:LS CITY ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer. B. UL-Certified, Portable Roll-Forming Equipment: UL-certified, portable roll-forming equipment capable of producing metal panels warranted by manufacturer to be the same as factory-formed products. Maintain UL certification of portable roll-forming equipment for duration of work. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver components, metal panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged or deformed. Package metal panels for protection during transportation and handling. B. Unload, store, and erect metal panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage. C. Stack metal panels horizontally on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated covering. Store metal panels to ensure dryness, with positive slope for drainage of water. Do not store metal panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. D. Retain strippable protective covering on metal panels during installation. E. Copper Panels: Wear gloves when handling to prevent fingerprints and soiling of surface. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit assembly of metal panels to be performed according to manufacturers'written instructions and warranty requirements. 1.9 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations with actual equipment provided. B. Coordinate metal panel installation with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, construction of soffits, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation. STANDING-SEAM METAL 074113.16 ROOF PANELS CITY ROUN ID ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 1.10 WAURANTY A. Spey ial Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or r:place components of metal panel systems that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. , Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including rupturing, cracking, or puncturing. b. Deterioration of metals and other materials beyond normal weathering. 2. , Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Spe, ial Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace metal panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1. ' Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following: a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal. 2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Spe ial Weathertightness Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which ma iufacturer agrees to repair or replace standing-seam metal roof panel assemblies that fail to remain weathertight, including leaks, within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRI DUCTS 2.1 PEFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Stru tural Performance: Provide metal panel systems capable of withstanding the effe,ts of the following loads, based on testing according to ASTM E 1592: 1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings. B. Air Infiltration: Air leakage of not more than 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. (0.3 LIs per sq. m) when test d according to ASTM E 1680 at the following test-pressure difference: 1. ' Test-Pressure Difference: 1.57 Ibf/sq. ft. (75 Pa) C. Watr Penetration under Static Pressure: No water penetration when tested according to A TM E 1646 at the following test-pressure difference: 1. ', Test-Pressure Difference: 2.86 lbf/sq. ft. (137 Pa) STANDING-.EAM METAL 074113.16 ROOF PAN:LS CITY ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 D. Hydrostatic-Head Resistance: No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E 2140. E. Wind-Uplift Resistance: Provide metal roof panel assemblies that comply with UL 580 for wind-uplift-resistance class indicated. F. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces 2.2 STANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS A. General: Provide factory-formed metal roof panels designed to be installed by lapping and interconnecting raised side edges of adjacent panels with joint type indicated and mechanically attaching panels to supports using concealed clips in side laps. Include clips, cleats, pressure plates, and accessories required for weathertight installation. 1. Steel Panel Systems: Unless more stringent requirements are indicated, comply with ASTM E 1514. 2. Aluminum Panel Systems: Unless more stringent requirements are indicated, comply with ASTM E 1637. B. Vertical-Rib, Snap-Joint, Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels: Formed with vertical ribs at panel edges and intermediate stiffening ribs symmetrically spaced between ribs; designed for sequential installation by mechanically attaching panels to supports using concealed clips located under one side of panels, engaging opposite edge of adjacent panels, and snapping panels together. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide MBCI BattenLok HS or comparable product. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Miscellaneous Metal Subframing and Furring: ASTM C 645; cold-formed, metallic- coated steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275 hot-dip galvanized) coating designation or ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 (Class AZM150) coating designation unless otherwise indicated. Provide manufacturer's standard sections as required for support and alignment of metal panel system. B. Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete, weathertight panel system including trim, copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal panels unless otherwise indicated. 1. Closures: Provide closures at eaves and ridges, fabricated of same metal as metal panels. STANDING-SEAM METAL 074113.16 ROOF PANELS CITY ROUN i� ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 2. Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricate from material recommended by manufacturer. 3. ', Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin- foam or closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum I-inch-(25-mm-)thick, flexible closure strips; cut or premolded to match metal panel profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction. C. FIahing and Trim: Provide flashing and trim formed from same material as metal pan-Is as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, eaves, rakes, corners, bases, framed ope ings, ridges, fasciae, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as .djacent metal panels. D. Gu ers: Formed from same material as roof panels, complete with end pieces, outlet tub:s, and other special pieces as required. Fabricate in minimum 96-inch-(2400-mm- )lon sections, of size and metal thickness according to SMACNA's "Architectural She-t Metal Manual." Furnish gutter supports spaced a maximum of 36 inches (914 mm o.c., fabricated from same metal as gutters. Provide wire ball strainers of co 'patible metal at outlets. Finish gutters to match roof fascia and rake trim. E. Do nspouts: Formed from same material as roof panels. Fabricate in I 0-foot-(3-m- )lon sections, complete with formed elbows and offsets, of size and metal thickness acc,irding to SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Finish downspouts to mat h gutters. F. PanHI Fasteners: Self-tapping screws designed to withstand design loads. G. PanH I Sealants: Provide sealant type recommended by manufacturer that are co patible with panel materials, are nonstaining, and do not damage panel finish. 1. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide and 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick. 2. ' Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; elastomeric polyurethane or silicone sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in metal panels and remain weathertight; and as recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer. 3. Butyl-Rubber-Based, Solvent-Release Sealant: ASTM C 1311. 2.4 FA:RlCATlON A. Ge Feral: Fabricate and finish metal panels and accessories at the factory, by ma ufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated perf.rmance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated prof les and with dimensional and structural requirements. B. On-bite Fabrication: Subject to compliance with requirements of this Section, metal pan-Is may be fabricated on-site using UL-certified, portable roll-forming equipment if pan'-Is are of same profile and warranted by manufacturer to be equal to factory- STANDING- .EAM METAL 074113.16 ROOF PAN:LS CITY ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 formed panels. Fabricate according to equipment manufacturer's written instructions and to comply with details shown. C. Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full length of panel. D. Fabricate metal panel joints with factory-installed captive gaskets or separator strips that provide a weathertight seal and prevent metal-to-metal contact, and that minimize noise from movements. E. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with manufacturer's recommendations and recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated. 1. Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 2. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength. 3. Seams for Other Than Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams in accessories with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder. 4. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate sealant and to comply with SMACNA standards. 5. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces of accessories exposed to view. 6. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer. a. Size: As recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" or metal panel manufacturer for application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured. 2.5 FINISHES A. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in same piece are unacceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. C. Steel Panels and Accessories: 1. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers'written instructions. STANDING-SEAM METAL 074113.16 ROOF PANELS CITY ROUN ii ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 PART 3 - E ELUTION 3.1 E A MINATION A. Exa ne substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with req 1 irements for installation tolerances, metal panel supports, and other conditions affe ting performance of the Work. 1. Examine primary and secondary roof framing to verify that rafters, purlins, angles, channels, and other structural panel support members and anchorages have been installed within alignment tolerances required by metal roof panel manufacturer. 2. Examine solid roof sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing or blocking and that installation is within flatness tolerances required by metal roof panel manufacturer. a. Verify that air- or water-resistive barriers have been installed over sheathing or backing substrate to prevent air infiltration or water penetration. B. Examine roughing-in for components and systems penetrating metal panels to verify actial locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of metal panels before instllation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Miscellaneous Supports: Install subframing, furring, and other miscellaneous panel supod members and anchorages according to ASTM C 754 and metal panel marufacturer's written recommendations. 3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. InstIlation Tolerances: Shim and align metal panel units within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m) on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-nch (3-mm)offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect metal roof panel installation, including accessories. Report results in writing. B. Re ove and replace applications of metal roof panels where tests and inspections indi.ate that they do not comply with specified requirements. C. Additional tests and inspections, at Contractor's expense, are performed to determine co pliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. STANDING- EAM METAL 074113.16 ROOF PAN:LS CITY ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 D. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal panels are installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of metal panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction. B. Replace metal panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. END OF SECTION 074113.16 STANDING-SEAM METAL 074113.16 ROOF PANELS CITY OF RO ND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 SECTION 0 4646 - FIBER-CEMENT SIDING PART 1 -G:NERAL 1.1 RE ATED DOCUMENTS A. Dra ings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Sup.Iementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Sec ion. 1.2 SU MARY A. Sec ion includes fiber-cement siding and soffit. 1.3 CORDlNATION A. Co.rdinate siding installation with flashings and other adjoining construction to ensure proter sequencing. 1.4 AC ION SUBMITTALS A. Pro'uct Data: For each type of product. Include construction details, material des riptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Sa ples for Initial Selection: For fiber-cement siding and soffit including related acc ssories. 1.5 INFAIRMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Proo uct Certificates: For each type of fiber-cement siding and soffit. B. Proouct Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qua ified testing agency, for fiber-cement siding. C. Res-arch/Evaluation Reports: For each type of fiber-cement siding required, from ICC- ES. D. Sa ple Warranty: For special warranty. 1.6 CLISEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Mai tenance Data: For each type of product, including related accessories, to include in Maintenance manuals. FlBER-CEM I NT SIDING 074646 CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Furnish full lengths of fiber-cement siding and soffit including related accessories, in a quantity equal to 2 percent of amount installed. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 1. Build mockups for fiber-cement siding and soffit including accessories. a. Size: 48 inches (1200 mm) long by 48 inches (1800 mm) high. 2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with labels intact until time of use. B. Store materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace products that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including cracking and deforming. b. Deterioration of materials beyond normal weathering. 2. Warranty Period: 30 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain products, including related accessories, from single source from single manufacturer. FIBER-CEMENT SIDING 074646 CITY OF RO ND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 2.2 FIB: R-CEMENT SIDING A. GenraI: ASTM C 1186, Type A, Grade II, fiber-cement board, noncombustible when testd according to ASTM E 136; with a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested acc.rding to ASTM E 84. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide John Hardie HardiPlank Lap Siding HZIO Cedar Mill or comparable product. B. Labeling: Provide fiber-cement siding that is tested and labeled according to ASTM C 118'0 by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. No linal Thickness: Not less than 5/16 inch (8 mm). D. Horirontal Pattern: Boards 8-1/4 to 8-1/2 inches (210 to 216 mm)wide. 1. Texture: Wood grain. E. Factory Priming: Manufacturer's standard acrylic primer. 2.3 FIB: R-CEMENT SOFFIT A. Genral: ASTM C 1186, Type A, Grade II, fiber-cement board, noncombustible when test d according to ASTM E 136; with a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested accrnrding to ASTM E 84. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide John Hardie HardiPlank Lap Siding HZIO Cedar Mill or comparable product. B. No �final Thickness: Not less than 1/4 inch (8 mm). C. Patt rn: I 6-inch-(400-mm-)wide sheets with wood-grain texture. D. Ven ilation: Provide unperforated soffit. E. Faciory Priming: Manufacturer's standard acrylic primer. 2.4 AC CESSORI ES A. Sidi g Accessories, General: Provide starter strips, edge trim, outside and inside cor er caps, and other items as recommended by siding manufacturer for building con'iguration. 1. Provide accessories matching color and texture of adjacent siding unless otherwise indicated. B. Decprative Accessories: Provide the following fiber-cement decorative accessories as indkated: 1. Corner posts. 2. Door and window casings. 3. Fasciae. 4. Moldings and trim. FIBER-CEM NT SIDING 074646 CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 C. Flashing: Provide aluminum flashing complying with Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" at window and door heads and where indicated. 1. Finish for Aluminum Flashing: High-performance organic finish. D. Fasteners: 1. For fastening to wood, use ribbed bugle-head screws of sufficient length to penetrate a minimum of 1 inch (25 mm) into substrate. 2. For fastening to metal, use ribbed bugle-head screws of sufficient length to penetrate a minimum of 1/4 inch (6 mm), or three screw-threads, into substrate. 3. For fastening fiber cement, use hot-dip galvanized fasteners. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of fiber-cement siding and soffit and related accessories. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated unless more stringent requirements apply. 1. Do not install damaged components. 2. Install fasteners no more than 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. B. Install joint sealants as specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" and to produce a weathertight installation. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove damaged, improperly installed, or otherwise defective materials and replace with new materials complying with specified requirements. B. Clean finished surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions and maintain in a clean condition during construction. END OF SECTION 074646 FIBER-CEMENT SIDING 074646 CITY ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 SECTION 076200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Manufactured through-wall flashing 2. Formed steep-slope roof sheet metal fabrications. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim layout and seams with sizes and locations of penetrations to be flashed, and joints and seams in adjacent materials. B. Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim installation with adjoining roofing and wall materials,joints, and seams to provide leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each manufactured product and accessory. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For sheet metal flashing and trim, and its accessories, to include in maintenance manuals. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a recrd of successful in-service performance. SHEET METfr\L FLASHING 076200 AND TRIM CITY ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store sheet metal flashing and trim materials away from uncured concrete and masonry. B. Protect strippable protective covering on sheet metal flashing and trim from exposure to sunlight and high humidity, except to extent necessary for period of sheet metal flashing and trim installation. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace sheet metal flashing and trim that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following: a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal. 2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies shall withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight. B. Sheet Metal Standard for Flashing and Trim: Comply with NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing Manual" and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" requirements for dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated. C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes to prevent buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces. SHEET METAL FLASHING 076200 AND TRIM CITY ROUND ROCK KINN INGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 2.2 SHEET METALS A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying strippable, temporary protective film before shipping. B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy as standard with manufacturer for finish required, with temper as required to suit forming operations and performance required; with smooth, flat surface. 1. As-Milled Finish: Standard one-side bright 2. Concealed Finish: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil (0.013 mm). C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Provide zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet according to ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 (Class AZM 150) coating designation, Grade 40 (Grade 275); prepainted by coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M. 1. Surface: Smooth, flat 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation and as recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metalunless otherwise indicated. B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal. 1. General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head. a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or factory-applied coating. Provide metal-backed EPDM or PVC sealing washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side of metal. b. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for metal being fastened. G. Spikes and Ferrules: Same material as gutter; with spike with ferrule matching internal gutter width. 2. Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel. 3. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel or hot-dip galvanized steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329. C. Solder: SHEET METAL FLASHING 076200 AND TRIM CITY ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 1. For Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn50, 50 percent tin and 50 percent lead or Grade Sn60, 60 percent tin and 40 percent lead with maximum lead content of 0.2 percent. D. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch (13 mm)wide and 1/8 inch (3 mm)thick. E. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric silicone polymer sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight. F. Epoxy Seam Sealer: Two-part, noncorrosive, aluminum seam-cementing compound, recommended by aluminum manufacturer for exterior nonmoving joints, including riveted joints. 2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with details showrf and recommendations in cited sheet metal standard that apply to design, dimensions, geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of item required. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in shop to greatest extent possible. 1. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal. 2. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. 3. Form sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks; true to line, levels, and slopes; and with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 4. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Do not use exposed fasteners on faces exposed to view. B. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m) on slope and location lines indicated on Drawings and within 1/8-inch (3-mm) offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles. C. Expansion Provisions: Form metal for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. 1. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints. 2. Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings. D. Sealant Joints: Where movable, nonexpansion-type joints are required, form metal to provide for proper installation of elastomeric sealant according to cited sheet metal standard. E. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal. SHEET METAL FLASHING 076200 AND TRIM CITY ROUN ROCK KINN INGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 F. Sea s: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, for seams, and solder. G. Sea s: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with elas omeric sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for inte ded use. H. Sea s for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and'seal with epoxy seam sealer. I. Do ot use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces. 2.5 ROOF-DRAINAGE SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Hanging Gutters: Fabricate to cross section required, complete with end pieces, outlet tub-s, and other accessories as required. Fabricate in minimum 96-inch-(2400-mm- )Ion! sections. Furnish flat-stock gutter brackets and flat-stock gutter spacers and stra ps fabricated from same metal as gutters, of size recommended by cited sheet met al standard but with thickness not less than twice the gutter thickness][dimension indi cated on Drawings. Fabricate expansion joints, expansion-joint covers, and gutter accssories from same metal as gutters. 1. Gutter Profile: Style I according to cited sheet metal standard. 2. Expansion Joints: Lap type 3. Accessories: Continuous, removable leaf screen with sheet metal frame and hardware cloth screen. 4. Gutters with Girth up to 15 Inches (380 mm): Fabricate from the following materials: a. Aluminum:[0.032 inch (0.81 mm)thick. B. Do nspouts: Fabricate rectangular downspouts to dimensions indicated, complete with mitred elbows. Furnish with metal hangers from same material as downspouts and anc ors 1. Fabricated Hanger Style: Fig I-35C according to SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." 2. Fabricate from the following materials: a. Aluminum: 0.024 inch (0.61 mm)thick. 2.6 WA L SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Thr.ugh-Wall Flashing: Fabricate continuous flashings in minimum 96-inch-(2400-mm- )lon!, but not exceeding 12-foot-(3.6-m-)long, sections, under copings, and at shelf angles. Fabricate discontinuous lintel, sill, and similar flashings to extend 6 inches (150 mm) beyond each side of wall openings; and form with 2-inch-(50-mm-)high, end dams. Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Stainless Steel: 0.016 inch (0.40 mm)thick. SHEET METAL FLASHING 076200 AND TRIM CITY ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, substrate, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify compliance with requirements for installation tolerances of substrates. 2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored. 3. Verify that air- or water-resistant barriers have been installed over sheathing or backing substrate to prevent air infiltration or water penetration. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system. 1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line, levels, and slopes. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant. 2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal. 3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches (300 mm) apart. Attach each cleat with at least two fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners. 4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim with limited oil canning, and free of buckling and tool marks. 5. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted. 6. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces. B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other, or where metal contacts pressure-treated wood or other corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action or corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by sheet metal manufacturer or cited sheet metal standard. 1. Coat concealed side of uncoated-aluminum and stainless-steel sheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous coating where flashing and trim contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction. 2. Underlayment: Where installing sheet metal flashing and trim directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install underlayment and cover with slip sheet. C. Fasteners: Use fastener sizes that penetrate substrate not less than recommended by fastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out resistance. SHEET METAL FLASHING 076200 AND TRIM CITY ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 D. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible in exposed work and locate to minimize possibility of leakage. Cover and seal fasteners and anchors as required for a tight installation. E. Seal joints as required for watertight construction. 1. Use sealant-filled joints unless otherwise indicated. Embed hooked flanges of joint members not less than 1 inch (25 mm) into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When ambient temperature at time of installation is between 40 and 70 deg F (4 and 21 deg C), set joint members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant-type joints at temperatures below 40 deg F (4 deg C). 2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants." 3.3 ROOF-DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. General: Install sheet metal roof-drainage items to produce complete roof-drainage system according to cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Coordinate installation of roof perimeter flashing with installation of roof-drainage system. B. Hanging Gutters: Join sections with riveted and soldered joints. Provide for thermal expansion. Attach gutters at eave or fascia to firmly anchor them in position. Provide end closures and seal watertight with sealant. Slope to downspouts. 1. Fasten gutter spacers to front and back of gutter. 2. Anchor and loosely lock back edge of gutter to continuous eave or apron flashing. 3. Install continuous gutter screens on gutters with noncorrosive fasteners, removable for cleaning gutters. C. Downspouts: Join sections with 1-1/2-inch (38-mm)telescoping joints. 1. Provide hangers with fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely to walls. Locate hangers at top and bottom and at approximately 60 inches (1500 mm) o.c. 2. Provide elbows at base of downspout to direct water away from building. 3. Connect downspouts to underground drainage system. 3.4 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements, sheet metal manufacturer's written installation instructions, and cited sheet metal standard. Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line, levels, and slopes. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that are per anently watertight and weather resistant. SHEETMET L FLASHING 076200 AND TRIM CITY ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 B. Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Interlock bottom edge of roof edge flashing with continuous cleat anchored to substrate at staggered 3-inch (75-mm)centers. C. Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for FM Approvals' listing for required windstorm classification. D. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof-penetration flashing with installation of roofing and other items penetrating roof. Seal with [elastomeric][butyl] sealant and clamp flashing to pipes that penetrate roof. 3.5 WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION A. General: Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating moisture according to cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Coordinate installation of wall flashing with installation of wall-opening components such as windows, doors, and louvers. 3.6 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m) on slope and location lines indicated on Drawings and within 1/8-inch (3-mm) offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles. B. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerances specified in MCA's "Guide Specification for Residential Metal Roofing." 3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering. B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder. C. Clean off excess sealants. D. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of sheet metal flashing and trim installation, remove unused materials and clean finished surfaces as recommended by sheet metal flashing and trim manufacturer. Maintain sheet metal flashing and trim in clean condition during construction. SHEET METAL FLASHING 076200 AND TRIM CITY ROUN III ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 E. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have dete iorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procH dures. END OF SEITION 076200 SHEET MET L FLASHING 076200 AND TRIM CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 SECTION 079200 -JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Silicone joint sealants. 2. Urethane joint sealants. 3. Butyl joint sealants. 4. Latex joint sealants. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product. B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from the following: 1. Movement of the structure caused by stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression. JOINT SEALANTS 079200 CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 2. Disintegration of joint substrates from causes exceeding design specifications. 3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents. 4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric contaminants. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 JOINT SEALANTS, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.2 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS A. Silicone, S, NS, 100/50, NT: Single-component, nonsag, plus 100 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use NT. 2.3 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS A. Urethane, S, P, 25, T, NT: Single-component, pourable, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade P, Class 25, Uses T and NT. 2.4 BUTYL JOINT SEALANTS A. Butyl-Rubber-Based Joint Sealants: ASTM C 1311. 2.5 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS A. Acrylic Latex: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF. 2.6 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING A. Sealant Backing Material, General: Nonstaining; compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin)][Type 0 (open-cell material), and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance. JOINT SEALANTS 079200 CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests. B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates. C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost. 2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following: a. Concrete. b. Masonry. 3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. JOINT SEALANTS 079200 CITY OF RO ND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 4. III Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following: a. Metal. b. Glass. B. Join Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior exp:rience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written inst ' ctions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or mig ation onto adjoining surfaces. C. Mas ing Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Re rove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.3 INS ALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. Genral: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for pro.ucts and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply. B. Sea ant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. C. Inst.:II sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at posi ion required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants rela give to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application, and replace them with dry materials. D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints. E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs bel.w to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air poc ets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. JOINT SEAL A NTS 079200 CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193 unless otherwise indicated. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out, remove, and repair damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work. 3.6 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE A. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces. 1. Joint Locations: a. Isolation and contraction joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs. 2. Joint Sealant: Urethane, M, P, 50, T, NT. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. B. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces. 1. Joint Locations: a. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry. b. Joints in dimension stone cladding. c. Other joints as indicated on Drawings. 2. Joint Sealant: Silicone, nonstaining, S, NS, 50, NT. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. C. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces not subject to significant movement. 1. Joint Locations: JOINT SEALANTS 079200 CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 a. Control joints exposed on interior surfaces of exterior walls. b. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors, and windows. c. Other joints as indicated on Drawings. 2. Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. D. Joi 1 -Sealant Application: Mildew-resistant interior joints in vertical surfaces and hori-ontal nontraffic surfaces. 1. Joint Locations: a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters. b. Other joints as indicated on Drawings. 2. Joint Sealant: Silicone, mildew resistant, acid curing, S, NS, 25, NT. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. E. Join -Sealant Application: Concealed mastics. 1. Joint Locations: a. Aluminum thresholds. b. Sill plates. c. Other joints as indicated on Drawings. 2. Joint Sealant: Butyl-rubber based. 3. I Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. END OF SE' TION 079200 JOINT SEAL A NTS 079200 CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes hollow-metal work. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings according to NAAMM-HMMA 803 or SDI A250.8. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate anchorage installation for hollow-metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Include the following: 1. Elevations of each door type. 2. Details of doors, including vertical- and horizontal-edge details and metal thicknesses. 3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. 4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 5. Details of each different wall opening condition. 6. Details of anchorages,joints, field splices, and connections. 7. Details of accessories. HOLLOW METAL DOORS 081113 AND FRAMES CITY OF R UND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 8. Details of moldings, removable ,stoP s andglazing. 9. Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems. C. Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow-metal work prepared by or under the suprvision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as tho-e on Drawings. Coordinate with final Door Hardware Schedule. 1.6 DEL IVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deli er hollow-metal work palletized, packaged, or crated to provide protection during tranit and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic. 1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to factory-finished units. B. Deli er welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welued to jambs and mullions. C. Sto le hollow-metal work vertically under cover at Project site with head up. Place on minmum 4-inch-(102-mm-)high wood blocking. Provide minimum 1/4-inch (6-mm) spa e between each stacked door to permit air circulation. PART 2 - PODUCTS A. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow-metal work from single source from single ma ufacturer. 2.2 INTERIOR DOORS AND FRAMES A. Construct interior doors and frames to comply with the standards indicated for materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as specified. B. Standard-Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 1. 1. Physical Performance: Level C according to SDI A250.4. 2. Doors: a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches (44.5 mm). c. Face: Metallic-coated, cold-rolled steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.032 inch (0.8 mm). d. Edge Construction: Model 1, Full Flush. e. Core: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polystyrene, polyurethane, polyisocyanurate, mineral-board, or vertical steel-stiffener core at manufacturer's discretion. f. Core: Vertical steel stiffener. 3. Frames: HOLLOW METAL DOORS 081113 AND FRAMES CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 a. Materials: Metallic-coated, cold-rolled steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch (1.0 mm). b. Construction: Face welded. 4. Exposed Finish: Prime. 2.3 EXTERIOR HOLLOW-METAL DOORS AND FRAMES A. Construct exterior doors and frames to comply with the standards indicated for materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as specified. B. Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 2. 1. Physical Performance: Level B according to SDI A250.4. 2. Doors: a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches (44.5 mm.) c. Face: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch (1.0 mm), with minimum A40 (ZF120) coating. d. Edge Construction: Model 1, Full Flush. e. Core: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polystyrene, polyurethane, polyisocyanurate, mineral-board, or vertical steel-stiffener core at manufacturer's discretion. f. Core: Vertical steel stiffener. 3. Frames: a. Materials: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch (1.3 mm), with minimum A40 (ZF120) coating. b. Construction: Face welded. 4. Exposed Finish: Prime. 2.4 FRAME ANCHORS A. Jamb Anchors: 1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not less than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm)thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches (51 mm) wide by 10 inches (254 mm) long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch (4.5 mm)thick. B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch (1.0 mm), and as follows: 1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners. HOLLOW METAL DOORS 081113 AND FRAMES CITY OF RIUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 2.5 MA ERIALS A. Cole-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications. B. Hot Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of s ale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled. C. Met:llic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B. D. Fra e Anchors: ASTM A 879/A 879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Z (12G) coating designation; mill phosphatized. 1. i For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B. E. Ins Irts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M. F. Po er-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for app cation indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accssory devices for attaching hollow-metal frames of type indicated. G. Gro t: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches (102 mm), as me:sured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M. H. Minral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); con isting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for co ibustion characteristics. I. Gla ing: Comply with requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing." J. Bitu inous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, compounded for 15-mu (0.4-mm) dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibe s, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities. 2.6 FA:RlCATlON A. Fab icate hollow-metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately for ' metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for metal thickness. Wh:re practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper ass:mbly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory ass mbled before shipment. B. Hollow-Metal Doors: 1. Steel-Stiffened Door Cores: Provide minimum thickness 0.026 inch (0.66 mm), steel vertical stiffeners of same material as face sheets extending full-door height, with vertical webs spaced not more than 6 inches (152 mm) apart. Spot HOLLOW M:TAL DOORS 081113 AND FRAM='S CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 weld to face sheets no more than 5 inches (127 mm) o.c. Fill spaces between stiffeners with glass-or mineral-fiber insulation. 2. Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Provide beveled or square edges at manufacturer's discretion. 3. Top Edge Closures: Close top edges of doors with inverted closures, except provide flush closures at exterior doors of same material as face sheets. 4. Bottom Edge Closures: Close bottom edges of doors where required for attachment of weather stripping with end closures or channels of same material as face sheets. 5. Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottoms of exterior doors to permit moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration. C. Hollow-Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames. 1. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. 2. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be grouted. 3. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottoms of jambs with at least four spot welds per anchor; however, for slip-on drywall frames, provide anchor clips or countersunk holes at bottoms of jambs. 4. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows: a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 16 inches (406 mm)from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813 mm) o.c., to match coursing, and as follows: 1) Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches (1524 mm) high. 2) Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches (1524 to 2286 mm) high. 3) Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches (2286 to 3048 mm) high. 4) Four anchors per jamb plus one additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches (610 mm) or fraction thereof above 120 inches (3048 mm) high. 5. Head Anchors: Two anchors per head for frames more than 42 inches (1067 mm)wide and mounted in metal-stud partitions. 6. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, drill stops to receive door silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction. a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers. b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers. 7. Terminated Stops: Terminate stops 6 inches (152 mm) above finish floor with a 45-degree angle cut, and close open end of stop with steel sheet closure. Cover opening in extension of frame with welded-steel filler plate, with welds ground smooth and flush with frame. HOLLOW METAL DOORS 081113 AND FRAMES CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 D. Fab icate concealed stiffeners and edge channels from either cold- or hot-rolled steel she-t. E. Haroware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal work to receive templated mo ised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates. 1. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface- mounted door hardware. 2. Comply with applicable requirements in SDI A250.6 and BHMA A156.115 for preparation of hollow-metal work for hardware. 2.7 ST:EL FINISHES A. Pri e Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer. 1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer complying with SDI A250.10; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure. 2.8 ACC ESSORIES A. Gro t Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inch (0.4 mm thick. PART 3 - EX CUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Exa ine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with req irements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the ork. B. Exa ine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before frame installation. C. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental. to performance of the Work. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. HOLLOW M TAL DOORS 081113 AND FRAME CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 B. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface- mounted door hardware. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install hollow-metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place. Comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Hollow-Metal Frames: Install hollow-metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with SDI A250.11 or NAAMM-HMMA 840 as required by standards specified. 1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. a. At fire-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80. b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. c. Install frames with removable stops located on secure side of opening. d. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. e. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been properly set and secured. f. Check plumb, square, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances. g. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that will be filled with grout containing antifreezing agents. 2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors. a. Floor anchors may be set with power-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings. 3. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between frames and masonry with grout. 4. In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. 5. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow-metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances: a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs at floor. HOLLOW METAL DOORS 081113 AND FRAMES CITY OF RO UND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 C. Holliw-Metal Doors: Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances spe ified below. Shim as necessary. 1. Non-Fire-Rated Steel Doors: a. Between Door and Frame Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) plus or minus 1/32 inch (0.8 mm). b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) to 1/4 inch (6.3 mm) plus or minus 1/32 inch (0.8 mm). c. At Bottom of Door: 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) plus or minus 1/32 inch (0.8 mm). d. Between Door Face and Stop: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm)to 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) plus or minus 1/32 inch (0.8 mm). 2. i Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80. 3. Smoke-Control Doors: Install doors and gaskets according to NFPA 105. 3.4 AD LISTING AND CLEANING A. Fin.l Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before fina I inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and repi:ce defective work, including hollow-metal work that is warped, bowed, or oth:rwise unacceptable. B. Re ove grout and other bonding material from hollow-metal work immediately after inst..Ilation. C. Pri e-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged are1s of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer. D. Met:Ilic-Coated Surface Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing rep.ir paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. E. Facory-Finish Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with same material used for factory finish according to manufacturer's written instructions. F. Tou, hup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of abraded areas of paint are spec ified in painting Sections. END OF SEITlON 081113 HOLLOW M:TAL DOORS 081113 AND FRAME'. CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 06/18/2021 SECTION 085113 -ALUMINUM WINDOWS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes aluminum windows for exterior locations. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, glazing and fabrication methods, dimensions of individual components and profiles, hardware, and finishes for aluminum windows. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, hardware, accessories, insect screens, operational clearances, and details of installation, including anchor, flashing, and sealant installation. C. Product Schedule: For aluminum windows. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer and Installer. B. Product Test Reports: For each type of aluminum window, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. C. Field quality-control reports. D. Sample Warranties: For manufacturer's warranties. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace aluminum windows that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. ALUMINUM WINDOWS 085113 CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 06/18/2021 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Failure to meet performance requirements. b. Structural failures including excessive deflection, water leakage, condensation, and air infiltration. c. Faulty operation of movable sash and hardware. d. Deterioration of materials and finishes beyond normal weathering. e. Failure of insulating glass. 2. Warranty Period: a. Window: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. b. Glazing Units: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. c. Aluminum Finish: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain aluminum windows from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 WINDOW PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Product Standard: Comply with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 for definitions and minimum standards of performance, materials, components, accessories, and fabrication unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 1. Window Certification: AMMA certified with label attached to each window. B. Con ensation-Resistance Factor (CRF): Provide aluminum windows tested for thermal perf rmance according to AAMA 1503, showing a CRF of 45. C. The mal Movements: Provide aluminum windows, including anchorage, that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C) material surfaces. 2.3 ALUMINUM WINDOWS A. Operating Types: Provide the following operating types in locations indicated on Drawings: 1. Fixed. ALUMINUM WINDOWS 085113 CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 06/18/2021 B. Frames and Sashes: Aluminum extrusions complying with AAMAIWDMA/CSA 1O1/I.S.2/A440. 1. Thermally Improved Construction: Fabricate frames, sashes, and muntins with an integral, concealed, low-conductance thermal barrier located between exterior materials and window members exposed on interior side in a manner that eliminates direct metal-to-metal contact. C. Glass: Clear annealed glass, ASTM C 1036, Type 1, Class 1, q3. 1. Kind: Fully tempered D. Insulating-Glass Units: ASTM E 2190. 1. Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type 1, Class 1, q3. a. Tint: Gray b. Kind: Fully tempered 2. Filling: Fill space between glass lites with air 3. Low-E Coating: Pyrolytic on second surface E. Weather Stripping: Provide full-perimeter weather stripping for each operable sash unless otherwise indicated. F. Fasteners: Noncorrosive and compatible with window members, trim, hardware, anchors, and other components. 1. Exposed Fasteners: Do not use exposed fasteners to the greatest extent possible. For application of hardware, use fasteners that match finish hardware being fastened. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Fabricate aluminum windows in sizes indicated. Include a complete system for assembling components and anchoring windows. B. Glaze aluminum windows in the factory. C. Weather strip each operable sash to provide weathertight installation. D. Weep Holes: Provide weep holes and internal passages to conduct infiltrating water to exterior. E. Provide water-shed members above side-hinged sashes and similar lines of natural water penetration. F. Mullions: Provide mullions and cover plates, matching window units, complete with anchors for support to structure and installation of window units. Allow for erection tolerances and provide for movement of window units due to thermal expansion and building deflections, as indicated. Provide mullions and cover plates capable of withstanding design wind loads of window units. ALUMINUM WINDOWS 085113 CITY OF ROTUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 06/18/2021 G. Co plete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work in the factsry to greatest extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shi.ment and installation. 2.5 GE ERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Co ply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Pro sect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a stri•pable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. App-arance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are :cceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable vari:tions in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other co ponents are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assmbled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.6 AL MINUM FINISHES A. Finih designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Alu inum Association for designating aluminum finishes. B. Cla-s II, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A31 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as fabr Gated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural CIas II, clear coating 0.010 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611. PART 3 - EX CUTION 3.1 E •MINATION A. Exa ine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions, with Inst.:Iler present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other c0n4itions affecting performance of the Work. B. Veri jr rough opening dimensions, levelness of sill plate, and operational clearances. C. Exa ine wall flashings, vapor retarders, water and weather barriers, and other built-in corn onents to ensure weathertight window installation. D. Pro eed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INS ALLATION A. Co ply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing windows, hardware, acc ssories, and other components. For installation procedures and requirements not add essed in manufacturer's written instructions, comply with installation requirements in ASTM E 2112. ALUMINUM WINDOWS 085113 CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 06/18/2021 B. Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing and other adjacent construction to produce weathertight construction. C. Install windows and components to drain condensation, water penetrating joints, and moisture migrating within windows to the exterior. D. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. 1. Testing and inspecting agency will interpret tests and state in each report whether tested work complies with or deviates from requirements. B. Testing Services: Testing and inspecting of installed windows shall take place as follows: 1. Testing Methodology: Testing of windows for air infiltration and water resistance shall be performed according to AAMA 502. 2. Air-Infiltration Testing: a. Test Pressure: That required to determine compliance with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 performance class indicated. b. Allowable Air-Leakage Rate: 1.5 times the applicable AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 rate for product type and performance class rounded down to one decimal place. 3. Water-Resistance Testing: a. Test Pressure: Two-thirds times test pressure required to determine compliance with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 performance grade indicated. b. Allowable Water Infiltration: No water penetration. 4. Testing Extent: Three windows of each type as selected by Architect and a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency. Windows shall be tested after perimeter sealants have cured. 5. Test Reports: Prepared according to AAMA 502. C. Remove and replace noncomplying windows and retest as specified above. D. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. E. Prepare test and inspection reports. ALUMINUM WINDOWS 085113 CITY OF RO UND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 06/18/2021 3.4 AD USTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION A. Adj st operating sashes and hardware for a tight fit at contact points and weather stri ping for smooth operation and weathertight closure. B. CIe. n exposed surfaces immediately after installing windows. Avoid damaging protctive coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and oth:r substances. 1. ' Keep protective films and coverings in place until final cleaning. C. Re ove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or da aged during construction period. D. Project window surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from con.truction operations. If contaminating substances do contact window surfaces, rem.ve contaminants immediately according to manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SE A TION 085113 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 085113 CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 SECTION 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Mechanical door hardware for the following: a. Swinging doors. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction and installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Other Action Submittals: 1. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as installation procedures and diagrams. Coordinate final door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. a. Submittal Sequence: Submit door hardware schedule after or concurrent with submissions of Product Data, Samples, and Shop Drawings. Coordinate submission of door hardware schedule with scheduling requirements of other work to facilitate the fabrication of other work that is critical in Project construction schedule. b. Format: Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical format in DHI's "Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule." Double space entries, and number and date each page. c. Format: Use same scheduling sequence and format and use same door numbers as in the Contract Documents. d. Content: Include the following information: 1) Identification number, location, hand, fire rating, size, and material of each door and frame. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 CITY OF RO UND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 2) Locations of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings on floor plans and to door and frame schedule. 3) Complete designations, including name and manufacturer, type, style, function, size, quantity, function, and finish of each door hardware product. 4) Description of electrified door hardware sequences of operation and interfaces with other building control systems. 5) Fastenings and other pertinent information. 6) Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. 7) Mounting locations for door hardware. 8) List of related door devices specified in other Sections for each door and frame. 2. Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer, detailing Owner's final keying instructions for locks. Include schematic keying diagram and index each key set to unique door designations that are coordinated with the Contract Documents. 1.4 CLISEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Mai tenance Data: For each type of door hardware to include in maintenance manuals. Inci de final hardware and keying schedule. 1.5 QU A LITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Supplier of products and an employer of workers trained and appoved by product manufacturers and an Architectural Hardware Consultant who is available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Ow per about door hardware and keying. 1. Warehousing Facilities: In Project's vicinity. 2. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedules. 3. ', Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for electrified door hardware, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project. B. Arc itectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A person who is experienced in pro iding consulting services for door hardware installations that are comparable in mats rial, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and who is currently certii ied by DHI as follows: C. Sou ce Limitations: Obtain each type of door hardware from a single manufacturer. 1. Provide electrified door hardware from same manufacturer as mechanical door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. Manufacturers that perform electrical modifications and that are listed by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction are acceptable. DOOR HAR WARE 087100 CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 D. Accessibility Requirements: For door hardware on doors in an accessible route, comply with the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines, ICC/ANSI A117.1, and Texas Accessibility Standards. 1. Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 Ibf(22.2 N). 2. Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements: a. Interior, Non-Fire-Rated Hinged Doors: 5 lbf(22.2 N) applied perpendicular to door. 3. Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2. Provide thresholds not more than 1/2 inch (13 mm) high. 4. Adjust door closer sweep periods so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches (75 mm) from the latch, measured to the leading edge of the door. E. Keying Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination." In addition to Owner Contractor, and Architect, conference participants shall also include Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant and Owner's security consultant. Incorporate keying conference decisions into final keying schedule after reviewing door hardware keying system including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Function of building, flow of traffic, purpose of each area, degree of security required, and plans for future expansion. 2. Preliminary key system schematic diagram. 3. Requirements for key control system. 4. Requirements for access control. 5. Address for delivery of keys. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to Project site. B. Tag each item or package separately with identification coordinated with the final door hardware schedule, and include installation instructions, templates, and necessary fasteners with each item or package. C. Deliver keys to manufacturer of key control system for subsequent delivery to Owner. D. Deliver keys and permanent cores to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of floor-recessed door hardware with floor construction. Cast anchoring inserts into concrete. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 B. Installation Templates: Distribute for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated req irements. C. Sec rity: Coordinate installation of door hardware, keying, and access control with Ow er's security consultant. D. Ele trical System Roughing-In: Coordinate layout and installation of electrified door har ware with connections to power supplies and building safety and security systems. 1.8 WA RANTY A. Spe ial Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or r place components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within spe ified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage. b. Faulty operation of doors and door hardware. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering and use. 2. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise indicated. a. Manual Closers: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.9 MAI TENANCE SERVICE A. Mai tenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and mai tenance instructions for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware. PART 2 - PRI DUCTS 2.1 SC EDULEDDOORHARDWARE A. Pro ide door hardware for each door as scheduled on Drawings to comply with requirements in this Section. 1. Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and products equivalent in function and comparable in quality to named products 2.2 HIND ES A. Hinges: BHMA A156.1. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 2.3 CONTINUOUS HINGES A. Continuous Hinges: BHMA A156.26; minimum 0.1 20-inch-(3.O-mm-)thick, hinge leaves with minimum overall width of 4 inches (102 mm); fabricated to full height of door and frame and to template screw locations; with components finished after milling and drilling are complete. B. Continuous, Gear-Type Hinges: Extruded-aluminum, pinless, geared hinge leaves joined by a continuous extruded-aluminum channel cap; with concealed, self- lubricating thrust bearings. 2.4 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES A. Lock Functions: As indicated in door hardware schedule. B. Lock Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts required for labeled fire doors, and as follows: 1. Bored Locks: Minimum 1/2-inch (13-mm) latchbolt throw. 2. Mortise Locks: Minimum 3/4-inch (19-mm) latchbolt throw. 3. Deadbolts: Minimum 1.25-inch (32-mm) bolt throw. C. Lock Backset: 2-3/4 inches (70 mm), unless otherwise indicated. D. Lock Trim: 1. Description: As indicated on Drawings. E. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike for each lock bolt or latchbolt complying with requirements indicated for applicable lock or latch and with strike box and curved lip extended to protect frame; finished to match lock or latch. 1. Flat-Lip Strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latchbolts, as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Extra-Long-Lip Strikes: For locks used on frames with applied wood casing trim. 3. Aluminum-Frame Strike Box: Manufacturer's special strike box fabricated for aluminum framing. 4. Rabbet Front and Strike: Provide on locksets for rabbeted meeting stiles. F. Bored Locks: BHMA A156.2; Grade 1; Series 4000. 2.5 LOCK CYLINDERS A. Lock Cylinders: Tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver. 1. Manufacturer: Same manufacturer as for locking devices. B. Standard Lock Cylinders: BHMA A156.5; Grade 1; permanent cores that are interchangeable; face finished to match lockset. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 CITY OF RO UND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 C. Co struction Master Keys: Provide cylinders with feature that permits voiding of con.truction keys without cylinder removal. Provide 10 construction master keys. D. Co struction Cores: Provide construction cores that are replaceable by permanent cor:s. Provide 10 construction master keys. 2.6 KE ING A. Key ng System: Factory registered, complying with guidelines in BHMA A156.28, App-ndix A. Incorporate decisions made in keying conference. 1. No Master Key System: Only change keys operate cylinder. 2. Master Key System: Change keys and a master key operate cylinders. 3. Grand Master Key System: Change keys, a master key, and a grand master key operate cylinders. 4. Great-Grand Master Key System: Change keys, a master key, a grand master key, and a great-grand master key operate cylinders. 5. Existing System: a. Master key or grand master key locks to Owner's existing system. b. Re-key Owner's existing master key system into new keying system. 6. Keyed Alike: Key all cylinders to same change key. B. Key.: Nickel silver. 1. Stamping: Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key control number and include the following notation: a. Notation: Information to be furnished by Owner. 2. Quantity: In addition to one extra key blank for each lock, provide the following: a. Cylinder Change Keys: Three. b. Master Keys: Five. c. Grand Master Keys: Five. d. Great-Grand Master Keys: Five. 2.7 SU FACE CLOSERS A. Surf ce Closers: BHMA A156.4; rack-and-pinion hydraulic type with adjustable sweep and latch speeds controlled by key-operated valves and forged-steel main arm. Co ply with manufacturer's written recommendations for size of door closers dep nding on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Pro ide factory-sized closers, adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for ope ing force. 2.8 DO R GASKETING A. Doo Gasketing: ,BHMA A156.22; air leakage not to exceed 0.50 cfm per foot (0.0 0774 cu. m/s per m) of crack length for gasketing other than for smoke control, as DOOR HARDWARE 087100 CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 tested according to ASTM E 283; with resilient or flexible seal strips that are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer. 2.9 THRESHOLDS A. Thresholds: BHMA A156.21; fabricated to full width of opening indicated. 2.10 FABRICATION A. Manufacturer's Nameplate: Do not provide products that have manufacturer's name or trade name displayed in a visible location except in conjunction with required fire-rated labels and as otherwise approved by Architect. 1. Manufacturer's identification is permitted on rim of lock cylinders only. B. Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of base metal indicated, fabricated by forming method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness. Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware units and BHMA A156.18. C. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws that comply with commercially recognized industry standards for application intended, except aluminum fasteners are not permitted. Provide Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Concealed Fasteners: For door hardware units that are exposed when door is closed, except for units already specified with concealed fasteners. Do not use through bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed unless it is the only means of securely attaching the door hardware. Where through bolts are used on hollow door and frame construction, provide sleeves for each through bolt. 2.11 FINISHES A. Provide finishes complying with BHMA A156.18 as indicated in door hardware schedule. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 PART 3 - E ECUTION 3.1 E A MINATION A. Exa ine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for inst. Ilation tolerances, labeled fire-rated door assembly construction, wall and floor con truction, and other conditions affecting performance. B. Exa, ine roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring con ections before electrified door hardware installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PR:PARATlON A. Ste:l Doors and Frames: For surface applied door hardware, drill and tap doors and fra es according to ANSI/SDI A250.6. B. Wo.d Doors: Comply with DHI WDHS.5 "Recommended Hardware Reinforcement Loc.tions for Mineral Core Wood Flush Doors." 3.3 INS ALLATION A. Mo nting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights to comply with the following unle.s otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations. 1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8. 2. Custom Steel Doors and Frames: HMMA 831. B. lnst II each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing. Do not install surface- mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved. 1. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation. 2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards. C. Hinges: Install types and in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule but not fewer than the number recommended by manufacturer for application indicated or one hinge for every 30 inches (750 mm) of door height, whichever is more stringent, unless other equivalent means of support for door, such as spring hinges or pivots, are provided. D. Intermediate Offset Pivots: Where offset pivots are indicated, provide intermediate offset pivots in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule but not fewer than one DOOR HARDWARE 087100 CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 intermediate offset pivot per door and one additional intermediate offset pivot for every 30 inches (750 mm)of door height greater than 90 inches (2286 mm). E. Lock Cylinders: Install construction cores to secure building and areas during construction period. 1. Replace construction cores with permanent cores as directed by Owner 2. Furnish permanent cores to Owner for installation. F. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior doors and other doors indicated in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants." G. Stops: Provide floor stops for doors unless wall or other type stops are indicated in door hardware schedule. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. H. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame. I. Meeting Stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors are closed. J. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is closed. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. 1. Spring Hinges: Adjust to achieve positive latching when door is allowed to close freely from an open position of 30 degrees. 2. Electric Strikes: Adjust horizontal and vertical alignment of keeper to properly engage lock bolt. 3. Door Closers: Adjust sweep period to comply with accessibility requirements and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Occupancy Adjustment: Approximately three months after date of Substantial Completion, Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant shall examine and readjust each item of door hardware, including adjusting operating forces, as necessary to ensure function of doors, door hardware, and electrified door hardware. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation. B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish. C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 3.6 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain door hardware and door hardware finishes. Refer to Section 017900"Demonstration and Training." END OF SECTION 087100 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 SECTION 092216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior gypsum board assemblies. 2. Suspension systems for interior gypsum ceilings, soffits, and grid systems. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FRAMING SYSTEMS A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. 1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless otherwise indicated. 2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 (Z120), hot-dip galvanized unless otherwise indicated. B. Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. Use either steel studs and runners or dimpled steel studs and runners. 1. Steel Studs and Runners: a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.018 inch (0.45 mm). b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. C. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide one of the following: 1. Single Long-Leg Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-inch-(51-mm- )deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs, installed with studs friction fit into top runner and with continuous bridging located within 12 inches (305 mm) of the top of studs to provide lateral bracing. NON-STRUCTURAL METAL 092216 FRAMING CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 2. Double-Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runners, inside runner with 2-inch-(51- mm-)deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs and fastened to studs, and outer runner sized to friction fit inside runner. 3. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. D. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated. 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.018 inch (0.45 mm). 2.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Tie ire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch-(1.59- mm }diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch-(1.21-mm-)diameter wire. B. Wir Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.16 inch (4.12 mm) in diameter. C. Grid Suspension System for Gypsum Board Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system co posed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock. 2.3 AU ILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards. 1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow- metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and that hangers will develop their full strength. NON-STRUdTURAL METAL 092216 FRAMING CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754. 1. Gypsum Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 841 that apply to framing installation. 2. Portland Cement Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 1063 that apply to framing installation. 3. Gypsum Veneer Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 844 that apply to framing installation. 4. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation. B. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies. D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently. 3.4 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types. 1. Single-Layer Application: 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 2. Multilayer Application: 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 3. Tile Backing Panels: 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. unless otherwise indicated. B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall. C. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction. D. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling. 1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies. 2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated. NON-STRUCTURAL METAL 092216 FRAMING CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch (13-mm) clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly. c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure. 3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. E. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing. 3.5 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Install suspension system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types. 1. Hangers: 48 inches (1219 mm) o.c. 2. Carrying Channels (Main Runners): 48 inches (1219 mm) o.c. 3. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. B. Isol to suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by lcuilding structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system. a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices. a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced installation standards. 3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 4. Flat Hangers: Secure to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure NON-STRUCTURAL METAL 092216 FRAMING CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 and appropriate for structure and hanger, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 5. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. 6. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts that extend through forms. 7. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck. 8. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit. D. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track. E. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 3.6 m) measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes. END OF SECTION 092216 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL 092216 FRAMING CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 SECTION 09 900 - GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RE 'TED DOCUMENTS A. Dra ings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Sup.lementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Secion. 1.2 SU MARY A. Secion Includes: 1. Interior gypsum board. 1.3 AC ION SUBMITTALS A. Pro'uct Data: For each type of product. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging. 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent. B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned. C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. GYPSUM BOARD 092900 CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency. C. Low Emitting Materials: For ceiling and wall assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly and complying with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." 2.2 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL A. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated. 2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm). B. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. With moisture- and mold-resistant core and paper surfaces. 1. Core: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. 3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274. 2.4 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced galvanized steel sheet. 2. Shapes: a. Cornerbead. b. Bullnose bead. c. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. GYPSUM BOARD 092900 CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 e. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound. f. Expansion (control)joint. g. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges. 2.5 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M. B. of Tape: J r�t p 1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper. 2. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Paper. 3. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10-by-10 glass mesh. 4. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer. C. Joirft Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is coripatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound. a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories. 3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound. 2.6 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick. 2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer. C. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool. 1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly. D. Thertmal Insulation: As specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation." GYPSUM BOARD 092900 CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 E. Vapor Retarder: As specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL A. Comply with ASTM C 840. B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member. C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) of open space between panels. Do not force into place. D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings. E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels. F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally. 1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. (0.7 sq. m) in area. 2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4-to 3/8-inch-(6.4- to 9.5-mm-)wide joints to install sealant. G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch-(6.4- to 12.7-mm-)wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. GYPSUM BOARD 092900 CITY OF RiUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 H. Att.chment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attar hed to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. I. Wood Framing: Install gypsum panels over wood framing, with floating internal corner con.truction. Do not attach gypsum panels across the flat grain of wide-dimension lum'er, including floor joists and headers. Float gypsum panels over these members or pro ide control joints to counteract wood shrinkage. J. STD-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at ope ings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install aco stical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Co ply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations for loca,ing edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, incl ding sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings. K. Inst.:II sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are rea.ily installed after panels have been installed on one side. 3.3 INS ALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Gen ral: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fastners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written inst ctions. B. Con rol Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific loc tions approved by Architect for visual effect. C. Inte for Trim: Install in the following locations: 1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners 2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges 3.4 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD A. GenraI: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, pen:trations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adja ent surfaces. B. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas. C. Appk joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically mdi. ted as not intended to receive tape. D. Gypum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to AST C 840: 1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. 2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile. 3. Level 3:Where indicated on Drawings. GYPSUM BO A RD 092900 CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 4. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated. a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 099123 "Interior Painting." 5. Level 5: Where indicated on Drawings. a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 099123 "Interior Painting." E. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions for use as exposed soffit board. F. Glass-Mat Faced Panels: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions. G. Cementitious Backer Units: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.5 APPLYING TEXTURE FINISHES A. Surface Preparation and Primer: Prepare and apply primer to gypsum panels and other surfaces receiving texture finishes. Apply primer to surfaces that are clean, dry, and smooth. B. Texture Finish Application: Mix and apply finish using powered spray equipment, to produce a uniform texture free of starved spots or other evidence of thin application or of application patterns. C. Prevent texture finishes from coming into contact with surfaces not indicated to receive texture finish by covering them with masking agents, polyethylene film, or other means. If, despite these precautions, texture finishes contact these surfaces, immediately remove droppings and overspray to prevent damage according to texture-finish manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application. B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period. C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. END OF SECTION 092900 GYPSUM BOARD 092900 CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 SECTION 096513 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Dra ings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Sec on. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Resilient base. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated. 1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet (3 linear m) for every 500 linear feet (150 linear m) or fraction thereof, of each type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stor� resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the wea her, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) or more than 90 deg F (32 deg C). 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F (21 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C), in spaces to receive resilient products during the following time periods: 1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. RESILIENT BASE AND 096513 ACCESSORIES CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 3. 48 hours after installation. B. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C). C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 THERMOSET-RUBBER BASE A. Product Standard: ASTM F 1861, Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset), Group (solid, homogeneous). 1. Style: a. Style B, Cove. B. Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm). C. Height: 4 inches (102 mm). D. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length E. Outside Corners: Job formed F. Inside Corners: Job formed G. Colors: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors 2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by resilient- product manufacturer for applications indicated. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by resilient-product manufacturer for resilient products and substrate conditions indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. RESILIENT BASE AND 096513 ACCESSORIES CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products. B. Proeed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Installation of resilient products indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products. B. Do not install resilient products until they are the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. 1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed. C. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products. 3.3 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base. B. App y resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. C. Inst43ll resilient base in lengths as long as practical without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned. D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in con inuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation. F. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material. G. Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces. H. Job-Formed Corners: 1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns not less than 3 inches (76 mm) in length. a. Form without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends. 2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns not less than 3 inches (76 mm) in length. RESILIENT BASE AND 096513 ACCESSORIES CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 a. Miter or cope corners to minimize open joints. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting resilient products. B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient-product installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum horizontal surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop horizontal surfaces to remove marks and soil. C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. D. Cover resilient products subject to wear and foot traffic until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 096513 RESILIENT BASE AND 096513 ACCESSORIES CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 SECTION 099113 - EXTERIOR PAINTING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on exterior substrates. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. MPI Gloss Level 1: Not more than five units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. B. MPI Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. C. MPI Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. D. MPI Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. E. MPI Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. F. MPI Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions. 1. Include printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified, with the proposed product highlighted. 2. Indicate VOC content. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product. EXTERIOR PAINTING 099113 CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. (3.8 L) of each material and color applied. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system. a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m). b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required. 2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups. a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner. 3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F (7 deg C). 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F (10 and 35 deg C). B. Do not apply paints in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. EXTERIOR PAINTING 099113 CITY OF RSUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 PART 2 - PODUCTS 2.1 PAI T, GENERAL A. MPI Standards: Products shall comply with MPI standards indicated and shall be listed in it. "MPI Approved Products Lists." B. Matrial Compatibility: 1. Materials for use within each paint system shall be compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturers for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. C. VO4 Content: Products shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction. D. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range 2.2 SO RCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Tes ting of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure: 1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials. Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If paint materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency. 2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are incompatible. PART 3 - EX CUTION 3.1 E MINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 1. Concrete: 12 percent. 2. Fiber-Cement Board: 12 percent. 3. Masonry(Clay and CMUs): 12 percent. EXTERIOR PAINTING 099113 CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 4. Wood: 15 percent. 5. Portland Cement Plaster: 12 percent. 6. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. C. Portland Cement Plaster Substrates: Verify that plaster is fully cured. D. Exterior Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth. E. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility, with existing finishes and primers. F. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated. B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection. C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated. D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. E. Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces or mortar joints exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. F. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer if any. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer 1. SSPC-SP2. 2. SSPC-SP3. 3. SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4. 4. SSPC-SPII. EXTERIOR PAINTING 099113 CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 G. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and areas where shop paint is abraded. Paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces. H. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints. I. Aluminum Substrates: Remove loose surface oxidation. J. Wood Substrates: 1. Scrape and clean knots. Before applying primer, apply coat of knot sealer recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for exterior use in paint system indicated. 2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off. 3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood. 4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. K. Plastic Trim Fabrication Substrates: Remove dust, dirt, and other foreign material that might impair bond of paints to substrates. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual." 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable items same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed items with prime coat only. 3. Paint both sides and edges of exterior doors and entire exposed surface of exterior door frames. 4. Paint entire exposed surface of window frames and sashes. 5. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. 6. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers. B. Tint undercoats same color as topcoat, but tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance. D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. EXTERIOR PAINTING 099113 CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINN INGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 E. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety and Security Work: 1. Paint the following work where exposed to view: a. Equipment, including panelboards and switch gear. b. Uninsulated metal piping. c. Uninsulated plastic piping. d. Pipe hangers and supports. e. Metal conduit. f. Plastic conduit. g. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness. 1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing. 2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.6 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A. Concrete Substrates, Nontraffic Surfaces: 1. Latex System: a. Prime Coat: Primer, alkali resistant, water based. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat. EXTERIOR PAINTING 099113 CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINN INGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 c. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5). B. Concrete Substrates, Traffic Surfaces: 1. Clear Sealer System: a. Prime Coat: Sealer, solvent based, matching topcoat. b. Intermediate Coat: Sealer, solvent based, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Sealer, solvent based, for concrete floors. C. CMU Substrates: 1. Latex System: a. Prime Coat: Block filler, latex, interior/exterior b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat. G. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5). D. Steel and Iron Substrates: 1. Quick-Dry Enamel System: a. Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd, quick dry, for metal. b. Intermediate Coat: Alkyd, quick dry, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Alkyd, quick dry, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5). E. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: 1. Alkyd System: a. Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized, cementitious. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior, alkyd enamel, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Alkyd, exterior, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5). F. Aluminum Substrates: 1. Alkyd System: a. Prime Coat: Primer, quick dry, for aluminum. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior, alkyd enamel, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Alkyd, exterior, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5). G. Wo d Substrates: Wood trim, Architectural woodwork 1. Latex over Latex Primer System: EXTERIOR HINTING 099113 CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 a. Prime Coat: Primer, latex for exterior wood. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5). H. Wood Substrates: Wood-based panel products. 1. Latex over Latex Primer System: a. Prime Coat: Primer, latex for exterior wood. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, low sheen (MPI Gloss Level 3-4). END OF SECTION 099113 EXTERIOR PAINTING 099113 CITY OF RO ND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 SECTION 099123- INTERIOR PAINTING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RE ATED DOCUMENTS A. Dra ings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Sup.lementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Sec ion. 1.2 SU MARY A. Sec ion includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on interior sub'-trates. 1.3 DEINlTIONS A. MPI Gloss Level 1: Not more than five units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, accerding to ASTM D 523. B. MPI Gloss Level 2: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 deg ees, according to ASTM D 523. C. MPI Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. D. MPI Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 deg ees, according to ASTM D 523. E. MPI Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. F. MPI Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. G. MPI Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. 1.4 AC ION SUBMITTALS A. Pro.uct Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and appl cation instructions. 1. Include Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified, with the proposed product highlighted. 2. Indicate VOC content. INTERIOR P INTING 099123 CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 B. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat. 1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches (200 mm) square. 2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area. 1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. (3.8 L) of each material and color applied. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system. a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m). b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required. 2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups. a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner. 3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F (7 deg C). 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F (10 and 35 deg C). B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. PART 2 - P O D U CTS 2.1 PAI T, GENERAL A. MPI Standards: Products shall comply with MPI standards indicated and shall be listed in it "MPI Approved Products Lists." B. Material Compatibility: 1. Materials for use within each paint system shall be compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturers for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. 2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure: 1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials. Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If paint materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency. 2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are incompatible. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 1. Concrete: 12 percent. 2. Fiber-Cement Board: 12 percent. 3. Masonry(Clay and CMUs): 12 percent. 4. Wood: 15 percent. 5. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. 6. Plaster: 12 percent. C. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth. D. Plaster Substrates: Verify that plaster is fully cured. E. Spray-Textured Ceiling Substrates: Verify that surfaces are dry. F. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility, with existing finishes and primers. G. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated. B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any. C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated. D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. E. Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces or mortar joints exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 F. Stel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer, if any. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer. G. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and areas where shop paint is abraded. Paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces. H. Gal anized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adh-sion of subsequently applied paints. I. Alu ' inum Substrates: Remove loose surface oxidation. J. Wo Substrates: 1. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer. 2. ' Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off. 3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood. 4. � After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. K. Cot'on or Canvas Insulation Covering Substrates: Remove dust, dirt, and other foreign matrial that might impair bond of paints to substrates. 3.3 APLlCATlON A. App y paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in " ' PI Manual." 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces. 4. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. 5. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers. B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coa is of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but pro ide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. C. If u'dercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until curd film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance. D. App y paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marl s, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp line- and color breaks. INTERIOR PIS INTING 099123 CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 E. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety and Security Work: 1. Paint the following work where exposed in equipment rooms: a. Equipment, including panelboards and switch gear. b. Uninsulated metal piping. c. Uninsulated plastic piping. d. Pipe hangers and supports. e. Metal conduit. f. Plastic conduit. g. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes. h. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering or other paintable jacket material. 2. Paint the following work where exposed in occupied spaces: a. Equipment, including panelboards. b. Uninsulated metal piping. c. Uninsulated plastic piping. d. Pipe hangers and supports. e. Metal conduit. f. Plastic conduit. g. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering or other paintable jacket material. h. Other items as directed by Architect. 3. Paint portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and outlets that are visible from occupied spaces. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness. 1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing. 2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.6 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A. Concrete Substrates, Traffic Surfaces: 1. Water-Based Concrete Floor Sealer System: a. First Coat: Sealer, water based, for concrete floors, matching topcoat. b. Topcoat: Sealer, water based, for concrete floors. B. Steel Substrates: 1. Latex over Shop-Applied Quick-Drying Shop Primer System: a. Prime Coat: Primer, quick dry, for shop application. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior(MPI Gloss Level 2). C. Wood Substrates: Exposed framing. 1. Latex over Latex Primer System: a. Prime Coat: Primer, latex, for interior wood. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior(MPI Gloss Level 3). D. Wood Substrates: Wood trim and wood board paneling. 1. Latex over Latex Primer System: a. Prime Coat: Primer, latex, for interior wood. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior(MPI Gloss Level 4). d. T E. Gypsum Board Substrates: 1. Latex over Latex Sealer System: INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, latex, interior. b. Prime Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. c. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. d. Topcoat: Latex, interior(MPI Gloss Level 3). END OF SECTION 099123 INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 Copyright 201I' 3 AIA MasterSpec Premium 12/13 SECTION 0'93O0 - STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RE ATED DOCUMENTS A. Dra ings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Sup.lementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Sec ion. 1.2 SU MARY A. Section includes surface preparation and application of wood stains and transparent finishes. , 1. Exterior Substrates: a. Exposed glued-laminated beams and columns. b. Exposed framing. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. MPI Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. B. MPI Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. C. MPI Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. D. MPI Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. E. MPI Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. 1.4 AC11ION SUBMITTALS A. Pro uct Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and appl cation instructions. 1. Include printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified, with the proposed product highlighted. 2. Indicate VOC content. B. San1pIes for Initial Selection: For each type of product. STAINING 4JD 099300 TRANSPARNT FINISHING Copyright 2013 AIA MasterSpec Premium 12/13 C. Product List: Cross-reference to finish system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. Include color designations. 1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Stains and Transparent Finishes: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. (3.8 L) of each material and color applied. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each finish system indicated and each color selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each type of finish system and substrate. a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m). b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required. 2. Final approval of stain color selections will be based on mockups. a. If preliminary stain color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional stain colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F (7 deg C). 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Apply finishes only when temperature of surfaces to be finished and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F (10 and 35 deg C). B. Do not apply finishes when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point, or to damp or wet surfaces. C. Do not apply exterior finishes in snow, rain, fog, or mist. STAINING AND 099300 TRANSPARENT FINISHING Copyright 2013 AIA MasterSpec Premium 12/13 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. MPI Standards: Products shall comply with MPI standards indicated and shall be listed in its "MPI Approved Products List." B. Material Compatibility: 1. Materials for use within each paint system shall be compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. C. Stain Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.2 SO11JRCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Tesing of Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure: 1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample wood finishing materials. Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency. 2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying wood finishes if test results show materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying materials from Project site, pay for testing, and refinish surfaces finished with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously finished surfaces before refinishing with complying materials if the two finishes are incompatible or produce results that, in the opinion of the Architect, are aesthetically unacceptable. PART 3 - EX: CUTION 3.1 E AMINATION A. Exa ine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting perfis rmance of the Work. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Exterior Wood Substrates: 15 percent, when measured with an electronic moisture meter. C. Maximum Moisture Content of Interior Wood Substrates: [15][13][10][9] percent, when measured with an electronic moisture meter. STAINING AND 099300 TRANSPARENT FINISHING Copyright 2013 AIA MasterSpec Premium 12/13 D. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers. E. Proceed with finish application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Beginning finish application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated. B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and finishing. 1. After completing finishing operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any. C. Clean and prepare surfaces to be finished according to manufacturer's written instructions for each substrate condition and as specified. 1. Remove dust, dirt, oil, and grease by washing with a detergent solution; rinse thoroughly with clean water and allow to dry. Remove grade stamps and pencil marks by sanding lightly. Remove loose wood fibers by brushing. 2. Remove mildew by scrubbing with a commercial wash formulated for mildew removal and as recommended by stain manufacturer. D. Exterior Wood Substrates: 1. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer. 2. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood. a. For solid hide stained wood, stain edges and ends after priming. b. For varnish-coated stained wood, stain edges and ends and prime with varnish. Prime undersides and backsides with varnish. 3. Countersink steel nails, if used, and fill with putty or plastic wood filler tinted to final color. Sand smooth when dried. E. Interior Wood Substrates: 1. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer. 2. Apply wood filler paste to open-grain woods, as defined in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual," to produce smooth, glasslike finish. 3. Sand surfaces exposed to view and dust off. 4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dry. STAINING AND 099300 TRANSPARENT FINISHING Copyright 20; 3 AIA MasterSpec Premium 12/13 3.3 APLICATION A. App y finishes according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual." 1. I Use applicators and techniques suited for finish and substrate indicated. 2. Finish surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. 3. Do not apply finishes over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. B. App y finishes to produce surface films without cloudiness, holidays, lap marks, brush mar s, runs, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. 3.4 CL �NING AND PROTECTION A. At :lid of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded matrials from Project site. B. Afte completing finish application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered matrials by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finis) ed surfaces. C. Protct work of other trades against damage from finish application. Correct damage by *leaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in a undamaged condition. D. At c.mpletion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced finished wood surfaces. 3.5 EX ERIOR WOOD-FINISH-SYSTEM SCHEDULE A. Wood Substrates: Glued-laminated construction. 1. Clear, Two-Component Polyurethane Varnish System: a. Prime Coat: Varnish, aliphatic polyurethane, two component, matching topcoat. b. Topcoat: Varnish, aliphatic polyurethane, two component (MPI Gloss Level 6 or 7). END OF SECTION 099300 STAINING A D 099300 TRANSPARNT FINISHING CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 SECTION 101419- DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fabricated channel dimensional characters. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Illuminated: Illuminated by lighting source integrally constructed as part of the sign unit. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Furnish templates for placement of electrical service embedded in permanent construction by other installers. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: For dimensional letter signs. 1. Include fabrication and installation details and attachments to other work. 2. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by others, and accessories. 3. Show message list, typestyles, graphic elements, and layout for each sign at least half size. 4. Show locations of electrical service connections. 5. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sign assembly, exposed component, and exposed finish. 1. Include representative Samples of available typestyles and graphic symbols. DIMENSIONAL LETTER 101419 SIGNAGE CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 1.6 FIE D CONDITIONS A. Fiel Measurements: Verify locations of electrical service embedded in permanent con truction by other installers by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate me surements on Shop Drawings. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of signs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Deterioration of finishes beyond normal weathering. b. Separation or delamination of sheet materials and components. 2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - P RIO D U CTS 2.1 DIMENSIONAL CHARACTERS A. Fabricated Channel Characters: Metal face and side returns, formed free from warp and distortion; with uniform faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles; internallybraced for stabilityand for securingfasteners; and as follows. p 1. Character Material: Sheet or plate aluminum. 2. Material Thickness: Manufacturer's standard for size and design of character. 3. Character Height: As indicated. 4. Character Depth: 2". 5. Finishes: a. Integral Aluminum Finish: Clear anodized. 6. Mounting: Manufacturer's standard for size and design of character a. Hold characters at manufacturer's recommended distance from wall surface. 7. Typeface: Times Roman. 2.2 DIMENSIONAL CHARACTER MATERIALS A. Aluminum Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated. B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated. DIMENSION i•kL LETTER 101419 SIGNAGE CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Anchors: Manufacturer's standard as required for secure anchorage of signage, noncorrosive and compatible with each material joined, and complying with the following: 1. Use concealed fasteners and anchors unless indicated to be exposed. 2. For exterior exposure, furnish nonferrous-metal devices unless otherwise indicated. 3. Exposed Metal-Fastener Components, General: a. Fabricated from same basic metal and finish of fastened metal unless otherwise indicated. b. Fastener Heads: For nonstructural connections, use flathead screws and bolts with tamper-resistant Allen-head slots unless otherwise indicated. 4. Sign Mounting Fasteners: a. Concealed Studs: Concealed (blind), threaded studs welded or brazed to back of sign material, screwed into back of sign assembly, or screwed into tapped lugs cast integrally into back of cast sign material, unless otherwise indicated. b. Projecting Studs: Threaded studs with sleeve spacer, welded or brazed to back of sign material, screwed into back of sign assembly, or screwed into tapped lugs cast integrally into back of cast sign material, unless otherwise indicated. c. Through Fasteners: Exposed metal fasteners matching sign finish, with type of head indicated, installed in predrilled holes. 2.4 FABRICATION A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard sign assemblies according to requirements indicated. 1. Preassemble signs and assemblies in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble signs and assemblies only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and installation; apply markings in locations concealed from view after final assembly. 2. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Form assemblies and joints exposed to weather to resist water penetration and retention. 3. Comply with AWS for recommended practices in welding and brazing. Provide welds and brazes behind finished surfaces without distorting or discoloring exposed side. Clean exposed welded and brazed connections of flux, and dress exposed and contact surfaces. 4. Conceal connections if possible; otherwise, locate connections where they are inconspicuous. 5. Internally brace signs for stability and for securing fasteners. 6. Provide rebates, lugs, and brackets necessary to assemble components and to attach to existing work. Drill and tap for required fasteners. Use concealed fasteners where possible; use exposed fasteners that match sign finish. DIMENSIONAL LETTER 101419 SIGNAGE CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 7. Castings: Fabricate castings free of warp, cracks, blowholes, pits, scale, sand holes, and other defects that impair appearance or strength. Grind, wire brush, sandblast, and buff castings to remove seams, gate marks, casting flash, and other casting marks before finishing. 2.5 GE ERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Pro ect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a stri pable, temporary protective covering before shipping. B. App arance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Vari tions in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the ran e of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. C. Dir ctional Finishes: Run grain with long dimension of each piece and perpendicular to long dimension of finished trim or border surface unless otherwise indicated. D. Organic, Anodic, and Chemically Produced Finishes: Apply to formed metal after fabrication but before applying contrasting polished finishes on raised features unless otherwise indicated. 2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker. 2.7 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES A. Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish. B. Polished Finishes: Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of cross scratches. 1. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean. 2. Directional Satin Finish: No. 4. 3. Dull Satin Finish: No. 6. 4. Reflective, Directional Polish: No. 7. 5. Mirrorlike Reflective, Nondirectional Polish: No. 8. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of signage work. DIMENSIONAL LETTER 101419 SIGNAGE CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 B. Verify that sign-support surfaces are within tolerances to accommodate signs without gaps or irregularities between backs of signs and support surfaces unless otherwise indicated. C. Verify that electrical service is correctly sized and located to accommodate signs. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install signs using, mounting methods indicated and according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Install signs level, plumb, true to line, and at locations and heights indicated, with sign surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance. 2. Before installation, verify that sign surfaces are clean and free of materials or debris that would impair installation. 3. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of exterior aluminum in contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint. B. Mounting Methods: 1. Concealed Studs: Using a template, drill holes in substrate aligning with studs on back of sign. Remove loose debris from hole and substrate surface. a. Masonry Substrates: Fill holes with adhesive. Leave recess space in hole for displaced adhesive. Place sign in position and push until flush to surface, embedding studs in holes. Temporarily support sign in position until adhesive fully sets. b. Thin or Hollow Surfaces: Place sign in position and flush to surface, install washers and nuts on studs projecting through opposite side of surface, and tighten. 2. Projecting Studs: Using a template, drill holes in substrate aligning with studs on back of sign. Remove loose debris from hole and substrate surface. a. Masonry Substrates: Fill holes with adhesive. Leave recess space in hole for displaced adhesive. Place spacers on studs, place sign in position, and push until spacers are pinched between sign and substrate, embedding the stud ends in holes. Temporarily support sign in position until adhesive fully sets. b. Thin or Hollow Surfaces: Place spacers on studs, place sign in position with spacers pinched between sign and substrate, and install washers and nuts on stud ends projecting through opposite side of surface, and tighten. 3. Through Fasteners: Drill holes in substrate using predrilled holes in sign as template. Countersink holes in sign if required. Place sign in position and flush to surface. Install through fasteners and tighten. DIMENSIONAL LETTER 101419 SIGNAGE CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 4. Back Bar and Brackets: Remove loose debris from substrate surface and install backbar or bracket supports in position so that signage is correctly located and aligned. 5. Adhesive: Clean bond-breaking materials from substrate surface and remove loose debris. Apply linear beads or spots of adhesive symmetrically to back of sign and of suitable quantity to support weight of sign after cure without slippage. Keep adhesive away from edges to prevent adhesive extrusion as sign is applied and to prevent visibility of cured adhesive at sign edges. Place sign in position, and push to engage adhesive. Temporarily support sign in position until adhesive fully sets. 6. Two-Face Tape: Clean bond-breaking materials from substrate surface and remove loose debris. Apply tape strips symmetrically to back of sign and of suitable quantity to support weight of sign without slippage. Keep strips away from edges to prevent visibility at sign edges. Place sign in position, and push to engage tape adhesive. 3.3 ADJ STINGAND CLEANING A. Re ove and replace damaged or deformed characters and signs that do not comply with specified requirements. Replace characters with damaged or deteriorated finishes or cImponents that cannot be successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. B. Re ove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as signs are installed. C. On completion of installation, clean exposed surfaces of signs according to manufacturer's written instructions, and touch up minor nicks and abrasions in finish. Mai Main signs in a clean condition during construction and protect from damage until acc:ptance by Owner. END OF SEC TION 101419 DIMENSION L LETTER 101419 SIGNAGE ', CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 SECTION 101423 - PANEL SIGNAGE PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Panel signs. 2. Room-identification signs. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Accessible: In accordance with the accessibility standard. B. Illuminated: Illuminated by lighting source integrally constructed as part of the sign unit. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Furnish templates for placement of sign-anchorage devices embedded in permanent construction by other installers. B. Furnish templates for placement of electrical service embedded in permanent construction by other installers. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: For panel signs. 1. Include fabrication and installation details and attachments to other work. 2. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by others, and accessories. 3. Show message list, typestyles, graphic elements, and layout for each sign at least half size PANEL SIGNAGE 101423 CITY OF RO ND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 C. Sa pies for Initial Selection: For each type of sign assembly, exposed component, and exposed finish. 1. Include representative Samples of available typestyles and graphic symbols. 1.6 INFIRMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Sa ple Warranty: For special warranty. 1.7 CLO SEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Mai tenance Data: For signs to include in maintenance manuals. 1.8 FIE D CONDITIONS A. Fiel Measurements: Verify locations of anchorage devices embedded in permanent con truction by other installers by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate me surements on Shop Drawings. 1.9 WA RANTY A. Spe ial Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of signs that fail i materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Deterioration of finishes beyond normal weathering. b. Deterioration of embedded graphic image. c. Separation or delamination of sheet materials and components. 2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PR DUCTS 2.1 PE FORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. The mal Movements: For exterior signs, allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces. B. Accessibility Standard: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities and ICC A117.1 for signs. 2.2 SIGNS A. Panel Sign: Sign with smooth, uniform surfaces; with message and characters having uniform faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles; and as follows: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Rockwood BF686 .050"Thick Brass US26D. PANEL SIGNAGE 101423 CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Anchors: Manufacturer's standard as required for secure anchorage of signage, noncorrosive and compatible with each material joined, and complying with the following: 1. For exterior exposure, furnish stainless-steel devices unless otherwise indicated. 2. Exposed Metal-Fastener Components, General: a. Fastener Heads: For nonstructural connections, use flathead screws and bolts with tamper-resistant slots unless otherwise indicated. 3. Sign Mounting Fasteners: a. Through Fasteners: Exposed metal fasteners matching sign finish, with type of head indicated, installed in predrilled holes. 4. Inserts: Furnish inserts to be set by other trades into concrete or masonry work. 2.4 FABRICATION A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard sign assemblies according to requirements indicated. 1. Preassemble signs and assemblies in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble signs and assemblies only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and installation; apply markings in locations concealed from view after final assembly. 2. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Form assemblies and joints exposed to weather to resist water penetration and retention. 3. Comply with AWS for recommended practices in welding and brazing. Provide welds and brazes behind finished surfaces without distorting or discoloring exposed side. Clean exposed welded and brazed connections of flux, and dress exposed and contact surfaces. 4. Conceal connections if possible; otherwise, locate connections where they are inconspicuous. 5. Internally brace signs for stability and for securing fasteners. 6. Provide rebates, lugs, and brackets necessary to assemble components and to attach to existing work. Drill and tap for required fasteners. Use concealed fasteners where possible; use exposed fasteners that match sign finish. 2.5 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. C. Directional Finishes: Run grain with long dimension of each piece and perpendicular to long dimension of finished trim or border surface unless otherwise indicated. PANEL SIGNAGE 101423 CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINN INGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 D. Organic, Anodic, and Chemically Produced Finishes: Apply to formed metal after fabrication but before applying contrasting polished finishes on raised features unless otherwise indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of signage work. B. Verify that sign-support surfaces are within tolerances to accommodate signs without gaps or irregularities between backs of signs and support surfaces unless otherwise indicated. C. Verity that anchor inserts are correctly sized and located to accommodate signs. D. Verity that electrical service is correctly sized and located to accommodate signs. E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install signs using mounting methods indicated and according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Install signs level, plumb, true to line, and at locations and heights indicated, with sign surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance. 2. Install signs so they do not protrude or obstruct according to the accessibility standard. 3. Before installation, verify that sign surfaces are clean and free of materials or debris that would impair installation. 4. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of exterior aluminum in contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint. B. Mounting Methods: 1. Through Fasteners: Drill holes in substrate using predrilled holes in sign as template. Countersink holes in sign if required. Place sign in position and flush to surface. Install through fasteners and tighten. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace damaged or deformed signs and signs that do not comply with specified requirements. Replace signs with damaged or deteriorated finishes or PANEL SIGNAGE 101423 CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 components that cannot be successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. B. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as signs are installed. C. On completion of installation, clean exposed surfaces of signs according to manufacturer's written instructions, and touch up minor nicks and abrasions in finish. Maintain signs in a clean condition during construction and protect from damage until acceptance by Owner. END OF SECTION 101423 PANEL SIGNAGE 101423 CITY OF RO ND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 SECTION 1O113.19- PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS PART 1 -GE ERAL 1.1 RE A TED DOCUMENTS A. Dra ings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Sup.Iementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Sec pion. 1.2 SU MARY A. Section Includes: 1. Solid-plastic toilet compartments configured as toilet enclosures and urinal screens. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for toilet compartments. B. Shop Drawings: For toilet compartments. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachment details. 2. Show locations of cutouts for compartment-mounted toilet accessories. 3. Show locations of centerlines of toilet fixtures. 4. Show locations of floor drains. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For toilet compartments to include in maintenance manuals. 1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents and source. 1. Door Hinges: One hinge(s)with associated fasteners. 2. Latch and Keeper: One latch(es) and keeper(s)with associated fasteners. 3. Door Bumper: One bumper(s)with associated fasteners. PLASTIC TOILET 102113.19 COMPARTMENTS CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 4. Door Pull: One door pull(s)with associated fasteners. 5. Fasteners: Ten fasteners of each size and type. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of toilet fixtures, walls, columns, ceilings, and other construction contiguous with toilet compartments by field measurements before fabrication. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities and ICC A117.1 for toilet compartments designated as accessible. 2.2 SOLID-PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Scranton Products, Hiny Hiders or comparable product. B. Toilet-Enclosure Style: Overhead braced C. Urinal-Screen Style: Wall hung D. Door, Panel, and Pilaster Construction: Solid, high-density polyethylene (HDPE) panel material, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) thick, seamless, with eased edges, no-sightline system, and with homogenous color and pattern throughout thickness of material. 1. Integral Hinges: Configure doors and pilasters to receive integral hinges. 2. Heat-Sink Strip: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum or stainless-steel strip fastened to exposed bottom edges of solid-plastic components to hinder malicious combustion. 3. Color and Pattern: One color and pattern in each room as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. E. Pilaster Shoes and Sleeves (Caps): Manufacturer's standard design; stainless steel F. Urinal-Screen Post: Manufacturer's standard post design of 1-3/4-inch-(44-mm- )square, aluminum tube with satin finish; with shoe matching that on the pilaster. G. Overhead Cross Bracing for Ceiling-Hung Units: As recommended by manufacturer and fabricated from solid polymer. PLASTIC TOILET 102113.19 COMPARTMENTS CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 2.3 HA DWARE AND ACCESSORIES A. Har ware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard operating hardware and acc ssories. 1. Material: Stainless steel. 2. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard continuous, cam type that swings to a closed or partially open position, allowing emergency access by lifting door. 3. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard surface-mounted latch unit designed for emergency access and with combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper. Provide units that comply with regulatory requirements for accessibility at compartments designated as accessible. 4. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard combination hook and rubber-tipped bumper, sized to prevent in-swinging door from hitting compartment-mounted accessories. 5. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's standard rubber-tipped bumper at out-swinging doors 6. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit at out-swinging doors that complies with regulatory requirements for accessibility. Provide units on both sides of doors at compartments designated as accessible. B. Ove head Bracing: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum head rail with antigrip profile and in manufacturer's standard finish. C. Anc orages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless ste I, finished to match the items they are securing, with theft-resistant-type heads. Pro ide sex-type bolts for through-bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use staff less-steel, hot-dip galvanized-steel, or other rust-resistant, protective-coated steel compatible with related materials. 2.4 MA ERIALS A. Alu inum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M. B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM Ei 221 (ASTM B 221 M). C. Brass Castings: ASTM B 584. D. Brass Extrusions: ASTM B 455. E. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304, stretcher-leveled standard of flatness. F. Staff less-Steel Castings: ASTM A 743/A 743M. G. Zarrac: ASTM B 86, commercial zinc-alloy die castings. PLASTIC TO LET 102113.19 COMPARTM NTS CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 2.5 FABRICATION A. Fabrication, General: Fabricate toilet compartment components to sizes indicated. Coordinate requirements and provide cutouts for through-partition toilet accessories where required for attachment of toilet accessories. B. Overhead-Braced Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant supports, leveling mechanism, and anchors at pilasters to suit floor conditions. Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal supports and leveling mechanism. C. Urinal-Screen Posts: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant anchoring assemblies with leveling adjustment nuts at bottoms of posts. Provide shoes at posts to conceal anchorage. D. Door Size and Swings: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch-(610-mm-)wide, in- swinging doors for standard toilet compartments and 36-inch-(914-mm-)wide, out- swinging doors with a minimum 32-inch-(81 3-mm-)wide, clear opening for compartments designated as accessible. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for fastening, support, alignment, operating clearances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Confirm location and adequacy of blocking and supports required for installation. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid, straight, level, and plumb. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices. 1. Maximum Clearances: a. Pilasters and Panels: 1/2 inch (13 mm). b. Panels and Walls: 1 inch (25 mm). 2. Full-Height (Continuous) Brackets: Secure panels to walls and to pilasters with full-height brackets. a. Locate bracket fasteners so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or tile joints. b. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls. PLASTIC TOILET 102113.19 COMPARTMENTS CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 B. Overhead-Braced Units: Secure pilasters to floor and level, plumb, and tighten. Set pilasters with anchors penetrating not less than 1-3/4 inches (44 mm) into structural floor unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written instructions. Secure continuous head rail to each pilaster with no fewer than two fasteners. Hang doors to align tops of doors with tops of panels, and adjust so tops of doors are parallel with overhead brace when doors are in closed position. C. Urinal Screens: Attach with anchoring devices to suit supporting structure. Set units level and plumb, rigid, and secured to resist lateral impact. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to hardware manufacturer's written instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold doors open approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out-swinging doors to return doors to fully closed position. END OF SECTION 102113.19 PLASTIC TOILET 102113.19 COMPARTMENTS CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 SECTION 102800 -TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Public-use washroom accessories. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following: 1. Construction details and dimensions. 2. Anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other work and substrate preparation. 3. Material and finish descriptions. 4. Features that will be included for Project. 5. Manufacturer's warranty. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories. B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent delaying the Work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.031-inch (0.8-mm) minimum nominal thickness unless otherwise indicated. B. Brass: ASTM B 19, flat products; ASTM B 16/B 16M, rods, shapes, forgings, and flat products with finished edges; or ASTM B 30, castings. TOILET, BATH, AND 102800 LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES CITY OF RO ND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 C. Ste:l Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Designation CS (cold rolled, commercial steel), 0.03.-inch (0.9-mm) minimum nominal thickness. D. Gal anized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G60 (Z180) hot-dip zinc coating. E. Gal anized-Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. F. Faseners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and tam.•er-and-theft resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel where concealed. G. Chr4me Plating: ASTM B 456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service). H. Mirrirs: ASTM C 1503, Mirror Glazing Quality, clear-glass mirrors, nominal 6.0 mm thic•. I. AB' Plastic: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene resin formulation. 2.2 PU:LlC-USE WASHROOM ACCESSORIES A. Basi -of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indi'ated on Drawings or comparable product B. Toil:,t Tissue (Roll) Dispenser TA-1: 1. II Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick B-2888. C. Gra Bar TA-3, TA-4: 1. ' Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick B-5806. D. Mirrir Unit TA-6: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick B-2908 18x36. E. Gen*ral: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doo s and access panels with full-length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed anc orage and with corrosion-resistant backing plates. F. Key.: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative. PART 3 - EX CUTION 3.1 INS ALLATION A. lnst. II accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners app opriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units leve , plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. TOILET, BA H, AND 102800 LAUNDRY A CESSORIES CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 B. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf (1112 N), when tested according to ASTM F 446. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective items. B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings. C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations. END OF SECTION 102800 TOILET, BATH, AND 102800 LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES CITY OF RO ND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 SECTION 10'413 - FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS PART 1 -GE ERAL 1.1 REL TED DOCUMENTS A. Dra ings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Sup lementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Sec on. 1.2 SU MARY A. Secion Includes: 1. Fire-protection cabinets for the following: a. Portable fire extinguishers. B. Rel-ted Requirements: 1. II Section 104416 "Fire Extinguishers." 1.3 AC ION SUBMITTALS A. Pro•uct Data: For each type of product. Show door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, and panel style. Include roughing-in dimensions and details showing recessed-, semrecessed-, or surface-mounting method and relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For fire-protection cabinets to include in maintenance manuals. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coo dinate size of fire-protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire exti guishers indicated are accommodated. B. Coo dinate sizes and locations of fire-protection cabinets with wall depths. PART2 - PR DUCTS 2.1 PE FORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire Rated Fire-Protection Cabinets: Listed and labeled to comply with requirements in AS M E 814 for fire-resistance rating of walls where they are installed. FIRE PROT CTION 104413 CABINETS CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 2.2 FIRE-PROTECTION CABINET A. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Larsen's Manufacturing 2409-SM or comparable product 2.3 FABRICATION A. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub) with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. 1. Weld joints and grind smooth. 2. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes. 3. Prepare doors and frames to receive locks. 4. Install door locks at factory. B. Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials indicated and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles. 1. Fabricate door frames with tubular stiles and rails and hollow-metal design, minimum 1/2 inch (13 mm)thick. 2. Fabricate door frames of one-piece construction with edges flanged. 3. Miter and weld perimeter door frames. C. Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground smooth. 2.4 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with NAAMM's AMP 500, "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products,"for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces of fire-protection cabinets from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Finish fire-protection cabinets after assembly. D. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. FIRE PROTECTION 104413 CABINETS CITY OF RO ND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 3.2 INS ALLATION A. Genral: Install fire-protection cabinets in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, at heights acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Fire ;Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb. 1. ' Unless otherwise indicated, provide recessed fire-protection cabinets. If wall thickness is inadequate for recessed cabinets, provide semirecessed fire- protection cabinets. 2. Provide inside latch and lock for break-glass panels. 3. i Fasten mounting brackets to inside surface of fire-protection cabinets, square and plumb. C. Iden ification: Apply decals at locations indicated. 3.3 ADJ STING AND CLEANING A. Re ove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as fire-protection cabi ets are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation inst ctions. B. Adj st fire-protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that intecral locking devices operate properly. C. On ompletion of fire-protection cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as rcommended by manufacturer. D. Tour h up marred finishes, or replace fire-protection cabinets that cannot be restored to factory-finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furn ished by fire-protection cabinet and mounting bracket manufacturers. E. Replace fire-protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond suci essful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. END OF SEA TION 104413 FIRE PROT:CTION 104413 CABINETS CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 SECTION 104416- FIRE EXTINGUISHERS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes portable, hand-carried fire extinguishers B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 104413 "Fire Protection Cabinets." 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include rating and classification, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire extinguisher. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire extinguishers to include in maintenance manuals. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire-protection cabinets to ensure fit and function. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10. FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 104416 CITY OF ROUND ROCK KINNINGHAM PARK 6/18/2021 b. Faulty operation of valves or release levers. 2. Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PR DUCTS 2.1 PEFFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers." B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Provide fire extinguishers approved, listed, and labeled by FM Global. 2.2 PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each fire-protection cabinet indicated. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Larsen's Manufacturing MP10 or comparable product PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Exarrnine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging. 1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INS ALLATION A. Geri ral: Install fire extinguishers in locations indicated and in compliance with req irements of authorities having jurisdiction. END OF SEA TION 104416 FIRE EXTIN, UISHERS 104416 NIN HAM HOUSE KIN G CITY OF ROUND ROCK PROJECT MANUAL. MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL AND PLUMBING SPECIFICATIONS I I _Li jjj I ,, Bacorn Bros. LLC June 28, 2021 Kinningham House Specifications TOC Div 21 211313 Wet Pipe Sprinkler Systems Div 22 220000 Gen ral Plumbing Requirements 220529 Han ers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment 220553 Plu bing Identification 220719 Plu bing Insulation 221005 Plumbing Piping 224000 Plu bing Fixtures Div 23 230000 Gen ral Mechanical Requirements 230529 Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment 230553 Mechanical Identification 230593 HVAC Testing, Adjusting, Balancing 230719 Mechanical Insulation 233100 HVAC Ductwork 233400 HVAC Fans 233700 Air Outlets and Inlets 238126 Split-System Air Conditioners Div 26 260000 Electrical General Conditions 260519 Conductors and Cables 600V and Less 260526 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 260529 Handers and Supports for Electrical Systems 260533 Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems 260553 Identification for Electrical Systems 262416 Panelboards 262726 Wiring Devices 262819 Enclpsed Switches and Circuit Breakers 265100 Lighting Div 28 283100 Fire Alarm Bacorn Bros LLC PO Box 341621 —Lakeway, TX 78734 512-953-3474 SECTION 2113 13 WET-PIPE SPLINKLER SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes automatic fire-protection sprinkler system,designed by a specialist sprinkler company such as Northstar, Continental or Owner approved equal. This specification is intended to provide only basic methods and materials scope and performance requirements. This section references to other sections for pipe, pipe fittings,valves,connections Section includes design,installation and certificatio B. Section includes wet-pipe sprinkler system,system design,installation,and certification. 1.2 REFERENCES A. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 13-Installation of Sprinkler Systems. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Provide a wet pipe ceiling sprinkler system designed in accordance with the most recent edition of NFPA 13; using minimum K-5.6 nominal orifice, 165E sprinklers,designed to provide a density of O.1O-gpm/sqft over any,including the hydraulically most remote I 500-sqft of floor area with 100 GPM hose allowance. B. Provide fire department connections as required.Sprinkler piping should be American made, minimum schedule 10 black steel. Crimped joints and fittings will not be allowed. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate layout of finished ceiling areas indicating sprinkler locations coordinated with ceiling installation. Indicate detailed pipe layout, hangers and supports,sprinklers,components and accessories. Indicate system controls. B. Product Data:Submit data on sprinklers,valves,and specialties, including manufacturers catalog information.Submit performance ratings, rough-in details,weights,support requirements,and piping connections. C. Samples:Submit two of each style of sprinkler specified. D. Design Data:Submit design calculations; signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer or Certified Sprinkler Contractor. E. Manufacturer's Certificate:Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements. June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 1 of 4 WET-PIPE SPRI KLER SYSTEMS SECTION 2113 13 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Thro ugh Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of sprinklers and deviations of piping from dra' ings. Indicate drain and test locations. B. Op ration and Maintenance Data:Submit components of system,servicing requirements,record drawings, ins ection data, replacement part numbers and availability,and location and numbers of service depot. 1.6 QUALIT ASSURANCE A. Pe orm Work in accordance with NFPA 13 and City of Round Rock requirements. B. Mantain one copy of each document on site. 1.7 QUALIFICATIONS A. Mal ufacturer:Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three ye.rs documented experience. B. Ins alter:Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years documented experience approved by manufacturer. C. De.ign system under direct supervision of Professional Engineer or Certified Fire Protection Contractor exterienced in design of this Work and licensed at Project location. 1.8 DELIVE"Y,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. St.re products in shipping containers until installation. B. Fu nish piping with temporary inlet and outlet caps until installation. 1.9 EXTRAi ATERIALS 1 A. Fu nish extra sprinklers under provisions of NFPA 13. B. Fu Knish suitable wrenches for each sprinkler type. C. Funish metal storage cabinet located adjacent to alarm valve. PART 2 PROD CTS 2.1 SPRIN 1 ERS A. Furnish materials in accordance with State and City of Round Rock requirements and standards. B. SuSpended Ceiling Type: , 1. Standard pendant type with matching push on escutcheon plate. 2. i Finish: Chrome plated. June 02,2021 � KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 2 of 4 WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS SECTION 2113 13 3. Escutcheon Plate Finish: Chrome plated. 4. Fusible Link: Fusible solder link type temperature rated for specific area hazard. C. Exposed Area Type 1. Type:Standard upright type with guard. 2. Finish: Brass.Fusible Link: Fusible-solder link type temperature rated for specific area hazard. 2.2 PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Hanger Wet Pipe Sprinkler Alarm Valve:Check type valve with divided seat ring, rubber faced clapper to automatically actuate water motor alarm and electric alarm,with pressure retard chamber and variable pressure trim;with test and drain valve. B. Water Motor Alarm: Hydraulically operated impeller type alarm with aluminum alloy chrome plated red enameled gong and motor housing,nylon bearings,and inlet strainer. C. Electric Alarm:Electrically operated red enameled gong with pressure alarm switch. D. Water Flow Switch:Vane type switch for mounting horizontal or vertical,with two contacts;rated 10 amp at 125 volt AC and 2.5 amp at 24 volt DC. E. Fire Department Connections: 1. Type: Flush mounted or brass free standing type with ductile iron pedestal brass. 2. Outlets:Two-way with fire department thread size.Threaded dust-cap and chain of matching material and finish. 3. Drain: 3/4 inch f automatic drip,outside. 4. Label:"Sprinkler-Fire Department Connection" PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Verify Install in accordance with NFPA 13. B. Install approved double check valve back-flow preventer assembly at sprinkler system water source connection. C. Locate fire department connection with sufficient clearance from walls,obstructions,or adjacent Siamese connectors to allow full swing of fire department wrench handle. D. Locate outside alarm-gong on building wall as indicated on Drawings. E. Place pipe runs to minimize obstruction to other work. June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 3 of 4 WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS SECTION 2113 13 F. Ce ter sprinklers in one direction only in ceiling tile with location in other direction variable,dependent upon sp cing and coordination with ceiling elements G. Hyirostatically test entire system. H. Re uire test be witnessed by Fire Marshall.Owner's insurance underwriter. I. P EPARATION J. CI an substrate surfaces of dirt,dust,grease,oil, loose material,or other matter affecting bond of firstopping material. K. Re ove incompatible materials affecting bond. L. Ins all backing damming materials to arrest liquid material leakage. M. Ob ain permission from Architect/Engineer before using powder-actuated anchors. N. Do not drill or cut structural members. 3.2 INTERF'CE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Ve ify signal devices are installed and connected to fire alarm system. 3.3 CLEANI G A. Flu.h entire piping system of foreign matter. 3.4 PROTEITION OF ISNTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Ap�0 ly masking tape or paper cover to protect concealed sprinklers, cover plates,and sprinkler escutcheons not receiving field paint finish.Remove after painting. END OF SECTION June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 4 of 4 SECTION 22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS PART GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following basic plumbing materials and methods to complement other Division 22 Sections. 1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems. 2. Concrete equipment base construction requirements. 3. Equipment nameplate data requirements. 4. Labeling and identifying plumbing systems and equipment. 5. Nonshrink grout for equipment installations. 6. Field-fabricated metal and wood equipment supports. 7. Installation requirements common to equipment specification Sections. 8. plumbing demolition. 9. Cutting and patching. 10. Touchup painting and finishing. B. Pipe and pipe fitting materials are specified in piping system Sections. C. Related Sections: This and all other division 22 specifications, the construction drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General, Special, and the Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 REFERENCES A. The "Authority Having Jurisdiction" over the project described by these documents is the City of Round Rock. As such, it is required that the installation shall meet the minimum standards prescribed in the latest editions of the following listed codes and standards, which are made a part of these Specifications. All referenced codes and standards shall be those current at the date of issue of the design documents. B. National Fire Protection Association Standards(NFPA): 1. NFPA No.51,Welding&Cutting, Oxygen-Fuel Gas Systems 2. NFPA No.70, National Electrical Code 3. NFPA No.90A,Air Conditioning Systems 4. NFPA No.91, Blower&Exhaust Systems 5. NFPA No. 101, Life Safety Code 6. NFPA No.241, Standard for Safeguarding Construction,Alteration and Demolition Operations 7. NFPA No.255, Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 1 of 19 PLUMBING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 22 00 00 8. NFPA No. 258, Standard Research Test Method for Determining Smoke Generation of Solid Materials C. Amerman National Standards Institute(ANSI): I. A40.8, National Plumbing Code 2. '� B31.1, Power Piping 3. � B9.1,Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration D. Amen an Society of Mechanical Engineers(ASME): Boiler and Pressure Vessel Codes E. Air M. ing and Conditioning Association(AMCA): All current editions of applicable manuals and standards. F. Amen an Society of Testing Materials(ASTM): All current editions of applicable manuals and standards. G. Amen an Water Works Association(AWWA): All current editions of applicable manuals and standards. H. Natio al Electrical Manufacturers' Association (NEMA): All current editions of applicable manuals and stand.rds. I. City a Round Rock, Fire Department as may be applicable to construction on this site. J. Intern tional Building Code, International Energy Conservation Code, International Fire Code, Uniform Plumbing Code, Uniform Mechanical Code, National electric Code. K. Texas Occupational Safety Act: All applicable safety standards L. Occu.ational Safety and Health Act(OSHA) M. ADA ::nd ANSI Standards: All work shall be in accord with all regulations and requirements of the Stand:;rds and Specifications for Handicapped and Disabled for the Construction of Public Buildings and Facilities in the State of Texas Usable by Physically Handicapped and Disabled persons, ANSI Standards and th- requirements of the American Disabilities Act. N. Texas State Fire Marshal Rules 0. State nergy Code P. Refer o Specification Sections hereinafter bound for additional Codes and Standards. Q. All m. erials and workmanship shall comply with all applicable state and national codes, Specifications,and Indust standards. In all cases where Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. have established standards for a partic!lar type material, such material shall comply with these standards. Evidence of compliance shall be the U ' "label"or"listing"under Re-Examination Service. R. The .ntract Documents are intended to comply with the aforementioned rules and regulations; however, some discrepancies may occur. Where such discrepancies occur, the Contractor shall immediately notify the E gineer in writing of said discrepancies and apply for an interpretation. Should the discovery and notification occur after the execution of a contract, any additional work required for compliance with said June 02,2021 i KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 2 of 19 PLUMBING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 22 00 00 regulations shall be paid for as covered by Division 01 of these Contract Documents, providing no work of fabrication of materials has been accomplished in a manner of non-compliance. Should the Contractor fabricate and/or install materials and/or workmanship in such a manner that does not comply with the applicable codes, rules and regulations,the Contractor who performed such work shall bear all costs arising in correcting these deficiencies to comply with said rules and regulations. 1.3 GENERAL A. The Contractor shall execute all work hereinafter specified or indicated on accompanying Drawings. Contractor shall provide all equipment necessary and usually furnished in connection with such work and systems whether or not mentioned specifically herein or on the Drawings. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for fitting his material and apparatus into the building and shall carefully lay out his work at the site to conform to the structural conditions,to avoid all obstructions,to conform to the details of the installation and thereby to provide an integrated satisfactory operating installation. C. The Plumbing, Electrical, and associated Drawings are necessarily diagrammatic by their nature, and are not intended to show every connection in detail or every pipe or conduit in its exact location. These details are subject to the requirements of standards referenced elsewhere in these specifications, and structural and architectural conditions. The Contractor shall carefully investigate structural and finish conditions and shall coordinate the separate trades in order to avoid interference between the various phases of work. Work shall be organized and laid out so that it will be concealed in furred chases and suspended ceilings, etc., in finished portions of the building, unless specifically noted to be exposed. All exposed work shall be installed parallel or perpendicular to the lines of the building unless otherwise noted. D. When the plumbing and electrical Drawings do not give exact details as to the elevation of pipe, conduit and ducts, the Contractor shall physically arrange the systems to fit in the space available at the elevations intended with proper grades for the functioning of the system involved. Piping, exposed conduit and the duct systems are generally intended to be installed true and square to the building construction, and located as high as possible against the structure in a neat and workmanlike manner. The Drawings do not show all required offsets, control lines, pilot lines and other location details. Work shall be concealed in all finished areas. 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Pipe,pipe fittings,and piping include tube,tube fittings,and tubing. B. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below the roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawl spaces, and tunnels. C. Exposed Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms. D. Exposed Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors, or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations. E. Concealed Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafts. June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 3 of 19 PLUMBING GEN:RAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 22 00 00 F. Concealed Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants, but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within u heated shelters. G. lndicat:d: The term "indicated" is a cross reference to graphic representations, notes or schedules on drawin g s, to other paragraphs or schedules in the Specifications, and to similar means of recording require ents on contract documents. Where terms such as"shown", "noted", "scheduled", and "specified" are us:d in lieu of "indicated", it is for the purpose of helping reader locate the cross reference, and no limitation of location is intended except as specifically noted. H. Directes, requested, etc.: Where not otherwise explained, terms such as "directed", "requested", "author zed", "selected", "approved", "required", "accepted", and "permitted" mean directed by Architet/Engineer", "requested by Architect/Engineer" and similar phrases. However, no such implied meaning will be interpreted to extend Architect's/Engineer's responsibility into Contractor's area of construction supervision and job safety. I. And/Or Where "and/or" is used in these Specifications or on the Drawings, it shall mean "that situations exist ere either one or both conditions occur or are required and shall not be interpreted to permit an option (In the part of the Contractor. J. Appro -: Where used in conjunction with Architect's/Engineer's response to submittals, requests, applica ions, inquiries, reports and claims by Contractor, the meaning of term "approved" will be held to limitatios to Architect's/Engineer's responsibilities and duties as specified in General and Supplementary Conditions. In no case will"approval" by Architect/Engineer be interpreted as a release of Contractor from respon ibilities to fulfill requirements of contract documents or to extend Architect's/Engineer's responsibility into Contractobs area of construction supervision and job safety. K. As req fired: Where "as required" is used in these Specifications or on the drawings, it shall mean "that situations exist that are not necessarily described in detail or indicated that may cause the contractor certain compIi ations in performing the work described or indicated. These complications entail the normal coordi ation activities expected of the Contractor where multiple trades are involved and new or existing constr iction causes deviations to otherwise simplistic approaches to the work to be performed. The term shall nat be interpreted to permit an option on the part of the Contractor to achieve the end result." L. Furnis 1. he term"furnish"is used to mean"supply and deliver to project site, ready for unloading,unpacking, .ssemble,installation,and similar operations." 2. here"furnish"applies to work for which the installation is not otherwise specified, "furnish" in such ase shall mean"furnish and install." I. Install:) The term "install" is used to describe operations at project site including "unloading, unpacking, assem.Iy, erection, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleani ig and similar operation." M. Provid-: The term"provide"means"to furnish and install,complete and ready for intended use." 1.5 SUBMTTALS June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 4 of 19 PLUMBING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 22 00 00 A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Proposed Products List: Include Products specified in the following Sections: 1. Section 22 05 29-Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment 2. Section 22 05 53-Plumbing Identification 3. Section 22 07 19-Plumbing Insulation 4. Section 22 10 05-Plumbing Piping 5. Section 22 40 00-Plumbing Fixtures B. Samples of color, lettering style, and other graphic representation required for each identification material and device. C. Shop drawings detailing fabrication and installation for metal and wood supports and anchorage for plumbing materials and equipment. D. Coordination drawings for access panel and door locations. E. Prepare coordination drawings according to Division 1 Section"Submittals"to a 1/4 inch equals 1 foot(1:48) scale or larger. Detail major elements, components, and systems of plumbing equipment and materials in relationship with other systems, installations, and building components. Show space requirements for installation and access. Show where sequence and coordination of installations are important to the efficient flow of the Work. Include the following: 1. Proposed locations of piping,equipment,and materials. Include the following: a. Planned piping layout,including valve and specialty locations and valve stem movement. b. Clearances for installing and maintaining insulation. c. Clearances for servicing and maintaining equipment, including space for equipment disassembly required for periodic maintenance. d. Equipment service connections and support details. e. Exterior wall and foundation penetrations. f. Fire-rated wall and floor penetrations. g. Sizes and location of required concrete pads and bases. 2. Scheduling, sequencing, movement, and positioning of large equipment into the building during construction. 3. Floor plans, elevations, and details to indicate penetrations in floors, walls, and ceilings and their relationship to other penetrations and installations. F. Welder certificates signed by Contractor certifying that welders comply with requirements specified under the"Quality Assurance"Article. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 5 of 19 PLUMBING GEN:RAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 22 00 00 A. Qualify welding processes and operators for structural steel according to AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code-- teel." B. Qualify elding processes and operators for piping according to ASME"Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code," Section IX,"Welding and Brazing Qualifications." 1. � Comply with provisions of ASMEB31 Series"Code for Pressure Piping." 2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for the welding processes involved and that certification is current. C. ASME 13.1 for lettering size,length of color field,colors,and viewing angles of identification devices. D. Equip lent Selection: Equipment of greater or larger power, dimensions, capacities, and ratings may be furnish:d provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting plumbing and electrical service.,circuit breakers,conduit, motors,bases,and equipment spaces are increased. No additional costs will be�approved for these increases, if larger equipment is approved. If minimum energy ratings or efficien ies of the equipment are specified, the equipment must meet the design requirements and commissioning requirements. 1.7 DELlV:RY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver)pipes and tubes with factory-applied end-caps. Maintain end-caps through shipping, storage, and handlin. to prevent pipe-end damage and prevent entrance of dirt,debris,and moisture. B. Protect stored pipes and tubes from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. When stored inside, do not exceed structural capacity of the floor. C. Protect flanges,fittings,and piping specialties from moisture and dirt. D. Protec,stored plastic pipes from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending. 1.8 PERMI S, UTILITY CONNECTIONS AND INSPECTIONS: A. General: Refer to Division 01 for construction phasing and time increments. B. Fees and Costs: If, during the course of the construction, a need arises to buy utilities,the Contractor shall pay all fees attendant thereto. If City or privately owned utility piping or electrical cable needs to be extended, relocated, or terminated, the Contractor will pay all permits and construction/inspection fees associated with that particular work. C. The C ntractor is responsible for any fees or permits in connection with implementation of this scope of work. D. Complince: The Contractor shall comply in every respect with all requirements of National Fire Protection Association, local Fire Department regulations and utility company requirements. In no case does this relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of complying with these Specifications and Drawings where specified conditions are of higher quality than the requirements of the above-specified authorities. Where requirements of the Specifications and Drawings are more lenient than the requirements of the above June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 6 of 19 PLUMBING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 22 00 00 authorities having jurisdiction,the Contractor shall make installations in compliance with the requirements of the above authorities with no extra compensation. 1.9 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate plumbingequipment Installation with other building components. B. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction to allow for plumbing installations. C. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed. D. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of plumbing materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Coordinate installation of large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing in the building. E. Coordinate connection of electrical services. F. Coordinate connection of plumbing systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations,franchised service companies,and controlling agencies. G. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors where plumbing items requiring access are concealed behind finished surfaces. H. Coordinate installation of identifying devices after completing covering and painting where devices are applied to surfaces. I. Interruptions in utilities shall be scheduled with the Owner and shall be performed at such times and dates directed by the Owner to minimize the impact to the campus. Proposals shall include the costs of performing work on weekends,holidays,and off-hours as required to meet the Owners requirements. 1.10 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: A. All dimensional information related to new structures shall be taken from the appropriate Drawings. All dimensional information related to existing facilities shall be taken from actual measurements made by the Contractor on the site. B. The interrelation of the Specifications, the Drawings, and the schedules are as follows: The Specifications determine the nature and setting of the several materials,the Drawings establish the quantities,dimensions and details, and the schedules give the performance characteristics. If the Contractor requires additional clarification, he shall request it in writing, following the contractually prescribed information flow requirements. C. Should the Drawings or Specifications conflict within themselves, or with each other, the better quality, or greater size or quantity of work or materials shall be performed or furnished. 1.11 ALTERNATES June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 7 of 19 PLUMBING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 22 00 00 A. Alternales quoted on Bid Forms will be reviewed and accepted or rejected at the Owner's option. Accepted Alternates will be identified in Owner-Contractor Agreement. B. Coordirate related work and modify surrounding work as required. C. Any Alternate Proposals are summarized in Division 01 of the Specifications. The Contractor is directed to refer to all Sections of the Specifications and Drawings for this project to determine the exact extent and scope cf the various Alternate Proposals as each pertains to the work of all trades. 1.12 ELECT ICAL WIRING OF MOTORS AND EQUIPMENT: A. The C ntractor shall note that the electrical design and Drawings are based on the equipment scheduled and in icated on the Drawings, and should any plumbing equipment be provided requiring changes to the electric I design,the required electrical changes shall be made at no cost to the Owner. B. The Electrical Trades shall provide all interconnecting wiring for the installation of all power. The Electrical Trades shall provide all disconnect switches as required for proper operation, as indicated on the Drawings or required by applicable code. All combination starters, individual starters, and other motor starting apparatus not specifically scheduled or specified as provided by the equipment manufacturer under the scope of Division 22,shall be provided under the scope of Division 26. C. The PI mbing Trades shall provide complete wiring diagrams indicating power wiring and interlock wiring. Diagra s shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer for review within thirty (30)days after the submittals for equpment have been reviewed. Diagrams shall be based on accepted equipment and shall be complete full ph.se and interlock control Drawings, not a series of manufacturer's individual diagrams. After these diagra 's have been reviewed by the Architect/Engineer,copies shall be transmitted to the Electrical Trades by the ( ontractor. They shall be followed in detail. 1.13 TESTS. A. The Cntractor shall make, at no additional cost to the Owner, any tests deemed necessary by the inspect on departments having jurisdiction, and in the National Fire Protection Association, ASTM, etc. Standa ds listed. The Contractor shall provide all equipment, materials, and labor for making such tests. Reaso,able amounts of fuel and electrical energy costs for system tests will be paid by the Owner. Fuel and el:ctrical energy costs for system adjustment and tests which follow beneficial occupancy by the Owner will be some by the Owner. B. Additio al tests specified hereinafter under the various Specification Sections shall be made. C. The Owner shall be notified in writing at least 10 working days prior to each test and other Specification requirements requiring action on the part of the Construction Inspector. All equipment shall be placed in operation and tested for proper automatic control requirements before the balancing agency starts their work. D. Maintain Log of Tests as hereinafter specified. E. See S9ecifications hereinafter for additional tests and requirements. 1.14 LOG OTESTS: June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 8 of 19 PLUMBING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 22 00 00 A. All tests shall have pertinent data logged by the Contractor at the time of testing. Data shall include date, time, personnel, description, and extent of system tested, test conditions,test results, specified results, and other pertinent data. All Test Log entries shall be legibly signed by the Project Contractor or his authorized job superintendent. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS A. Refer to individual piping system specification Sections for pipe and fitting materials and joining methods. B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings. 2.2 JOINING MATERIALS A. Refer to individual piping system specification Sections in Division 22 for special joining materials not listed below. B. Pipe Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for the chemical and thermal conditions of the piping system contents. 1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch (3mm) maximum thickness, except where thickness or specific material is indicated. a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face,Class 125 cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges. b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face,Class 250 cast-iron and steel flanges. 2. ASME B16.20 for grooved, ring-joint,steel flanges. 3. AWWA C110, rubber,flat face, 1/8 inch (3 mm)thick, except where other thickness is indicated; and full-face or ring type,except where type is indicated. C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1,carbon steel,except where other material is indicated. D. Plastic Pipe Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer,except where other type or material is indicated. E. Solder Filler Metal: ASTM B 32. 1. Alloy Sn95 or Alloy Sn94: Tin (approximately 95 percent) and silver (approximately 5 percent), having 0.10 percent lead content. 2. Alloy E: Tin (approximately 95 percent) and copper(approximately 5 percent), having 0.10 percent maximum lead content. 3. Alloy HA: Tin-antimony-silver-copper-zinc,having 0.10 percent maximum lead content. 4. Alloy HB: Tin-antimony-silver-copper-nickel, having 0.10 percent maximum lead content. 5. Alloy Sb5: Tin(95 percent)and antimony(5 percent), having 0.20 percent maximum lead content. June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 9 of 19 PLUMBING GEN:RAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 22 00 00 F. Brazing'Filler Metals: AWS A5.8. 1. :CuP Series: Copper-phosphorus alloys. 2. :Ag1: Silver alloy. G. Weldini! Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemic:I analysis of steel pipe being welded. H. Solven y Cements: Manufacturer's standard solvents complying with the following: 1. 4 crylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene(ABS): ASTM D 2235. 2. 4'hlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride)(CPVC): ASTM F 493. 3. ''oly(Vinyl Chloride)(PVC): ASTM D 2564. 4. "VC to ABS Transition: Made to requirements of ASTM D 3138,color other than orange. I. Plastic 'ipe Seals: ASTM F 477,elastomeric gasket. J. Flange', Ductile-Iron Pipe Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: AWWA C110, rubber gasket, carbon steel bolts and nuts. K. Coupli gs: Iron body sleeve assembly,fabricated to match outside diameters of plain-end pressure pipes. 1. Sleeve: ASTM A 126, Class B,gray iron. 2. Followers: ASTM A 47(ASTM A 47M),Grade 32510 or ASTM A 536 ductile iron. 3. baskets: Rubber. 4. olts and Nuts: AWWACIII. 5. finish: Enamel paint. 2.3 PIPING PECIALTIES A. Escutcheons: Manufactured wall, ceiling, and floor plates; deep-pattern type where required to conceal protruding fittings and sleeves. 1. Inside Diameter: Closely fit around pipe,tube,and insulation. 2. outside Diameter: Completely cover opening. 3. tamped Steel: One-piece,with set-screw and chrome-plated finish. 4. Stamped Steel: Split plate,with concealed hinge,set-screw, and chrome-plated finish. 5. ast-Iron Floor Plate: One-piece casting. B. Dielect c Fittings: Assembly or fitting having insulating material isolating joined dissimilar metals to prevent galvanic action and stop corrosion. 1. D esc ri pti o n: Combination of copper alloy and ferrous; threaded, solder, plain, and weld neck end pes and matching piping system materials. 2. nsulating Material: Suitable for system fluid,pressure,and temperature. June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 10 of 19 PLUMBING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 22 00 00 3. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly for 250-psig (1725kPa) minimum working pressure at a 180 deg F(82 deg C)temperature. 4. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly for 150-or 300-psig (1035kPa or 2070kPa)minimum pressure to suit system pressures. 5. Dielectric-Flange Insulation Kits: Field-assembled,companion-flange assembly,full-face or ring type. Components include neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic washers,and steel backing washers. a. Provide separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts for 150-or 300-psig (1035kPa or 2070kPa)minimum working pressure to suit system pressures. 6. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling, having inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining, with threaded ends and 300-psig (2070kPa) minimum working pressure at 225 deg F (107 deg C) temperature. 7. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple, having inert and noncorrosive thermoplastic lining,with combination of plain, threaded, or grooved end types and 300-psig (2070kPa) working pressure at 225 deg F(107 deg C)temperature. C. Plumbing Sleeve Seals: Modular, watertight mechanical type. Components include interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill annular space between pipe and sleeve. Connecting bolts and pressure plates cause rubber sealing elements to expand when tightened. D. Sleeves: The following materials are for wall,floor,slab,and roof penetrations: 1. Steel Sheet-Metal: 24-gage or heavier galvanized sheet metal, round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint. 2. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53,Type E,Grade A,Schedule 40,galvanized, plain ends. 3. Cast-Iron: Cast or fabricated wall pipe equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, having plain ends and integral water stop,except where other features are specified. 4. Wall Penetration Systems: Wall sleeve assembly, consisting of housing, gaskets, and pipe sleeve, with 1 mechanical-joint end conforming to AWWA C110 and 1 plain pipe-sleeve end. a. Penetrating Pipe Deflection: 5 percent without leakage. b. Housing: Ductile-iron casting having waterstop and anchor ring, with ductile-iron gland, steel studs and nuts, and rubber gasket conforming to AWWA C111, of housing and gasket size as required to fit penetrating pipe. c. Pipe Sleeve: AWWA C151,ductile-iron pipe. d. Housing-to-Sleeve Gasket: Rubber or neoprene push-on type of manufacturer's design. 5. Cast-Iron Sleeve Fittings: Commercially made sleeve having an integral clamping flange, with clamping ring, bolts,and nuts for membrane flashing. a. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set-screws. 6. PVC Plastic: Manufactured, permanent,with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms. 7. PVC Plastic Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40. 8. PE Plastic: Manufactured, reusable, tapered, cup-shaped, smooth outer surface, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms. June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 11 of 19 PLUMBING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 22 00 00 2.4 IDENTIFYING DEVICES AND LABELS A. Genera': Manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required for each application as referened in other Division 22 Sections. Where more than one type is specified for listed application, selectidn is Installer's option,but provide single selection for each product category. B. Equipnnt Nameplates: Metal nameplate with operational data engraved or stamped, permanently fastene to equipment. 1. ata: Manufacturer, product name, model number, serial number, capacity, operating and power haracteristics, impeller diameter, date installed, labels of tested compliances, and similar essential ata. 2. ocation: An accessible and visible location. C. Snap- n Plastic Pipe Markers: Manufacturer's standard preprinted, semi-rigid snap-on, color-coded pipe marker ,conforming to ASME A13.1. D. Engrav d Plastic-Laminate Signs: ASTM D 709, Type I, cellulose, paper-base, phenolic-resin-laminate engravi g stock;Grade ES-2, black surface, black phenolic core,with white(letter color)melamine subcore, except hen other colors are indicated. 1. Fabricate in sizes required for message. 2. Engraved with engraver's standard letter style, of sizes and with wording to match equipment identification. 3. Punch for mechanical fastening. 4. Thickness: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) for units up to 20 square inches (13,000 sq.mm) or 8 inches (200 mm)long; 1/8 inch(3 mm)for larger units. 5. ' asteners: Self-tapping stainless-steel screws or contact-type permanent adhesive. E. Plastic Equipment Markers: Laminated-plastic,color-coded equipment markers. Conform to following color code: 1. ! reen: Cooling equipment and components. , 2. 1 ellow: Heating equipment and components. 3. ellow/Green: Combination cooling and heating equipment and components. 4. :rown: Energy reclamation equipment and components. 5. :lue: Equipment and components that do not meet any of the above criteria. 6. or hazardous equipment,use colors and designs recommended by ASME A13.1. 1 7. 1 omenclature: Include following,matching terminology on schedules as closely as possible: .1. Name and plan number. •. Equipment service. .. Design capacity. I. Other design parameters such as pressure drop,entering and leaving conditions,and rpm. June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 12 of 19 PLUMBING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 22 00 00 8. Size: Approximately 2-1/2 by 4 inches(65 by 100 mm)for control devices,dampers,and valves; and 4-1/2 by 6 inches(115 by 150 mm)for equipment. F. Lettering and Graphics: Coordinate names, abbreviations, and other designations used in plumbing identification, with corresponding designations indicated. Use numbers, lettering, and wording indicated for proper identification and operation/maintenance of plumbing systems and equipment. 1. Multiple Systems: Where multiple systems of same generic name are indicated, provide identification that indicates individual system number as well as service such as "Boiler No. 3," "Air Supply No. IH,"or"Standpipe F12." 2.5 GROUT A. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: ASTM C 1107,Grade B. 1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous,and recommended for interior and exterior applications. 2. Design Mix: 5000-psi(34.50MPa),28-day compressive strength. 3. Packaging: Premixed and factory-packaged. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING SYSTEMS--COMMON REQUIREMENTS A. General: Install piping as described below, except where system Sections specify otherwise. Individual piping system specification Sections in Division 22 specify piping installation requirements unique to the piping system. B. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawings (plans, schematics, and diagrams) indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated,except where deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings. C. Install piping at indicated slope. D. Install components having pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. E. Install piping in concealed interior and exterior locations,except in equipment rooms and service areas. F. Install piping free of sags and bends. G. Install exposed interior and exterior piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited,except where indicated. H. Install piping tight to slabs, beams, joists, columns, walls, and other building elements. Allow sufficient space above removable ceiling panels to allow for ceiling panel removal. June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 13 of 19 PLUMBING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 22 00 00 I. Install piping to allow application of insulation plus 1-inch(25mm)clearance around insulation. J. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other,spaced to permit valve servicing. K. Install ttings for changes in direction and branch connections. L. Install a ouplings according to manufacturer's printed instructions. M. Install ipe escutcheons for pipe penetrations of concrete and masonry walls according to the following: 1. hrome-Plated Piping: Cast-brass, one-piece, with set-screw, and polished chrome-plated finish. se split-casting escutcheons,where required,for existing piping. 2. ninsulated Piping Wall Escutcheons: Cast-brass or stamped-steel,with set-screw. 3. ' ninsulated Piping Floor Plates in Utility Areas: Cast-iron floor plates. 4. nsulated Piping: Cast-brass or stamped-steel,with concealed hinge,spring clips,and chrome-plated finish. 5. •iping in Utility Areas: Cast-brass or stamped-steel,with set-screw or spring clips. N. SleeveS are not required for core drilled holes. 0. Permai ent sleeves are not required for holes formed by PE plastic(removable)sleeves. P. Install Leeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, concrete floor and roof slabs, and where ndicated. Q. Install .leeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions, concrete floor a id roof slabs,and where indicated. 1. ut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces. .. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other wet areas 2 inches(50 mm)above finished floor level. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring where specified. 2. :uild sleeves into new walls and slabs as work progresses. 3. nstall large enough sleeves to provide 1/4-inch (6mm)annular clear space between sleeve and pipe •r pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials: a. PVC Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than 6 inches(150 mm). b. Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes larger than 6 inches(150 mm). G. Steel Sheet-Metal Sleeves: For pipes 6 inches (150 mm) and larger that penetrate gypsum- board partitions. •. Cast-Iron Sleeve Fittings: For floors having membrane waterproofing. Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level. Flashing is specified in Division 7 Section"Flashing and Sheet Metal." 1) Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with nonshrink,nonmetallic grout. June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 14 of 19 PLUMBING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 22 00 00 4. Except for below-grade wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation,using elastomeric joint sealants specified in Division 7 Section"Joint Sealants." R. Above Grade, Exterior Wall, Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Size sleeve for 1-inch (25mm) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installation of mechanical seals. 1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches(150 mm). 2. Install cast-iron wall pipes for sleeves 6 inches(150 mm)and larger. 3. Assemble and install mechanical seals according to manufacturer's printed instructions. S. Below Grade, Exterior Wall, Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron wall pipes for sleeves. Seal pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Size sleeve for 1-inch (25mm) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installation of mechanical seals. T. Below Grade, Exterior Wall, Pipe Penetrations: Install ductile-iron wall penetration system sleeves according to manufacturer's printed installation instructions. U. Fire Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestopping sealant material. Firestopping materials are specified in Division 7 Section"Firestopping." V. Verify final equipment locations for roughing in. W. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections for roughing-in requirements. X. Piping Joint Construction: Join pipe and fittings as follows and as specifically required in individual piping system Sections. 1. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. 2. Remove scale,slag,dirt,and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly. 3. Soldered Joints: Construct joints according to AWS "Soldering Manual," Chapter 22"The Soldering of Pipe and Tube." 4. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS"Brazing Manual"in the"Pipe and Tube"chapter. 5. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME BI.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: a. Note the internal length of threads in fittings or valve ends,and proximity of internal seat or wall, to determine how far pipe should be threaded into joint. b. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads (except where dry seal threading is specified). c. Align threads at point of assembly. d. Tighten joint with wrench. Apply wrench to valve end into which pipe is being threaded. e. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings having threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds. June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 15 of 19 PLUMBING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 22 00 00 6. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12 "Recommended Practices and Procedures for Welding Low Carbon Steel Pipe" using qualified processes and welding operators according to the"Quality Assurance"Article. 7. Flanged Joints: Align flange surfaces parallel. Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Assemble joints by Sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly using torque wrench. 8. Plastic Pipe and Fitting Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean loth or paper towels. Join pipe and fittings according to the following standards: �. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe handling of solvent-cement and primers. Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene(ABS): ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661. Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride)(CPVC): ASTM D 2846 and ASTM F 493. Poly(Vinyl Chloride)(PVC)Pressure Application: ASTM D 2672. Poly(Vinyl Chloride)(PVC)Non-Pressure Application: ASTM D 2855. PVC to ABS (Non-Pressure) Transition: Procedure and solvent cement described in ASTM D 3138. 9. rastc Pipe and Fitting Heat-Fusion Joints: Prepare pipe and fittings and join with heat-fusion according to manufacturer's printed instructions. a. Plain-End Pipe and Fittings: Butt joining. b. Plain-End Pipe and Socket-Type Fittings: Socket joining. Y. Piping onnections: Except as otherwise indicated,make piping connections as specified below. 1. nstall unions in piping 2 inches (50 mm)and smaller adjacent to each valve and at final connection o each piece of equipment having a 2-inch(50mm)or smaller threaded pipe connection. 2. Install flanges in piping 2-1/2 inches (65 mm) and larger adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment having flanged pipe connection. 3. et Piping Systems (Water and Steam): Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect •iping materials of dissimilar metals. 3.2 EQUIP ENT INSTALLATION--COMMON REQUIREMENTS A. Install quipment to provide the maximum possible headroom where mounting heights are not indicated. B. Install equipment according to approved submittal data. Portions of the Work are shown only in diagra matic form. Refer conflicts to the Engineer. C. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces,except where otherwise indicated. June 02,2021 1 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 16 of 19 PLUMBING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 22 00 00 D. Install plumbing equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance, and repair or replacement of equipment components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations. Extend grease fittings to an accessible location. E. Install equipment giving right-of-way to piping systems installed at a required slope. 3.3 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING A. Piping Systems: Install pipe markers on each system. Include arrows showing normal direction of flow. 1. Stenciled Markers: Complying with ASME A13.1. 2. Plastic markers, with application systems. Install on pipe insulation segment where required for hot noninsulated pipes. 3. Locate pipe markers wherever piping is exposed in finished spaces, machine rooms, accessible maintenance spaces(shafts,tunnels, plenums),and exposed exterior locations as follows: a. Near each valve and control device. b. Near each branch, excluding short take-offs for fixtures and terminal units. Mark each pipe at branch,where flow pattern is not obvious. c. Near locations where pipes pass through walls,floors,ceilings,or enter inaccessible enclosures. d. At access doors,manholes,and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping. e. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. f. Spaced at a maximum of 20-foot(6 m)intervals along each run. g. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings,except omit intermediately spaced markers. B. Equipment: Install engraved plastic laminate sign or equipment marker on or near each major item of plumbing equipment. 1. Lettering Size: Minimum 1/4-inch (6mm) -high lettering for name of unit where viewing distance is less than 2 feet(0.6 m), 1/2-inch (13mm)-high for distances up to 6 feet(1.8 m),and proportionately larger lettering for greater distances. Provide secondary lettering 2/3 to 3/4 of size of principal lettering. 2. Text of Signs: Provide text to distinguish between multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations,in addition to name of identified unit. C. Adjusting: Relocate identifying devices which become visually blocked by work of this Division or other Divisions. 3.4 PAINTING AND FINISHING A. Refer to Division 9 Section"Painting and Coating"for field painting requirements. B. Damage and Touch Up: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory finish. 3.5 ROOF PENETRATIONS AND FLASHING: June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 17 of 19 PLUMBING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 22 00 00 A. Pipe, conduit and duct sleeves, pitch pockets, and flashings compatible with the roofing installation shall be provided and installed by the owners roofing contractor for all roof penetrations in order to maintain roof warrant'. Hiring the roofing sub-contractor shall be the responsibility of the General Contractor. 3.6 CONCRETE BASES A. Construct concrete equipment bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches (100 mm) larger than supported unit in both directions. Follow supported equipment manufacturer's setting templates for anchor bolt and tie locations. Use 3000-psi (20.70MPa), 28-day compressive strength concrete and reinforcement as specified in Division 3 Section"Cast-in-Place Concrete." 3.7 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor plumbing materials and equipment. B. Field elding: Comply with AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code--Steel." 3.8 ERECTIIN OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE A. Cut, fi g, and place wood grounds, Hailers, blocking, and anchorage to support and anchor plumbing materia ls and equipment. B. Select�astener sizes that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receiv: finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood memb:rs. C. Attach a substrates as required to support applied loads. 3.9 CUTTIN AND PATCHING A. Gener.l: Cut and patch walls,floors,etc., resulting from work in existing construction or by failure to provide proper openings or recesses in new construction. B. Metho's of cutting: Openings cut through concrete and masonry shall be made with masonry saws and/or core d ills and at such locations acceptable to the Architect/Engineer. Impact-type equipment shall not be used e cept where specifically acceptable to the Architect/Engineer. Openings in precast concrete slabs for pipes, j onduits,outlet boxes,etc.,shall be core drilled to exact size. C. Restoration: All openings shall be restored to "as-new" condition under the appropriate Specification Sectio for the materials involved,and shall match remaining surrounding materials and/or finishes. D. Mason Where openings are cut through masonry walls, provide and install lintels or other structural suppo Is to protect the remaining masonry. Adequate supports shall be provided during the cutting operati.n to prevent any damage to the masonry occasioned by the operation. All structural members, suppo 's, etc., shall be of the proper size and shape, and shall be installed in a manner acceptable to the Archit* t/Engineer. June 02,2021 II KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 18 of 19 PLUMBING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 22 00 00 E. Plaster: All plumbing work in areas containing plaster shall be completed prior to the application of the finish plaster coat. Cutting of finish plaster coat will not be permitted. F. Special Note: No cutting,boring,or excavating which will weaken the structure shall be undertaken. G. Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces necessary for plumbing installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of the trades involved. H. Repair cut surfaces to match adjacent surfaces. 3.10 GROUTING A. Install nonmetallic nonshrink grout for plumbing equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates,and anchors. Mix grout according to manufacturer's printed instructions. B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout. C. Provide forms for placement of grout,as required. D. Avoid air entrapment when placing grout. E. Place grout to completely fill equipment bases. F. Place grout on concrete bases to provide a smooth bearing surface for equipment. G. Place grout around anchors. H. Cure placed grout according to manufacturer's printed instructions. END OF SECTION June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 19 of 19 SECTION 22 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENE L 1.1 SUMMA'Y A. Se ion Includes: 1. Pipe hangers and supports. 2. Hanger rods. 3. Inserts. 4. Flashing. 5. Sleeves. 6. Mechanical sleeve seals. 7. Formed steel channel. 8. Firestopping relating to plumbing work. 9. Firestopping accessories. 10. Equipment bases and supports. 1.2 REFERNCES A. Amrican Society of Mechanical Engineers: 1. ASME B31.1 -Power Piping. 2. ASME B31.5-Refrigeration Piping. 3. ASME B31.9-Building Services Piping. B. ASTM International: 1. ASTM E84-Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 2. ASTM E119-Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 3. ASTM E814-Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through Penetration Fire Stops. 4. ASTM F708-Standard Practice for Design and Installation of Rigid Pipe Hangers. 5. ASTM E1966-Standard Test Method for Fire-Resistive Joint Systems. C. American Welding Society: 1. AWS D1.1 -Structural Welding Code-Steel. D. FM Global: June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 1 of 12 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT SECTION 22 05 29 1. FM-Approval Guide,A Guide to Equipment, Materials&Services Approved By Factory Mutual Research For Property Conservation. E. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry: 1. MSS SP 58-Pipe Hangers and Supports-Materials, Design and Manufacturer. 2. MSS SP 69-Pipe Hangers and Supports-Selection and Application. 3. MSS SP 89-Pipe Hangers and Supports-Fabrication and Installation Practices. F. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1. UL 263-Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 2. UL 723-Tests for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 3. UL 1479-Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops. 4. UL 2079-Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems. 5. UL-Fire Resistance Directory. G. Intertek Testing Services(Warnock Hersey Listed): 1. WH-Certification Listings. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Firestopping(Through-Penetration Protection System):Sealing or stuffing material or assembly placed in spaces between and penetrations through building materials to arrest movement of fire,smoke, heat,and hot gases through fire rated construction. 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Firestopping Materials:ASTM E119 to achieve fire ratings as noted on Drawings for adjacent construction, but not less than 1 hour fire rating. 1. Ratings may be 3-hours for firestopping in through-penetrations of 4-hour fire rated assemblies unless otherwise required by applicable codes. B. Firestop interruptions to fire rated assemblies,materials,and components. 1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Firestopping: Conform to applicable code FM UL WH for fire resistance ratings and surface burning characteristics. B. Firestopping: Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of materials used. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate system layout with location including critical dimensions,sizes,and pipe hanger and support locations and detail of trapeze hangers. B. Product Data: June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 2 of 12 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT SECTION 22 05 29 1. Hangers and Supports:Submit manufacturers catalog data including load capacity. 2. Firestopping:Submit data on product characteristics, performance and limitation criteria. C. Firestopping Schedule:Submit schedule of opening locations and sizes, penetrating items,and required listed design numbers to seal openings to maintain fire resistance rating of adjacent assembly. D. Desgn Data: Indicate load carrying capacity of trapeze, multiple pipe,and riser support hangers. Indicate cal ulations used to determine load carrying capacity of trapeze, multiple pipe,and riser support hangers. Submit sizing methods calculations sealed by a registered professional engineer. E. Ma ufacturer's Installation Instructions: 1. Hangers and Supports:Submit special procedures and assembly of components. 2. Firestopping:Submit preparation and installation instructions. F. Manufacturer's Certificate:Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements. G. Engineering Judgements: For conditions not covered by UL or WH listed designs,submit judgements by licensed professional engineer suitable for presentation to authority having jurisdiction for acceptance as meeting code fire protection requirements. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Through Penetration Firestopping of Fire Rated Assemblies:UL 1479 or ASTM E814 with 0.10 inch water gage minimum positive pressure differential to achieve fire F-Ratings and temperature T-Ratings as indicated on Drawings,but not less than 1-hour. 1. Wall Penetrations: Fire F-Ratings as indicated on Drawings,but not less than 1-hour. 2. Floor and Roof Penetrations: Fire F-Ratings and temperature T-Ratings as indicated on Drawings, but not less than 1-hour. a. Floor Penetrations Within Wall Cavities:T-Rating is not required. B. Thrpugh Penetration Firestopping of Non-Fire Rated Floor and Roof Assemblies:Materials to resist free passage of flame and products of combustion. 1. Noncombustible Penetrating Items: Noncombustible materials for penetrating items connecting maximum of three stories. 2. Penetrating Items: Materials approved by authorities having jurisdiction for penetrating items connecting maximum of two stories. C. Fire Resistant Joints in Fire Rated Floor, Roof,and Wall Assemblies:ASTM El 966 or UL 2079 to achieve fire resistant rating as indicated on Drawings for assembly in which joint is installed. D. Fire Resistant Joints Between Floor Slabs and Exterior Walls:ASTM E119 with 0.10 inch water gage minimum positive pressure differential to achieve fire resistant rating as indicated on Drawings for floor assembly. E. Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum 25/450 flame spread/smoke developed index when tested in acdordance with ASTM E84. June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 3 of 12 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT SECTION 22 05 29 F. Perform Work in accordance with applicable authority AWS D1.1 for welding hanger and support attachments to building structure. G. Perform Work in accordance with State Municipality of Highways Public Work's standard. H. Maintain one copy copies of each document on site. 1.8 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer:Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Installer:Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum years documented experience approved by manufacturer. 1.9 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification. B. Protect from weather and construction traffic,dirt,water,chemical,and damage,by storing in original packaging. 1.10 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not apply firestopping materials when temperature of substrate material and ambient air is below 60 degrees F. B. Maintain this minimum temperature before,during,and for minimum 3 days after installation of firestopping materials. C. Provide ventilation in areas to receive solvent cured materials. 1.11 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. 1.12 WARRANTY A. Furnish five year manufacturer warranty for pipe hangers and supports. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Manufacturers: I. B-Line 2. Creative Systems Inc. June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 4 of 12 HANGERS AND '.UPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT SECTION 22 05 29 3. Flex-Weld, Inc. 4. Glope Pipe Hanger Products Inc. 5. Michigan Hanger Co. 6. Superior Valve Co. B. Fu ish materials in accordance with State Municipality of Highways Public Work's standards. C. Plu bing Piping-DWV: 1. Conform to ASME B31.9. 2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 inch: Malleable iron Carbon steel,adjustable swivel,split ring. 3. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 inches and Larger: Carbon steel,adjustable,clevis. 4. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers:Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods. 5. ' Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 3 inches and Smaller:Cast iron hook. 6. ' Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 inches and Larger:Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp. 7. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp. 8. , Floor Support:Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle,lock nut, nipple,floor flange,and concrete pier or steel support. 9. Copper Pipe Support: Copper-plated,carbon-steel adjustable, ring. D. Plui bing Piping-Water: 1. ' Conform to ASME B31.9. 2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 inch: Malleable iron Carbon steel,adjustable swivel,split ring. 3. Hangers for Cold Pipe Sizes 2 inches and Larger:Carbon steel,adjustable,clevis. 4. Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 2 to 4 inches: Carbon steel,adjustable,clevis. 5. Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 inches and Larger:Adjustable steel yoke,cast iron roll,double hanger. 6. I Multiple or Trapeze Hangers:Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods. 7. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 inches and Larger:Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods,cast iron roll. 8. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 3 inches and Smaller:Cast iron hook. 9. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 inches and Larger:Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp. 10. Wall Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 inches and Larger:Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp with adjustable steel yoke and cast iron roll. 11.E Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp. 12. Floor Support for Cold Pipe:Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple,floor flange,and concrete pier or steel support. 13. Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 4 inches and Smaller:Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple,floor flange,and concrete pier or steel support. June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 5 of 12 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT SECTION 22 05 29 14. Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 inches and Larger:Adjustable cast iron roll and stand,steel screws, and concrete pier or steel support. 15. Copper Pipe Support: Copper-plated, Carbon-steel ring. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Hanger Rods: Mild steel threaded both ends,threaded on one end,or continuous threaded. 2.3 INSERTS A. Inserts: Malleable iron case of galvanized steel shell and expander plug for threaded connection with lateral adjustment,top slot for reinforcing rods,lugs for attaching to forms;size inserts to suit threaded hanger rods. 2.4 FLASHING A. Metal Flashing:26 gage thick galvanized steel. B. Metal Counterflashing:22 gage thick galvanized steel. C. Lead Flashing: 1. Waterproofing:5 lb./sq.ft sheet lead. 2. Soundproofing: 1 lb/sq.ft sheet lead. D. Flexible Flashing:47 mil thick sheet butyl;compatible with roofing. E. Caps:Steel,22 gage minimum; 16 gage at fire resistant elements. 2.5 SLEEVES A. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Floors: 18 gage thick galvanized steel. B. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Beams,Walls, Footings,and Potentially Wet Floors:Steel pipe or 18 gage thick galvanized steel. C. Sealant:Acrylic 2.6 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS A. Manufacturers: 1. Thunderline Link-Seal, Inc. Model. 2. NMP Corporation Model. B. Product Description: Modular mechanical type,consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill annular space between object and sleeve,connected with bolts and pressure plates causing rubber sealing elements to expand when tightened, providing watertight seal and electrical insulation. June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 6 of 12 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT SECTION 22 05 29 2.7 FORMED'STEEL CHANNEL A. Ma ufacturers: 1. Allied Tube&Conduit Corp. 2. B-Line Systems 3. Midland Ross Corporation, Electrical Products Division 4. Unistrut Corp. B. Pro'uct Description:Galvanized 12 gage)thick steel.With holes 1-1/2 inches on center. 2.8 FIRESTOPPING A. Manufacturers: 1. Dow Corning Corp. 2. Fire Trak Corp. 3. Hilti Corp. 4. Internation I.al Protective Coating Corp. 5. 3M fire Protection Products 6. Specified Technology, Inc. B. Furnish materials in accordance with State Municipality of Highways Public Work's standards. C. Product Description: Different types of products by multiple manufacturers are acceptable as required to me t specified system description and performance requirements;provide only one type for each similar ap lication. 1. Silicone Elastomeric Firestopping:Single Multiple component silicone elastomeric compound and compatible silicone sealant. 2. Foam Firestopping Compounds:Single Multiple component foam compound. 3. Formulated Firestopping Compound of Incombustible Fibers: Formulated compound mixed with incombustible non-asbestos fibers. 4. Fiber Stuffing and Sealant Firestopping:Composite of mineral ceramic fiber stuffing insulation with silicone elastomer for smoke stopping. 5. Mechanical Firestopping Device with Fillers: Mechanical device with incombustible fillers and silicone elastomer,covered with sheet stainless steel jacket,joined with collars,penetration sealed with flanged stops. 6. Intumescent Firestopping: Intumescent putty compound which expands on exposure to surface heat gain. 7. Firestop Pillows: Formed mineral fiber pillows. D. Co or: Dark gray Black As selected from manufacturer's full range of colors. June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 7 of 12 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT SECTION 22 05 29 2.9 FIRESTOPPING ACCESSORIES A. Primer:Type recommended by firestopping manufacturer for specific substrate surfaces and suitable for required fire ratings. B. Dam Material: Permanent: 1. Mineral fiberboard. 2. Mineral fiber matting. 3. Sheet metal. 4. Plywood or particle board. 5. Alumina silicate fire board. C. Installation Accessories:Provide clips,collars,fasteners,temporary stops or dams,and other devices required to position and retain materials in place. D. General: 1. Furnish UL listed products or products tested by independent testing laboratory. 2. Select products with rating not less than rating of wall or floor being penetrated. E. Non-Rated Surfaces: 1. Stamped steel,chrome plated,hinged,split ring escutcheons or floor plates or ceiling plates for covering openings in occupied areas where piping is exposed. 2. For exterior wall openings below grade,furnish mechanical sealing device to continuously fill annular space between piping and cored opening or water-stop type wall sleeve. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify openings are ready to receive sleeves. B. Verify openings are ready to receive firestopping. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate surfaces of dirt,dust,grease,oil,loose material,or other matter affecting bond of firestopping material. B. Remove incompatible materials affecting bond. C. Install backing damming materials to arrest liquid material leakage. D. Obtain permission from Architect/Engineer before using powder-actuated anchors. June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 8 of 12 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT SECTION 22 05 29 E. Do not drill or cut structural members. 3.3 INSTALLATION-INSERTS A. Install inserts for placement in concrete forms. B. Install inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams. C. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe 4 inches and larger. D. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface. E. Where inserts are omitted,drill through concrete slab from below and provide through-bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut above flush with top of recessed into and grouted flush with slab. 3.4 INSTALLATION-PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Install in accordance with ASME B31.1 ASME B31.5 ASME 31.9 ASTM F708 MSS SP 58 MSS SP 69 MSS SP 89. B. Support horizontal piping as scheduled. C. Install hangers with minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work. D. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow. E. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. F. Support horizontal cast iron pipe adjacent to each hub,with 5 feet maximum spacing between hangers. G. Support vertical piping at every other floor.Support vertical cast iron pipe at each floor at hub. H. Where piping is installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple pipe or trapeze hangers. I. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping. J. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping sheet lead packing between hanger or support and piping. K. Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe. L. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Refer to Section 09 90 00. Hangers and supports located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts,and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed. M. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation. June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 9 of 12 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT SECTION 22 05 29 3.5 INSTALLATION-EQUIPMENT BASES AND SUPPORTS A. Provide housekeeping pads of concrete, minimum 3-1/2 inches thick and extending 6 inches beyond supported equipment. B. Using templates furnished with equipment, install anchor bolts,and accessories for mounting and anchoring equipment. C. Construct supports of steel members formed steel channel steel pipe and fittings.Brace and fasten with flanges bolted to structure. D. Provide rigid anchors for pipes after vibration isolation components are installed. 3.6 INSTALLATION-FLASHING A. Provide flexible flashing and metal counterflashing where piping penetrates weather or waterproofed walls, floors,and roofs. B. Flash vent and soil pipes projecting 3 inches minimum above finished roof surface with lead worked 1 inch minimum into hub,8 inches minimum clear on sides with 24 x 24 inches sheet size. For pipes through outside walls,turn flanges back into wall and caulk,metal counter-flash,and seal. C. Flash floor drains in floors with topping over finished areas with lead, 10 inches clear on sides with minimum 36 x 36 inch sheet size.Fasten flashing to drain clamp device. D. Seal floor shower mop sink drains watertight to adjacent materials. E. Adjust storm collars tight to pipe with bolts;caulk around top edge. Use storm collars above roof jacks. Screw vertical flange section to face of curb. 3.7 INSTALLATION-SLEEVES A. Exterior watertight entries:Seal with mechanical sleeve seals. B. Set sleeves in position in forms. Provide reinforcing around sleeves. C. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction.Provide for continuous insulation wrapping. D. Extend sleeves through floors 1 inch above finished floor level.Caulk sleeves. E. Where piping penetrates floor,ceiling,or wall,close off space between pipe and adjacent work with stuffing firestopping insulation and caulk airtight.Provide close fitting metal collar or escutcheon covers at both sides of penetration. F. Install chrome plated steel plastic stainless steel escutcheons at finished surfaces. June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 10 of 12 1 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT SECTION 22 05 29 3.8 INSTALL A TION-FIRESTOPPING A. Inst II material at fire rated construction perimeters and openings containing penetrating sleeves,piping and oth:r items,requiring firestopping. B. App y primer where recommended by manufacturer for type of firestopping material and substrate involved, and as required for compliance with required fire ratings. C. Apply firestopping material in sufficient thickness to achieve required fire and smoke rating,to uniform den, ity and texture. D. Co press fibered material to maximum 40 percent of its uncompressed size. E. Re l'ove dam material after firestopping material has cured.Dam material to remain. F. Fir* Rated Surface: 1. Seal opening at floor,wall, partition,ceiling,and roof as follows: a. Install sleeve through opening and extending beyond minimum of 1 inch on both sides of building element. b. Size sleeve allowing minimum of 1 inch void between sleeve and building element. c. Pack void with backing material. d. Seal ends of sleeve with UL listed fire resistive silicone compound to meet fire rating of structure penetrated. 2. Where cable tray, bus,cable bus,conduit,wireway,trough,and penetrates fire rated surface, install firestopping product in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. G. Non-Rated Surfaces: 1. Seal opening through non-fire rated wall, partition floor,ceiling,and roof opening as follows: a. Install sleeve through opening and extending beyond minimum of 1 inch on both sides of building element. b. Size sleeve allowing minimum of 1 inch void between sleeve and building element. c. Install type of firestopping material recommended by manufacturer. 2. Install escutcheons floor plates or ceiling plates where conduit, penetrates non-fire rated surfaces in occupied spaces.Occupied spaces include rooms with finished ceilings and where penetration occurs below finished ceiling. 3. Exterior wall openings below grade:Assemble rubber links of mechanical sealing device to size of piping and tighten in place,in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 4. Interior partitions:Seal pipe penetrations at clean rooms,laboratories,hospital spaces,computer rooms,telecommunication rooms data rooms and.Apply sealant to both sides of penetration to completely fill annular space between sleeve and conduit. June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 11 of 12 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT SECTION 22 05 29 3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect installed firestopping for compliance with specifications and submitted schedule. 3.10 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials. 3.11 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation. 3.12 SCHEDULES PIPE HANGER SPACING MAXIMUM HANGER ROD PIPE MATERIAL HANGER SPACING DIAMETER Feet Inches ABS(All sizes) 4 3/8 Aluminum(All sizes) 1 0 1/2 Brass Cast Iron(All Sizes) 5 5/8 Cast Iron(All Sizes)with 10 foot length of pipe 1 0 5/8 CPVC, 1 inch and smaller 3 1/2 CPVC, 1-1/4 inches and larger 4 1/2 Copper Tube, 1-1/4 inches and smaller 6 1/2 Copper Tube, 1-1/2 inches and larger 10 1/2 Fiberglass 4 1/2 Glass 8 1/2 Polybutylene 2.67 3/8 Polypropylene 4 3/8 PVC(All Sizes) 4 3/8 Steel,3 inches and smaller 12 1/2 Steel,4 inches and larger 12 5/8 END OF SECTION June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 12 of 12 SECTION 22 05 53 PLUMBING IDENTIFICATION PART 1 GENE £L 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Nam:-plates. B. Tag'. C. PipeMarkers. 1.2 REFERE ICE STANDARDS A. AS E A13.1 -Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems;The American Society of Mechanical Engi eers; 1996(Reaffirmed 2002). 1.3 SUBMITT Ik LS A. Prod. ct Data: Provide manufacturers catalog literature for each product required. PART 2 PROD CTS 2.1 MANUFA TURERS A. Brad Corporation: www.bradycorp.com. B. Cha pion America, Inc: www.Champion-America.com. C. Seto Identification Products: www.seton.com/aec. 2.2 NAMEPLATES A. Description: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved letters. 1. Letter Color: White. 2. Letter Height: 1/4 inch. 3. Background Color: Black. 2.3 TAGS A. Plastic Tags: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting background color. Tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter. B. Metal Tags: Brass with stamped letters;tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter with smooth edges. 2.4 PIPE MARKERS A. Color: Conform to ASME A13.1. B. Plastic Pipe Markers: Factory fabricated,flexible,semi-rigid plastic, preformed to fit around pipe or pipe covering; minimum information indicating flow direction arrow and identification of fluid being conveyed. C. Underground Plastic Pipe Markers: Bright colored continuously printed plastic ribbon tape, minimum 6 inches wide by 4 mil thick, manufactured for direct burial service. June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 1 of 2 PLUMBING IDENTIFICATION SECTION 22 05 53 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials. B. Prepare surfaces for stencil painting. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install plastic nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners,or adhesive. Apply with sufficient adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer. B. Install tags with corrosion resistant chain. C. Install plastic pipe markers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Install plastic tape pipe markers complete around pipe in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. E. Install underground plastic pipe markers 6 to 8 inches below finished grade,directly above buried pipe. F. Identify air handling units,pumps, heat transfer equipment,tanks, and water treatment devices with plastic nameplates. Small devices,such as in-line pumps,may be identified with tags. G. Identify control panels and major control components outside panels with plastic nameplates. H. Tag automatic controls,instruments,and relays. Key to control schematic. I. Identify piping,concealed or exposed,with plastic pipe markers. Use tags on piping 3/4 inch diameter and smaller. Identify service,flow direction,and pressure. Install in clear view and align with axis of piping. Locate identification not to exceed 20 feet on straight runs including risers and drops,adjacent to each valve and tee,at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure,and at each obstruction. END OF SECTION June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 2 of 2 SECTION 2207 19 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION PART 1 GENE £L 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Piping insulation. B. Jackets and accessories. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM B 209-Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate;2006. B. ASTM B 209M-Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate[Metric];2006. C. ASTM C 177-Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transnission Properties by Means of the Guarded Hot Plate Apparatus;2004. D. AST C 534-Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Shee and Tubular Form;2005. E. AST C 547-Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation;2006. F. ASTIR C 552-Standard Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation;2003. G. ASTM C 795-Standard Specification for Thermal Insulation for Use in Contact with Austenitic Stainless Steel;2003. H. AST E 84-Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;2007. I. AST E 96/E 96M-Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials;2005. J. NFPPf 255-Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; National Fire Protection Association;2006. K. UL 723-Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.;2003. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Prodict Data: Provide product description,thermal characteristics, list of materials and thickness for each servide,and locations. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Man acturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with of less than three years of documented experience. B. Appli ator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified in this section with inimum three years of experience. 1.05 DELIVER ,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Accest materials on site, labeled with manufacturer's identification, product density,and thickness. 1.06 FIELD CI NDITIONS A. Main gain ambient conditions required by manufacturers of each product. B. Main ain temperature before,during,and after installation for minimum of 24 hours. JULY 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 1 of 4 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION SECTION 22 07 19 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL PRODUCTS OF THIS SECTION A. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25/50, maximum,when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84, NFPA 255,or UL 723. 2.02 GLASS FIBER A. Manufacturers: 1. Johns Manville Corporation: www.jm.com. 2. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com. 3. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com. B. Insulation: ASTM C 547 and ASTM C 795;rigid molded,noncombustible. 1. 'K'value: ASTM C 177,0.24 at 75 degrees F. 2. Maximum service temperature: 850 degrees F. 3. Maximum moisture absorption: 0.2 percent by volume. C. Vapor Barrier Jacket: White kraft paper with glass fiber yarn,bonded to aluminized film;moisture vapor transmission when tested in accordance with ASTM E 961E 96M of 0.02 perm-inches. 2.04 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC CELLULAR INSULATION A. Manufacturer: 1. Armacell International: www.armacell.com. 2. Engineer approved equal B. Insulation: Pre-molded flexible elastomeric cellular rubber insulation complying with ASTM C 534 Grade 3;use molded tubular material wherever possible. 1. Minimum Service Temperature: -40 degrees F. 2. Maximum Service Temperature: 220 degrees F. 3. Connection: Waterproof vapor barrier adhesive. 2.05 JACKETS A. PVC Plastic. 1. Jacket: One piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material,off-white color. a. Minimum Service Temperature: 0 degrees F. b. Maximum Service Temperature: 150 degrees F. c. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.002 perm inch, maximum,when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96/E 96M. d. Thickness: 15 mil. e. Connections: Brush on welding adhesive. B. Aluminum Jacket:ASTM B 209(ASTM B 209M)formed aluminum sheet. 1. Thickness: 0.016 inch sheet. JULY 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 2 of 4 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION SECTION 22 07 19 2. finish: Embossed. 3. oining: Longitudinal slip joints and 2 inch laps. 4. fittings: 0.016 inch thick die shaped fitting covers with factory attached protective liner. 5. etal Jacket Bands: 3/8 inch wide;0.015 inch thick aluminum. PART 3 EXEC TION 3.01 EXAMINA ION A. Verify that piping has been tested before applying insulation materials. B. Verif that surfaces are clean and dry,with foreign material removed. 3.02 INSTALL A'TION A. Instal in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Instal in accordance with NAIMA National Insulation Standards. C. Expoed Piping: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations. D. Insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature: Insulate entire system including fittings, valve,,unions,flanges,strainers,flexible connections, pump bodies,and expansion joints. Use cellular glass or flexible elastomeric cellular insulation. E. lnsul.ted pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature, including domestic cold water and well water and condensate: 1. 'Provide vapor barrier jackets,factory-applied or field-applied. Secure with self-sealing longitudinal aps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples nd vapor barrier mastic. 2. nsulate fittings,joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material and thickness as adjacent I ipe. Finish with glass cloth and vapor barrier adhesive or PVC fitting covers. F. For hst piping conveying fluids 140 degrees F or less,do not insulate flanges and unions at equipment, but bevel and seal ends of insulation. G. For h.t piping conveying fluids over 140 degrees F,insulate flanges and unions at equipment. H. Glas' fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids above ambient temperature: 1. rovide standard jackets,with or without vapor barrier,factory-applied or field-applied. Secure with .elf-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive. Secure with outward linch expanding staples. 2. Insulate fittings,joints, and valves with pre-molded insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe. Finish with PVC fitting covers. I. Inse is and Shields: I1. A pplication: Piping 1-1/2 inches diameter or larger. 2. shields: Galvanized steel between pipe hangers or pipe hanger rolls and inserts. 3. Insert location: Between support shield and piping and under the finish jacket. 4. Insert configuration: Minimum 6 inches long,of same thickness and contour as adjoining insulation; ay be factory fabricated. 5. Insert material: Hydrous calcium silicate insulation or other heavy density insulating material suitable JULY 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 3 of 4 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION SECTION 2207 19 for the planned temperature range. J. Continue insulation through walls,sleeves, pipe hangers,and other pipe penetrations. Finish at supports, protrusions,and interruptions. K. Pipe Exposed in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces(less than 8 feet above finished floor): Finish with aluminum jacket. L. Exterior Applications: Provide vapor barrier jacket. Insulate fittings,joints,and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe,and finish with glass mesh reinforced vapor barrier cement. Cover with aluminum jacket with seams located on bottom side of horizontal piping. END OF SECTION JULY 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 4 of 4 SECTION 22 10 05 PLUMBING PIPING PARTI GENEL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pipe, sipe fittings,valves,and connections for piping systems. 1. 4.anitary sewer. 2. D omestic water. 1.02 REFERE CES A. ANSI 21.22-American National Standard for Relief Valves and Automatic Gas Shutoff Devices for Hot Wate'Supply Systems; 1999,and addenda A&B(R2004). B. ASM: B16.3-Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings;The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 1998 (R2006). C. ASM B16.18-Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings;The American Society of Mechanical Enginrs;2001 (R2005)(ANSI B16.18). D. ASM B16.22-Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings;The American Society of Me hanical Engineers;2001 (R2005). E. ASME B16.23-Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings-DWV;The American Society of Mechanical Engineers;2002(R2006). F. ASME B31.1 -Power Piping;The American Society of Mechanical Engineers;2007(ANSI/ASME B31.1). G. ASME B31.2-Fuel Gas Piping;The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 1968. H. ASM B31.9-Building Services Piping;The American Society of Mechanical Engineers;2004 (ANS/ASME B31.9). I. ASM (BPV IV)-Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,Section IV-Rules for Construction of Heating Boilers; The merican Society of Mechanical Engineers;2007. J. ASM (BPV IX)-Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,Section IX-Welding and Brazing Qualifications;The American Society of Mechanical Engineers;2007. K. ASTM A 53/A 53M-Standard Specification for Pipe,Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped,Zinc-Coated,Welded and Seamless;2006a. L. ASTM A 74-Standard Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings;2006. M. AST . A 234/A 234M-Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for M'derate and High Temperature Service;2006a. N. AST B 32-Standard Specification for Solder Metal;2004. 0. AST . B 42-Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Pipe,Standard Sizes;2002. P. AST B 88-Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube;2003. A Q. AW C651 -Disinfecting Water Mains;American Water Works Association;2005(ANSI/AWWA C651). , R. MSS SP-58-Pipe Hangers and Supports-Materials, Design and Manufacture; Manufacturers Stan'ardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.;2002. S. MSS SP-67-Butterfly Valves; Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, JULY 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 1 of 7 PLUMBING PIPING SECTION 22 10 05 Inc.;2002a. T. MSS SP-69-Pipe Hangers and Supports-Selection and Application; Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.;2003. U. MSS SP-70-Cast Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends; Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.;2006. V. MSS SP-71 -Cast Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends; Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.;2005. W. MSS SP-80-Bronze Gate,Globe,Angle and Check Valves; Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.;2003. X. MSS SP-85-Cast Iron Globe&Angle Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends;Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.;2002. Y. MSS SP-89-Pipe Hangers and Supports-Fabrication and Installation Practices;Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.;2003. Z. MSS SP-1 10-Ball Valves Threaded,Socket-Welding,Solder Joint,Grooved and Flared Ends; Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 1996. AA. NFPA 54-National Fuel Gas Code; National Fire Protection Association;2006. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials,pipe fittings,valves,and accessories. Provide manufacturers catalog information. Indicate valve data and ratings. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with State of Texas,standards. B. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body. C. Identify pipe with marking including size,ASTM material classification,ASTM specification, potable water certification,water pressure rating. 1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Perform Work in accordance with Local plumbing code. B. Conform to applicable code for installation of backflow prevention devices. 1.06 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage. B. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves. C. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation. D. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers,completing sections of the work,and isolating parts of completed system. JULY 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 2 of 7 PLUMBING PIPING SECTION 22 10 05 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 WATER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING A. Copper Pipe: ASTM B 42, hard drawn. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.18,cast copper alloy or ASME B16.22 wrought copper and bronze. 2. Joints: ASTM B 32,alloy Sn95 solder. 2.02 WATER PIPING,ABOVE GRADE A. Copper Tube: ASTM B 88(ASTM B 88M),Type L(B), Drawn(H). 1. Fittings: ASME B16.18,cast copper alloy or ASME B16.22,wrought copper and bronze. 2. Joints: ASTM B 32,alloy Sn95 solder. 2.03 WASTE PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING A. SCH40 PVC Pipe:ASTM D2466,schedule 40 1. Fittings:Schedule 40 PVC 2. Joints:Solvent Weld 2.05 WASTE PIPING,ABOVE GRADE A. SCH40 PVC Pipe:ASTM D2466,schedule 40 1. Fittings:Schedule 40 PVC 2. Joints:Solvent Weld 2.06 FLANGES, UNIONS,AND COUPLINGS A. Unions for Pipe Sizes 2 inches and Under: 1. Ferrous pipe: Class 150 malleable iron threaded unions. 2. Copper tube and pipe: Class 150 bronze unions with soldered joints. B. Flanges for Pipe Size Over 2-1/2 inches and over: 1. Ferrous pipe: Class 150 malleable iron welded; preformed neoprene gaskets. 2. Copper tube and pipe: Class 150 slip-on bronze flanges; preformed neoprene gaskets. C. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end,copper solder end,water impervious isolation barrier. 2.07 GATE VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Conbraco Industries;www.conbraco.com. 2. Nibco, Inc;www.nibco.com. 3. Milwaukee Valve Company;www.milwaukeevalve.com. B. Up To and Including 3 Inches: 1. MSS SP-80,Class 125,bronze body,bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, inside screw,solid wedge disc,solder ends. C. 2 Inches and Larger: 1. MSS SP-70, Class 125, iron body, bronze trim,outside screw and yoke, handwheel,solid wedge disc,flanged ends. Provide chain-wheel operators for valves 6 inches and larger mounted over 8 feet above floor. 2.08 GLOBE VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Conbraco Industries;www.conbraco.com. JULY 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 3 of 7 PLUMBING PIPING SECTION 22 10 05 2. Nibco, Inc;www.nibco.com. 3. Milwaukee Valve Company;www.milwaukeevalve.com. B. Up To and Including 3 Inches: 1. MSS SP-80,Class 125,bronze body, bronze trim, handwheel,bronze disc,solder ends. C. 2 Inches and Larger: 1. MSS SP-85,Class 125,iron body,bronze trim, handwheel,outside screw and yoke, renewable bronze plug-type disc, renewable seat,flanged ends. Provide chain-wheel operators for valves 6 inches and larger mounted over 8 feet above floor. 2.09 BALL VALVES A. Construction,2 inches and Smaller: MSS SP-1 10, Class 150,400 psi CWP, bronze,two piece body, stainless trim,full port,teflon seats and stuffing box ring, blow-out proof stem, lever handle with balancing stops,threaded ends. Equal to Nibco T585-70-66. 2.10 BUTTERFLY VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Hammond Valve: www.hammondvalve.com. 2. Crane Co.: www.cranevalve.com. 3. Milwaukee Valve Company: www.milwaukeevalve.com. 4. Nibco: www.nibco.com B. Construction 1-1/2 Inches and Larger: MSS SP-67,200 psi CWP, cast or ductile iron body,nickel-plated ductile iron disc,resilient replaceable EPDM seat,wafer ends,extended neck, 10 position lever handle. C. Provide gear operators for valves 8 inches and larger,and chain-wheel operators for valves mounted over 8 feet above floor. 2.11 SWING CHECK VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Hammond Valve: www.hammondvalve.com. 2. Nibco, Inc: www.nibco.com. 3. Milwaukee Valve Company: www.milwaukeevalve.com. B. Up to 2 Inches: 1. MSS SP-80,Class 125,bronze body and cap, bronze swing disc with rubber seat,solder ends. C. Over 2 Inches: 1. MSS SP-71,Class 125,iron body,bronze swing disc,renewable disc seal and seat,flanged or grooved ends. 2.12 WATER PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Amtrol Inc: www.amtrol.com. 2. Cla-Val Co: www.cla-val.com. 3. Watts Regulator Company: www.wattsregulator.com. B. Up to 2 Inches: 1. MSS SP-80,bronze body,stainless steel and thermoplastic internal parts,fabric reinforced diaphragm,strainer,threaded single union ends. C. Over 2 Inches: 1. MSS SP-85,cast iron body,bronze fitted,elastomeric diaphragm and seat disc,flanged. JULY 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 4 of 7 PLUMBING PIPI G SECTION 22 10 05 2.13 RELIEF LVES A. Pres ure Relief: 1. Manufacturers: a. Cla-Val Co: www.cla-val.com. b. Henry Technologies: www.henrytech.com. c. Watts Regulator Company: www.wattsregulator.com. 2. GA Z21.22 certified, bronze body,teflon seat,steel stem and springs,automatic,direct pressure .ctuated. B. Temperature and Pressure Relief: 1. Manufacturers: a. Cla-Val Co: www.cla-val.com. b. Henry Technologies: www.henrytech.com. c. Watts Regulator Company: www.wattsregulator.com. 2. !A GA Z21.22 certified, bronze body,teflon seat,stainless steel stem and springs,automatic,direct pressure actuated,temperature relief maximum 210 degrees F, capacity ASME(BPV IV)certified and labelled. 2.14 STRAINES A. Man facturers: 1. A rmstrong International, Inc: www.armstronginternational.com. 2. Green Country Filtration: greencountryfiltration.com. 3. EAMCO: www.weamco.com. B. Size inch and Under: 1. hreaded brass body for 175 psi CWP,Y pattern with 1/32 inch stainless steel perforated screen. 2. Class 150,threaded bronze body 300 psi CWP,Y pattern with 1/32 inch stainless steel perforated Green. C. Size P-1/2 inch to 4 inch: 1. Class 125,flanged iron body,Y pattern with 1/16 inch stainless steel perforated screen. PART 3 EXEC TION 3.01 EXAMIN TION A. Veri that excavations are to required grade,dry,and not over-excavated. 3.02 PREPA' TION A. Rea pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe. B. Rem,ve scale and dirt,on inside and outside, before assembly. C. Prep.,re piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. 3.03 INSTALL TION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provi.e non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals. C. Rout piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel and perpendicular to walls. D. Install piping to maintain headroom,conserve space,and not interfere with use of space. JULY 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 5 of 7 PLUMBING PIPING SECTION 22 10 05 E. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. F. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe,joints,or connected equipment. Refer to Section 2205 16. G. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings.Refer to Section 22 07 19. H. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed. Coordinate size and location of access doors with Section 08 31 00. I. Install vent piping penetrating roofed areas to maintain integrity of roof assembly. J. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing,scrape,brush clean,and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding. K. Prepare exposed,unfinished pipe,fittings,supports,and accessories ready for finish painting. Refer to Section 09 90 00. L. Install bell and spigot pipe with bell end upstream. M. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. N. Install water piping to ASME B31.9. 0. Sleeve pipes passing through partitions,walls and floors. P. Pipe Hangers and Supports: 1. Install in accordance with ASME B31.9. 2. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work. 3. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow. 4. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe. 5. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation,provide multiple or trapeze hangers. 6. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping. 7. Provide hangers adjacent to motor driven equipment with vibration isolation; refer to Section 22 05 48. 8. Support cast iron drainage piping at every joint. 3.04 APPLICATION A. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections. B. Install brass male adapters each side of valves in copper piped system. Solder adapters to pipe. C. Install ball or butterfly valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems,or vertical risers. D. Install globe valves for throttling,bypass,or manual flow control services. E. Provide lug end butterfly valves adjacent to equipment when provided to isolate equipment. 3.05 DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM A. Prior to starting work,verify system is complete,flushed and clean. B. Disinfect new piping systems in accordance with Texas Department of Health standards. C. Ensure Ph of water to be treated is between 7.4 and 7.6 by adding alkali(caustic soda or soda ash)or acid(hydrochloric). JULY 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 6 of 7 PLUMBING PIPING SECTION 22 10 05 D. Inject disinfectant,free chlorine in liquid,powder,tablet or gas form,throughout system to obtain 50 to 80 mg/L residual. E. Bleed water from outlets to ensure distribution and test for disinfectant residual at minimum 15 percent of outlets. F. Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours. G. If final disinfectant residual tests less than 25 mg/L, repeat treatment. H. Flush disinfectant from system until residual equal to that of incoming water or 1.0 mg/L. I. Take samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing,from 10 percent of outlets and from water entry,and analyze in accordance with AWWA C651. END OF SECTION JULY 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 7 of 7 SECTION 22 40 00 PLUMBING FIXTURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Sinks. 2. Service sinks. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute: 1. ANSI A117.1 -Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities. B. Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute: 1. ARI 1010-Self-Contained, Mechanically Refrigerated Drinking-Water Coolers. C. American Society of Mechanical Engineers: 1. ASME A112.6.1 -Floor-Affixed Supports for Off-the-Floor Plumbing Fixtures for Public Use. 2. ASME A112.18.1 -Plumbing Fixture Fittings. 3. ASME Al 12.19.lM-Enameled Cast Iron Plumbing Fixtures. 4. ASME Al 12.19.2M-Vitreous China Plumbing Fixtures. 5. ASME A112.19.3-Stainless Steel Plumbing Fixtures(Designed for Residential Use). 6. ASME Al 12.19.4-Porcelain Enameled Formed Steel Plumbing Fixtures. 7. ASME A112.19.5-Trim for Water-Closet Bowls,Tanks and Urinals. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data:Submit catalog illustrations of fixtures,sizes, rough-in dimensions, utility sizes,trim,and finishes. B. Samples:Submit color chips for each standard color. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions:Submit installation methods and procedures. D. Manufacturer's Certificate:Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data:Submit fixture,trim,exploded view and replacement parts lists. June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 1 of 4 PLUMBING FIXTURES SECTION 22 40 00 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perf rm Work in accordance with State Municipality of Highways Public Work's standard. B. Pro ide products requiring electrical connections listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., testi g firm acceptable to authority having jurisdiction as suitable for purpose specified and indicated. C. Pro ide plumbing fixture fittings in accordance with ASME A112.18.1 that prevent backflow from fixture into wat r distribution system. D. Mai Itain one copy of each document on site. 1.6 QUALIFIC ATIONS A. Manufacturer:Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three yea documented experience,and with service facilities within 100 miles of Project. B. Inst.,Iler:Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years documented exp:‘rience approved by manufacturer. 1.7 DEL1VE ,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Acc•pt fixtures on site in factory packaging. Inspect for damage. B. Pro i*ct installed fixtures from damage by securing areas and by leaving factory packaging in place to prot*ct fixtures and prevent use. 1.8 WARRA TY A. Fur ish five year manufacturer warranty for plumbing fixtures. 1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Fur ish two sets of faucet washers flush valve service kits lavatory supply fittings shower heads toilet seats. PART 2 PROD CTS 2.1 LAVATO Y INSULATION KIT A. Pro uct Description:Where Lavatories are noted to be insulated for ADA compliance,furnish the following: Saf ty Covers conforming to ANSI A177.1 and consisting of insulation kit of molded closed cell vinyl con truction,3/16 inch thick,white gray color,for insulating tailpiece, P-trap,valves, and supply piping. Fur ish with weep hole and angle valve access covers. June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 2 of 4 PLUMBING FIXTURES SECTION 22 40 00 2.2 Refer to Plumbing Fixture Schedule,Sheet P2.0,for all product requirements PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify walls and floor finishes are prepared and ready for installation of fixtures. B. Verify electric power is available and of correct characteristics. C. Confirm millwork is constructed with adequate provision for installation of counter top lavatories and sinks. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Rough-in fixture piping connections in accordance with minimum sizes indicated in fixture rough-in schedule for particular fixtures. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install Work in accordance with State Municipality of Highways Public Works standards. B. Install each fixture with trap,easily removable for servicing and cleaning. C. Provide chrome plated rigid or flexible supplies to fixtures with loose key screwdriver stops,reducers,and escutcheons. D. Install components level and plumb. E. Install and secure fixtures in place with wall supports wall carriers and bolts. F. Seal fixtures to wall and floor surfaces with sealant as specified in Section 07 90 00,color to match fixture. G. Solidly attach water closets to floor with lag screws. Lead flashing is not intended hold fixture in place. H. For ADA accessible water closets, install flush valve with handle to wide side of stall. 3.4 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Review millwork shop-drawings. Confirm location and size of fixtures and openings before rough in and installation. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splashing, noise,or overflow. 3.6 CLEANING A. Clean plumbing fixtures and equipment. June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 3 of 4 PLUMBING FIXTURES SECTION 22 40 00 3.7 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Do not permit use of figures before final acceptance. END OF SECTION June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 4 of 4 SECTION 23 00 00 MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following basic mechanical materials and methods to complement other Division 23 Sections. 1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems. 2. Concrete equipment base construction requirements. 3. Equipment nameplate data requirements. 4. Labeling and identifying mechanical systems and equipment. 5. Nonshrink grout for equipment installations. 6. Field-fabricated metal and wood equipment supports. 7. Installation requirements common to equipment specification Sections. 8. Mechanical demolition. 9. Cutting and patching. 10. Touchup painting and finishing. B. Pipe and pipe fitting materials are specified in piping system Sections. C. Related Sections: This and all other division 23 specifications, the construction drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General, Special, and the Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 REFERENCES A. The "Authority Having Jurisdiction" over the project described by these documents is the City of Round Rock. As such, it is required that the installation shall meet the minimum standards prescribed in the latest editions of the following listed codes and standards, which are made a part of these Specifications. All referenced codes and standards shall be those current at the date of issue of the design documents. B. National Fire Protection Association Standards(NFPA): 1. NFPA No.51,Welding&Cutting,Oxygen-Fuel Gas Systems 2. NFPA No.70, National Electrical Code 3. NFPA No.90A,Air Conditioning Systems 4. NFPA No.91, Blower&Exhaust Systems 5. NFPA No. 101, Life Safety Code 6. NFPA No.241,Standard for Safeguarding Construction,Alteration and Demolition Operations 7. NFPA No.255, Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 1 of 19 MECHANICAL G NERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 23 00 00 8. NFPA No. 258, Standard Research Test Method for Determining Smoke Generation of Solid Materials C. Ameri n National Standards Institute(ANSI): 1. A40.8, National Plumbing Code 2. B31.1, Power Piping 3. B9.1,Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration D. American Society of Mechanical Engineers(ASME): Boiler and Pressure Vessel Codes F. Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute Standards (ARI): All standards related to refrigeration and air conditioning equipment and piping furnished under these Specifications. G. Sheet etal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. (SMACNA): All current editions of applic ble manuals and standards(See Sections 23 31 00 and 23 33 00). H. Air Mo ing and Conditioning Association(AMCA): All current editions of applicable manuals and standards. I. Ameri n Society of Testing Materials(ASTM): All current editions of applicable manuals and standards. J. Amen n Water Works Association(AWWA): All current editions of applicable manuals and standards. K. Nation I Electrical Manufacturers' Association (NEMA): All current editions of applicable manuals and standards. L. City of Round Rock, Fire Department as may be applicable to construction on this site. M. International Building Code, International Energy Conservation Code, International Fire Code, Uniform Plumbing Code, Uniform Mechanical Code, National electric Code. N. Texas Occupational Safety Act: All applicable safety standards 0. Occupational Safety and Health Act(OSHA) P. ADA and ANSI Standards: All work shall be in accord with all regulations and requirements of the Standards and Specifications for Handicapped and Disabled for the Construction of Public Buildings and Facilities in the State of Texas Usable by Physically Handicapped and Disabled persons, ANSI Standards and the requirements of the American Disabilities Act. Q. Texas State Fire Marshal Rules R. State Energy Code S. Refer to Specification Sections hereinafter bound for additional Codes and Standards. T. All materials and workmanship shall comply with all applicable state and national codes,Specifications,and industry standards. In all cases where Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. have established standards for a June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 2 of 19 MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 23 00 00 particular type material, such material shall comply with these standards. Evidence of compliance shall be the UL"label"or"listing"under Re-Examination Service. U. The Contract Documents are intended to comply with the aforementioned rules and regulations; however, some discrepancies may occur. Where such discrepancies occur, the Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer in writing of said discrepancies and apply for an interpretation. Should the discovery and notification occur after the execution of a contract, any additional work required for compliance with said regulations shall be paid for as covered by Division 01 of these Contract Documents, providing no work of fabrication of materials has been accomplished in a manner of non-compliance. Should the Contractor fabricate and/or install materials and/or workmanship in such a manner that does not comply with the applicable codes, rules and regulations,the Contractor who performed such work shall bear all costs arising in correcting these deficiencies to comply with said rules and regulations. 1.3 GENERAL A. The Contractor shall execute all work hereinafter specified or indicated on accompanying Drawings. Contractor shall provide all equipment necessary and usually furnished in connection with such work and systems whether or not mentioned specifically herein or on the Drawings. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for fitting his material and apparatus into the building and shall carefully lay out his work at the site to conform to the structural conditions,to avoid all obstructions,to conform to the details of the installation and thereby to provide an integrated satisfactory operating installation. C. The Mechanical, Electrical, and associated Drawings are necessarily diagrammatic by their nature, and are not intended to show every connection in detail or every pipe or conduit in its exact location. These details are subject to the requirements of standards referenced elsewhere in these specifications, and structural and architectural conditions. The Contractor shall carefully investigate structural and finish conditions and shall coordinate the separate trades in order to avoid interference between the various phases of work. Work shall be organized and laid out so that it will be concealed in furred chases and suspended ceilings, etc., in finished portions of the building, unless specifically noted to be exposed. All exposed work shall be installed parallel or perpendicular to the lines of the building unless otherwise noted. D. When the mechanical and electrical Drawings do not give exact details as to the elevation of pipe, conduit and ducts, the Contractor shall physically arrange the systems to fit in the space available at the elevations intended with proper grades for the functioning of the system involved. Piping, exposed conduit and the duct systems are generally intended to be installed true and square to the building construction,and located as high as possible against the structure in a neat and workmanlike manner. The Drawings do not show all required offsets, control lines, pilot lines and other location details. Work shall be concealed in all finished areas. 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Pipe,pipe fittings,and piping include tube,tube fittings,and tubing. B. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below the roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawl spaces,and tunnels. June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 3 of 19 MECHANICAL G: NERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 23 00 00 C. Expos:d Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mecha ical equipment rooms. D. Exposd Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors, or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weath:r conditions. Examples include rooftop locations. E. Conce:led Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occup.nts. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafts. F. Conce;led Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contac by building occupants, but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within nheated shelters. G. Indicated: The term "indicated" is a cross reference to graphic representations, notes or schedules on drawings, to other paragraphs or schedules in the Specifications, and to similar means of recording requirements on contract documents. Where terms such as"shown", "noted", "scheduled", and "specified" are used in lieu of "indicated", it is for the purpose of helping reader locate the cross reference, and no limitation of location is intended except as specifically noted. H. Directed, requested, etc.: Where not otherwise explained, terms such as "directed", "requested", "authorized", "selected", "approved", "required", "accepted", and "permitted" mean directed by Architect/Engineer", "requested by Architect/Engineer" and similar phrases. However, no such implied meaning will be interpreted to extend Architect's/Engineer's responsibility into Contractor's area of constr ction supervision and job safety. I. And/O : Where "and/or" is used in these Specifications or on the Drawings, it shall mean "that situations exist here either one or both conditions occur or are required and shall not be interpreted to permit an option n the part of the Contractor. J. Appro e: Where used in conjunction with Architect's/Engineer's response to submittals, requests, applic tions, inquiries, reports and claims by Contractor, the meaning of term "approved" will be held to limitati ns to Architect's/Engineer's responsibilities and duties as specified in General and Supplementary Condit ons. In no case will"approval" by Architect/Engineer be interpreted as a release of Contractor from respon ibilities to fulfill requirements of contract documents or to extend Architect's/Engineer's responsibility into C ntractor's area of construction supervision and job safety. K. As req ired: Where "as required" is used in these Specifications or on the drawings, it shall mean "that situati ns exist that are not necessarily described in detail or indicated that may cause the contractor certain compli ations in performing the work described or indicated. These complications entail the normal coordi ation activities expected of the Contractor where multiple trades are involved and new or existing constr ction causes deviations to otherwise simplistic approaches to the work to be performed. The term shall n t be interpreted to permit an option on the part of the Contractor to achieve the end result." L. Furnish: 1. he term"furnish"is used to mean"supply and deliver to project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, ssemble,installation,and similar operations." 2. here "furnish"applies to work for which the installation is not otherwise specified, "furnish" in such base shall mean"furnish and install." June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 4 of 19 MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 23 00 00 I. Install: The term "install" is used to describe operations at project site including "unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning and similar operation." M. Provide: The term"provide"means"to furnish and install,complete and ready for intended use." 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Proposed Products List: Include Products specified in the following Sections: 1. Section 23 05 29-Hangers and Supports for HVAC 2. Section 23 05 53-Mechanical Identification 3. Section 23 05 93-HVAC Testing,Adjusting, Balancing 4. Section 23 07 13-Duct Insulation 5. Section 23 07 19-Pipe Insulation 6. Section 23 31 00-HVAC Ducts and Casings 7. Section 23 37 00 Air Outlets and Inlets 8. Section 23 81 26-Split-System Air Conditioners B. Samples of color, lettering style, and other graphic representation required for each identification material and device. C. Shop drawings detailing fabrication and installation for metal and wood supports and anchorage for mechanical materials and equipment. D. Coordination drawings for access panel and door locations. E. Prepare coordination drawings according to Division 1 Section"Submittals"to a 1/4 inch equals 1 foot(1:48) scale or larger. Detail major elements,components,and systems of mechanical equipment and materials in relationship with other systems, installations, and building components. Show space requirements for installation and access. Show where sequence and coordination of installations are important to the efficient flow of the Work. Include the following: 1. Proposed locations of ductwork, piping, equipment,and materials. Include the following: a. Planned piping layout,including valve and specialty locations and valve stem movement. b. Clearances for installing and maintaining insulation. c. Clearances for servicing and maintaining equipment, including space for equipment disassembly required for periodic maintenance. d. Equipment service connections and support details. e. Exterior wall and foundation penetrations. June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 5 of 19 MECHANICAL G: NERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 23 00 00 f. Fire-rated wall and floor penetrations. g. Sizes and location of required concrete pads and bases. h. Ductwork layout including sizes and elevations. 2. Scheduling, sequencing, movement, and positioning of large equipment into the building during construction. 3. Floor plans, elevations, and details to indicate penetrations in floors, walls, and ceilings and their relationship to other penetrations and installations. F. Welde' certificates signed by Contractor certifying that welders comply with requirements specified under the"Q iality Assurance"Article. 1.6 QUALM, ASSURANCE A. Quali welding processes and operators for structural steel according to AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code-- teel." B. Quali welding processes and operators for piping according to ASME"Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code," Sectio IX,"Welding and Brazing Qualifications" I. Comply with provisions of ASMEB31 Series"Code for Pressure Piping." 2. ' Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for the welding processes involved and that certification is current. C. ASME A 13.1 for lettering size,length of color field,colors,and viewing angles of identification devices. D. Equip ent Selection: Equipment of greater or larger power, dimensions, capacities, and ratings may be furnish*d provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting mechanical and electri.al services, circuit breakers, conduit, motors, bases, and equipment spaces are increased. No addition al costs will be approved for these increases, if larger equipment is approved. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies of the equipment are specified,the equipment must meet the design requirements and commi:sioning requirements. 1.7 DELIVI RY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Delive pipes and tubes with factory-applied end-caps. Maintain end-caps through shipping, storage, and handli g to prevent pipe-end damage and prevent entrance of dirt,debris,and moisture. B. Protect stored pipes and tubes from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. When stored inside, do not excees structural capacity of the floor. C. Protect flanges,fittings,and piping specialties from moisture and dirt. D. Protect stored plastic pipes from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending. 1.8 PERM f S, UTILITY CONNECTIONS AND INSPECTIONS: A. Gener.I: Refer to Division 01 for construction phasing and time increments. June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 6 of 19 MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 23 00 00 B. Fees and Costs: If,during the course of the construction, a need arises to buy utilities,the Contractor shall pay all fees attendant thereto. If City or privately owned utility piping or electrical cable needs to be extended, relocated, or terminated, the Contractor will pay all permits and construction/inspection fees associated with that particular work. C. The Contractor is responsible for any fees or permits in connection with implementation of this scope of work. D. Compliance: The Contractor shall comply in every respect with all requirements of National Fire Protection Association, local Fire Department regulations and utility company requirements. In no case does this relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of complying with these Specifications and Drawings where specified conditions are of higher quality than the requirements of the above-specified authorities. Where requirements of the Specifications and Drawings are more lenient than the requirements of the above authorities having jurisdiction,the Contractor shall make installations in compliance with the requirements of the above authorities with no extra compensation. 1.9 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate mechanical equipment installation with other building components. B. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction to allow for mechanical installations. C. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed. D. Sequence, coordinate,and integrate installations of mechanical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Coordinate installation of large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing in the building. E. Coordinate connection of electrical services. F. Coordinate connection of mechanical systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations,franchised service companies,and controlling agencies. G. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors where mechanical items requiring access are concealed behind finished surfaces. H. Coordinate installation of identifying devices after completing covering and painting where devices are applied to surfaces. I. Interruptions in utilities shall be scheduled with the Owner and shall be performed at such times and dates directed by the Owner to minimize the impact to the campus. Proposals shall include the costs of performing work on weekends,holidays,and off-hours as required to meet the Owners requirements. 1.10 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 7 of 19 MECHANICAL G:NERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 23 00 00 A. All dimnsional information related to new structures shall be taken from the appropriate Drawings. All dimensional information related to existing facilities shall be taken from actual measurements made by the Contra,for on the site. B. The int-rrelation of the Specifications, the Drawings, and the schedules are as follows: The Specifications determ ne the nature and setting of the several materials,the Drawings establish the quantities,dimensions and de;ails, and the schedules give the performance characteristics. If the Contractor requires additional clarification, he shall request it in writing, following the contractually prescribed information flow requirements. C. Should the Drawings or Specifications conflict within themselves, or with each other, the better quality, or greater size or quantity of work or materials shall be performed or furnished. 1.11 ALTERNATES A. Alternates quoted on Bid Forms will be reviewed and accepted or rejected at the Owner's option. Accepted Alternates will be identified in Owner-Contractor Agreement. B. Coordinate related work and modify surrounding work as required. C. Any Al ernate Proposals are summarized in Division 01 of the Specifications. The Contractor is directed to refer t all Sections of the Specifications and Drawings for this project to determine the exact extent and scope f the various Alternate Proposals as each pertains to the work of all trades. 1.12 ELECTICAL WIRING OF MOTORS AND EQUIPMENT: A. The Ccntractor shall note that the electrical design and Drawings are based on the equipment scheduled and indicated on the Drawings,and should any mechanical equipment be provided requiring changes to the electrithl design,the required electrical changes shall be made at no cost to the Owner. B. The Electrical Trades shall provide all interconnecting wiring for the installation of all power. The Electrical Trades shall provide all disconnect switches as required for proper operation, as indicated on the Drawings or required by applicable code. All combination starters, individual starters, and other motor starting apparatus not specifically scheduled or specified as provided by the equipment manufacturer under the scope of Division 23,shall be provided under the scope of Division 26. C. The Mechanical Trades shall provide complete wiring diagrams indicating power wiring and interlock wiring. Diagrams shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer for review within thirty(30)days after the submittals for equipment have been reviewed. Diagrams shall be based on accepted equipment and shall be complete full phse and interlock control Drawings, not a series of manufacturer's individual diagrams. After these diagra s have been reviewed by the Architect/Engineer, copies shall be transmitted to the Electrical Trades by the ontractor. They shall be followed in detail. 1.13 TESTS A. The Contractor shall make, at no additional cost to the Owner, any tests deemed necessary by the inspec'ion departments having jurisdiction, and in the National Fire Protection Association, ASTM, etc. Standa;ds listed. The Contractor shall provide all equipment, materials, and labor for making such tests. Reaso able amounts of fuel and electrical energy costs for system tests will be paid by the Owner. Fuel June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 8 of 19 MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 23 00 00 and electrical energy costs for system adjustment and tests which follow beneficial occupancy by the Owner will be borne by the Owner. B. Additional tests specified hereinafter under the various Specification Sections shall be made. C. The Owner shall be notified in writing at least 10 working days prior to each test and other Specification requirements requiring action on the part of the Construction Inspector. All equipment shall be placed in operation and tested for proper automatic control requirements before the balancing agency starts their work. D. Maintain Log of Tests as hereinafter specified. E. See Specifications hereinafter for additional tests and requirements. 1.14 LOG OF TESTS: A. All tests shall have pertinent data logged by the Contractor at the time of testing. Data shall include date, time, personnel, description, and extent of system tested, test conditions,test results, specified results, and other pertinent data. All Test Log entries shall be legibly signed by the Project Contractor or his authorized job superintendent. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS A. Refer to individual piping system specification Sections for pipe and fitting materials and joining methods. B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings. 2.2 JOINING MATERIALS A. Refer to individual piping system specification Sections in Division 23 for special joining materials not listed below. B. Pipe Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for the chemical and thermal conditions of the piping system contents. 1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch (3mm) maximum thickness, except where thickness or specific material is indicated. a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face,Class 125 cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges. b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face,Class 250 cast-iron and steel flanges. 2. ASME B16.20 for grooved, ring-joint,steel flanges. 3. AWWA C110, rubber,flat face, 1/8 inch (3 mm)thick, except where other thickness is indicated; and full-face or ring type,except where type is indicated. C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1,carbon steel,except where other material is indicated. June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 9 of 19 MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 23 00 00 D. Plastic Pipe Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer,except where other type or material is indicated. E. Solder Filler Metal: ASTM B 32. 1. Alloy Sn95 or Alloy Sn94: Tin (approximately 95 percent) and silver (approximately 5 percent), having 0.10 percent lead content. 2. Alloy E: Tin (approximately 95 percent) and copper(approximately 5 percent), having 0.10 percent maximum lead content. 3. Alloy HA: Tin-antimony-silver-copper-zinc, having 0.10 percent maximum lead content. 4. Alloy HB: Tin-antimony-silver-copper-nickel, having 0.10 percent maximum lead content. 5. Alloy Sb5: Tin(95 percent)and antimony(5 percent), having 0.20 percent maximum lead content. F. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8. 1. BCuP Series: Copper-phosphorus alloys. 2. BAgI: Silver alloy. G. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded. H. Solvem Cements: Manufacturer's standard solvents complying with the following: 1. Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene(ABS): ASTM D 2235. 2. hlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride)(CPVC): ASTM F 493. 3. Poly(Vinyl Chloride)(PVC): ASTM D 2564. 4. PVC to ABS Transition: Made to requirements of ASTM D 3138,color other than orange. I. Plastic Pipe Seals: ASTM F 477,elastomeric gasket. J. Flanged, Ductile-Iron Pipe Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: AWWA C110, rubber gasket, carbon steel bolts and nuts. K. Couplings: Iron body sleeve assembly,fabricated to match outside diameters of plain-end pressure pipes. 1. Sleeve: ASTM A 126, Class B,gray iron. 2. Followers: ASTM A 47(ASTM A 47M), Grade 32510 or ASTM A 536 ductile iron. 3. Gaskets: Rubber. 4. Bolts and Nuts: AWWA C111. 5. Finish: Enamel paint. 2.3 PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Escutcheons: Manufactured wall, ceiling, and floor plates; deep-pattern type where required to conceal protruding fittings and sleeves. June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 10 of 19 MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 23 00 00 1. Inside Diameter: Closely fit around pipe,tube,and insulation. 2. Outside Diameter: Completely cover opening. 3. Stamped Steel: One-piece,with set-screw and chrome-plated finish. 4. Stamped Steel: Split plate,with concealed hinge,set-screw,and chrome-plated finish. 5. Cast-Iron Floor Plate: One-piece casting. B. Dielectric Fittings: Assembly or fitting having insulating material isolating joined dissimilar metals to prevent galvanic action and stop corrosion. 1. Description: Combination of copper alloy and ferrous; threaded, solder, plain, and weld neck end types and matching piping system materials. 2. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid,pressure,and temperature. 3. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly for 250-psig (1725kPa) minimum working pressure at a 180 deg F(82 deg C)temperature. 4. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly for 150-or 300-psig (1035kPa or 2070kPa)minimum pressure to suit system pressures. 5. Dielectric-Flange Insulation Kits: Field-assembled,companion-flange assembly,full-face or ring type. Components include neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic washers,and steel backing washers. a. Provide separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts for 150-or 300-psig (1035kPa or 2070kPa)minimum working pressure to suit system pressures. 6. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling, having inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining, with threaded ends and 300-psig (2070kPa) minimum working pressure at 225 deg F (107 deg C) temperature. 7. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple, having inert and noncorrosive thermoplastic lining,with combination of plain, threaded, or grooved end types and 300-psig (2070kPa) working pressure at 225 deg F(107 deg C)temperature. C. Mechanical Sleeve Seals: Modular,watertight mechanical type. Components include interlocking synthetic rubber links.shaped to continuously fill annular space between pipe and sleeve. Connecting bolts and pressure plates cause rubber sealing elements to expand when tightened. D. Sleeves: The following materials are for wall,floor,slab,and roof penetrations: 1. Steel Sheet-Metal: 24-gage or heavier galvanized sheet metal, round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint. 2. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53,Type E,Grade A,Schedule 40,galvanized, plain ends. 3. Cast-Iron: Cast or fabricated wall pipe equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, having plain ends and integral water stop,except where other features are specified. 4. Wall Penetration Systems: Wall sleeve assembly, consisting of housing, gaskets, and pipe sleeve, with 1 mechanical-joint end conforming to AWWA C110 and 1 plain pipe-sleeve end. a. Penetrating Pipe Deflection: 5 percent without leakage. b. Housing: Ductile-iron casting having waterstop and anchor ring, with ductile-iron gland, steel June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 11 of 19 MECHANICAL G: NERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 23 00 00 studs and nuts, and rubber gasket conforming to AWWA C111, of housing and gasket size as required to fit penetrating pipe. Pipe Sleeve: AWWA C151,ductile-iron pipe. .I. Housing-to-Sleeve Gasket: Rubber or neoprene push-on type of manufacturer's design. 5. ast-lron Sleeve Fittings: Commercially made sleeve having an integral clamping flange, with tamping ring,bolts,and nuts for membrane flashing. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set-screws. 6. !VC Plastic: Manufactured, permanent,with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms. 7. 'VC Plastic Pipe: ASTM D 1785,Schedule 40. 8. 'E Plastic: Manufactured, reusable, tapered, cup-shaped, smooth outer surface, with nailing flange or attaching to wooden forms. 2.4 IDENTI YING DEVICES AND LABELS A. Gener.l: Manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required for each application as referenced in other Division 23 Sections. Where more than one type is specified for listed application, se1ecti4n is Installer's option,but provide single selection for each product category. B. Equip ent Nameplates: Metal nameplate with operational data engraved or stamped, permanently fasten:d to equipment. 1. Data: Manufacturer, product name, model number, serial number, capacity, operating and power haracteristics, impeller diameter, date installed, labels of tested compliances, and similar essential ata. 2. i ocation: An accessible and visible location. C. Snap-tn Plastic Pipe Markers: Manufacturer's standard preprinted, semi-rigid snap-on, color-coded pipe marke ;,conforming to ASME A13.1. D. Engra -d Plastic-Laminate Signs: ASTM D 709, Type I, cellulose, paper-base, phenolic-resin-laminate engrav ng stock;Grade ES-2, black surface, black phenolic core,with white(letter color)melamine subcore, except hen other colors are indicated. 1. abricate in sizes required for message. 2. ngraved with engraver's standard letter style, of sizes and with wording to match equipment dentification. 3. !unch for mechanical fastening. 4. i hickness: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) for units up to 20 square inches (13,000 sq.mm) or 8 inches (200 m)long; 1/8 inch(3 mm)for larger units. 5. ; asteners: Self-tapping stainless-steel screws or contact-type permanent adhesive. E. Plastic Equipment Markers: Laminated-plastic, color-coded equipment markers. Conform to following color code: 1. reen: Cooling equipment and components. June 02,2021 Ili KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 12 of 19 MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 23 00 00 2. Yellow: Heating equipment and components. 3. Yellow/Green: Combination cooling and heating equipment and components. 4. Brown: Energy reclamation equipment and components. 5. Blue: Equipment and components that do not meet any of the above criteria. 6. For hazardous equipment,use colors and designs recommended by ASME A13.1. 7. Nomenclature: include following,matching terminology on schedules as closely as possible: a. Name and plan number. b. Equipment service. c. Design capacity. d. Other design parameters such as pressure drop,entering and leaving conditions,and rpm. 8. Size: Approximately 2-1/2 by 4 inches(65 by 100 mm)for control devices,dampers,and valves; and 4-1/2 by 6 inches(115 by 150 mm)for equipment. F. Lettering and Graphics: Coordinate names, abbreviations, and other designations used in mechanical identification,with corresponding designations indicated. Use numbers, lettering, and wording indicated for proper identification and operation/maintenance of mechanical systems and equipment. 1. Multiple Systems: Where multiple systems of same generic name are indicated,provide identification that indicates individual system number as well as service such as "Boiler No. 3," "Air Supply No. IH,"or"Standpipe F12." 2.5 GROUT A. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: ASTM C 1107,Grade B. 1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous,and recommended for interior and exterior applications. 2. Design Mix: 5000-psi(34.50MPa),28-day compressive strength. 3. Packaging: Premixed and factory-packaged. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING SYSTEMS--COMMON REQUIREMENTS A. General: Install piping as described below, except where system Sections specify otherwise. Individual piping system specification Sections in Division 23 specify piping installation requirements unique to the piping system. B. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawings (plans, schematics, and diagrams) indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated,except where deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings. June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 13 of 19 MECHANICAL G:NERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 23 00 00 C. Install at indicated slope. D. Install omponents having pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. E. Install iping in concealed interior and exterior locations,except in equipment rooms and service areas. F. Install iping free of sags and bends. G. Install 'xpcsed interior and exterior piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibi ed, except where indicated. H. Install 'piping tight to slabs, beams, joists, columns, walls, and other building elements. Allow sufficient space above removable ceiling panels to allow for ceiling panel removal. I. Install iping to allow application of insulation plus 1-inch(25mm)clearance around insulation. J. Locategroups of pipes parallel to each other,spaced to permit valve servicing. K. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. L. Install ouplings according to manufacturer's printed instructions. M. Install pipe escutcheons for pipe penetrations of concrete and masonry walls according to the following: 1. hrome-Plated Piping: Cast-brass, one-piece, with set-screw, and polished chrome-plated finish. se split-casting escutcheons,where required,for existing piping. 2. ninsulated Piping Wall Escutcheons: Cast-brass or stamped-steel,with set-screw. 3. ninsulated Piping Floor Plates in Utility Areas: Cast-iron floor plates. 4. nsulated Piping: Cast-brass or stamped-steel,with concealed hinge,spring clips, and chrome-plated finish. 5. 'iping in Utility Areas: Cast-brass or stamped-steel,with set-screw or spring clips. N. Sleeve'. are not required for core drilled holes. 0. Perma ent sleeves are not required for holes formed by PE plastic(removable)sleeves. P. Install .leeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, concrete floor and roof slabs, and where ndicated. Q. Install Leeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions, concrete floor a d roof slabs,and where indicated. 1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces. a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other wet areas 2 inches(50 mm)above finished floor level. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring where specified. 2. Build sleeves into new walls and slabs as work progresses. June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 14 of 19 MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 23 00 00 3. Install large enough sleeves to provide 1/4-inch (6mm)annular clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials: a. PVC Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than 6 inches(150 mm). b. Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes larger than 6 inches(150 mm). c. Steel Sheet-Metal Sleeves: For pipes 6 inches (150 mm) and larger that penetrate gypsum- board partitions. d. Cast-Iron Sleeve Fittings: For floors having membrane waterproofing. Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level. Flashing is specified in Division 7 Section"Flashing and Sheet Metal." 1) Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with nonshrink,nonmetallic grout. 4. Except for below-grade wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation,using elastomeric joint sealants specified in Division 7 Section"Joint Sealants." R. Above Grade, Exterior Wall, Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Size sleeve for 1-inch (25mm) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installation of mechanical seals. 1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches(150 mm). 2. Install cast-iron wall pipes for sleeves 6 inches(150 mm)and larger. 3. Assemble and install mechanical seals according to manufacturer's printed instructions. S. Below Grade, Exterior Wall, Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron wall pipes for sleeves. Seal pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Size sleeve for 1-inch (25mm) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installation of mechanical seals. T. Below Grade, Exterior Wall, Pipe Penetrations: Install ductile-iron wall penetration system sleeves according to manufacturer's printed installation instructions. U. Fire Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestopping sealant material. Firestopping materials are specified in Division 7 Section"Firestopping." V. Verify final equipment locations for roughing in. W. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections for roughing-in requirements. X. Piping Joint Construction: Join pipe and fittings as follows and as specifically required in individual piping system Sections. 1. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. 2. Remove scale,slag,dirt,and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly. 3. Soldered Joints: Construct joints according to AWS"Soldering Manual," Chapter 22"The Soldering of Pipe and Tube." 4. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS"Brazing Manual"in the"Pipe and Tube"chapter. June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 15 of 19 MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 23 00 00 5. threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME BI.20.1. Cut threads dull and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: a. Note the internal length of threads in fittings or valve ends,and proximity of internal seat or wall, to determine how far pipe should be threaded into joint. b. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads (except where dry seal threading is specified). c Align threads at point of assembly. d. Tighten joint with wrench. Apply wrench to valve end into which pipe is being threaded. e. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings having threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds. 6. elded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12 "Recommended Practices and rocedures for Welding Low Carbon Steel Pipe" using qualified processes and welding operators ccording to the"Quality Assurance"Article. 7. Flanged Joints: Align flange surfaces parallel. Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly using torque Wrench. 8. Plastic Pipe and Fitting Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or paper towels. Join pipe and fittings according to the following standards: a. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe handling of solvent-cement and primers. . Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene(ABS): ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661. Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride)(CPVC): ASTM D 2846 and ASTM F 493. Poly(Vinyl Chloride)(PVC)Pressure Application: ASTM D 2672. -. Poly(Vinyl Chloride)(PVC)Non-Pressure Application: ASTM D 2855. PVC to ABS (Non-Pressure) Transition: Procedure and solvent cement described in ASTM D 3138. 9. 1astic Pipe and Fitting Heat-Fusion Joints: Prepare pipe and fittings and join with heat-fusion -quipment according to manufacturer's printed instructions. .. Plain-End Pipe and Fittings: Butt joining. 1. Plain-End Pipe and Socket-Type Fittings: Socket joining. Y. Piping onnections: Except as otherwise indicated,make piping connections as specified below. 1. nstall unions in piping 2 inches (50 mm) and smaller adjacent to each valve and at final connection a each piece of equipment having a 2-inch(50mm)or smaller threaded pipe connection. 2. install flanges in piping 2-1/2 inches (65 mm) and larger adjacent to flanged valves and at final onnection to each piece of equipment having flanged pipe connection. June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 16 of 19 MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 230000 3. Wet Piping Systems (Water and Steam): Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals. 3.2 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION--COMMON REQUIREMENTS A. Install equipment to provide the maximum possible headroom where mounting heights are not indicated. B. Install equipment according to approved submittal data. Portions of the Work are shown only in diagrammatic form. Refer conflicts to the Engineer. C. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces,except where otherwise indicated. D. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance, and repair or replacement of equipment components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations. Extend grease fittings to an accessible location. E. Install equipment giving right-of-way to piping systems installed at a required slope. 3.3 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING A. Piping Systems: Install pipe markers on each system. Include arrows showing normal direction of flow. 1. Stenciled Markers: Complying with ASME A13.1. 2. Plastic markers, with application systems. Install on pipe insulation segment where required for hot noninsulated pipes. 3. Locate pipe markers wherever piping is exposed in finished spaces, machine rooms, accessible maintenance spaces(shafts,tunnels,plenums),and exposed exterior locations as follows: a. Near each valve and control device. b. Near each branch, excluding short take-offs for fixtures and terminal units. Mark each pipe at branch,where flow pattern is not obvious. c. Near locations where pipes pass through walls,floors,ceilings,or enter inaccessible enclosures. d. At access doors,manholes,and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping. e. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. f. Spaced at a maximum of 20-foot(6 m)intervals along each run. g. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings,except omit intermediately spaced markers. B. Equipment: Install engraved plastic laminate sign or equipment marker on or near each major item of mechanical equipment. 1. Lettering Size: Minimum 1/4-inch (6mm) -high lettering for name of unit where viewing distance is less than 2 feet(0.6 m), 1/2-inch (13mm)-high for distances up to 6 feet(1.8 m),and proportionately larger lettering for greater distances. Provide secondary lettering 2/3 to 3/4 of size of principal lettering. June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 17 of 19 MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 23 00 00 2. ext of Signs: Provide text to distinguish between multiple units, inform operator of operational quirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper )perations, in addition to name of identified unit. C. Adjusti g: Relocate identifying devices which become visually blocked by work of this Division or other Divisio s. 3.4 PAINTI G AND FINISHING A. Refer t Division 9 Section"Painting and Coating"for field painting requirements. B. Damagp and Touch Up: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and procedres to match original factory finish. 3.5 ROOF PENETRATIONS AND FLASHING: A. Pipe, conduit and duct sleeves, pitch pockets, and flashings compatible with the roofing installation shall be provided and installed by the owners roofing contractor for all roof penetrations in order to maintain roof warranty. Hiring the roofing sub-contractor shall be the responsibility of the General Contractor. 3.6 CONCRETE BASES A. Constryct concrete equipment bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches (100 mm) larger than supported unit in both directions. Follow supported equipment manufacturer's setting templates for anchor bolt and tie locations. Use 3000-psi (20.70MPa), 28-day compressive strength concrete and reinforcement as specified in Division 3 Section"Cast-in-Place Concrete." 3.7 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE A. Cut,fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment. B. Field\Aelding: Comply with AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code--Steel." 3.8 ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, Hailers, blocking, and anchorage to support and anchor mechanical materi.ls and equipment. B. Select astener sizes that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receiv:finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood memb:rs. C. Attach i o substrates as required to support applied loads. 3.9 CUTTIN: AND PATCHING A. Gener.I: Cut and patch walls,floors,etc., resulting from work in existing construction or by failure to provide proper openings or recesses in new construction. June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 18 of 19 MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 23 00 00 B. Methods of cutting: Openings cut through concrete and masonry shall be made with masonry saws and/or core drills and at such locations acceptable to the Architect/Engineer. Impact-type equipment shall not be used except where specifically acceptable to the Architect/Engineer. Openings in precast concrete slabs for pipes,conduits,outlet boxes,etc.,shall be core drilled to exact size. C. Restoration: All openings shall be restored to "as-new" condition under the appropriate Specification Section for the materials involved,and shall match remaining surrounding materials and/or finishes. D. Masonry: Where openings are cut through masonry walls, provide and install lintels or other structural supports to protect the remaining masonry. Adequate supports shall be provided during the cutting operation to prevent any damage to the masonry occasioned by the operation. All structural members, supports, etc., shall be of the proper size and shape, and shall be installed in a manner acceptable to the Architect/Engineer. E. Plaster: All mechanical work in areas containing plaster shall be completed prior to the application of the finish plaster coat. Cutting of finish plaster coat will not be permitted. F. Special Note: No cutting, boring,or excavating which will weaken the structure shall be undertaken. G. Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces necessary for mechanical installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of the trades involved. H. Repair cut surfaces to match adjacent surfaces. 3.10 GROUTING A. Install nonmetallic nonshrink grout for mechanical equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates,and anchors. Mix grout according to manufacturer's printed instructions. B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout. C. Provide forms for placement of grout,as required. D. Avoid air entrapment when placing grout. E. Place grout to completely fill equipment bases. F. Place grout on concrete bases to provide a smooth bearing surface for equipment. G. Place grout around anchors. H. Cure placed grout according to manufacturer's printed instructions. END OF SECTION June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 19 of 19 SECTION 23 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENE' A L 1.1 SUMMA''Y A. Section Includes: 1. Pipe hangers and supports. 2. Hanger rods. 3. Inserts. 4. Flashing. 5. ' Sleeves. 6. ' Mechanical sleeve seals. 7. Firestopping relating to HVAC work. 8. I Firestopping accessories. B. ReI:ted Sections: 1. Section 23 05 48-Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment: Product and execution requirements for vibration isolators. 1.2 REFER:NCES A. Am-rican Society of Mechanical Engineers: 1. ASME B31.1 -Power Piping. 2. I ASME B31.5-Refrigeration Piping. 3. ' ASME B31.9-Building Services Piping. B. AS M International: 1. ASTM El 19-Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 2. ASTM E814-Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through Penetration Fire Stops. 3. ASTM F708-Standard Practice for Design and Installation of Rigid Pipe Hangers. 4. ASTM E1966-Standard Test Method for Fire-Resistive Joint Systems. C. Amrican Welding Society: 1. AWS D1.1 -Structural Welding Code-Steel. D. FM Global: 1. FM-Approval Guide,A Guide to Equipment, Materials&Services Approved By Factory Mutual Research For Property Conservation. E. Ma.ufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry: 1. MSS SP 58-Pipe Hangers and Supports-Materials,Design and Manufacturer. 2. MSS SP 69-Pipe Hangers and Supports-Selection and Application. 3. MSS SP 89-Pipe Hangers and Supports-Fabrication and Installation Practices. F. Unaerwriters Laboratories Inc.: June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 1 of 10 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT SECTION 23 05 29 1. UL 263-Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 2. UL 723-Tests for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 3. UL 1479-Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops. 4. UL 2079-Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems. 5. UL-Fire Resistance Directory. G. Intertek Testing Services(Warnock Hersey Listed): 1. WH-Certification Listings. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Firestopping(Through-Penetration Protection System):Sealing or stuffing material or assembly placed in spaces between and penetrations through building materials to arrest movement of fire,smoke, heat,and hot gases through fire rated construction. 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Firestopping Materials: UL 263 to achieve fire ratings as noted on Drawings for adjacent construction, but not less than 1 hour fire rating. B. Firestop interruptions to fire rated assemblies, materials,and components. 1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Firestopping:Conform to UL for fire resistance ratings and surface burning characteristics. B. Firestopping: Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of materials used. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings:Indicate system layout with location including critical dimensions,sizes,and pipe hanger and support locations and detail of trapeze hangers. B. Product Data: 1. Hangers and Supports:Submit manufacturers catalog data including load capacity. 2. Firestopping:Submit data on product characteristics,performance and limitation criteria. C. Firestopping Schedule:Submit schedule of opening locations and sizes,penetrating items,and required listed design numbers to seal openings to maintain fire resistance rating of adjacent assembly. D. Design Data: Indicate load carrying capacity of trapeze, multiple pipe,and riser support hangers. Indicate calculations used to determine load carrying capacity of trapeze, multiple pipe,and riser support hangers. Submit sizing methods calculations sealed by a registered professional engineer. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: 1. Hangers and Supports:Submit special procedures and assembly of components. 2. Firestopping:Submit preparation and installation instructions. June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 2 of 10 HANGERS AND UPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT SECTION 23 05 29 F. Ma ufacturer's Certificate:Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements. G. En s ineering Judgements: For conditions not covered by UL or WH listed designs,submit judgements by lice sed professional engineer suitable for presentation to authority having jurisdiction for acceptance as meting code fire protection requirements. 1.7 QUALI ASSURANCE A. Thr.ugh Penetration Firestopping of Fire Rated Assemblies: UL 1479 or ASTM E814 with 0.10 inch water ga.e minimum positive pressure differential to achieve fire F-Ratings and temperature T-Ratings as indi .ted on Drawings,but not less than 1-hour. 1. Wall Penetrations: Fire F-Ratings as indicated on Drawings, but not less than 1-hour. 2. Floor and Roof Penetrations: Fire F-Ratings and temperature 1-Ratings as indicated on Drawings, but not less than 1-hour. a. Floor Penetrations Within Wall Cavities:1-Rating is not required. B. Thrpugh Penetration Firestopping of Non-Fire Rated Floor and Roof Assemblies: Materials to resist free pasisage of flame and products of combustion. 1. Noncombustible Penetrating Items: Noncombustible materials for penetrating items connecting maximum of three stories. 2. Penetrating Items: Materials approved by authorities having jurisdiction for penetrating items connecting maximum of two stories. C. Fir: Resistant Joints in Fire Rated Floor, Roof, and Wall Assemblies:ASTM E1966 or UL 2079 to achieve fire resistant rating as indicated on Drawings for assembly in which joint is installed. D. Fir: Resistant Joints Between Floor Slabs and Exterior Walls:ASTM E119 with 0.10 inch water gage mi imum positive pressure differential to achieve fire resistant rating as indicated on Drawings for floor as -mbly. E. Su ace Burning Characteristics: Maximum 25/50 flame spread/smoke developed index when tested in acordance with ASTM E84. F. Pe orm Work in accordance with AWS D1.1 for welding hanger and support attachments to building str cture. G. Pe arm Work in accordance with State of Texas standard. H. Ma ntain one copy of document on site. 1.8 QUALIFI, ATIONS A. Ma ufacturer:Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section with minimum three ye.rs documented experience. B. Ins aller:Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum 3 years experience apiroved by manufacturer. June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 3 of 10 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT SECTION 23 05 29 1.9 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification. B. Protect from weather and construction traffic,dirt,water,chemical,and damage, by storing in original packaging. 1.10 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not apply firestopping materials when temperature of substrate material and ambient air is below 60 degrees F. B. Maintain this minimum temperature before,during,and for minimum 3 days after installation of firestopping materials. C. Provide ventilation in areas to receive solvent cured materials. 1.11 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. 1.12 WARRANTY A. Furnish five year manufacturer warranty for pipe hangers and supports. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Manufacturers: 1. Cooper B-Line 2. Creative Systems Inc. Model. 3. Flex-Weld, Inc. B. Furnish materials in accordance with State of Texas standards. C. Refrigerant Piping: 1. Conform to ASME B31.5. 2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 inch: Malleable iron Carbon steel,adjustable swivel,split ring. 3. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 inches and Larger:Carbon steel,adjustable,clevis. 4. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers:Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods. 5. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 3 inches and Smaller:Cast iron hook. 6. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 inches and Larger:Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp. 7. Vertical Support:Steel riser clamp. 8. Floor Support:Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple,floor flange,and concrete pier or steel support. 9. Copper Pipe Support: Copper-plated carbon-steel ring. June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 4 of 10 HANGERS AND UPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT SECTION 23 05 29 2.2 ACCES'ORIES A. Ha ger Rods:Mild steel threaded both ends,threaded on one end,or continuous threaded. 2.3 lNSERT'• A. Ins-rts: Malleable iron case of galvanized steel shell and expander plug for threaded connection with lateral adj I stment,top slot for reinforcing rods,lugs for attaching to forms;size inserts to suit threaded hanger rod.. 2.4 FLASHI 'G A. Me al Flashing:26 gage thick galvanized steel. B. Me al Counterllashing:22 gage thick galvanized steel. C. Le.d Flashing: 1. Waterproofing:5 lb/sq.ft sheet lead. 2. Soundproofing: 1 lb/sq.ft sheet lead. D. Fle ible Flashing:47 mil thick sheet butyl;compatible with roofing. E. Ca's:Steel,22 gage minimum; 16 gage at fire resistant elements. 2.5 EQUIP TENT CURBS A. Fairication:Welded 18 gage galvanized steel shell and base, mitered 3 inch cant,variable step to match roo insulation, 1-1/2 inch thick insulation,factory installed wood nailer. 2.6 SLEEVE: A. Sle-ves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Floors: 18 gage thick galvanized steel. B. Sle-ves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Beams,Walls, Footings,and Potentially Wet Floors:Steel pipe or 18 eage thick galvanized steel. C. Sle-ves for Round Ductwork:Galvanized steel. D. Sle-ves for Rectangular Ductwork: Galvanized steel or wood. E. Se.;lant:Acrylic; refer to Section 07 90 00. 2.7 MECHA ICAL SLEEVE SEALS A. Maiufacturers: 1. Thunderline Link-Seal, Inc. 2. NMP Corporation Model. 3. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 5 of 10 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT SECTION 23 05 29 2.8 FORMED STEEL CHANNEL A. Manufacturers: 1. Allied Tube&Conduit Corp 2. B-Line Systems 3. Midland Ross Corporation, Electrical Products Division 4. Unistrut Corp. 2.9 FIRESTOPPING A. Manufacturers: 1. Dow Corning Corp. 2. Fire Trak Corp. 3. Hilti Corp.. 4. International Protective Coating Corp. 5. 3M fire Protection Products 6. Specified Technology, Inc. 2.10 FIRESTOPPING ACCESSORIES A. Primer:Type recommended by firestopping manufacturer for specific substrate surfaces and suitable for required fire ratings. B. Dam Material: Permanent: 1. Mineral fiberboard. 2. Mineral fiber matting. 3. Sheet metal. 4. Plywood or particle board. 5. Alumina silicate fire board. C. Installation Accessories: Provide clips,collars,fasteners,temporary stops or dams,and other devices required to position and retain materials in place. D. General: 1. Furnish UL listed products or products tested by independent testing laboratory. 2. Select products with rating not less than rating of wall or floor being penetrated. E. Non-Rated Surfaces: 1. Stamped steel,chrome plated,hinged,split ring escutcheons or floor plates or ceiling plates for covering openings in occupied areas where piping is exposed. 2. For exterior wall openings below grade,furnish mechanical sealing device to continuously fill annular space between piping and cored opening or water-stop type wall sleeve. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify openings are ready to receive sleeves. June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 6 of 10 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT SECTION 23 05 29 B. Verify openings are ready to receive firestopping. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate surfaces of dirt,dust,grease,oil, loose material,or other matter affecting bond of firestopping material. B. Re nove incompatible materials affecting bond. C. Ins all backing damming materials to arrest liquid material leakage. D. Ob ain permission from Architect/Engineer before using powder-actuated anchors. E. Do not drill or cut structural members. 3.3 INSTAL ATION-INSERTS A. Ins all inserts for placement in concrete forms. B. Ins all inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete be.ms. C. Pr. ide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe 4 inches and larger. D. Wh*re concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface. E. Wh re inserts are omitted,drill through concrete slab from below and provide through-bolt with recessed sq are steel plate and nut above flush with top of recessed into and grouted flush with slab. 3.4 INSTAL ATION-PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Ins all in accordance with ASME B31.1. B. Su port horizontal piping as scheduled. C. Insiall hangers with minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work. D. Pla e hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow. E. Us- hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. F. Support vertical piping at every other floor. G. Where piping is installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple pipe or trapeze hangers. H. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping. I. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping sheet lead packing between hanger or support and piping. June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 7 of 10 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT SECTION 23 05 29 J. Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe. K. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Refer to Section 09 90 00. Hangers and supports located in crawl spaces,pipe shafts,and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed. L. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation. 3.5 INSTALLATION-FLASHING A. Provide flexible flashing and metal Counterfiashing where piping and ductwork penetrate weather or waterproofed walls,floors,and roofs. B. Provide acoustical lead flashing around ducts and pipes penetrating equipment rooms for sound control. C. Provide curbs for roof installations 14 inches minimum high above roofing surface.Flash and counter-flash with sheet metal;seal watertight.Attach Counterflashing to equipment and lap base flashing on roof curbs. Flatten and solder joints. D. Adjust storm collars tight to pipe with bolts;caulk around top edge. Use storm collars above roof jacks. Screw vertical flange section to face of curb. 3.6 INSTALLATION-SLEEVES A. Exterior watertight entries:Seal with mechanical sleeve seals. B. Set sleeves in position in forms. Provide reinforcing around sleeves. C. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction. Provide for continuous insulation wrapping. D. Extend sleeves through floors 1 inch above finished floor level.Caulk sleeves. E. Where piping or ductwork penetrates floor,ceiling,or wall,close off space between pipe or duct and adjacent work with stuffing firestopping insulation and caulk airtight.Provide close fitting metal collar or escutcheon covers at both sides of penetration. F. Install chrome plated steel plastic stainless steel escutcheons at finished surfaces. 3.7 INSTALLATION-FIRESTOPPING A. Install material at fire rated construction perimeters and openings containing penetrating sleeves,piping, ductwork,and other items,requiring firestopping. B. Apply primer where recommended by manufacturer for type of firestopping material and substrate involved, and as required for compliance with required fire ratings. C. Apply firestopping material in sufficient thickness to achieve required fire and smoke rating,to uniform density and texture. June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 8 of 10 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT SECTION 23 05 29 D. Compress fibered material to maximum 40 percent of its uncompressed size. E. Remove dam material after firestopping material has cured.Dam material to remain. F. Fire Rated Surface: 1. Seal opening at floor,wall, partition,ceiling,and roof as follows: a. Install sleeve through opening and extending beyond minimum of 1 inch on both sides of building element. b. Size sleeve allowing minimum of 1 inch void between sleeve and building element. c. Pack void with backing material. d. Seal ends of sleeve with UL listed fire resistive silicone compound to meet fire rating of structure penetrated. 2. Where cable tray, bus,cable bus,conduit,wireway,trough,and penetrates fire rated surface,install firestopping product in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. G. Non-Rated Surfaces: 1. Seal opening through non-fire rated wall, partition floor,ceiling,and roof opening as follows: a. Install sleeve through opening and extending beyond minimum of 1 inch on both sides of building element. b. Size sleeve allowing minimum of 1 inch void between sleeve and building element. c. Install type of firestopping material recommended by manufacturer. 2. Install escutcheons floor plates or ceiling plates where conduit, penetrates non-fire rated surfaces in occupied spaces.Occupied spaces include rooms with finished ceilings and where penetration occurs below finished ceiling. 3. Exterior wall openings below grade:Assemble rubber links of mechanical sealing device to size of piping and tighten in place,in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 4. Interior partitions:Seal pipe penetrations at clean rooms, laboratories,hospital spaces,computer rooms,telecommunication rooms data rooms and.Apply sealant to both sides of penetration to completely fill annular space between sleeve and conduit. 3.8 FIELD Q UALITY CONTROL A. Ins ect installed firestopping for compliance with specifications and submitted schedule. 3.9 CLEANI r. G A. Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials. 3.10 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation. 3.11 SCHED LES A. Copper and Steel Pipe Hanger Spacing: June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 9 of 10 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT SECTION 23 05 29 COPPER STEEL PIPE COPPER STEEL PIPE PIPE SIZE TUBING MAXIMUM TUBING HANGER ROD Inches MAXIMUM HANGER HANGER ROD DIAMETER HANGER SPACING DIAMETER Inches SPACING Feet Inches Feet 1/2 5 7 3/8 3/8 3/4 5 7 3/8 3/8 1 6 7 3/8 3/8 1-1/4 7 7 3/8 3/8 1-1/2 8 9 3/8 3/8 2 8 10 3/8 3/8 - • 2-1/2(Note2) 9 11 1/2 1/2 3 10 12 1/2 1/2 4 12 14 1/2 5/8 5 13 16 1/2 5/8 . - 6 14 17 5/8 3/4 . • . 8 16 19 3/4 3/4 B. Plastic and Ductile Iron Pipe Hanger Spacing: MAXIMUM HANGER ROD PIPE MATERIAL HANGER SPACING DIAMETER Feet Inches ABS(All sizes) 4 3/8 FRP(All Sizes) 4 3/8 PVC(All Sizes) 4 3/8 C. Note 1: Refer to manufacturer's recommendations for grooved end piping systems. D. Note 2:20 feet maximum spacing,minimum of one hanger for each pipe section close to joint behind bell. Provide hanger at each change of direction and each branch connection. For pipe sizes 6 inches and smaller,subjected to loadings other than weight of pipe and contents, limit span to maximum spacing for water service steel pipe. END OF SECTION June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 10 of 10 SECTION 23 05 53 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Nam plates. B. Tag ,. C. Pipe Markers. 1.2 REFERE ICE STANDARDS A. ASM A13.1 -Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems;The American Society of Mechanical Engi i eers; 1996(Reaffirmed 2002). 1.3 SUBMITTA LS A. Prod ct Data: Provide manufacturers catalog literature for each product required. PART 2 PROD CTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Brady Corporation: www.bradycorp.com. B. Champion America, Inc: www.Champion-America.com. C. Seton Identification Products: www.seton.com/aec. 2.2 NAMEPLATES A. Desdription: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved letters. 1. Letter Color: White. 2. Letter Height: 1/4 inch. 3. Background Color: Black. 2.3 TAGS A. Plas c Tags: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting background color Tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter. B. Meta Tags: Brass with stamped letters;tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter with smooth edges. 2.4 DUCT LA ELS A. Stencils: Prepared with letter sizes according to ASME A13.1 for piping; minimum letter height of 1-1/4 inch4s for ducts;and minimum letter height of 3/4 inch for access panel and door labels,equipment labeI ,,and similar operational instructions. June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 1 of 2 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION SECTION 23 05 53 2.5 PIPE MARKERS A. Color: Conform to ASME A13.1. B. Plastic Pipe Markers: Factory fabricated,flexible,semi-rigid plastic, preformed to fit around pipe or pipe covering; minimum information indicating flow direction arrow and identification of fluid being conveyed. C. Underground Plastic Pipe Markers: Bright colored continuously panted plastic ribbon tape,minimum 6 inches wide by 4 mil thick, manufactured for direct burial service. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials. B. Prepare surfaces for stencil painting. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install plastic nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners,or adhesive. Apply with sufficient adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer. B. Install tags with corrosion resistant chain. C. Install plastic pipe markers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Install plastic tape pipe markers complete around pipe in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. E. Install underground plastic pipe markers 6 to 8 inches below finished grade,directly above buried pipe. F. Identify air handling units,pumps,heat transfer equipment,tanks,and water treatment devices with plastic nameplates. Small devices,such as in-line pumps,may be identified with tags. G. Identify control panels and major control components outside panels with plastic nameplates. H. Tag automatic controls, instruments,and relays. Key to control schematic. I. Identify piping,concealed or exposed,with plastic pipe markers. Use tags on piping 3/4 inch diameter and smaller. Identify service,flow direction,and pressure. Install in clear view and align with axis of piping. Locate identification not to exceed 20 feet on straight runs including risers and drops,adjacent to each valve and tee,at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure,and at each obstruction. END OF SECTION June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 2 of 2 SECTION 23 05 93 TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING FOR HVAC PART 1 GENE L 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Testi g, adjustment,and balancing of air systems as scheduled on drawings. B. Testi g,adjustment,and balancing of hydronic systems as scheduled on drawings. C. Meas rement of final operating condition of HVAC systems. 1.02 REFEREI10ES A. AABC MN-I -AABC National Standards for Total System Balance;Associated Air Balance Council;2002. B. ASHRAE Std 111 -Practices for Measurement, Testing,Adjusting and Balancing of Building Heating, Ventilation,Air-Conditioning,and Refrigeration Systems;American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 1988(R 1997). C. NEBB(TAB)-Procedural Standards for Testing Adjusting Balancing of Environmental Systems; National Environmental Balancing Bureau;2005,Seventh Edition. D. SMACNA(TAB)-HVAC Systems Testing,Adjusting,and Balancing;Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contr.ctors'National Association;2002. 1.03 SUBMITT A LS A. Quali ications: Submit name of adjusting and balancing agency and TAB supervisor for approval within 30 days after award of Contract. B. TAB 'Ian: Submit a written plan indicating the testing,adjusting,and balancing standard to be followed and U e specific approach for each system and component. 1. submit six weeks prior to starting the testing,adjusting,and balancing work. 2. nclude certification that the plan developer has reviewed the contract documents,the equipment and .ystems,and the control system with the project engineer and other installers to sufficiently nderstand the design intent for each system. 3. include at least the following in the plan: a. List of all air flow,water flow,sound level,system capacity and efficiency measurements to be performed and a description of specific test procedures, parameters,formulas to be used. b. Copy of field checkout sheets and logs to be used, listing each piece of equipment to be tested, adjusted and balanced with the data cells to be gathered for each. c. Identification and types of measurement instruments to be used and their most recent calibration date. d. Discussion of what notations and markings will be made on the duct and piping drawings during the process. e. Final test report forms to be used. f. Expected problems and solutions,etc. g. Details of how TOTAL flow will be determined;for example: 1) Air: Sum of terminal flows via control system calibrated readings or via hood readings of June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 1 of 5 TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING FOR HVAC SECTION 23 05 93 all terminals,supply(SA)and return air(RA)pitot traverse,SA or RA flow stations. 2) Water: Pump curves,circuit setter,flow station, ultrasonic,etc. h. Procedures for field technician logs of discrepancies,deficient or uncompleted work by others, contract interpretation requests and lists of completed tests(scope and frequency). i. Procedures for formal progress reports, including scope and frequency. j. Procedures for formal deficiency reports, including scope,frequency and distribution. C. Field Logs: Submit at least once a week to Construction Manager. D. Control System Coordination Reports: Communicate in writing to the controls installer all setpoint and parameter changes made or problems and discrepancies identified during TAB that affect,or could affect, the control system setup and operation. E. Progress Reports. F. Final Report: Indicate deficiencies in systems that would prevent proper testing,adjusting,and balancing of systems and equipment to achieve specified performance. 1. Submit to the Construction Manager within two weeks after completion of testing,adjusting,and balancing. 2. Revise TAB plan to reflect actual procedures and submit as part of final report. 3. Submit draft copies of report for review prior to final acceptance of Project. Provide final copies for Engineer and for inclusion in operating and maintenance manuals. 4. Provide reports in soft cover,letter size,3-ring binder manuals,complete with index page and indexing tabs,with cover identification at front and side. Include set of reduced drawings with air outlets and equipment identified to correspond with data sheets,and indicating thermostat locations. 5. Include actual instrument list,with manufacturer name,serial number,and date of calibration. 6. Form of Test Reports: Where the TAB standard being followed recommends a report format use that;otherwise,follow ASHRAE Std 111. 7. Units of Measure: Report data in I-P(inch-pound)units only. 8. Include the following on the title page of each report: a. Name of Testing,Adjusting,and Balancing Agency. b. Address of Testing,Adjusting,and Balancing Agency. c. Telephone number of Testing,Adjusting,and Balancing Agency. d. Project name. e. Project location. f. Project Engineer. g. Project altitude. h. Report date. G. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of balancing valves and rough setting. PART 2 PRODUCTS-NOT USED June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 2 of 5 TESTING,ADJU TING,AND BALANCING FOR HVAC SECTION 23 05 93 PART 3 EXEC TION 3.01 GENERAl REQUIREMENTS A. Perfoi m total system balance in accordance with one of the following: 1. "BC MN-1,AABC National Standards for Total System Balance. 2. I EBB Procedural Standards for Testing Adjusting Balancing of Environmental Systems. 3. SMACNA HVAC Systems Testing,Adjusting,and Balancing. B. Begin work after completion of systems to be tested,adjusted,or balanced and complete work prior to Substantial Completion of the project. C. TAB Agency Qualifications: 1. Company specializing in the testing,adjusting,and balancing of systems specified in this section. 2. Having minimum of three years documented experience. 3. Certified by one of the following: a. AABC,Associated Air Balance Council: www.aabchq.com; upon completion submit AABC National Performance Guaranty. b. NEBB, National Environmental Balancing Bureau: www.nebb.org. c. TABB,The Testing,Adjusting,and Balancing Bureau of National Energy Management Institute: www.tabbcertified.org. D. TAB Supervisor and Technician Qualifications: Certified by same organization as TAB agency. 3.02 EXAMINATION A. Verify that systems are complete and operable before commencing work. Ensure the following conditions: 1. Systems are started and operating in a safe and normal condition. 2. Temperature control systems are installed complete and operable. 3. Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment. 4. Final filters are clean and in place. If required,install temporary media in addition to final filters. 5. Duct systems are clean of debris. 6. Fans are rotating correctly. 7. Fire and volume dampers are in place and open. 8. Air coil fins are cleaned and combed. 9. Access doors are closed and duct end caps are in place. 10. Air outlets are installed and connected. 11. Duct system leakage is minimized. 12. Service and balance valves are open. B. Submit field reports. Report defects and deficiencies that will or could prevent proper system balance. C. Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.03 PREPARATION June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 3 of 5 TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING FOR HVAC SECTION 23 05 93 A. Hold a pre-balancing meeting prior to starting TAB work. 1. Require attendance by all installers whose work will be tested,adjusted,or balanced. B. Provide instruments required for testing,adjusting,and balancing operations. 3.04 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Air Handling Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 5 percent of design for supply systems and plus or minus 10 percent of design for return and exhaust systems. B. Air Outlets and Inlets: Adjust total to within plus 10 percent and minus 5 percent of design to space. Adjust outlets and inlets in space to within plus or minus 10 percent of design. 3.05 RECORDING AND ADJUSTING A. Field Logs: Maintain written logs including: 1. Running log of events and issues. 2. Discrepancies,deficient or uncompleted work by others. 3. Contract interpretation requests. 4. Lists of completed tests. B. Ensure recorded data represents actual measured or observed conditions. C. Permanently mark settings of valves,dampers,and other adjustment devices allowing settings to be restored. Set and lock memory stops. D. Mark on the drawings the locations where traverse and other critical measurements were taken and cross reference the location in the final report. E. After adjustment,take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted or that such disruption has been rectified. F. Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards,closing access doors,closing doors to electrical switch boxes,and restoring thermostats to specified settings. 3.06 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE A. Adjust air handling and distribution systems to provide required or design supply,return,and exhaust air quantities. B. Make air quantity measurements in ducts by Pitot tube traverse of entire cross sectional area of duct. C. Vary total system air quantities by adjustment of fan speeds. Provide drive changes required. Vary branch air quantities by damper regulation. D. Provide system schematic with required and actual air quantities recorded at each outlet or inlet. E. Measure static air pressure conditions on air supply units, including filter and coil pressure drops,and total pressure across the fan. Make allowances for 50 percent loading of filters. F. Adjust outside air automatic dampers,outside air,return air,and exhaust dampers for design conditions. G. Check multi-zone units for motorized damper leakage. Adjust air quantities with mixing dampers set first for cooling,then heating,then modulating. 3.08 MINIMUM DATA TO BE REPORTED B. Air Moving Equipment: June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 4 of 5 TESTING,ADJU',TING,AND BALANCING FOR HVAC SECTION 23 05 93 1. ocation 2. I anufacturer 3. I odel number 4. erial number 5. rrangement/Class/Discharge 6. �it flow,specified and actual 7. Return air flow,specified and actual 8. Outside air flow,specified and actual 9. otal static pressure(total external),specified and actual 10. Inlet pressure 11. Discharge pressure 12. heave Make/Size/Bore 13. Number of Belts/Make/Size 14. Fan RPM E. Air dvices: 1. Identification/location 2. Design air flow 3. ctual air flow 4. upply air temperature 5. Design supply air temperature END OF SECTION June 02,2021 ', KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 5 of 5 SECTION 230719 MECHANICAL INSULATION PART GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Duct insulation. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM C 518-Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus;2004. B. ASTM C 553-Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications;2002. C. ASTM C 1071 -Standard Specification for Fibrous Glass Duct Lining Insulation (Thermal and Sound Absorbing Material);2005. D. ASTM E 84-Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;2007. E. ASTM E 96/E 96M-Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials;2005. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide product description,thermal characteristics, list of materials and thickness for each service, and locations. B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions:Submit manufacturers published literature indicating proper installation procedures. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products of the type specified in this section with not less than three years of documented experience. B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified in this section, with minimum three years of experience and approved by manufacturer. 1.05 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging,labeled with manufacturer's identification, including product density and thickness. B. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic,dirt,water,chemical,and mechanical damage,by storing in original wrapping. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adhesives, mastics,and insulation cements. B. Maintain temperature during and after installation for minimum period of 24 hours. June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 1 of 4 MECHANICAL INSULATION SECTION 2307 19 PART 2 PRODJCTS 2.01 REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL PRODUCTS OF THIS SECTION A. Surfa e Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25/50,maximum,when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84, NFPA 255,or UL 723. 2.02 DUCT INSULATION,GLASS FIBER, FLEXIBLE A. Insulation: ASTM C 553;flexible, noncombustible blanket. 1. 'K'value: 0.36 at 75 degrees F,when tested in accordance with ASTM C 518. 2. Maximum Service Temperature: 450 degrees F. 3. Maximum Water Vapor Sorption: 5.0 percent by weight. B. Vapor Barrier Jacket: 1. Kraft paper with glass fiber yam and bonded to aluminized film. 2. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.029 ng/Pa s m(0.02 perm inch),when tested in accordance with ASTM E 961E 96M. 3. Secure and seal joints and seams with fiberglass mesh and vapor seal mastic only. 2.03 PIPE IN ULATION A. TYKE CF:ASTM C534,Type I,flexible,closed cell elastomeric insulation,tubular. 1. Thermal Conductivity:0.27 at 75 degrees F. 2. Operating Temperature Range: Range: Minus 70 to 180 degrees F. 2.04 PIPE INSULATION JACKETS A. Vapor Retarder Jacket: 1. ASTM C921,white Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn,bonded to aluminized film. 2. Water Vapor Permeance:ASTM E96/E96M;0.02 perms. B. PVC Plastic Pipe Jacket: 1. Product Description:ASTM D1785,One piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material,off- white color. 2. Thickness: 10 mil. 3. Connections: Brush on welding adhesive. C. Aluminum Pipe Jacket: 1. ASTM B209. 2. Thickness:0.016 inch thick sheet. 3. Finish:Smooth. 4. Joining: Longitudinal slip joints and 2 inch laps. 5. Fittings:0.016 inch thick die shaped fitting covers with factory attached protective liner. 6. Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8 inch wide;0.015 inch thick aluminum. 2.05 PIPE INSULATION ACCESSORIES A. Vapor Retarder Lap Adhesive:Compatible with insulation. B. Covering Adhesive Mastic:Compatible with insulation. C. Piping 1-1/2 inches diameter and smaller:Galvanized steel insulation protection shield. MSS SP-69, Type 40.Length: Based on pipe size and insulation thickness. June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 2 of 4 MECHANICAL INSULATION SECTION 23 07 19 D. Piping 2 inches diameter and larger:Wood insulation saddle,hard maple. Inserts length: not less than 6 inches long, matching thickness and contour of adjoining insulation. E. Closed Cell Elastomeric Insulation Pipe Hanger: Polyurethane insert with aluminum jacket single piece construction with self-adhesive closure.Thickness to match pipe insulation. F. Insulating Cement:ASTM C195; hydraulic setting on mineral wool. G. Adhesives:Compatible with insulation. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that ducts have been tested before applying insulation materials. B. Verify that surfaces are clean,foreign material removed,and dry. 3.02 INSTALLATION-DUCTWORK A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install in accordance with NAIMA National Insulation Standards. C. Insulated ducts conveying air below ambient temperature: 1. Provide insulation with vapor barrier jackets. 2. Finish with tape and vapor barrier jacket. 3. Continue insulation through walls,sleeves,hangers,and other duct penetrations. 4. Insulate entire system including fittings,joints,flanges,fire dampers,flexible connections,and expansion joints. 3.03 INSTALLATION-PIPING A. Piping Exposed to View in Finished Spaces: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations. B. Continue insulation through penetrations of building assemblies or portions of assemblies having fire resistance rating of one hour or less.Provide intumescent firestopping when continuing insulation through assembly. Finish at supports,protrusions,and interruptions. C. Piping Systems Conveying Fluids Below Ambient Temperature: 1. Insulate entire system including fittings,valves,unions,flanges,strainers,flexible connections, and expansion joints. 2. Furnish factory-applied or field-applied vapor retarder jackets.Secure factory-applied jackets with pressure sensitive adhesive self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips.Secure field-applied jackets with outward clinch expanding staples and seal staple penetrations with vapor retarder mastic. 3. Insulate fittings,joints,and valves with molded insulation of like material and thickness as adjacent pipe. Finish with glass cloth and vapor retarder adhesive or PVC fitting covers. D. Inserts and Shields: 1. Install insert between support shield and piping and under finish jacket. a. Insert Configuration: Minimum 2 inches longer than shield,of thickness and contour matching adjoining insulation;may be factory fabricated. June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 3 of 4 MECHANICAL INSULATION SECTION 2307 19 b. Insert Material: Compression resistant insulating material suitable for planned temperature range and service.Foamglas blocks(HLB 1600), phenolic foam segments, polyurethane segments,or polyisocyanurate segments are acceptable for most pipe sizes. 2. � Piping Supported by Roller Type Pipe Hangers: Install galvanized steel shield between roller and inserts. 3. ' Shields shall be made of galvanized iron,or black iron painted on both sides with two coats of aluminum paint.Required metal shield sizes are as follows: Nominal IPS Metal Thickness Lengths of Shield up thru 2" 14 gauge 12" thru 6" 12 gauge 16" and above 10 gauge 20" 4. Refer to hangers and supports specification for more information. E. Ins lation Terminating Points: 1. Coil Branch Piping 1 inch and Smaller:Terminate hot water piping at union upstream of the coil control valve. 2. Chilled Water Coil Branch Piping: Insulate chilled water piping and associated components up to coil connection. 3. Condensate Piping: Insulate entire piping system and components to prevent condensation. F. Clo.ed Cell Elastomeric Insulation: 1. Push insulation on to piping. 2. Miter joints at elbows. 3. Seal seams and butt joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 4. When application requires multiple layers,apply with joints staggered. 5. Insulate filings and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjacent pipe. G. Ja•ket Requirements 1. Pipe Exposed in Mechanical Equipment Rooms(less than 8 feet above finished floor): Finish with PVC jacket and fitting covers. 2. Pipe Concealed above ceiling: Finish with ASJ and PVC fitting covers. 3. Pipe Exposed: Finish with PVC jacket and fitting covers. 4. Exterior Piping: Finish with AL jacket and fitting covers. 3.04 INSULAT ON SCHEDULE A. Refe to schedule on drawings. END OF SECTION June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 4 of 4 SECTION 23 31 00 HVAC DUCTWORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal ductwork. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM A 36/A 36M-Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel;2005. B. ASTM A 653/A 653M-Standard Specification for Steel Sheet,Zinc-Coated(Galvanized)or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated(Galvannealed)by the Hot-Dip Process;2006a. C. NFPA 90A-Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems;National Fire Protection Association;2002. D. SMACNA(DCS)-HVAC Duct Construction Standards-Metal and Flexible;Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors'National Association;2005. 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. No variation of duct configuration or sizes permitted except by written permission. Size round ducts installed in place of rectangular ducts in accordance with ASHRAE table of equivalent rectangular and round ducts. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide data for duct materials. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products specified in this section,with minimum three years of documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified in this section,with minimum three years of documented experience. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Galvanized Steel Ducts: Hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet,ASTM A 653/A 653M FS Type B,with G601Z180 coating. B. Hanger Rod: ASTM A 36/A 36M;steel,galvanized;threaded both ends,threaded one end,or continuously threaded. 2.02 DUCTWORK FABRICATION A. Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards-Metal and Flexible,and as indicated. Provide duct material,gages,reinforcing,and sealing for operating pressures indicated. B. Construct T's, bends,and elbows with radius of not less than 1-1/2 times width of duct on centerline. Where not possible and where rectangular elbows must be used, provide air foil turning vanes. Where acoustical lining is indicated,provide turning vanes of perforated metal with glass fiber insulation. June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 1 of 2 HVACDUCTWOK SECTION 23 31 00 C. lncre se duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible; maximum 30 degr:es divergence upstream of equipment and 45 degrees convergence downstream. D. Fabri ate continuously welded round and oval duct fittings two gages heavier than duct gages indicated in SMAI NA Standard. Joints shall be minimum 4 inch cemented slip joint, brazed or electric welded. Prime coat elded joints. E. Provile standard 45 degree lateral wye takeoffs unless otherwise indicated where 90 degree conical tee connctions may be used. F. Wher* ducts are connected to exterior wall louvers and duct outlet is smaller than louver frame, provide blank out panels sealing louver area around duct. Use same material as duct,painted black on exterior side; .eal to louver frame and duct. 2.03 MANUFk,TURED METAL DUCTWORK AND FITTINGS A. Man acture in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards-Metal and Flexible,and as in.icated. Provide duct material,gages, reinforcing,and sealing for operating pressures indicated. B. TranSverse Duct Connection System: SMACNA"E"rated rigidly class connection,interlocking angle and duct edge connection system with sealant,gasket, cleats,and corner clips. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Duct sizes indicated are inside clear dimensions. For lined ducts, maintain sizes inside lining. C. Install and seal metal and flexible ducts in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards -Metal and Flexible. D. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and maintenance activities. E. Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports. F. During construction provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system. G. At exterior wall louvers,seal duct to louver frame. END OF SECTION June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 2 of 2 SECTION 23 37 00 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS PART I GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Diffusers. B. Registers/grilles. C. Louvers._ 1.02 REFERENCES A. AMCA 500-L-Laboratory Methods of Testing Louvers for Rating;Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.;2007. B. ASHRAE Std 70-Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets;American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers, Inc.;2006. C. SMACNA(DCS)-HVAC Duct Construction Standards-Metal and Flexible;Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors'National Association;2005. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide data for equipment required for this project. Review outlets and inlets as to size, finish,and type of mounting prior to submission. Submit schedule of outlets and inlets showing type,size, location,application,and noise level. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Test and rate air outlet and inlet performance in accordance with ASHRAE Std 70. B. Test and rate louver performance in accordance with AMCA 500-L. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products specified in this section,with minimum three years of documented experience. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Titus: www.titus-hvac.com. B. Price Industries: www.price-hvac.com. C. Krueger: wwv.krueger-hvac.com. 2.02 RECTANGULAR CEILING DIFFUSERS A. Basis of Design: Price,SPD (or equal) B. Type: Square,stamped,multi-core diffuser to discharge air in four way and two way pattern. C. Frame: Inverted T-bar type. In plaster ceilings,provide plaster frame and ceiling frame. C. Fabrication: Steel with baked enamel white finish. 2.03 PERFORATED FACE CEILING EXHAUST AND RETURN DIFFUSERS June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 1 of 2 AIR OUTLETS A DINLETS SECTION 23 37 00 A. Basisof Design: Price,Series 80(or equal) B. Type: ducted egg-crate return grill. C. Fram : Surface mount type. In plaster ceilings, provide plaster frame and ceiling frame. D. Fabric ation: Steel with steel frame and baked enamel off-white finish. 2.04 LOUVER', A. Type: 4 inch deep with blades on 45 degree slope with center baffle and return bend, heavy channel fram:, 1/2 inch square mesh screen over exhaust and 1/2 inch square mesh screen over intake. B. Fabri,ation: 16 gage thick galvanized steel welded assembly,with factory prime coat finish,color to be selec ed. C. Moun ing: Furnish with exterior flat flange for installation. PART 3 EXEC TION 3.01 INSTALL a TION A. Instal in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Chec location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform with archi l'-ctural features,symmetry,and lighting arrangement. C. Instal diffusers to ductwork with air tight connection. D. Proviie balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers,and grilles and registers,despite whether dam lers are specified as part of the diffuser,or grille and register assembly. E. Paint ductwork visible behind air outlets and inlets matte black. Refer to Section 09 90 00. 3.02 SCHEDU ES A. Refe j to Drawings. END OF SECTION June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 2 of 2 SECTION 23 81 26 SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Air handling unit. 2. Condensing unit. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute: 1. ARI 270-Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment. 2. ARI 340/360-Commercial and Industrial Unitary Air-Conditioning and Heat Pump Equipment. 3. ARI 365-Commercial and Industrial Unitary Air-Conditioning Condensing Units. B. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers: 1. ASHRAE 52.2—Method of Testing General Ventilation Air-Cleaning Devices for Removal Efficiency by Particle Size. 2. ASHRAE 62.1 —Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality. 3. ASHRAE 90.1 -Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings. C. ASTM International: 1. ASTM B117-Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray(Fog)Apparatus. D. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1. NEMA MG 1 -Motors and Generators. E. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 90A-Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Energy Efficiency Ratio(EER)-Ratio of net cooling capacity in Btu/h to total rate of electric input in watts under designated operating conditions. B. Integrated Part-Load Value(IPLV):Single-number figure of merit based on part-load EER,COP,or kW/ton expressing part-load efficiency for air-conditioning and heat pump equipment on basis of weighted operation at various load capacities for the equipment. C. Integrated Energy Efficiency Ratio(IEER)—A measure that expresses cooling part-load EER efficiency for commercial unitary air-conditioning and heat pump equipment on the basis of weighted operation at various load capacities.As of January 1,2010 IEER replaced IPLV for all commercial unitary products rated above 65,000 Btu/h. June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 1 of 6 SPLIT-SYSTEM FAIR CONDITIONERS SECTION 23 81 26 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data:Submit data indicating: 1. Cooling and heating capacities. 2. Efficiencies. 3. Dimensions. 4. Weights. 5. Rough-in connections and connection requirements. 6. Duct connections. 7. Electrical requirements with electrical characteristics and connection requirements. 8. Controls. 9. Accessories. B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions:Submit assembly,support details,connection requirements,and include start-up instructions. C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify Products meet or exceed specified requirements. D. Mahufacturer's Field Reports:Submit start-up report for each unit. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents:Record actual locations of controls installed remotely from units. B. Operation and Maintenance Data:Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature,operating instructions, installation instructions,and maintenance and repair data. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Performance Requirements:Conform to minimum EER, IPLV,or IEER prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1 when tested in accordance with ARI 340/360 or ARI 365. B. Cooling Capacity: Rate in accordance with ARI 340/360 or ARI 365.Testing standard varies with equipment type. C. Sound Rating: Measure in accordance with ARI 270. D. Insulation and adhesives: Meet requirements of NFPA 90A. E. Perform Work in accordance with applicable local,state,and federal standards. 1.7 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer:Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Installer:Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years documented experience approved by manufacturer. June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 2 of 6 SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONERS SECTION 23 81 26 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Accept units and components on site in factory protective containers,with factory shipping skids and lifting lugs. Inspect for damage. B. Comply with manufacturer's installation instruction for rigging, unloading and transporting units. C. Protect units from weather and construction traffic by storing in dry, roofed location. 1.9 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of condensing units with[concrete pad][roof structure] . B. Coordinate installation of air handling units with building structure. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Furnish five year manufacturer's warranty for compressors. 1.11 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Furnish service and maintenance of equipment for one year from Date of Substantial Completion. Include maintenance items as shown in manufacturer's operating and maintenance data,including filter replacements,fan belt replacement,and controls checkout and adjustments. 1.12 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Furnish one set of fan belts and filters. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONING UNITS A. Manufacturers: 1. Carrier Corp.. 2. Lennox International. 3. American Standard. 4. The Trane Company. 5. York International. B. Product Description: Split system consisting of air handling unit and condensing unit including cabinet, evaporator fan,refrigerant cooling coil,compressor, refrigeration circuit,condenser,air filters,controls,air handling unit accessories,condensing unit accessories,and refrigeration specialties. June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 3 of 6 SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONERS SECTION 23 81 26 2.2 AIR HANDLING UNIT A. Configuration:As indicated on Drawings. B. Cabinet: 1. Panels:Constructed of galvanized steel with baked enamel finish.Access Panels: Located on both sides of unit. Furnish with duct collars on inlets and outlets. 2. Insulation: Factory applied to each surface to insulate entire cabinet.One inch thick aluminum foil faced glass fiber with edges protected from erosion. C. Evaporator Fan: Forward curved centrifugal type, resiliently mounted with adjustable belt drive and high effiiency motor complying with NEMA MGI,Type 1. Motor permanently lubricated with built-in thermal overload protection. D. Evaporator Coil:Constructed of copper tubes expanded onto aluminum fins. Factory leak tested under water. Removable, PVC construction,double-sloped drain pan with piping connections on both sides. Provide[float switch to disable fan]and/or[secondary drain pan]. E. Refrigeration System: [Single]refrigeration circuits controlled by factory installed thermal expansion valve. F. Air Filters: 1 inch thick pleated glass fiber disposable media in metal frames. Minimum MERV of 8 pre cribed by ASHRAE 62.1 when rated in accordance with ASHRAE 52.2. 2.3 CONDE SING UNIT A. General: Factory assembled and tested air cooled condensing units,consisting of casing,compressors, condensers,coils,condenser fans and motors,and unit controls. B. Unit Casings: Exposed casing surfaces constructed of galvanized steel with manufacturer's standard baked enamel finish. Designed for outdoor installation and complete with weather protection for components and cortrols,and complete with removable panels for required access to compressors,controls,condenser fans, motors,and drives. C. Compressor: Single refrigeration circuit with(4)scroll type compressors, resiliently mounted,with positive lubrication,and internal motor overload protection. D. Condenser Coil:Constructed of copper tubing mechanically bonded to aluminum fins,factory leak and pressure tested. E. Co trots: Furnish operating and safety controls including high and low pressure cutouts.Control transformer. Furnish magnetic contactors for compressor and condenser fan motors. F. Condenser Fans and Drives: Direct drive propeller fans statically and dynamically balanced.Wired to operate with compressor. Permanently lubricated ball bearing type motors with built-in thermal overload protection. Furnish high efficiency fan motors. June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 4 of 6 SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONERS SECTION 23 81 26 G. Condensing Unit Accessories: Furnish the following accessories: 1. Controls to provide low ambient cooling to 0 degrees F. 2. Time delay relay. 3. Anti-short cycle timer. 4. Disconnect switch. H. Refrigeration specialties: Furnish the following: 1. Charge of compressor oil. 2. Holding charge of refrigerant. 3. Replaceable core type filter drier. 4. Liquid line sight glass and moisture indicator. 5. Shut-off valves on suction and liquid piping. 6. Liquid line solenoid valve. 7. Charging valve. 8. Oil level sight glass. 9. Crankcase heater. 10. Pressure relief device. I. Refrigerant: Furnish charge of refrigerant. 2.4 CONTROLS A. Furnish interface to Direct Digital Control System protocol as specified in Project Documents. 2.5 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS AND COMPONENTS A. Electrical Characteristics:As indicated in Drawings. B. Disconnect Switch: Factory mounted, non-fused type,accessible from outside unit,with power lockout capability.Sizes and NEMA ratings indicated on Drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify concrete pad for condensing unit is ready for unit installation. 3.2 INSTALLATION-AIR HANDLING UNIT A. Install floor mounted unit on 4"base rail with spring isolators. B. Connect air handling units to supply and return ductwork with flexible connections. C. Install condensate piping with trap and route from drain pan to location indicated on Drawings. D. Install components furnished loose for field mounting. June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 5 of 6 SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONERS SECTION 23 81 26 E. Install connection to electrical power wiring. 3.3 INSTALLATION-CONDENSING UNIT A. Install condensing units on vibration isolators. B. Install units on concrete foundations. C. Install refrigerant piping from unit to condensing unit. Install refrigerant specialties furnished with unit. D. Evacuate refrigerant piping and install initial charge of refrigerant. E. Install electrical devices furnished loose for field mounting. F. Install control wiring between air handling unit,condensing unit,and field installed accessories. G. Install connection to electrical power wiring. 3.4 MANUF kCTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A. Fu nish initial start-up and shutdown during first year of operation, including routine servicing and checkout. 3.5 CLEANI G A. Vag uum clean coils and inside of unit cabinet. B. InsaIl temporary filters during construction period. Replace with permanent filters at Substantial Completion. 3.6 DEMON bTRATlON A. Del onstrate air handling unit operation and maintenance. B. De onstrate starting,maintenance,and operation of condensing unit. C. Fu nish services of manufacturer's technical representative for one8 hour day to instruct Owner's personnel in 4:peration and maintenance of units.Schedule training with Owner,provide at least 7 days'notice to Ar•hitect/Engineer of training date. 3.7 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK Do not operate air handling units until ductwork is clean,filters are in place, bearings lubricated,and fan has been test run under observation. END OF SECTION June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 6 of 6 Wiring Devices SECTION 262726 4. Provide black ON or START pushbuttons and switches. 5. Provide red OFF or STOP pushbuttons and switches. 6. Provide engraved plastic label. 7. Provide lock out provisions,shrouds, and manual reset functions as noted on plans. C. Enclosure: Fabricate enclosure from steel finished with manufacturer's standard gray enamel. 1. Interior Dry Locations:Type 13. 2. Exterior Locations:Type 3R. Provide 4X for corrosive locations. 3. Hazardous Locations: UL listed for the space classification,division,group. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify outlet boxes are installed at proper height. B. Verify wall openings are neatly cut and completely covered by wall plates. C. Verify branch circuit wiring installation is completed,tested,and ready for connection to wiring devices. D. Verify locations of floor boxes and outlets prior to rough in 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean debris from outlet boxes. 3.3 EXISTING WORK A. Disconnect and remove abandoned wiring devices. B. Modify installation to maintain access to existing wiring devices to remain active. C. Clean and repair existing wiring devices to remain or to be reinstalled. D. Maintain access to existing floor boxes remaining active and requiring access.Modify installation or provide access panel. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. Install devices plumb and level. B. Connect wiring device grounding terminal to outlet box with bonding jumper and branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. C. Install boxes and fittings to preserve fire resistance rating of slabs and other elements D. Connect wiring devices by wrapping solid conductor around screw terminal. 1. Install stranded conductor for branch circuits 10 AWG and smaller. 2. When stranded conductors are used in lieu of solid, use crimp on fork terminals for device terminations. 3. Do not place bare stranded conductors directly under device screws. E. Wall Plates June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 7 of 9 Wiring Devices SECTION 262726 2. Electrical contractor shall coordinate with GC,mechanical contractor,and controls contractors to determine all locations where dual relays are required and insure the appropriate model device is rdered. E. Corridr and Hallway Sensors: 1. apable of detecting motion 14 feet wide and 80 feet long with one sensor mounted 10 feet above oar. 2. apable of detecting motion in warehouse aisle 10 feet wide and 60 feet long or 100 feet long when ounted 22 feet above floor. 3. evice shall be capable of being wired in parallel with additional occupancy sensors 2.8 RELA S A. Manuf cturers: 1. Ilen Bradley 2. utomatic Switch Co. 3. utter-Hammer 4. eneral Electric 5. iemens 6. quare D 7. ubstitutions:With engineer approval. B. Produc Description: Heavy duty,single-coil momentary contact, mechanically held remote control relays, unless oted otherwise 1. ontacts: Rated 20 amperes at 120-277 volts. Lower ratings may be used for control circuits with pproval. 2. Jne Voltage Connections:Clamp type screw terminals. C. Time Delay: Provide where required and/or noted 1. Solid state timer attachment 2. Adjustable from 0.2 to 60 seconds(min). Note that longer time ranges may be specified on plans. 3. Field convertible from ON delay to OFF delay. D. Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6,to meet conditions. Fabricate enclosure from steel finished with manufacturer's standard gray enamel. 1. Interior Dry Locations:Type 1. 2. Exterior Locations:Type 3R. 2.9 PUSH BUTTONS AND SELECTOR SWITCHES A. Manufacturers: 1. Allen Bradley 2. Cutler-Hammer 3. General Electric 4. Siemens 5. Square D 6. Substitutions:With engineer approval. B. Product Description: Heavy duty,oil tight,unless noted otherwise 1. Contacts: Rated 20 amperes at 120-277 volts. Lower ratings may be used for control circuits with approval. 2. Line Voltage Connections:Clamp type screw terminals. 3. Indicator lights: LED type,push to test. June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 6 of 9 Wiring Devices SECTION 262726 D. Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6,to meet conditions. Fabricate enclosure from steel finished with manufacturer's standard gray enamel. 1. Interior Dry Locations:Type 1. 2. Exterior Locations:Type 3R. 2.7 OCCUPANCY SENSOR A. Manufacturers: 1. Cooper 2. Douglas Lighting Controls 3. Hubbell 4. Leviton 5. Lutron 6. Watt Stopper 7. Substitutions:With engineer approval. B. Product Description: 1. Devices shall include both infrared and ultrasonic sensing(elsewhere noted dual technology or mult- technology) 2. Separate sensitivity and time delay adjustments with LED indication of sensed movement.User adjustable time-delay:30 seconds to 30 minutes. 3. Operation shall be silent. 4. Sensors shall be capable of operation in"vacancy mode"where manual on/automatic off. 5. Integral daylight sensing with automatic shutoff at field adjustable light level. 6. 1000VA at 120V,2700VA at 277V rated 7. 2000 sq ft coverage area. a. 1000 sq ft coverage may be used for room 800 sq ft or less,except restrooms and cubicle areas. b. 500 sq ft or less coverage devices shall not be used. c. Ceiling mounted sensors d. 360 degree sensing,unless noted 180 degree. e. Ultrasonic sensors on both side of device,unless noted 180 degree. f. Device shall be capable of being wired in parallel with additional occupancy sensors for large spaces. 8. Wall mounted sensors a. Integral on/off pushbutton b. 180 degree sensing C. Programming 1. Set off delay to 30 minutes. 2. Set wall mounted sensors to operate in vacancy mode. 3. Any lighting within the space that is not controlled by the sensor should remain on throughout the programming process. 4. More detail procedures for daylight sensor programming are required when daylight controls are used for selective switching of specific lights within a space that are located near sources of daylight.The procedures described here apply to whole room occupancy sensors only. D. Dual Relay devices: 1. Where occupancy sensors are indicated on the architectural, mechanical,or electrical plans to control additional equipment(exhaust fans,outside air dampers,etc), provide sensor with a second dedicated relay with appropriate voltage and power rating for the equipment to be served. June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 5 of 9 Wiring Devices SECTION 262726 2.4 WALL 'LATES A. Manufa(turers: 1. 'rovide product by the manufacturer of the wiring device being covers by the wall plate B. Decoraive Cover Plate:nylon to match receptacle color above. C. Weathe proof Cover Plate:Stainless steel plate with gasketed device cover. 2.5 TERMI 1 AL BLOCKS A. Manufa turers: 1. ilarion Electrical Products 2. '�ubbell Wiring Devices 3. "eliance Electric 4. 'substitutions:With engineer approval. B. Termin.:l Blocks: NEMA ICS 4. C. Power Terminals: Unit construction type with closed back and tubular pressure screw connectors,rated 600 volts. D. Signal .;nd Control Terminals:Modular construction type,suitable for channel mounting,with tubular pressu - screw connectors, rated 300 volts. E. Furnish ground bus terminal block,with each connector bonded to enclosure. 2.6 LIGHTI G CONTACTORS A. Manufacturers: 1. °utomatic Switch Co. 2. utter-Hammer 3. eneral Electric 4. '.quare D 5. '.iemens 6. 'substitutions:With engineer approval. B. Produc Description: 1. EMA ICS 2, magnetic lighting contactor. 2. ( onfiguration: Electrically held,2 wire control. 3. ! oil Operating Voltage:24 or 120 volts,60 Hertz. 4. 7oles:To match circuit configuration and control function. 5. ontact Rating: Conductor overcurrent protection,considering Berating for continuous loads. C. Accesories: 1. over Mounted Pilot Devices: NEMA ICS 5. 2. elector Switch: ON/OFF/AUTOMATIC function,with rotary action. 3. Auxiliary Contacts:one normally open and one normally closed in addition to seal-in contact. 4. Relays: NEMA ICS 2, 5. control Power Transformers: 120 volt secondary,VA as required,in each enclosed contactor. furnish fused primary and secondary,and bond unfused leg of secondary to enclosure. June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 4 of 9 Wiring Devices SECTION 262726 2.2 WALL DIMMERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Cooper Wiring Devices 2. Harvey Hubbell, Inc. 3. Leviton Manufacturing Company. 4. Substitutions:With engineer approval. B. Product Description: 1. NEMA WD 1 2. Semiconductor dimmer for incandescent lamps C. Body and Handle: 1. White nylon 2. Slide dimmer 3. Push button on off control D. Voltage: 120-277 volts. E. Power Rating: Match load shown on drawings, 1000W minimum F. Accessory Wall Switch: Match dimmer appearance. 2.3 RECEPTACLES A. Manufacturers: 1. Cooper Wiring Devices 2. Harvey Hubbell, Inc. 3. Leviton Manufacturing Company. 4. Substitutions:With engineer approval. B. Product Description: 1. NEMA WD 1, Heavy-duty,commercial grade receptacle,unless noted otherwise. 2. Provide heavy duty industrial grade receptacles in janitor's closets, mechanical rooms,manufacturing areas,and labs. 3. One-piece brass integral ground straps 4. Ground retention clips 5. Back wired ground terminals 6. Face and body:Constantly on—white nylon C. Minimum rating:20A, 125V D. Configuration: NEMA WD 6,type as indicated on Drawings. E. Convenience Receptacle: 1. Type 5-20, unless noted otherwise 2. 2 pole,3 wire grounding F. GFCI Receptacle:Convenience receptacle with integral ground fault circuit interrupter to meet regulatory requirements. June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 3 of 9 Wiring Devices SECTION 262726 C. Installe A licensed electrician with documented experience installing all equipment specified here in shall directly.upervise all work. Where noted in the specifications or required by the manufacturer,installer shall be a m.nufacturer trained and/or certified installer of the specific product to be installed. 1.6 QUALI ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: All components required for a complete functioning system as described here in shall be obta ned through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Listing .,nd Labeling: Where required,all electrical components,devices,and accessories shall be liste and lab-led as defined in NFPA 70,Article 100,by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdic'ion and marked for the intended use. Testing agency shall be UL unless noted otherwise or pre- approv:d by owner and AHJ. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Warran Period: one(1)year from the date of substantial completion PART 2 -PRO UCTS 2.1 WALL WITCHES A. Manuf cturers: 1. ooper Wiring Devices 2. arvey Hubbell, Inc. 3. .eviton Manufacturing Company. 4. Substitutions:With engineer approval. B. ProductDescription: 1. EMA WD 1, General-Duty,commercial grade,AC only general-use snap switch, unless noted therwise 2. rovide heavy duty industrial grade switches in janitor's closet, mechanical rooms, manufacturing reas,and labs. 3. One-piece brass integral ground terminal C. Rating : 1. oltage: I2O-277volts,AC. 2. urrent:20 amperes. 3. HP-I 20V,2HP 240-277V D. Body a d Handle: 1. hite nylon 2. rovide rocker switches in finished areas. 3. rovide toggle switches in un-finished areas such as janitor's closet, mechanical rooms, anufacturing areas,and labs. E. Indicator Light: Separate pilot strap; red color. F. Locator Light:Lighted handle type switch; red color. June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 2 of 9 SECTION 262726 WIRING DEVICES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes 1. Wall switches 2. Wall dimmers 3. Receptacles 4. Terminal strips 5. Device plates and decorative box covers. 6. Lighting contactors 7. Occupancy sensors 8. Photocells(Daylight sensors) 9. Relays 10. Push button and selector switches 1.2 REFERENCES A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1. NEMA WD 1 -General Requirements for Wiring Devices. 2. NEMA WD 6-Wiring Devices-Dimensional Requirements. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit catalog data showing all standard features,dimensions,weights, listings and product labels, material types,finishes and clearly indicating which optional features will be provided. 1. Include amperage and voltage ratings. 2. Include color to be used for 3. Where multiple sizes are listed, indicate sizes to be used. 4. Where multiple products are shown on the same page, indicate which products to be used. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of each floor box and poke-through fitting. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. Provide product data as defined under submittals. 2. Provide manufacturer's installation and maintenance instructions for normal operation,routine maintenance and testing,and emergency maintenance procedures. 3. Submit spare parts listing;source of replacement parts and supplies;and recommended maintenance procedures and intervals. 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer:Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Supplier: Authorized distributor June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 1 of 9 Panelboards SECTION 262416 resistance is less.Verify that any metering or surge protection equipment that could be damaged by this testing as been disconnected and or removed as needed for testing. F. Test all:ground fault protection systems in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 3.3 ADJUS, ING A. Measur* steady state load currents at each panelboard feeder;rearrange circuits in panelboard to balance phase ads to within 20 percent of each other.Maintain proper phasing for multi-wire branch circuits. END OF SECTION June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 5 of 5 Panelboards SECTION 262416 PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install panelboards: 1. In accordance with NEMA PB 1.1. 2. Plumb with adjacent walls and supports. 3. Flush with wall finishes if recessed in wall. 4. By securing all four corners to the adjacent structure using appropriate supports. 5. On concrete pads if floor mounted. B. Provide each panel with: 1. Filler plates for unused spaces in panelboards. 2. Typed circuit directory for each branch circuit panelboard. Revise directory to reflect circuiting changes to balance phase loads. 3. Engraved plastic nameplates identifying panel name,source,amperage,and voltage. C. Mounting Requirements 1. Surface mount using u-channel supports behind panel to stand panel off wall. In constrained spaces, panels may be secured directly to the wall where required to provide access to equipment,meet egress requirements,or NEC working space requirements. 2. Where panels are surface mounted in corridors or other egress pathways, provide sheet metal skirt from bottom edge of panel to finished floor for ADA compliance. 3. Exterior Building Walls: Surface mount using galvanized u-channel supports behind panel to stand panel off wall. 4. Exterior Free Standing: Mount to galvanized u-channel rack with minimum of two(2)horizontal supports behind panel and one(1)horizontal support below panel to secure conduits. Vertical supports shall be imbedded in concrete foundation or bolted to concrete pad. If bolted to pad, provide 45 degree angle braces attached to vertical support one foot or more above pad. 5. Mounting Height: a. Interior Spaces: 6 feet to top of panelboard. b. Install panelboards taller than 6 feet with bottom no more than 4 inches above floor. c. Exterior:To help shield from view, mount panels as low as practical.Bottom of panel shall be at least 18"AFG unless floor mounted or mounted over concrete,asphalt,etc. D. Grounding 1. Ground and bond panelboard enclosure according to grounding specifications and code. 2. Connect equipment ground bars of panels in accordance with NFPA 70. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tighten all accessible electrical connections to the manufacturer's torque specifications. B. Remove all blocks, packing and shipping materials,and foreign materials. C. Manually exercise all switches,circuit breakers,and other operating mechanisms to make certain they operate freely. D. Check integrity of all electrical and mechanical interlocks and padlocking mechanisms. E. Conduct an insulation resistance test phase to ground and phase to phase with the OCPDs in both the open and closed position.Resistance in open position shall be 1 megohm min. Remediate and retest if June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 4 of 5 Panelboards SECTION 262416 B. Maintain factory wrapping or provide additional canvas or plastic cover for all large electrical equipment. Follow III manufacturer recommendations for humidity and max/min temperatures for storing electrical equipment. 1.9 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Furnish four of each panelboard key.Panelboards keyed alike. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 BRANOH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS A. Manufapturers: 1. Cutler Hammer 2. General Electric ical 3. Siemens 4. Square D 5. Substitutions:With engineer approval. B. Produce Description: NEMA PB 1,circuit breaker type,lighting and appliance branch circuit panelboard. C. Panelboard Bus: 1. Copper current carrying components,ratings as indicated on Drawings. 2. Furnish copper ground bus in each panelboard. 3. furnish fully rated copper neutral bus in each panelboard. 4. For non-linear load applications subject to harmonics furnish 200 percent rated,plated copper,solid neutral. D. Minimum Integrated Short Circuit Rating: 10KAIC unless higher value indicated on Drawings. E. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, bolt-on type thermal magnetic trip circuit breakers,with commOn trip handle for all poles,listed as: 1. ype SWD for lighting circuits. 2. ype HACR for air conditioning equipment circuits. 3. iilass A ground fault interrupter circuit breakers as indicated on Drawings. 4. L 1699 compliant arc flash circuit interrupter for all circuits serving receptacles in every room of swelling units. 5. not use tandem circuit breakers. F. Enclos re: NEMA PB 1,Type 1 unless noted otherwise 1. inches deep,20 inches wide. 2. over: Flush cabinet front with continuous hinge. 3. poor:continuous hinge, metal directory frame,and flush lock keyed alike. 4. inish in manufacturer's standard gray enamel except as noted in 5 and 6.. 5. or panels on building exteriors in visible locations,paint to match surface to which they are ttached. June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 3 of 5 Panelboards SECTION 262416 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of electrical equipment and record actual circuiting arrangements. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. Provide product data as defined under submittals. 2. Provide manufacturer's installation and maintenance instructions for normal operation, routine maintenance and testing,and emergency maintenance procedures. 3. Submit spare parts listing;source of replacement parts and supplies;and recommended maintenance procedures and intervals. C. Field Quality-Control Test Reports: Report certified by field testing agent indicating results of performance testing required in Part 3 and/or on plans. 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer:Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Supplier: Authorized distributor C. Installer: A licensed electrician with documented experience installing all equipment specified here in shall directly supervise all work. Where noted in the specifications or required by the manufacturer,installer shall be a manufacturer trained and/or certified installer of the specific product to be installed. D. Testing Agency: An agency with the documented experience and properly calibrated,fully functioning equipment to conduct the testing required by the specifications,plans and code,that is a member company of the International Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory(NRTL), and is acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: All components required for a complete functioning system as described here in shall be obtained through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Listing and Labeling: Where required,all electrical components,devices,and accessories shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,Article 100,by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and marked for the intended use. Testing agency shall be UL unless noted otherwise or pre- approved by owner and AHJ. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer's standard form clearly stating that manufacturer agrees to repair or replace equipment,materials,and associated auxiliary components that fail or deteriorate within the specified warranty period. B. Warranty Period: one(1)year from the date of substantial completion 1.8 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store in clean,dry space located above grade and protect from dirt,water,construction debris,traffic, freeze,and where applicable,deterioration from sun light. June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 2 of 5 SECTION 262416 PANELBOARDS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Sectior includes 1. 8ranch circuit panelboards, 1.2 REFE ENCES A. Institut: of Electrical and Electronics Engineers: 1. l EE C62.41 -Recommended Practice on Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits. B. Nation.1 Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1. EMA AB 1 -Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Molded Case Switches. 2. EMA FU 1 -Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses. 3. EMA ICS 2-Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers,Contactors,and Overload Relays, Rated ot More Than 2000 Volts AC or 750 Volts DC. 4. EMA ICS 5-Industrial Control and Systems: Control Circuit and Pilot Devices. 5. EMA KS 1 -Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches(600 Volts Maximum). 6. EMA PB 1 -Panelboards. 7. EMA PB 1.1 -General Instructions for Proper Installation,Operation,and Maintenance of anelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less. C. Interns lanai Electrical Testing Association: 1. ETA ATS-Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and ystems. D. Nation I Fire Protection Association: 1. FPA 70-National Electrical Code. E. Unde riters Laboratories Inc.: 1. L 67-Safety for Panelboards. 2. L 1283-Electromagnetic Interference Filters. 3. L 1449-Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors. 1.3 SUBMI TALS A. Shop rawings:Manufacturer or contractor prepared drawings showing all relevant dimensions,weights, mounti g requirements,and conduit entry points. 1. nclude dimensioned plan views and elevations. B. Produ Data:Submit catalog data showing all standard features,dimensions,weights, listings and product labels,material types,finishes and clearly indicating which optional features will be provided. 1. nclude amperage ratings,voltage,over-current protective device ratings,AIC ratings. 2. here multiple sizes are listed, indicate sizes to be used. 3. Nhere multiple products are shown on the same page,indicate which products to be used. June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 1 of 5 Identification for Electrical Systems SECTION 260553 2. Mark data cabling at each end. Install additional marking at accessible locations along the cable run. 3. Install labels at data outlets identifying patch panel and port designation. H. Raceway Marker Installation: 1. Install raceway marker for each raceway longer than 6 feet and rated 100A or more. 2. Raceway Marker Spacing:provide marker in a visible location in each room where raceway passes through walls or floors. 3. Coordinate with architect before labeling raceways in finished spaces I. Junction and Pull Box Installation 1. Label all junction boxes with the panel,circuit number,and voltage. For boxes exposed in finished spaces,label the inside of the cover. 2. Box for communications,fire alarm,and access control shall be provided with color coded covers. Coordinate color to be used with owner. J. Underground Warning Tape Installation: 1. Install underground warning tape along length of each underground conduit, raceway,or cable 6 to 8 inches below finished grade,directly above buried conduit, raceway,or cable. K. Warning Sign Mounting 1. Provide the number of signs required to be readable from each accessible side, but space the signs a maximum of 30 feet apart. END OF SECTION June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 5 of 5 Identification for ' lectrical Systems SECTION 260553 t e words"HIGH VOLTAGE"shall be in black letters on a white background. Decal shall be Panduit lo. PPS0710D72 or approved equal. PART 3 -EXEC TION 3.1 PREPA'ATION A. Degrea e and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials. 3.2 INSTA CATION A. Install i entifying devices after completion of painting. B. Fire ala m,emergency/critical power,life safety labels, including receptacles,shall be color coded and engrav d. C. Provid each panel with a manufacturer prepared arc flash hazard warning label. D. Provid a typed panel directory for each panel provided or modified for this project. Directory shall identify the circuit number,loads served,and location of loads by room number. Mount on inside of each panel and file with the owner when the work is complete. E. Namep ate Installation: 1. l stall nameplate parallel to equipment lines. 2. I, stall nameplate for each electrical distribution and control equipment enclosure with corrosive- esistant mechanical fasteners,or adhesive. 3. I stall nameplates for each control panel and major control components located outside panel with orrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners,or adhesive. 4. ',ecure nameplate to equipment front using screws or rivets. 5. l stall nameplates for the following: .;. Switchboards. 41. Panelboards. 1 i. Transformers. 0. Disconnects and starters. v. VFDs `. ATSs Lighting contactors �. Equipment enclosures i. Controls cabinets and enclosures F. Label Installation: 1. lnstall label parallel to equipment lines. 2. Install label for identification of individual control device stations. 3. Install labels for permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer. 4. Install panel name and circuit number identification labels for the following: a. Junction boxes(permanent marker may be used for junction boxes in mechanical spaces or above lay in ceilings.) b. Receptacle cover plates G. Wire Marker Installation: 1. Install wire marker for each conductor at panelboards,gutters, pull boxes,at electrical equipment such as contactors and disconnects,and each load connection. June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 4 of 5 Identification for Electrical Systems SECTION 260553 2.6 UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE A. Description:6 inch wide plastic tape,detectable type,colored red with suitable warning legend describing buried electrical lines. 2.7 LOCKOUT DEVICES A. Lockout Hasps: 1. Anodized aluminum or Reinforced nylon hasp with erasable label surface;size minimum 7-1/4 x 3 inches. 2.8 POSTED OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A. Provide for each system and principal item of equipment as specified in the technical sections for use by operation and maintenance personnel. The operating instructions shall include the following: 1. Wiring diagrams,control diagrams,and control sequence for each principal system and item of equipment. 2. Start up, proper adjustment,operating, lubrication,and shutdown procedures. 3. Safety precautions. 4. The procedure in the event of equipment failure. 5. Other items of instruction as recommended by the manufacturer of each system or item of equipment. B. Print or engrave operating instructions and frame under glass or in approved laminated plastic. Post instructions where directed. For operating instructions exposed to the weather, provide weather-resistant materials or weatherproof enclosures. Operating instructions shall not fade when exposed to sunlight and shall be secured to prevent easy removal or peeling. 2.9 MANUFACTURER'S NAMEPLATE A. Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's name,address, model number, and serial number securely affixed in a conspicuous place;the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be acceptable. 2.10 FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATES A. ASTM D 709. Provide laminated plastic nameplates for each equipment enclosure,relay,switch,and device;as specified in the technical sections or as indicated on the drawings. Each nameplate inscription shall identify the function and,when applicable,the position. Nameplates shall be melamine plastic,0.125 inch thick,white with black center core. Surface shall be matte finish. Comers shall be square. Accurately align lettering and engrave into the core. Minimum size of nameplates shall be one by 2.5 inches. Lettering shall be a minimum of 0.25 inch high normal block style. 2.11 WARNING SIGNS A. Provide warning signs for the enclosures of electrical equipment including substations,pad-mounted transformers,pad-mounted switches,generators,and switchgear having a nominal rating exceeding 600 volts. 1. When the enclosure integrity of such equipment is specified to be in accordance with IEEE C57.12.28 or IEEE C57.12.29,such as for pad-mounted transformers,provide self-adhesive warning signs on the outside of the high voltage compartment door(s). Sign shall be a decal and shall have nominal dimensions of 7 by 10 inches with the legend"DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE"printed in two lines of nominal 2 inch high letters. The word"DANGER"shall be in white letters on a red background and June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 3 of 5 Identification for : lectrical Systems SECTION 260553 1.7 ENVIRiNMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Install I.bels and nameplates only when ambient temperature and humidity conditions for adhesive are within r.nge recommended by manufacturer. PART2 -PROD, CTS 2.1 NAME•LATES A. Produce Description:Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on white contrasting backgro and color. B. Letter maize: 1. I,/4 inch high(min)letters for identifying individual equipment and loads. 2. 1/4 inch high(min)letters for identifying grouped equipment and loads. C. Minimu nameplate thickness: 1/8 inch. 2.2 LABELI A. Generic Labels: Embossed adhesive tape,with 3/16 inch white letters on black background. B. Labels nor receptacles controlled by motion sensing devices: Embossed adhesive tape,with 3/16 inch white letters iin a dark green background. 2.3 WIRE ARKERS A. Descri tion: Cloth tape,split sleeve,or tubing type wire markers. B. Legen 1. ower and Lighting Circuits: Panel name and branch circuit or feeder number. 2. ontrol Circuits:Control wire number as indicated on shop drawings. 2.4 CONDUIT AND RACEWAY MARKERS A. Description: Nameplate fastened with adhesive, Labels fastened with adhesive or Stencils. B. Color: 1. Medium Voltage System: Black lettering on white background. 2. 480 Volt System: Black lettering on white background. 3. 208 Volt System: Black lettering on white background. C. Legend: 1. Medium Voltage System: HIGH VOLTAGE. 2. t8O Volt System:480 VOLTS. 3. 08 Volt System:208 VOLTS. 2.5 STENCILS A. Stencils:With clean cut symbols and letters of following size: 1. Up to 2 inches Outside Diameter of Raceway: 1/2 inch high letters. 2. 2-1/2 to 6 inches Outside Diameter of Raceway: 1 inch high letters. June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 2 of 5 SECTION 260553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Nameplates. 2. Labels. 3. Wire markers. 4. Conduit markers. 5. Stencils. 6. Underground Warning Tape. 7. Lockout Devices. 8. Operating Instrucitons 9. Nameplates 10. Warning Signs 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Submit manufacturer's catalog literature for each product required. 2. Submit electrical identification schedule including list of wording,symbols, letter size,color coding, tag number,location,and function. B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation instructions,special procedures,and installation. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of tagged devices;include tag numbers. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with federal,state,and local codes B. Provide all labeling as required by NFPA 70 and 70E. 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Accept identification products on site in original containers. Inspect for damage. B. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging,labeled with manufacturer's identification, including product density and thickness. C. Protect from weather and construction traffic,dirt,water,chemical,and mechanical damage,by storing in original wrapping. June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 1 of 5 Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems SECTION 260533 E. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening. F. Pro ptly pack grout solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect grout while curing. G. Firer Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls,partitions,ceilings,and floors at raceway and cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal raceway and cable penetration sleeves with fire-top materials that meet the fire rating of the wall. 3.10 FIREST•PPING A. Ap oly firestopping to penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies for electrical installations to rest.re original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Install per manufacturer's instruction and in accordance with architectural and owner specifications. B. Ap sly primer where recommended by manufacturer for type of firestopping material and substrate invi Ived,and as required for compliance with required fire ratings. C. Ap.ly firestopping material in sufficient thickness to achieve required fire and smoke rating and uniform density and texture. D. Co press fibered material to maximum 40 percent of its uncompressed size. E. Pla e foamed material in layers to ensure homogenous density,filling cavities and spaces. Place sealant to completely seal junctions with adjacent dissimilar materials. F. Pla e intumescent coating in sufficient coats to achieve rating required. G. Re ove dam material after firestopping material has cured. END OF SECTION June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 14 of 14 Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems SECTION 260533 3.7 ADJUSTING A. Adjust flush-mounting outlets to make front flush with finished wall material. B. Install knockout closures in unused openings in boxes. 3.8 CLEANING A. Clean interior of boxes to remove dust,debris,and other material. B. Clean exposed surfaces and restore finish. 3.9 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS A. Electrical penetrations occur when raceways,cables,wireways,cable trays,or busways penetrate concrete slabs,floors,ceilings concrete or masonry walls, partition walls in finished exposed spaces,or fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. B. Sleeve Installations: 1. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. 2. Install sleeve through opening and extending beyond minimum of 1 inch on both sides of building element. 3. Extend sleeves installed in floors 3 inches above finished floor level. 4. For fire rated penetrations,size sleeve allowing minimum of 1 inch annular clear space between raceway and sleeve. 5. For exterior wall penetrations,size sleeve allowing minimum of 1 inch annular clear space between raceway and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. 6. For other penetrations,size sleeve allowing'/to'/z"annular clear space between raceway and sleeve. 7. Where cable tray, bus,cable bus,conduit,wireway,or trough, penetrates fire rated surface, install firestopping product in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Install escutcheons,floor plates,or ceiling plates where conduit, penetrates surfaces in occupied spaces or exterior walls.Occupied spaces include rooms with finished ceilings and where penetration occurs below finished ceiling. 1. Provide close fitting metal collar or escutcheon covers at both sides of penetration. 2. Install stainless steel escutcheons at finished surfaces. D. Sealing 1. Exterior wall and other water tight openings: Seal with adjustable, interlocking rubber links of mechanical seal(waterproof sleeve seal)sized to cover annular space between raceway and sleeve. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Conduit penetrations not required to be watertight:Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size,depth,and location of joint 3. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible boot- type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work. 4. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry 5. Seal ends of sleeve with UL listed fire resistive silicone compound to meet fire rating of structure penetrated(for fire rated walls). 6. Special interior partitions:Seal pipe penetrations at clean rooms, laboratories,hospital spaces, computer rooms,telecommunication rooms data rooms.Apply sealant to both sides of penetration to completely fill annular space between sleeve and conduit. 7. Hazardous areas:Seal conduits entering areas classified as hazardous per the NEC using explosion proof fittings and sealing materials. June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 13 of 14 Racewayand Byes for Electrical Systems SECTION 260533 3.5 INSTALLA TION—BOXES, ENCLOSURES,CABINETS A. Ge Feral Requirements 1. Seal all unused openings. 2. j Provide flush mounted boxes in finished areas. 3. ' Support boxes independently of conduit. 4. Install boxes without damaging or removing insulation,cutting structural elements,or damaging finishes. 5. Install pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings and in unfinished areas only. B. Wirii g Device Boxes 1. ' Install gang box where more than one device is mounted together. Do not use sectional box. 2. Install gang box with plaster ring for single device outlets. 3. I Adjust mounting locations to be flush with finished surface. 4. Secure boxes using stamped steel bridges between studs. 5. Do not install flush mounting box back-to-back in walls ;. Install with minimum 6 inches separation. ). Install in separate stud bays to reduce noise transfer where ever possible. . Install with minimum 24 inches separation in acoustic rated walls. 6. ' Install wall mounted boxes at elevations to accommodate mounting heights as indicated on Drawings. Refer to architectural elevations for mounting heights of outlet boxes noted"above counter." 7. ' Orient boxes to accommodate wiring device orientation. Field verify with architect for wiring devices mounted above counters or exposed to view in lobbies,on display walls,etc. 8. ' Adjust box location up to 10 feet prior to rough-in to accommodate intended purpose. C. Cei ing Mounted Boxes 1. I Inaccessible Ceiling Areas: Install outlet and junction boxes no more than 6 inches from ceiling access panel or from removable recessed luminaire. 2. Install adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box. 3. '� Do not fasten boxes to ceiling support wires or other piping systems. D. Maonry Walls and Poured In Concrete 1. i Install recessed boxes in the corner of masonry blocks so that only the corner of one masonry element is required to be cut. 2. , File smooth the edges of cut masonry blocks. Replace cracked or damaged blocks. 3. Seal concrete tight all openings in boxes prior to pouring concrete. 4. Verify box is level and flush with finished grade. File down edges that protrude above finished grade. 3.6 INTERF CE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Ins Fall conduit to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements,using materials and mehods in accordance with the fire stopping material manufacture's instructions. B. Ro te conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork or through suitable roof jack with pitch po•ket.Coordinate location with roofing installation. Follow architectural details for any required roof pe etrations. Obtain permission from architect for dedicated electrical rough penetrations before pe orming work. C. Lo.ate outlet boxes to allow luminaires positioned as indicated on reflected ceiling plan. D. Ali n adjacent wall mounted outlet boxes for switches,thermostats,and similar devices. June 02,2021 II KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 12 of 14 Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems SECTION 260533 1. Raceway routing is shown in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Route to complete wiring system. 2. The conduit routing shown on the construction documents is diagrammatic. a. Coordinate interior routing with other trades;structure;existing and new utilities,ductwork, piping;and other existing conditions as required for a complete,conflict free installation. b. Coordinate site routing with other trades;structure; new and existing buried utilities,new and existing paved areas,conduit sleeves,and landscaping before digging to avoid conflicts, damage,and to allow for future installations. 3. Route raceway parallel and perpendicular to walls,floors,and ceilings. 4. Route exposed conduit parallel to structural elements. Follow all surface contours;do not route in free air from point to point. 5. Route conduit in and under slab from point-to-point. Coordinate conduit installations in slab, except straight slab penetrations with structural engineer for conduits larger than 2" 6. Maintain clearance between raceway and piping for maintenance purposes. 7. Maintain 12 inch clearance between power raceways and communications cabling, raceways,and cable trays. 8. Maintain 12 inch clearance between raceway and surfaces with temperatures exceeding 104 degrees F. 9. Install no more than equivalent of three 90 degree bends between boxes. Install conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction,as around beams. Use factory elbows or hydraulic one-shot bender to fabricate elbows for bends in metal conduit larger than 2 inch size. C. Install raceways so that it drains to junction and pull boxes to avoid moisture traps at low points; install junction box with drain fitting at low points in conduit system. D. Install fittings to accommodate expansion and deflection where raceway crosses seismic,control and expansion joints. E. Install suitable pull string or cord in each empty raceway except sleeves and nipples. F. Close ends and unused openings in surface raceways,wireways, boxes,and enclosures. G. Maximum Size Conduit in Slab Above Grade:3/4 inch. Do not cross conduits in slab without approval. H. Cut conduit square using saw or pipe cutter;de-burr cut ends. I. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings;fasten securely. J. Join nonmetallic conduit using cement as recommended by manufacturer.Wipe nonmetallic conduit dry and clean before joining.Apply full even coat of cement to entire area inserted in fitting.Allow joint to cure for minimum 20 minutes. K. Install conduit hubs or sealing locknuts to fasten conduit to sheet metal boxes in damp and wet locations and to cast boxes. L. Install suitable caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture. M. Surface Raceway: Install flat-head screws,clips,and straps to fasten raceway channel to surfaces; mount plumb and level. Install insulating bushings and inserts at connections to outlets and corner fittings. N. All connections to motors, instruments, machines,and equipment subject to movement or vibration shall be made using liquid-tight flexible metal conduit(3ft max). June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 11 of 14 Raceway and Byes for Electrical Systems SECTION 260533 C. Disionnect abandoned outlets and remove devices. Remove abandoned outlets when raceway is aba idoned and removed. Install blank cover for abandoned outlets not removed. D. Mai tain access to existing boxes and other installations remaining active and requiring access. Modify inst::Ilation or provide access panel. E. Ext*nd existing raceway and box installations using materials and methods[compatible with existing electrical installations,or]as specified. F. Clean and repair existing raceway and boxes to remain or to be reinstalled. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Proyide complete raceway systems from source to all loads with dedicated supports for each raceway elertient. B. Pro ide all required back boxes and supports for wiring devices,telecommunications,fire alarm,access con rol,controls equipment,alarms,sensors,etc. C. Pro ide pull box at appropriate locations for all power and special systems raceways whether shown on pla s or not. D. Arrnge raceway and boxes to present a neat appearance;allow for future expansion; provide access whdre needed;and maintain headroom and clearances for equipment,egress,etc. E. Fasten raceway and box supports to structure and finishes in accordance with all requirements of the NEC and the construction documents. F. Grqund and bond raceway and boxes in accordance with all requirements of the NEC and the construction documents. G. ldetify raceway and boxes in accordance with all requirements of the NEC and the construction doduments. H. Paint exposed raceway and boxes to match the surface to which they are attached. 3.4 INSTALLATION-RACEWAY A. Raceway Supports 1. Support raceway using galvanized steel,malleable iron straps,or channel and pipe clamps. 2. Provide support at each junction box,panel and load. 3. Provide supports at intervals per code and manufacturer recommendations. 4. Group related raceway and support using steel channel conduit rack. Provide space on each for 25 percent additional raceways. 5. Do not support raceway with wire or perforated pipe straps.Remove wire used for temporary supports 6. Do not attach raceway to ceiling support wires or other piping systems such as sprinkler or HVAC piping or duct work. 7. Support cables in vertical raceways per NEC 300.19. 8. Construct wireway supports from steel channel. 9. Arrange raceway supports to prevent misalignment during wiring installation. 10. Additional supporting requirements are specified in other specification sections. B. Raceway Routing June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 10 of 14 Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems SECTION 260533 3. Formulated Firestopping Compound of Incombustible Fibers: Formulated compound mixed with incombustible non-asbestos fibers. 4. Fiber Stuffing and Sealant Firestopping:Composite of mineral or ceramic fiber stuffing insulation with silicone elastomer for smoke stopping. 5. Mechanical Firestopping Device with Fillers: Mechanical device with incombustible fillers and silicone elastomer,covered with sheet stainless steel jacket,joined with collars, penetration sealed with flanged stops. 6. Intumescent Firestopping: Intumescent putty compound which expands on exposure to surface heat gain. 7. Firestop Pillows: Formed mineral fiber pillows. C. Firestopping Materials:ASTM El 19 or EB14 tested and UL Listed to achieve fire ratings of adjacent construction. D. Conform to applicable code for fire resistance ratings and surface burning characteristics. E. Color: Red in concealed location, black where exposed and allowed by AHJ. 2.16 FIRESTOPPING ACCESSORIES A. Primer:Type recommended by firestopping manufacturer for specific substrate surfaces and suitable for required fire ratings. B. Dam Material: Permanent: 1. Mineral fiberboard. 2. Mineral fiber matting. 3. Sheet metal. 4. Plywood or particle board. 5. Alumina silicate fire board. C. Installation Accessories: Provide clips,collars,fasteners,temporary stops or dams,and other devices required to position and retain materials in place. D. Non-Rated Surfaces: 1. Stamped steel,chrome plated, hinged,split ring escutcheons or floor plates or ceiling plates for covering openings in occupied areas where conduit is exposed. 2. For exterior wall openings below grade,furnish modular mechanical type seal consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill annular space between conduit and cored opening or water-stop type wall sleeve. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify outlet locations and routing and termination locations of raceway prior to rough-in. 3.2 EXISTING WORK A. Remove exposed abandoned raceway, including abandoned raceway above accessible ceiling finishes. Cut raceway flush with walls and floors,and patch surfaces. B. Remove concealed abandoned raceway to its source. June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 9 of 14 Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems SECTION 260533 2.14 SLEEVES A. Materials: 1. Interior Locations: Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M,Type E,Grade B,Schedule 40, galvanized steel,plain ends 2. Exterior Wall Penetrations:Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated"wall pipe,"equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe,with plain ends and integral waterstop,unless otherwise indicated 3. Fire Rated and Fire Resistive Floors and Wails: Prefabricated fire rated sleeves including seals, UL listed B. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings:Galvanized sheet steel. 1. Minimum Metal Thickness: For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches(1270 mm)and no side more than 16 inches(400 mm),thickness shall be 0.052 inch(1.3 mm). For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to,or more than,50 inches(1270 mm)and 1 or more sides equal to,or more than, 16 inches(400 mm),thickness shall be 0.138 inch(3.5 mm). C. Waterproof Sleeve Seals 1. Description: Modular mechanical type,designed for field assembly,consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill annular space between object and sleeve, connected with bolts and pressure plates causing rubber sealing elements to expand when tightened,providing watertight seal and electrical insulation. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following a. Advance Products&Systems, Inc. b. Calpico, Inc. c. Metraflex Co. d. NMP Corporation e. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. f. Thunderline Link-Seal, Inc. 3. Sealing Elements: Interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or conduit. Include type and number required for material and size of raceway or cable 4. Pressure Plates: Carbon Steel. Include two for each sealing element. 5. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element. 2.15 FIRESTOPPING A. Ma ufacturers: 1. Dow Corning Corp. 2. Fire Trak Corp. 3. Hilti Corp. 4. International Protective Coating Corp. 5. 3M fire Protection Products 6. ' Specified Technology, Inc. 7. Substitutions:With engineer approval. B. Pro.uct Description: Different types of products by multiple manufacturers are acceptable as required to meet specified system description and performance requirements; provide only one type for each similar application. 1. Silicone Firestopping Elastomeric Firestopping:Single component silicone elastomeric compound and compatible silicone sealant. 2. Foam Firestopping Compounds:Single component foam compound. June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 8 of 14 Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems SECTION 260533 2.12 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES A. Sheet Metal Boxes: NEMA OS 1,galvanized steel. Screw on cover,welded seams,stainless nuts, bolts,screws and washers. 1. Boxes larger than 12 inches in any dimension shall be panelboard code gauze galvanized steel with hinged cover. 2. Boxes shall be sized in accordance with NEC. B. Hinged Enclosures: Provide hinged covers for enclosures larger than 4". Coordinate with engineer if screw type covers must be used for any reason. C. Surface Mounted Cast Metal Box: NEMA 250,Type 4X;flat-flanged,surface mounted junction box: 1. Material: Galvanized cast iron. Cast aluminum may be used with engineer approval 2. Cover: Furnish with ground flange, neoprene gasket,and stainless steel cover screws. D. In-Ground Cast Metal Box: NEMA 250,Type 6,outside or inside flanged as required by site conditions, recessed cover box for flush mounting: 1. Material: Galvanized cast iron. Cast aluminum may be used with engineer approval 2. Provide box with a bottom with drain and a min 12"x12"gravel sump below drain opening. 3. Cover: Nonskid cover with neoprene gasket and stainless steel cover screws. 4. Cover Legend:"ELECTRIC"or"COMMUNICATIONS 5. Box shall be traffic rated unless located in a position that is physically inaccessible to vehicular traffic. E. In-Ground Polymer Concrete Boxes 1. Selectively graded aggregates in combination with a polymer resin reinforced with fiberglass 2. Provide a bottom with drain and a min 12"x12"gravel sump below drain opening. 3. Conform to all test provisions of the most current ANSI/SCTE 77 specifications for underground enclosure integrity. 4. Cover: Nonskid cover with neoprene gasket and stainless steel cover screws. 5. Cover Legend:"ELECTRIC"or"COMMUNICATIONS 6. Box shall be traffic rated unless located in a position that is physically inaccessible to vehicular traffic. F. Fiberglass Concrete composite Handholes: Die-molded,glass-fiber hand holes: 1. 12"x8"min dimensions. 2. Cover:Glass-fiber concrete composite,weatherproof cover with nonskid finish. 3. Use only where specifically noted as allowed. 2.13 ENCLOSURES AND CABINETS A. Construction: NEMA 250,Type 1 steel enclosure. 1. Use NEMA 3R in wet locations 2. Use NEMA 4X in corrosive locations. B. Covers:Continuous hinge,held closed by flush latch operable by key C. Furnish interior metal panel for mounting terminal blocks and electrical components;finish with white enamel. D. Provide wire management systems,terminal strips,and partitions as required for complete functioning of the system. E. Enclosure Finish:Manufacturer's standard enamel June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 7 of 14 Raceway and B xes for Electrical Systems SECTION 260533 G. ProJvide receptacles for the respective power systems as indicated on the drawings. Receptacles shall meet the requirements of the Wiring Devices specifications. 2.10 WIREWAY A. Wireways shall be of steel construction general purpose for indoor spaces and rain tight for outdoor applications with knockouts. B. Knockouts: Manufacturer's standard. C. Size:as indicated on Drawings. D. Co1er: Hinged cover with full gaskets. E. Fitti gs: Lay-in type with removable top, bottom,and side;captive screws. F. Fini h: Rust inhibiting primer coating with gray enamel finish. 2.11 OUTLET BOXES A. Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: 1. NEMA OS 1 2. Material:galvanized steel. 3. 4"x4",2"deep, unless noted otherwise 4. Concentric knockouts 5. Luminaire and Equipment Supporting Boxes: Rated for weight of equipment supported;furnish 1/2 inch male fixture studs where required. 6. Concrete Ceiling Boxes:Concrete type. B. Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes: NEMA OS 2. C. Cast Boxes: NEMA FB 1,Type FD,aluminum or cast feralloy. Furnish gasketed cover by box manufacturer. Furnish threaded hubs. D. Wal Plates for Finished Areas:As specified in Section 26 27 26. E. Wall Plates for Unfinished Areas: Furnish gasketed cover. F. Outlet box accessories as required for each installation,including mounting brackets,wallboard hangers, mud rings extension rings,fixture studs,cable clamps and metal straps for supporting outlet boxes, compatible with outlet boxes being used and meeting requirements of individual situations. G. Provide multi-gang outlets of single box design. Sectional boxes are not acceptable. Provide outlet boxes of sufficient volume to accommodate the number of conductors entering the box in accordance with the requirements of NEC,and not less than 1-1/2 inch deep unless shallower boxes are required by structural conditions and are approved by the NE. H. Prqvide deep type cast metal weatherproof exterior outlet wiring boxes of the type,shape and size, inclding depth of box,with threaded conduit ends,cast metal face plate with spring-hinged waterproof ca suitably configured for each application,including face plate gasket and fasteners. Provide PVC type outlet boxes only in corrosive areas rated as NEMA 4X. June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 6 of 14 Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems SECTION 260533 C. Use LFMC for all exterior vibrating equipment loads and in pump rooms that contain large quantities of mechanical and plumbing piping in the vicinity of the flex conduit. 2.7 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING(EMT) A. Product Description: 1. ANSI C80.3 2. Material:galvanized tubing,manufactured from mild steel 3. Continuously welded seems 4. Uniform wall thickness and cross section 5. Manufacturer applied lubricating and corrosion retarding coating applied to interior of conduit B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: 1. NEMA FB 1 2. Material:zinc plated steel 3. Concrete tight 4. Connectors and couplings:compression type. 5. Expansion Fittings:OZ Type TX 2.8 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT A. Product Description: NEMA TC 2;Schedule 40 and 80 PVC. 1. Schedule 40 PVC may be used where buried or embedded. 2. Use schedule 80 PVC conduit for any exposed exterior or interior applications requiring corrosive resistant PVC conduit such as pool pump rooms. B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA TC 3. 2.9 SURFACE METAL RACEWAY A. Surface metal raceway shall be factory pre-assembled galvanized steel complete including bases, removable covers, receptacles,end plates,elbows,connectors and fittings. B. Size shall be as shown on the Drawings. 1. The length shown on electrical drawings is diagrammatic only and is not accurate for fabrication of raceway Sections. 2. Refer to architectural plans and elevations for furniture and casework details and size to match the length of the furniture,cabinets, casework,work benches,and/or shelving at which the raceway will be installed. 3. Coordinate with owner and general contractor to verify that raceway lengths match furniture, casework,and/or laboratory shop drawings before ordering. C. Finish shall be ANSl-61 gray enamel D. Covers shall be field removable by use of a standard screwdriver,without marring the extrusion or cover finish. Raceway with two covers must allow each cover to be removed separately without access into the compartment(s)enclosed by the other cover. E. Provide a permanent, integral,grounded metallic dividing barrier to isolate the wiring compartments in the multi-outlet raceway system where raceway is used for power and communications. Provide divider with fittings that maintain the separation of the raceway wiring compartments. F. Provide device brackets for mounting standard single-gang or two-gang devices within the raceway system. Devices shall have the capacity of mounting flush or in conjunction with device faceplates June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 5 of 14 Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems SECTION 260533 E. Concealed Dry Interior Locations: 1. Provide rigid steel conduit,intermediate metal conduit,or electrical metallic tubing. 2. Provide sheet-metal boxes. F. Exposed Dry Interior Locations: 1. Provide rigid steel conduit below 10 feet,and rigid steel,intermediate metal,or electrical metallic tubing above 10 feet. 2. Provide sheet-metal boxes. 2.3 METAL ONDUIT A. Rigi. Steel Conduit: 1. ANSI C80.1. 2. Material:galvanized tubing, manufactured from mild steel. 3. ' Continuously welded seems. 4. Uniform wall thickness and cross section. 5. � Manufacturer applied lubricating and corrosion retarding coating applied to interior of conduit. B. Rigii Aluminum Conduit: 1. ANSI C80.5. 2. Continuously welded seems 3. ', Uniform wall thickness and cross section C. Inter mediate Metal Conduit(IMC): Rigid steel. D. Fitti gs and Conduit Bodies: 1. NEMA FB 1 2. Material to match conduit. 3. Couplings and connectors:threaded 4. ! Expansion Fittings:OZ Type DX,concrete tight, provide for 3/"movement in all directions and.or 30 degrees deflection in any direction 2.4 PVC CO A TED METAL CONDUIT A. Proluct Description: NEMA RN 1; rigid steel conduit with external PVC coating,20 mil thick. B. Fittii gs and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB 1;steel fittings with external PVC coating to match conduit. 2.5 FLEXIB E METAL CONDUIT A. Pro.uct Description: Interlocked steel construction. B. Fittings: NEMA FB 1. C. FM shall be used in the following locations 1. For lighting whips 2. , For connections to vibrating equipment 2.6 LIQUID TIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT A. Pr..uct Description: Interlocked steel construction with PVC jacket. B. Fittings: NEMA FB 1. June 02,2021 ' KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 4 of 14 Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems SECTION 260533 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to the requirements of the specifications,products by the following manufacturers may be used for raceways and boxes. UL listed substitutions that are compliant with these specifications are acceptable provided compliance with all specification requirements are clearly indicated on the submittal. 1. Apleton 2. Carlon Electrical Products 3. Hubbell Wiring Devices 4. Thomas&Betts Corp. 5. Walker Systems Inc. 6. The Wiremold Co. 7. Wheatland Tube Company 8. Allied Tube&Conduit 9. BIA 10. Cantex 11. Southwire 12. Eastern 13. Pass&Seymour 14. Hoffman 2.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Provide raceway and boxes as specified below for power,lighting,communications,fire alarm,access control/security,controls,and other special systems. 1. Provide raceway and boxes for all building wiring,equipment;lighting;wiring devices; communications equipment and outlets;fire alarm equipment,appliances,and devices;access control/security points;controls points;and other special systems shown on plans. 2. Provide raceway and boxes at other locations as required for splices,taps,wire pulling,equipment connections,and compliance with regulatory requirements. Raceway and boxes are shown in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Provide raceway to complete wiring system. B. Underground: 1. Provide wrapped rigid steel conduit for 1"or larger elbows and where entering and exiting slabs or ground. 2. Provide thick-wall nonmetallic conduit for straight runs that are buried and/or in concrete. 3. Provide cast metal boxes or polymer concrete boxes. Coordinate with engineer. 4. Provide boxes for utility service conduit or cabling per utility provider's specifications 5. Nonmetallic hand-holes may be used for site lighting and controls circuits 6. Provide rigid steel conduit within 5 ft of building foundation. C. In Concrete: 1. Provide wrapped rigid steel conduit for 1"or larger elbows and where entering or exiting concrete. 2. Provide thick-wall nonmetallic conduit for straight runs in concrete. 3. Provide cast metal boxes. Nonmetallic may be used with engineer approval. 4. Use concrete tight,masonry rated boxes and fittings were installed in concrete,stone,brick,or CMU. D. Exterior Above Grade and Wet/Damp Interior Locations: 1. Provide rigid steel conduit and fittings. 2. Provide cast metal outlet,junction,and pull boxes boxes,gasketed, rated NEMA 3R min. June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 3 of 14 Raceway and B.:xes for Electrical Systems SECTION 260533 10. Enclosures and cabinets 11. Handholes. B. Ma ufacturer's Installation Instructions:Submit application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Pro'uct testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, hansling, protection,examination, preparation,and installation of Product. 1.4 CLOSEO T SUBMITTALS A. Projct Record Documents: 1. Record actual routing of conduits larger than 2 inch. 2. Record actual locations and mounting heights of outlet, pull,and junction boxes larger than 4x4. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of outlet boxes for equipment connected under Section 26 05 03. B. Coordinate mounting heights,orientation and locations of outlets mounted above counters,benches, and backsplashes. 1.6 QUALIFI ATIONS A. Ma ufacturer:Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum thr e years documented experience. B. Ins her: A state licensed electrician with documented experience installing all equipment specified here in s all directly supervise all work. Where noted in the specifications, required by core,or required by the manufacturer, installer shall be a manufacturer trained and/or certified installer of the specific product to e installed. 1.7 QUALI ASSURANCE A. Lis ng and Labeling: Where required,all electrical components,devices,and accessories shall be listed an labeled as defined in NFPA 70,Article 100,by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having juri diction and marked for the intended use. Testing agency shall be UL unless noted otherwise or pre- ap roved by owner and AHJ. B. Fir Rated Assemblies:Tested and listed per all requirements of ASTM and UL to achieve the fire resistant rating of the wall(1 hour minimum).Refer to architectural plans for all locations of fire rated floor, roof,and wall assemblies. 1.8 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Store in clean,dry space located above grade and protect from dirt,water,construction debris,traffic, freeze,and where applicable,deterioration from sun light. B. Do not apply firestopping materials when temperature of substrate material and ambient air is below 60 degrees F. C. Maintain this minimum temperature before,during,and for minimum 3 days after installation of firestopping materials. June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 2 of 14 SECTION 260533 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Conduit and tubing 2. Surface raceways 3. Wireways 4. Outlet boxes 5. Pull and junction boxes 6. Enclosures and Cabinets B. Related Sections: 1. The requirements of this specification shall be followed when installing raceway for all mechanical, controls,electrical,and special systems work covered by other specifications. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute: 1. ANSI C80.1 -Rigid Steel Conduit,Zinc Coated. 2. ANSI C80.3-Specification for Electrical Metallic Tubing,Zinc Coated. 3. ANSI C80.5-Aluminum Rigid Conduit-(ARC). B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1. NEMA 250-Enclosures for Electrical Equipment(1000 Volts Maximum). 2. NEMA FB 1 -Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes,and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and Cable Assemblies. 3. NEMA OS 1 -Sheet Steel Outlet Boxes,Device Boxes,Covers,and Box Supports. 4. NEMA OS 2-Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes,Covers,and Box Supports. 5. NEMA RN 1 -Polyvinyl Chloride(PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit. 6. NEMA TC 2-Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride(PVC)Tubing and Conduit. 7. NEMA TC 3-PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing. C. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1. Products shall be listed where required by the NEC 2. Fire-stopping products shall be listed. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data:Submit catalog data showing all standard features,dimensions,weights, listings and product labels,and clearly indicating which optional features will be provided for the following items: 1. Metal conduit 2. Flexible metal conduit. 3. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit. 4. Nonmetallic conduit. 5. Raceway fittings and supports. 6. Conduit bodies. 7. Surface raceway. 8. Wireway. 9. Pull and junction boxes. June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 1 of 14 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems SECTION 260529 6. Sheet Metal: Provide sheet metal screws. 7. Wood Elements:Provide wood screws. C. Ins:rts: 1. Install inserts for placement in concrete forms. 2. Install inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams. 3. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4 inches. 4. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface. 5. Where inserts are omitted,drill through concrete slab from below and provide through-bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut. D. Su pports: 1. Fabricate supports from structural steel or formed steel channel. Install hexagon head bolts to present neat appearance with adequate strength and rigidity. Install spring lock washers under nuts. 2. Install surface mounted boxes,cabinets,and panelboards with minimum of four anchors. 3. Install surface mounted device boxes with a minimum of two anchors,secure boxes in stud walls to the studs on both sides of the box 4. In wet and damp locations install steel channel supports to stand cabinets and panelboards 1 inch off wall. 5. Support vertical conduit at every floor. 3.3 INSTAL A TION-EQUIPMENT BASES AND SUPPORTS A. Pro ide housekeeping pads of 3000 PSI concrete, minimum 3-1/2 inches thick and extending 6 inches be end supported equipment. B. Usipg templates furnished with equipment,install anchor bolts,and accessories for mounting and andhoring equipment. C. Co struct supports of steel members or formed steel channel.Brace and fasten with flanges bolted to str cture. 3.4 PROTE TION OF FINISHED WORK A. Pro ect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation. END OF SECTION June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 4 of 4 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems SECTION 260529 C. Provide heavier gage channel where the weight of the equipment exceeds the ratings of the products specified above. D. Steel Pipe Straps 1. Provide straps from the same manufacturer and of the same material and finish as channel 2. Bolt head combination slot and hex head with square nut 3. Conduit size engraved in strap for easy identifications 4. Design load of 5001bs min. 2.4 SPRING STEEL CLIPS A. Product Description: Mounting hole and screw closure. 2.5 BOX SUPPORTS A. Outlet boxes 1. Provide between stud box mounting brackets secured to the two adjacent studs. 2. Provide two self tapping screws on each side to secure bracket to stud 3. Where two studs are not available, provide far side box support strap B. Pull and Junction boxes 1. Provide threaded hangers and channel supports for pull and junction boxes suspended from ceiling PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Remove incompatible materials affecting bond. B. Obtain permission from Architect/Engineer before using powder-actuated anchors. C. Obtain permission from Architect/Engineer before drilling or cutting structural members. 3.2 INSTALLATION-HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. General Requirements 1. Support raceways using galvanized steel or malleable iron straps,channel,and/or beam/pipe clamps as appropriate. 2. Install conduit and raceway support and spacing in accordance with NEC. a. Provide supports at all boxes,elec equipment,and loads b. Provide supports at code required intervals along raceways. 3. Support independent of other systems. Do not fasten supports to pipes,ducts, mechanical equipment,or conduit. 4. Install multiple conduit runs on common hangers. Provide spare capacity on support elements where more than three conduits are grouped together. B. Anchors and Fasteners: 1. Concrete Structural Elements: Provide precast inserts,expansion anchors and preset inserts. 2. Steel Structural Elements: Provide beam clamps,spring steel clips,and welded fasteners. 3. Concrete Surfaces:Provide self-drilling anchors and expansion anchors. 4. Hollow Masonry,Plaster,and Gypsum Board Partitions: Provide toggle bolts and hollow wall fasteners. 5. Solid Masonry Walls: Provide expansion anchors and preset inserts. June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 3 of 4 Hangers and Suports for Electrical Systems SECTION 260529 1.6 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification. B. Protect from weather and construction traffic,dirt,water,chemical,and mechanical damage, by storing in original packaging. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUIT SUPPORTS A. Manufacturers: 1. Allied Tube&Conduit Corp. 2. Electroline Manufacturing Company 3. O-ZGedneyCo. 4. Thomas&Betts 5. Substitutions:With engineer approval. B. Hanger Rods:Threaded high tensile strength galvanized carbon steel with free running threads. C. Beam Clamps: Malleable Iron,with tapered hole in base and back to accept either bolt or hanger rod. Set screw: hardened steel. D. Corduit clamps for trapeze hangers: Galvanized steel,notched to fit trapeze with single bolt and nut to tighten. E. Co duit straps-general purpose: 1. One hole zinc plated steel for surface mounted conduits 1"or less. 2. Two hole zinc plated steel for surface mounted conduits greater than 1" 2.2 CABLE TIES A. Hig strength nylon temperature rated to 185 degrees F. B. Seli Locking 2.3 FORMEm STEEL CHANNEL A. Ma ufacturers: 1. Allied Tube&Conduit Corp. 2. B-Line Systems 3. i Midland Ross Corporation, Electrical Products Division 4. Thomas&Betts 5. Unistrut Corp. 6. '', Substitutions:With engineer approval. B. Pros uct Description: 1. Galvanized 12 gage thick steel. 2. Holes 1-1/2 to 2 inches on center. 3. Provide angle brackets and other accessories from the same manufacture and from the same materials with the same finish June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 2 of 4 SECTION 260529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. section Includes: 1. Conduit supports. 2. Formed steel channel. 3. Spring steel clips. 4. Equipment bases and supports. 1.2 REFERENCES A. FM Global: 1. FM-Approval Guide,A Guide to Equipment, Materials&Services Approved By Factory Mutual Research For Property Conservation. B. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 70-National Electrical Code. C. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: D. Intertek Testing Services(Warnock Hersey Listed): 1. WH-Certification Listings. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Hangers and Supports:Submit manufacturers catalog data including load capacity. B. Design Data: Indicate load carrying capacity of trapeze hangers and hangers and supports. 1.4 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer:Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Supplier: Authorized distributor C. Installer: A licensed electrician with documented experience installing all equipment specified here in shall directly supervise all work. Where noted in the specifications or required by the manufacturer, installer shall be a manufacturer trained and/or certified installer of the specific product to be installed. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: All components required for a complete functioning system as described here in shall be obtained through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Listing and Labeling: Where required,all electrical components,devices,and accessories shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,Article 100,by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and marked for the intended use. Testing agency shall be UL unless noted otherwise or pre- approved by owner and AHJ. June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 1 of 4 Grounding and :onding for Electrical Systems SECTION 260526 physical lub1'ect to abuse or environmental deteoration such as exterior mounted exposed below ceiling,etc. 4. (.round system using separate insulated grounding conductor installed with every feeder and branch circuit conductors in conduits. Terminate each end on suitable lug,bus,or bushing. 5. 'pize grounding conductors in accordance with NEC. Install from grounding bus of serving panel to round bus of served panel,grounding screw of receptacles, lighting fixture housing, light switch outlet boxes,equipment ground terminal,or metal enclosures of equipment. 6. "aceway systems shall be made continuous from source to load. .. Provide bonding jumpers were raceway system is inherently discontinuous such as where conduits terminate at cable trays. . Raceway shall be made continuous using mechanical connections that have been securely tightened using the appropriate tool. Hand tight is not acceptable. 7. "ermanently attach equipment and grounding conductors prior to energizing equipment. 8. "ipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors 9. Provide grounding bushings for conduit terminations at panels,electrical equipment,enclosures,etc. C. Bondin! Straps and Jumpers: 1. I stall in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance, except where routed through short I-ngths of conduit. 2. ::onding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure,taking care not to penetrate any ..djacent parts. 3. ::onding to Equipment Mounted on Vibrations Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install so vibration is ot transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. 4. se exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations, but if a disconnect-type connection is equired,use a bolted clamp. 5. :ond the following components to the grounding electrode System neutral at service entrance and transformer secondaries ,P. Service equipment enclosures,exposed non-current carrying metal parts of electrical equipment Metal raceway systems,cable trays,auxiliary gutters, meter fittings, boxes,cable armor,cable sheath �. Ground bus in electrical rooms and IT rooms D. Condu for Terminations and Connections: 1. "ipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors. 2. nderground Connections:Welded connectors,except at test wells and as otherwise indicated. 3. onnections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors 4. onnections to structural Steel:Welded connectors. E. Install oranch circuits feeding isolated ground receptacles with separate insulated grounding conductor, conne.ted only at isolated ground receptacle,ground terminals,and at ground bus of serving panel. 3.5 FIELD UALITY CONTROL A. Perfor continuity testing in accordance with IEEE 142. B. When i proper grounding is found on receptacles,check receptacles in entire project and correct. Perform retest. END OF SECTION June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 4 of 4 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems SECTION 260526 2.3 MECHANICAL CONNECTORS A. Description: Bronze connectors,suitable for grounding and bonding applications, in configurations required for particular installation. B. Listed and labeled by a nationally recognized testing laboratory acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used,and for specific types,sizes,and combinations of conductors and other items connected. C. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, bolted pressure-type,with at least two bolts. 2.4 EXOTHERMIC CONNECTIONS A. Product Description: Exothermic welding kits,accessories,and tools for preparing and making permanent field connections between grounding system components. 2.5 GROUND BUS A. Rectangular bars of annealed copper, 12 inch long, 1,4"by 2"in cross section, unless otherwise indicated. B. Provide with manufacturer's insulators to stand ground bus off mounting surface. C. Requirements for electrical switchgear,switchboards,distribution and branch circuit panel ground buses are covered by the specification section that cover said equipment. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify final backfill and compaction has been completed before driving rod electrodes. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove paint,rust,mill oils and surface contaminants at connection points. 3.3 EXISTING WORK A. Modify existing grounding system to maintain continuity to accommodate renovations. B. Extend existing grounding system using materials and methods compatible with existing electrical installations,or as specified. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. Permanently ground and bond the entire light and power system in accordance with NEC, including service equipment,feeders and branch circuits electrical panels,switch and starter enclosures, motor frames, grounding type receptacles,and other exposed non-current carrying metal parts of electrical equipment. B. General Requirements 1. Install in accordance with IEEE 142, NEC requirements,and manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Install grounding and bonding conductors concealed from view. 3. Routing of grounding electrode,special systems ground conductors,and other grounds not routed in feeders or branch circuit raceways shall be installed in a dedicated metal conduit in all locations June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 3 of 4 Grounding and Iiinding for Electrical Systems SECTION 260526 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide grounding materials conforming to requirements of NEC, IEEE 142,and UL labeled. B. Listing .nd Labeling: Where required,all electrical components,devices,and accessories shall be liste and lab ded as defined in NFPA 70,Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdic on and marked for the intended use. Testing agency shall be UL unless noted otherwise or pre- approv:d by owner and AHJ. C. Source Limitations: All components required for a complete functioning system as described here in shall be obta ned through one source from a single manufacturer. D. Maintai one copy of each document on site. 1.6 DELIV:RY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Accept'; aterials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification. B. Store i clean,dry space located above grade and protect from dirt,water,construction debris,traffic, chemic:I and mechanical damage,freeze,and where applicable,deterioration from sun light. Store in original packaging where possible. C. Do not ieliver items to project before time of installation. Limit shipment of bulk and multiple-use materials to qua ities needed for immediate installation. 1.7 COORII NATION A. Compl:te grounding and bonding of building reinforcing steel prior to concrete placement. PART 2-PRO DUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Produc s that are compliant with these specifications and produced by the following manufacturers are accept ble 1. opperweld, Inc 2. rico, Inc. 3. LSCO Corporation 4. -Z Gedney Co. 5. homas&Betts, Electrical. B. Substit tions:With engineer approval. 2.2 GROUDING� AND BONDING WIRE A. Materi I: 1. atch building wiring material specifications 2. xcept where noted bare,match building wiring insulation. 3. inimum requirement: 600V,stranded copper. 4, did copper may be used for#8 AWG and smaller. B. Groun ing Straps:Tin plated copper braided cable, 1"thick x 0.1"thick(min),#1 awg,with 3/<°one hole conne tions on both ends(note:other connection types may be noted on plans) June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 2 of 4 SECTION 260526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Wire. 2. Mechanical connectors. 3. Exothermic connections. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers: 1. IEEE 142-Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems. 2. IEEE 1100-Recommended Practice for Powering and Grounding Electronic Equipment. B. International Electrical Testing Association: 1. NETA ATS-Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems. C. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 70-National Electrical Code. 2. NFPA 99-Standard for Health Care Facilities. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data:Submit catalog data showing all standard features,dimensions,weights, listings and product labels, material types,finishes and clearly indicating which optional features will be provided. 1. Include amperage ratings,voltage,over-current protective device ratings,AIC ratings. 2. Where multiple sizes are listed, indicate sizes to be used. 3. Where multiple products are shown on the same page,indicate which products to be used. B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit for active electrodes. C. Manufacturer's Certificate:Certify, Products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.4 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer:Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Installer: A licensed electrician with documented experience installing all equipment specified here in shall directly supervise all work. Where noted in the specifications or required by the manufacturer, installer shall be a manufacturer trained and/or certified installer of the specific product to be installed. C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An agency,with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated,that is a member of a nationally recognized testing agency and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 1 of 4 Conductors and ables 600V and Less SECTION 260519 B. Neutral onductors:White.Use gray for 277/480V neutrals were required by AHJ.When two or more neutral are located in one conduit, individually identify each with proper circuit number. C. Branch' ircuit Conductors: Install three or four wire home runs with each phase uniquely color coded. D. Feeder ircuit Conductors: Uniquely color code each phase. E. GroundConductors: 1. `nor 6 AWG and smaller:Green. 2. ',or 4 AWG and larger: Identify with green tape at both ends and visible points including junction oxes. 3.6 FIELD 10UALITY CONTROL A. Before final acceptance,the Contractor shall make voltage,insulation,and load tests,necessary to demon-trate to the Owner's representative the satisfactory installation and proper performance of all circuits B. All ter inations rated 60A or larger shall be made using a torque wrench and the results recorded in a log to be pro ided to owner with closeout documents. C. Test feder conductor insulation. Insulation-resistance test shall be conducted per NETA—Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems. 1. est results below 50 megohms shall be cause for rejection of the wiring installation. 2. "eplace and retest all non-compliant conductors. 3. "rovide written log of testing results to owner with closeout documents. END OF SECTION June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 7 of 7 Conductors and Cables 600V and Less SECTION 260519 circuit ends and then bolting the proper pairs of lugs together. First one layer of No.33 scotch tape reversed(sticky side out),then a layer of rubber tape,then two layers of No.33 half-lapped. G. Terminal Lugs 1. Install terminal lugs on ends of 600 volt wires unless lugs are furnished on connected device,such as circuit breakers. 2. Size lugs in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations terminating wire sizes. Install 2-hole type lugs to connect wires 4 AWG and larger to copper bus bars. 3. For terminal lugs fastened together such as on motors,transformers,and other apparatus,or when space between studs is small enough that lugs can turn and touch each other,insulate for dielectric strength of 2-1/2 times normal potential of circuit. H. Voltage Drop 1. No conductor smaller than No. 12 wire shall be used for lighting purposes. In the case of"home runs"over 50'length(100'for 277 volt)no conductor smaller than a No. 10 wire shall be used. 2. Voltage drop on feeders and branch circuits shall not exceed NEC requirement. 3. Voltage drop on control circuits shall not exceed the requirements of the equipment that the wiring serves. I. Control Wiring 1. Run in separate conduits from building wiring. 2. Departures from the sizes specified in Part 2 shall be made only in those cases in which the National Electrical Code requires the use of larger conductors. 3. The Contractor may, if he deems it necessary or advisable, use larger sized conductors than those shown. J. Wiring Within An Enclosure: 1. Contractor shall bundle AC and DC wiring separately within an enclosure. 2. The Contractor shall utilize panel wire-ways when they are provided. 3. Where wireways are not provided,the Contractor shall neatly tag and bundle wires and secure to sub-panel at a minimum of every three inches. K. Separate neutral conductors shall be provided for each phase of the same size for 120V/277V single-phase application for heavy electrical loads,computer loads, loads fed from isolated transformers,lab equipment, clinic equipment,dedicated circuits,unless noted otherwise on drawings. L. Where terminations of cables that are installed under this Section are to be made by others,provide pigtail of adequate length for neat,trained and bundles connections, minimum 5 feet at each location, unless noted otherwise on drawings. M. Do not band any conductor either permanently or temporarily during installation to radii less than four times the outer diameter of 600-volt insulated conductors. 3.5 WIRE COLOR A. General: 1. For wire sizes 10 AWG and smaller,install wire colors in accordance with the following: a. Unique color coding for each phase. b. Separate color coding for 208V and 480V. c. Match the existing building color code system. 2. For wire sizes 8 AWG and larger, use black insulated phase conductors and identify wire with colored tape at terminals,splices and boxes.Colors as above: June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 6 of 7 Conductors and fables 600V and Less SECTION 260519 2. do not install the conductors until the raceway system is complete and properly cleaned. 3. ull conductors together where more than one is being installed in a raceway. 4. se UL listed pulling compound or lubricant,when necessary;compound must not deteriorate ônductor and insulation. 5. o not use a pulling means, including fish tape,cable or rope,which can damage the raceway. 6. I stall wire in raceway after interior of building has been physically protected from the weather and all echanical work likely to injure conductors has been completed. 7. lace an equal number of conductors for each phase of a circuit in same raceway. 8. rovide separate conduit or raceway for line and load conductors of motor starters,safety disconnect itches,and similar devices. Those devices shall not share the same raceway. 9. II conduits shall contain a green grounding conductor. Conduit,wireways,or boxes shall not be sed as the equipment grounding conductor. D. Cable: 1. Protect exposed cable from damage. 2. Support cables above accessible ceiling, using spring metal clips or appropriate cable ties to support cables from structure.Do not rest cable on ceiling panels. 3. Use suitable cable fittings and connectors. E. Direct urial Cable: 1. rench and backfill for direct burial cable installation. . Install warning tape along entire length of irect burial cable,within 3 inches of grade. 2. Use suitable direct burial cable fittings and connectors. F. Wiring ponnections and Terminations 1. listaIl splices,taps and terminations,which have equivalent-or-better mechanical strength and insulation as the conductor. Make splices,taps and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors ithout perceptible temperature rise. 2. eep conductor splices and taps accessible and to a minimum. Splice branch circuits only in ..ccessible junction or outlet boxes. Where terminations of cables that are installed under this ection are to be made by others, provide pigtail of adequate length for neat,trained and bundles onnections, minimum 5 feet at each location,unless noted otherwise on drawings. 3. '•plices below grade shall only be in handholes or manholes and shall be made watertight with epoxy resin type splicing kits similar to Scotchcast. 4. I se splice,tap and termination connectors,which are compatible with the conductor material. 5. ake splices,taps,and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors with no perceptible Temperature rise. 6. I ape un-insulated conductors and connectors with electrical tape to 150 percent of the insulation alue of conductor and label as spare. 7. ower and Lighting Circuits: :. Use solderless pressure connectors with insulating covers for copper wire splices and taps,8 AWG and larger. •. For 10 AWG and smaller, use insulated spring wire connectors with plastic caps on lighting and receptacle circuits. c. Use split bolt connectors for copper wire splices and taps,6 AWG and larger. 8. Controls Circuits a. Control circuit conductors shall terminate at terminal blocks only. Control cable shall never be spliced except the final connection to field devices. b. If stranded conductors used for#10 or smaller for controls, FA,security,etc, install crimp on fork terminals for device terminations. Do not place bare stranded conductors directly under screws. 9. Connections for all wire sizes in motor terminal boxes where the motor leads are furnished with crimped-on lugs shall be made by installing ring type compression terminals on the motor branch June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 5 of 7 Conductors and Cables 600V and Less SECTION 260519 2.5 TERMINATIONS A. Terminal Lugs for Wires 6 AWG and Smaller:Solderless,compression type copper. B. Lugs for Wires 4 AWG and Larger: Color keyed,compression type copper,with insulating sealing collars. C. Control wiring: Use insulated terminals for control wiring. Use flange spade compression terminal for termination of stranded conductors at wiring devices, including grounding connections. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify interior of building has been protected from weather. B. Verify mechanical work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed. C. Verify raceway installation is complete and supported. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway before installing wire. B. Clean conductor surfaces before installing lugs and connectors. 3.3 EXISTING WORK A. Remove exposed abandoned wire and cable,including abandoned wire and cable above accessible ceiling finishes. Patch surfaces where removed cables pass through building finishes. B. Disconnect abandoned circuits and remove circuit wire and cable. Remove abandoned boxes when wire and cable servicing boxes is abandoned and removed. Install blank cover for abandoned boxes not removed. C. Provide access to existing wiring connections remaining active and requiring access.Modify installation or install access panel. D. Extend existing circuits using materials and methods compatible with existing electrical installations,or as specified. E. Clean and repair existing wire and cable remaining or wire and cable to be reinstalled. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes,equipment,and panelboards. B. Install electrical cable,wire and connectors as indicated,in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions,the applicable requirements of NEC and the National Electrical Contractors Association's "Standard of Installation",and as required to ensure that products serve the intended functions. C. Wiring Installation in Raceways 1. Wire and cable shall be pulled into clean dry conduit. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended values for maximum pulling tension. June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 4 of 7 Conductors and Cables 600V and Less SECTION 260519 1. ETNA 2. A merican Insulated Wire Corp. 3. 1 olonial Wire Model 4. :Incore Wire Model 5. Leneral Cable Co.Model 6. "epublic Wire Model 7. "ome Cable Model 8. '.ervice Wire Co.Model 9. ',outhwire Model 10. 'uperior Essex Model 11. %ubstitutions:With engineer approval. B. Product Description:Single conductor insulated wire. 1. Conductor:Soft drawn copper,98%conductivity. 2. Insulation Voltage Rating:600 volts. 3. Insulation Temperature Rating:90 degrees C. 4. Insulation Material:Thermoplastic.Type THHN/THWN U.N.O. Use XHHW where install in conduit underground. C. Grounding conductors,where insulated,shall be colored solid green or identified with green color as require by the NEC. Conductors intended as a neutral shall be colored solid white,or identified as required by the NEC. All motor or equipment power wiring shall be colored according to Section 26 05 53, Electrical Identification. 2.3 NONM TALLIC-SHEATHED CABLE A. Manuf.cturers: 1. iiiamond Wire&Cable Co. 2. ssex Group Inc. 3. eneral Cable Co. 4. '.ubstitutions:With engineer approval. B. Conduitor:Copper. C. lnsulati.n Voltage Rating:600 volts. 2.4 WIRIN' CONNECTORS A. Provid: factory-fabricated,metal connectors of the size, rating,material,type and class as required by manuf.cturer of the equipment and the NEC. The following types,classes, kinds and styles should be used only w ere appropriate and as noted 1. .olderless Pressure Connectors 2. i rimp 3. hreaded 4. Insulated Spring Wire Connectors with plastic caps for 10 AWG and smaller 5. Split bolt parallel connectors 6. ire-insulated multi-tap connectors B. Wiring connectors shall be insulated to 600V. Conducting components shall match conducting material of wiring(copper, unless noted otherwise). June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 3 of 7 Conductors and Cables 600V and Less SECTION 260519 of the International Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory(NRTL), and is acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide wiring materials located in plenums with peak optical density not greater than 0.5,average optical density not greater than 0.15,and flame spread not greater than 5 feet(1.5 m)when tested in accordance with NFPA 262. B. Perform Work in accordance with all applicable city,state,and federal requirements. C. Maintain one copy of each document on site. D. Source Limitations: All components required for a complete functioning system as described here in shall be obtained through one source from a single manufacturer. E. Listing and Labeling: Where required,all electrical components,devices,and accessories shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and marked for the intended use. Testing agency shall be UL unless noted otherwise or pre- approved by owner and AHJ. 1.7 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify field measurements are as indicated on Drawings. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Where wire and cable destination is indicated and routing is not shown,determine routing and lengths required. B. Wire and cable routing indicated is approximate unless dimensioned. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Product Requirements: Provide products as follows: 1. Solid conductor for feeders and branch circuits 10 AWG and smaller. 2. Stranded conductors for feeders and branch circuits 8 AWG and larger 3. Stranded conductors for control circuits. 4. Conductor not smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits. 5. Conductor not smaller than 14 AWG for control circuits. 6. Increase wire size in branch circuits to limit voltage drop to a maximum of 3 percent. B. Wiring Methods: Provide the following wiring methods: 1. Concealed and Exposed Dry,Wet,or Damp Interior Locations: Use only building wire,Type THHN/THWN insulation, in raceway. 2. Exterior Locations: Use only building wire,Type THHNITHWN insulation,in raceway. 3. Underground Locations: Use only building wire,Type XHHW insulation,in raceway. 2.2 BUILDING WIRE A. Manufacturers: June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 2 of 7 SECTION 260519 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 600V AND LESS PART 1 -GENE'- L 1.1 SUMM°RY A. Section includes building wire and cable; nonmetallic-sheathed cable;direct burial cable;service entrance cable; .rmored cable;metal clad cable;and wiring connectors and connections. 1.2 REFE'ENCES A. Interna lanai Electrical Testing Association: 1. ETA ATS-Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and '.ystems. B. National Fire Protection Association: 1. FPA 70-National Electrical Code. 2. FPA 262-Standard Method of Test for Flame Travel and Smoke of Wires and Cables for Use in ir-Handling Spaces. C. Unde riters Laboratories, Inc.: 1. L 1277-Standard for Safety for Electrical Power and Control Tray Cables with Optional Optical- iber Members. 1.3 SUBMI TALS A. Product Data: Submit catalog data showing all standard features,dimensions,weights, listings and product labels, aterial types,finishes and clearly indicating which optional features will be provided. 1. Include amperage and voltage ratings. 2. ' here multiple sizes are listed, indicate sizes to be used. 3. here multiple products are shown on the same page,indicate which products to be used. 1.4 CLOS OUT SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and circuits. B. Field uality-Control Test Reports: Report certified by field testing agent indicating results of performance testing required in Part 3 and/or on plans. 1. orque log 2. nsulation test results 1.5 QUALI (CATIONS A. Manuf cturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years ocumented experience. B. Install r: A licensed electrician with documented experience installing all equipment specified here in shall direct) supervise all work. Where noted in the specifications or required by the manufacturer, installer shall be a m nufacturer trained and/or certified installer of the specific product to be installed. C. Testin Agency: An agency with the documented experience and properly calibrated,fully functioning equipnlent to conduct the testing required by the specifications, plans and code,that is a member company June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 1 of 7 Electrical General Conditions SECTION 260000 5. Do not block equipment control panels with lighting, raceways,structural elements or other equipment. Orient equipment so that control panels do not face structural elements or other equipment that will restrict access. 6. Coordinate with engineer before installation if any of the above conditions can not be met due to undiscovered site conditions or if locations shown on plans are field determined to be in conflict with equipment and structures called for on other plans. J. Cutting and Patching 1. Make opening through masonry and concrete by core drilling in acceptable locations. Restore openings to original condition to match remaining surrounding materials. 2. Provide sleeves for penetrations through floors and walls 3. Seal all openings using appropriate materials 4. Where existing conditions are not documented,perform ground penetrating radar scan of structural element to be cut. END OF SECTION June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 10 of 10 Electrical Gener I Conditions SECTION 260000 C. Ground ng and Bonding 1. II circuits shall be provided with NEC compliant green ground conductor sized per NEC 250, UNO. 2. II equipment shall be properly bonded. 3. rovide grounding electrodes as specified on plans and as required by code. D. Racewys, Boxes and Enclosures 1. Provide complete raceway systems from source to all loads with dedicated supports for each raceway element. 2. Provide all required back boxes and supports for wiring devices,telecommunications,fire alarm, access control,controls equipment,alarms,sensors,etc. 3. Provide pull box at appropriate locations for all power and special systems raceways whether shown on plans or not. E. Electric I connections and terminations. 1. ake all connections and terminations within the power distribution system and between the istribution system and the equipment served. 2. ake conduit connections to vibrating equipment using flexible conduit.Use liquidtight flexible onduit with watertight connectors in damp or wet locations. 3. I stall suitable strain-relief clamps and fittings for cord connections at outlet boxes and equipment onnection boxes. 4. rovide calibrated torque wrenches and screwdrivers and tighten terminals, lugs and bus joints using i . F. Equipment wiring requirements 1. Install disconnect switches,controllers,control stations,and control devices as required for equipment. 2. Install terminal block jumpers to complete equipment wiring requirements. 3. Install interconnecting conduit and wiring between devices and equipment to complete equipment wiring requirements. 4. Install control wiring to interlocks,sensors,and remote operator interfaces provided with equipment G. Identification 1. Provide appropriate labels for all equipment,wiring devices,conductors,cables, box,and enclosures 2. Provide warning signs for electrical equipment and buried circuits. H. Code nd manufacturer requirement compliance 1. nstall work in compliance with the latest edition of the NEC, City and Owner design criteria manuals, nd the authority having jurisdiction. 2. pply,install,connect,erect,use,clean,adjust,and condition materials and equipment as ecommended by the manufacturers in their published literature. 3. II terminals,lugs and bus joints shall be tightened per the manufacturer's torque recommendations. I. Arrang ment and planning 1. �rrange electrical work in neat,well-organized manner. 2. o not block future connection points of electrical service. 3. nstall all electrical work parallel or perpendicular to building lines unless noted otherwise,properly .upported with purpose-designed apparatus,in a neat manner. 4. aintain required NEC working space and dedicated equipment spaces around all electrical -quipment subject to maintenance,testing,or user interface. Coordinate with other trades prior to nstallation. June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 9 of 10 Electrical General Conditions SECTION 260000 2.3 GROUT A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107,factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive,nonstaining,mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time, PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 FIELD APPLIED PAINTING A. Paint electrical equipment as required to match finish of adjacent surfaces or to meet the indicated or specified safety criteria. 3.2 FIELD PROGRAMMING A. Electrical contractor shall be responsible for the coordination and payment of programming for all programmable devices and equipment including, but not limited to,lighting controls,circuit breakers, interfaces with building automation system,power monitoring equipment,etc. B. Where required,the manufacturer of the product shall be engaged to perform the programming. 3.3 EXAMINATION A. If a conflict is found between the specification and plans,notify the Architect or Engineer of the conflict. B. Verify equipment is ready for electrical connection,for wiring,and to be energized. C. Verify existing conditions are as shown on the plans and that adequate space is available for the equipment for installation. 3.4 EXISTING WORK A. Maintain in service existing systems that are required for life safety or ongoing operations during construction. B. Remove exposed abandoned equipment wiring connections,conduit,and boxes, including abandoned connections,conduit,and boxes above accessible ceiling finishes. C. Disconnect abandoned utilization equipment and remove wiring connections.Remove abandoned components when connected raceway is abandoned and removed. Install blank cover for abandoned boxes and enclosures not removed. D. Extend existing equipment connections using materials and methods compatible with existing electrical installations,or as specified. 3.5 INSTALLATION A. The installation requirements shown here are general scope requirements. More detailed information is provided for each of these topics in other specifications and on the plans. B. No foreign systems such as piping,duct work,etc shall be installed above electrical equipment. June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 8 of 10 Electrical Gener.,:I Conditions SECTION 260000 2. rovide dowels for connection to new or existing adjacent slabs 3. 'ad shall be 4"thick and protrude a minimum of 1"beyond the edge of equipment. 4. 4 hamfer top edges of slab 1.13 TEMPRARY CONSTRUCTION POWER AND LIGHTING A. Provith temporary power service per utility company specifications 1. 4 ontractor shall be responsible for securing permission and coordinating temporary service with ��wner. 2. "rovide service feeder from temporary service point to construction trailers and power distribution assemblies to serve power tools and construction equipment. B. Provid panel or assembly containing GFCI receptacles for power tools to be used on site. C. Provid temporary power cables neatly trained and protected from damage. D. Provid temporary lighting throughout area of construction. Install at ceiling level out of way of construction work. PART 2 -PRO II UCTS 2.1 GENE" L REQUIREMENTS A. Equip ent to be installed outdoors, in corrosive or hazardous environments shall be rated for the intended use. B. Compli nce with the requirements of the contract documents shall not relieve the contractor of the respon.ibiliry of providing equipment that is new, properly designed,from a reputable manufacturer,and in full wort ing order. C. If confli ts occur between the specifications and drawings,the higher quality, price or quantity shall be provid:. and installed. D. If there is any question as to quality,size or quantity necessary,the contractor shall provide a written reques for clarification from the Engineer. Contractor shall be responsible for any additional expenses incurreis as a result of the contractor's failure to obtain clarification. E. Detailes product specifications are included in other specification section and on the plans. 2.2 FINIS DES A. Electrical equipment shall have factory-applied painting systems which shall,as a minimum,meet the require'., ents of NEMA 250 corrosion-resistance test. B. Raceways, boxes,supports,etc shall be galvanized:gold,silver,or hot dipped, unless noted otherwise. 1. o not use pre-galvanized products that are formed, cut,or punched after galvanization. 2. 11 o not use hot dip galvanized threaded products. June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 7 of 10 Electrical General Conditions SECTION 260000 I. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete,masonry walls,and other structural components as they are constructed. J. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are behind finished surfaces or otherwise concealed. K. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with architect and structural engineer. L. Obtain and review shop drawings,product data,manufacturer's wiring diagrams,and manufacturer's instructions for equipment furnished under other sections. M. Determine connection locations and requirements. N. Sequence rough-in of electrical connections to coordinate with installation of equipment. 0. Sequence electrical connections to coordinate with start-up of equipment. 1.10 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store in clean,dry space located above grade and protect from dirt,water,construction debris,traffic, freeze,and where applicable,deterioration from sun light. B. Maintain factory wrapping or provide additional canvas or plastic cover for all large electrical equipment. Follow all manufacturer recommendations for humidity and max/min temperatures for storing electrical equipment. 1.11 SAFETY A. The Contractor shall follow all industry standard safety procedures in addition to the requirements of the owner's Project Safety Manual(PSM). 1. The Contractors shall be responsible for training all personnel under their employ in areas concerning safe work habits and construction safety. The Contractor shall continually inform personnel of hazards particular to this project and update the information as the project progresses. 2. The Contractor shall secure all electrical rooms,to limit access,prior to energizing any high voltage switchgear and shall control access during the project after energization. The Contractor shall post and maintain warning and caution signage in areas where work is on going near energized equipment. The Contractor shall cover all energized live parts when work is not being done in the equipment. This includes lunch and breaks. 3. The Contractor shall strictly enforce OSHA lock out/tag out procedures. Initial infractions shall result in a warning;a second infraction shall result in the removal of the workman and his foreman from the site. Continued infractions shall result in removal of the Contractor from the site. 1.12 SHORING AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. Provide all permanent and temporary bracing,anchoring,supports,and shoring required to firmly stabilize and secure all raceways,boxes,enclosure,equipment,and devices. B. Provide free standing racks to supports equipment. Racks shall be securely bolted to the floor,wall,and or ceilings. Where secured to only one surface, provide angle bracing so that racks have a minimum of 4 attachment points. C. Provide concrete housekeeping pads for floor mounted electrical equipment. 1. 3000PSI,with rebar reinforcement. June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 6 of 10 Electrical Gener.I Conditions SECTION 260000 1. roducts manufactured more than 2 years prior to date of delivery to site shall not be used,unless vecified otherwise. E. All equi'ment used for testing shall be in full working order and calibrated per the manufacturer's recom endations. 1 1.8 WARR a NTY A. The eq ipment items shall be supported by service organizations which are reasonably convenient to the equipmnt installation in order to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis d ring the warranty period of the contract. 1.9 COOR"INATION A. All power outages shall be coordinated in writing with the owner a minimum of one(1)week prior to the outage. B. If the o'vIvner will occupy any portion of the facility during any period of construction,cooperate fully with the owner cr his representative during construction operations to minimize conflicts and to facilitate owner usage o as not to interfere with the owner's operations. C. The drwings are diagrammatic. They do not show switches, power and data outlets,special systems components(FA,Access Control,AV,etc),electrical equipment,equipment connections, required raceways, etc. in their exact dimensioned locations. The contractor must carefully review the architectural, structual, mechanical,plumbing,fire protection,and special systems plans to identify conflicts and areas that reuire coordination. D. Coordinate electrical and special systems equipment rough in with millwork,signs,mechanical and plumbing systems,sprinkler systems,architectural and structural elements,and the owner's representative. Minor changes in electrical equipment locations and layout that are required by site conditions or order by the de ign team prior to performance of work shall be made by the contractor without additional charges to the owr er. E. Maintai required NEC working space and dedicated equipment spaces around all electrical equipment, control panels,etc that are subject to maintenance,testing,or user interface. Coordinate with other trades prior to installation. If clearance cannot be provided,the contractor shall notify the engineer prior to rough- in. F. Coordi ate color selections for luminaires and all device plates with architect. G. Contras for shall be responsible for field coordinating with other trades. H. Coordi ate arrangement, mounting,and support of electrical equipment: 1. o allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights that reduce headroom are ndicated. 2. o provide for ease of disconnecting the equipment with minimum interference to other installations. 3. o allow right of way for piping and conduit installed at required slope. 4. o connecting raceways,cables,wireways,cable trays,and busways will be clear of obstructions and of the working and access space of other equipment. 5. To allow for the appropriate installation of furniture and equipment relative to receptacles and switches. • June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 5 of 10 Electrical General Conditions SECTION 260000 C. Installer: A state licensed electrician with documented experience installing all equipment specified here in shall directly supervise all work. Where noted in the specifications,required by code,or required by the manufacturer,installer shall be a manufacturer trained and/or certified installer of the specific product to be installed. D. Testing Agency: Where required by the construction documents,equipment manufacturer,or code;testing shall be performed by an agency 1. With the documented experience and properly calibrated,fully functioning equipment. 2. That is a member company of the International Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory(NRTL). 3. That is acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. 4. Testing may be required to be performed by an independent agency. Refer to individual specification sections for detailed testing requirements. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Inclusion of specific products in these specifications and on the plans does not mean that said products may be used for all applications in all environments.Products may only be used where approved either in the specification installation requirements sections or on the plans.Where the construction documents do no explicitly state what products are acceptable for an application,the most robust products specified are assumed to be the minimum requirement. B. Regulatory Requirements 1. The contractor shall comply with the requirements of all laws,rules,regulations,code and ordinances that have been adopted by the federal,state,and local authorities having jurisdiction(AHJ).All equipment,materials,means and methods shall be acceptable to the AHJ's. 2. Electrical installations shall conform to IEEE C2, NFPA 70,local codes and specified requirements herein. Equipment, materials,installation,and workmanship shall be in accordance with the mandatory and advisory provisions of NFPA 70 unless more stringent requirements are specified or indicated. 3. In each of the publications referred to herein,consider the advisory provisions to be mandatory,as though the word,"shall"had been substituted for"should"wherever it appears. C. Standard Products 1. Unless otherwise approved,all equipment shall be new, properly designed,from a reputable manufacturer meeting the specification qualifications, in compliance with the specification requirements,and in full working order. 2. Where two or more items of the same class of equipment are required,these items shall be products of a single manufacturer;however,the component parts of the item need not be the products of the same manufacturer unless stated in the technical section. 3. Listing and Labeling: Where required,all electrical components,devices,and accessories shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and marked for the intended use. Testing agency shall be UL unless noted otherwise or pre-approved by owner and AHJ. 4. Products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use prior to bid opening. The minimum time of use shall be 2 years. The 2-year period shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. Longer periods may be specified for specific products. The product shall have been on sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers'catalogs,or brochures during the 2-year period. D. Material and Equipment Manufacturing Date June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 4 of 10 Electrical Gener.I Conditions SECTION 260000 2. hop Drawings(where applicable): Manufacturer or contractor prepared drawings showing all relevant dimensions,weights,electrical and mechanical connection requirements,conduit entry points,assembly requirements,lifting requirements,lifting points,and required clearances. a. Include dimensioned plan views and elevations. b. Include all relevant electrical diagrams including schematic and interconnection diagrams for power,signal,and control wiring. D. Submittals shall be organized by specification section,provided with a table of contents,and a cover page with all pertinent project information including contractor's name and contact information, project name and numbed,and specification sections submitted. E. Rejected submittals shall be resubmitted within two weeks of notification of rejection. F. Any equipment covered by division 26 specifications that is installed by the contractor without submittal approval and is not in compliance with the appropriate specifications shall be replaced at the contractor' expense. G. As-Built Record Drawings: The Contractor shall maintain a master set of As-Built Record Drawings that show c anges and any other deviations from the drawings. The markups must be made as the changes are done. At the conclusion of the job,these As-Built Record Drawings shall be transferred to AutoCad electronic files, in a format acceptable to the Owner,and shall be complete and delivered to the Owner's Repres*ntative prior to final acceptance. 1.5 CLOS:OUT SUBMITTALS A. At the :nd of construction,provide a closeout submittal containing the following information in addition to items s p ecified in other sections. 1. ^s built drawings showing the actual locations of installed equipment,site raceways and boxes,and eders rated 100A or more and concealed behind walls or in slabs. 2. to peration and Maintenance data 3. '.hop Drawings 4. est results 5. lk ctual circuit arrangements at panels and equipment. Provide complete,typed as built of all panel chedules. B. Operation and Maintenance Data:At the end of construction,provide the owner with an 8.5x11 bound manua including the following information: 1. "rovide product data as defined under submittals. 2. ';'rovide manufacturer's installation and maintenance instructions for normal operation,routine aintenance and testing,and emergency maintenance procedures. 3. .pare parts listing;source of replacement parts and supplies; and recommended maintenance ;procedures and intervals. C. Shop rawings:At end of construction, provide owner with a final draft, new copy of all shop drawings that were modified after the original submittal was approved 1.6 QUALI (CATIONS A. Manuf.cturer:Company specializing in manufacturing products shown on the construction documents with minim m three years documented experience. B. Supplier: Authorized distributor June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 3 of 10 Electrical General Conditions SECTION 260000 1.2 REFERENCES A. Materials,equipment,and the work performed shall comply with current requirements, rules and regulations of and,where applicable, be certified by the following standards,codes and organizations: 1. American National Standards Institute(ANSI) 2. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM) 3. Americans with Disabilities Act(ADA) 4. ASHRAE/IES 90.1 5. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers(IEEE) 6. IEEE C2 (2007; Errata 2007; INT 2008)National Electrical Safety Code 7. IEEE C57.12.28 (2005)Standard for Pad-Mounted Equipment-Enclosure Integrity 8. IEEE Std 100(2000)The Authoritative Dictionary of IEEE Standards Terms 9. National Electrical Manufacturer's Code(NEMA) 10. NEMA 250(2008)Enclosures for Electrical Equipment(1000 Volts Maximum) 11. National Fire Protection Associations(NFPA) 12. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code-2011 Edition 13. Underwriter's Association(UL) 14. Where discrepancies are found between the requirements of these standards codes,ordinances, regulations and the drawings and specifications,the contractor should notify the engineer prior to installation. Installed work that fails to comply with the requirements of the above shall be replaced at contractor's expense. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Unless otherwise specified or indicated,electrical and electronics terms used in these specifications,and on the drawings,shall be as defined in IEEE Std 100. B. The technical sections referred to herein are those specification sections that describe products,installation procedures,and equipment operations and that refer to this section for detailed description of submittal types. C. The technical paragraphs referred to herein are those paragraphs in PART 2-PRODUCTS and PART 3- EXECUTION of the technical sections that describe products,systems,installation procedures,equipment, and test methods. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submittal requirements shown here shall be used in conjunction with the requirements of the other specification sections. Where in conflict,the more stringent requirements shall apply. B. Submit the following: 1. Permitting, inspection,and final acceptance certifications from the authority having jurisdiction. C. For each product required to be submitted,provide the following 1. Product Data:Submit catalog data showing manufacturer's name and contact information,all standard features,dimensions,weights, listings and product labels,material types,finishes and clearly indicating which optional features will be provided. a. Include amperage and voltage ratings,over-current protective device ratings,AIC ratings,etc b. Where multiple sizes are listed,indicate sizes to be used. c. Where multiple products are shown on the same page, indicate which products to be used. June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 2 of 10 SECTION 260000 ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS PART 1 -GENEL 1.1 SUMM°RY A. Section includes electrical materials and methods. B. The say pe of work shall include complete provisions for electrical power distribution to all lighting,devices, applian es,and equipment shown on the construction documents. 1. 'i rovisions include, but are not limited to,all supplies, materials,equipment,tools,and labor. 2. 'rovisions also include all miscellaneous materials required to complete the work shown including, out not limited to,supports,hangers, raceways, boxes,sleeves,seals,equipment pads,wiring onnectors,terminals, labels,signs,and markers 3. he construction documents include all plans,elevations,details,diagrams, schedules,and notes on she drawings and the written specifications including any items mentioned in either the specifications r on the drawings but not in the other. 4. here used on the plans and in the specifications and where not specifically noted otherwise,the germ"provide"and the term"install"shall mean furnish,install,connect,and test. 5. ynless explicitly noted"by others"or"existing",all items shown graphically or specified by notes and details on the plans shall be furnished,installed,connected,and tested as needed. C. In addi ion to the general scope described above,the work shall include: 1. esting and Commissioning. 2. quipment rental. 3. emporary construction power and lighting. GFCI receptacles shall be used for all construction ower. 4. rovisions for maintaining the functionality of existing to remain building communications,fire alarm, ecurity/access control, public address,and bell systems that will be affected by the work. D. The int-nt of the drawings and specifications is to set forth the general requirements and equipment necess ry for the functioning of the electrical system. The drawings and specifications do not provide a complete list of materials and work required. All miscellaneous electrical components required by good practic. and workmanship for the complete installation of the electrical system shall be provided by the contra tor. E. The el:ctrical contractor shall be responsible for all controls raceways and boxes to serve devices and equip ent shown or described on the construction documents even where such devices and equipment will be pro'ided by a specialist contractor and/or a contractor working directly for the owner such as comm nications,fire alarm, HVAC controls,security/access control. 1. nless noted otherwise,all control wiring shall be by specialist contractor. 2. lectrical contractor shall be responsible for 120 through 480V power required for controls systems .uch as fire alarm panels and extension panels,server racks, HVAC equipment 120V control and aintenance circuits,etc. F. Relate,' Sections: 1. his and all other division 26 specifications,the construction drawings,general contract provisions, nd division 1 specifications shall be considered collectively as the total general requirements for the lectrical equipment and electrical system installation and all special systems shown or described on he electrical or"E series"sheets. June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 1 of 10 Wiring Devices SECTION 262726 1. Install wall plates on flush mounted switches,receptacles,and blank outlets. 2. Install decorative plates with concealed screws on switches,receptacles,and blank outlets in finished areas. 3. Install galvanized steel plates on outlet boxes and junction boxes in unfinished areas,above accessible ceilings,and on surface mounted outlets. 4. Use jumbo size plates for outlets installed in masonry walls. F. Switches 1. Install switches with OFF position down. 2. Where multiple switches are installed at the same location,switches shall be ganged together. G. Dimmers 1. Install wall dimmers to achieve full rating specified and indicated after derating for ganging as instructed by manufacturer. 2. Do not share neutral conductor on load side of dimmers. 3. Install dimmers on the load side of occupancy sensors and other controls. H. Receptacles 1. Install receptacles with grounding pole on top. 2. Provide appropriate receptacle type for the application per the requirements listed in part 2 above. I. Occupancy and photo sensors 1. Install ceiling mounted devices in center of area to be covered. 2. Install wall mounted devices at the typical switch location unless gimbal mounted. 3. Install gimbal mounted wall switches at 18"below ceiling. 4. Install 180 degree ceiling mounted devices at locations that are exposed to adjacent spaces from which false on signals could come. 5. Install gimbal mounted and 180 degree ceiling devices at edge of space facing towards the area to be covered and away from adjacent spaces from which false on signals could come J. Relays 1. Mount relay as indicated on Drawings.Wire numbered relays in panel to control power to each load. Install relays to be accessible.Allow space around relays for ventilation and circulation of air. 2. Identify power wiring with circuit breaker number controlling load.When multiple circuit breaker panels are feeding into relay panel, label wires to indicate originating panel designation. 3. Label each low voltage wire with relay number at each switch or sensor 3.5 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes with furniture and equipment. B. Install wall switch 48 inches above finished floor. C. Install convenience receptacle 18 inches above finished floor. D. Install convenience receptacle 6 inches above back splash of counter. E. Install dimmer 48 inches above finished floor. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect each wiring device for defects. June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 8 of 9 Wiring Devices SECTION 262726 B. Operat each wall switch and occupancy sensor with circuit energized and verify proper operation. C. Verify ach receptacle device is energized. D. Test e h receptacle device for proper polarity. E. Test e.ch GFCI receptacle device for proper operation. 3.7 ADJUS ING A. Adjust 0 evices and wall plates to be flush and level. B. Adjust oor box flush with finish flooring material 3.8 CLEANING A. Clean :xposed surfaces to remove splatters and restore finish. B. Clean i terior of boxes to remove dust,debris,and other material. END OF SECTION June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 9 of 9 SECTION 262819 ENCLOSED SWITCHED AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes 1. Fusible and nonfusible switches. 2. Enclosed circuit breakers 1.2 REFERENCES A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1. NEMA FU 1 -Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses. 2. NEMA KS 1 -Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches(600 Volts Maximum). 3. NEMA AB 1 -Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Molded Case Switches. B. International Electrical Testing Association: 1. NETA ATS-Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings:Manufacturer or contractor prepared drawings showing all relevant dimensions,weights, electrical and mechanical connection requirements,conduit entry points,assembly requirements,and required clearances. 1. Include dimensioned plan views and elevations. 2. Include all relevant electrical diagrams including schematic and interconnection diagrams for power, signal,and control wiring. B. Product Data:Submit catalog data showing all standard features,dimensions,weights,listings and product labels, material types,finishes and clearly indicating which optional features will be provided. 1. Include amperage ratings,voltage,over-current protective device ratings,AIC ratings. 2. Where multiple sizes are listed,indicate sizes to be used. 3. Where multiple products are shown on the same page,indicate which products to be used. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of electrical equipment and record actual circuiting arrangements. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. Provide product data as defined under submittals. 2. Provide manufacturer's installation and maintenance instructions for normal operation,routine maintenance and testing,and emergency maintenance procedures. 3. Submit spare parts listing;source of replacement parts and supplies;and recommended maintenance procedures and intervals. C. Field Quality-Control Test Reports: Report certified by field testing agent indicating results of performance testing required in Part 3 and/or on plans. June 02,2021 K1NNINGHAM HOUSE Page 1 of 4 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers SECTION 262819 1.5 QUALI (CATIONS A. Manufa turer:Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. SuppIir: Authorized distributor C. lnstalIe : A licensed electrician with documented experience installing all equipment specified here in shall directlysupervise all work. Where noted in the specifications or required by the manufacturer,installer shall be a m3nufacturer trained and/or certified installer of the specific product to be installed. D. Testing Agency: An independent agency with the documented experience and properly calibrated,fully functio ing equipment to conduct the testing required by the specifications,plans and code,that is a memb:r company of the International Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing laborabiry(NRTL),and is acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. 1.6 QUALI ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: All components required for a complete functioning system as described here in shall be obt.ined through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Listing :nd Labeling: Where required,all electrical components,devices,and accessories shall be liste and laseled as defined in NFPA 70,Article 100,by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdic ion and marked for the intended use. Testing agency shall be UL unless noted otherwise or pre- approv&d by owner and AHJ. 1.7 WAR' �NTY A. Provid: manufacturer's standard form clearly stating that manufacturer agrees to repair or replace equip ent, materials,and associated auxiliary components that fail or deteriorate within the specified warran period. B. Warra ty Period: one(1)year from the date of substantial completion 1.8 DELIV: RY STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store i clean,dry space located above grade and protect from dirt,water,construction debris,traffic, freeze,and where applicable,deterioration from sun light. B. Maintain factory wrapping or provide additional canvas or plastic cover for all large electrical equipment. Follow:II manufacturer recommendations for humidity and max/min temperatures for storing electrical equip ent. PART 2 -PRO UCTS 2.1 NONF SIBLE AND FUSIBLE SWITCH ASSEMBLIES A. Manuf.cturers: 1. E Electrical 2. .quare D 3. utler Hammer 4. .iemens June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 2 of 4 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers SECTION 262819 5. Substitutions:With engineer approval. B. Product Description: 1. NEMA KS 1,Type HD 2. Externally operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON position. 3. Defeater mechanism to allow opening energized disconnects 30A and smaller. 4. Enclosed load interrupter knife switch,quick make/quick break. 5. Handle lockable in ON and OFF position. 6. Fully hinged front cover. C. Fuse clips: Designed to accommodate NEMA FU 1,Class R fuses. D. Enclosure: NEMA KS 1,to meet conditions. Fabricate enclosure from steel finished with manufacturer's standard gray enamel except that stainless steel shall be used for 4X enclosures 1. Interior Dry Locations:Type 1. 2. Exterior Locations:Type 3R. 3. Industrial Locations:Type 12 4. Corrosive Locations:Type 4X a. Pool pump rooms b. Chemical storage rooms c. Within 25 feet of cooling towers d. Other corrosive locations. E. Service Entrance:Switches identified for use as service equipment are to be labeled for this application. Furnish solid neutral assembly and equipment ground bar. F. Furnish switches with entirely copper current carrying parts. 2.2 SWITCH RATINGS A. Switch Rating: Horsepower rated for AC or DC as indicated on Drawings. B. Short Circuit Current Rating: UL listed for available fault current. 2.3 MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKER A. Manufacturers: 1. GE Electrical 2. Square D 3. Cutler Hammer 4. Siemens 5. Substitutions:With engineer approval. B. Product Description: Enclosed, molded-case circuit breaker conforming to NEMA AB 1,suitable for use as service entrance equipment where applied. C. Accessories:Conform to NEMA AB 1. 1. Shunt Trip Device: 120 volts,provide for enclosed CBs serving elevators and at other locations as noted on plans. 2. Handle Lock: Provisions for padlocking. 3. Insulated Grounding Lug: In each enclosure. June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 3 of 4 Enclosed Switch*s and Circuit Breakers SECTION 262819 D. Enclos re: NEMA AB 1,to meet conditions.Fabricate enclosure from steel finished with manufacturer's standa I gray enamel 1. I terior Dry Locations:Type 1. 2. ;xterior Locations:Type 3R 3. 4 orrosive Locations:Type 4X. PART 3-EXEC. TION 3.1 INSTA CATION A. Install :nclosed switches plumb.Provide supports in accordance with Section 26 05 29. B. Height:5 feet to operating handle. C. Install ses for fusible disconnect switches. D. Install <'ngraved plastic nameplates in accordance with identifications requirements in specifications and on plans. E. Apply .dhesive tag on inside door of each fused switch indicating NEMA fuse class and size installed. 3.2 FIELD UALITY CONTROL A. Inspect each device for defects. B. Operat' each switch with circuit energized and verify proper operation. C. Torque all terminations. END OF SECTION June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 4 of 4 SECTION 265100 LIGHTING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes luminaires,lamps, ballasts,and accessories. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute: 1. ANSI C82.1 -American National Standard for Lamp Ballast-Line Frequency Fluorescent Lamp Ballast. 2. ANSI C82.4-American National Standard for Ballasts-for High-Intensity-Discharge and Low- Pressure Sodium Lamps(Multiple-Supply Type). 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions and components for each luminaire not standard product of manufacturer. B. Product Data:Submit catalog data showing all standard features,dimensions, listings and product labels, material types,finishes and clearly indicating which optional features will be provided. 1. Include ballast and lamp information. 2. Include photometric data 3. Where multiple sizes are listed, indicate sizes to be used. 4. Where multiple products are shown on the same page,indicate which products to be used. 1.4 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer:Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Supplier: Authorized distributor C. Installer: A licensed electrician with documented experience installing all equipment specified here in shall directly supervise all work. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: All components required for a complete functioning luminaire as described here in shall be obtained through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Listing and Labeling: Where required,all electrical components,devices,and accessories shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and marked for the intended use. Testing agency shall be UL unless noted otherwise or pre- approved by owner and AHJ. June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 1 of 5 Lighting SECTION 265100 1.6 WARR'NTY A. Provid: manufacturer's standard form clearly stating that manufacturer agrees to repair or replace equip ent, materials,and associated auxiliary components that fail or deteriorate within the specified warran period. B. Warra ty Period: 1. •ne(1)year from the date of substantial completion for luminaires 2. ive(5)years from the date of substantial completion for all ballasts. 1.7 DELIV: RY STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store i clean,dry space located above grade and protect from dirt,water, construction debris,traffic, freeze,and where applicable,deterioration from sun light. B. Maintan factory wrapping or provide additional canvas or plastic cover. Follow all manufacturer recomrhendations for humidity and max/min temperatures for storing. 1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Furnish two of each plastic lens type. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 LUMINAIRES A. Manufacturers: 1. Manufacturers shall be as listed in the luminaire schedule 2. Substitutions:With engineer approval. B. Produ t Description:Complete luminaire assemblies,with features,options,and accessories as scheduled. 2.2 LED DIVERS A. Produ t Description: 1. ED power supplies shall operate LEDs within the current limit specification of the manufacturer 2. 0Hzinputsource 3. nput power factor>90% 4. inimum efficiency of 70%at full rated load of the driver 5. inimum starting temperature of 0°F 6. aximum case temperature rating of at least 70°C 7. ower supply output regulated to+/-5%across published load rang 8. lass A sound rating 9. Compliant with the requirements of the Federal Communications Commission(FCC)rules and regulations,Title 47CFR part 15, non-consumer(Class A)for EMl/RFl B 10. 3 year minimum warranty from date of manufacturer against defects in material or workmanship, including a replacement,for operation at or below the maximum case temperature specification.(For LED lamps and internal power regulation components for defects resulting in a fixture lumen depreciation>30%.) 11. Dimmable power supplies shall allow the light output to be maintained at the lowest control setting (prior to off without dropping out 12. No PCBs June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 2 of 5 Lighting SECTION 265100 2.3 LED Lamps and Luminaires A. Manufacturers 1. Lamps: a. Lithonia b. Philips c. Substitutions:With engineer approval. 2. Luminaire Manufacturers shall a. provide the manufacturer's name of the LED being used in the luminaire b. meet DOE's Energy Star or Design Light Consortium performance criteria c. registered as a DOE Quality Advocate B. Product Description 1. Refer to owners Design&Constructions Standards Manual 5.26.50 2. 50,000 hour rated 3. Minimum CRI 80 4. The CCT shall be 4000K 5. total harmonic distortion (THD)<10% 6. power factor�90% 7. Shall be tested in accordance with LM-79-08 electrical and photometric measurements. Provide to the owner test results of each unique lamp. 8. LED light source packages,arrays or modules used in the luminaire shall be tested in accordance with LM-80 lumen depreciation test. Provide to the owner,test results of each unique package,array or module.The L70 rated life result shall be a minimum of 50,000 hours 9. Luminaires shall be UL,or ETL, listed and be furnished complete with LEDs and power supplies 10. Minimum 3 year warranty covering all components. 2.4 EXIT SIGNS A. Manufacturers: 1. Manufacturers shall be as listed in the luminaire schedule 2. Substitutions:With engineer approval. B. Product Description: 1. Universally mountable,field selectable. 2. Finished areas:clear glass face with red letters 3. Mechanical rooms and industrial areas: Aluminum or steel stencil face with red letters. 4. Direction Arrows: universal type for field adjustment C. Battery:6 or 12 volt, nickel-cadmium type,with 1.5 hour capacity. D. Battery Charger: Dual-rate type,with sufficient capacity to recharge discharged battery to full charge within twelve hours. E. Lamps:LED 5 W per side,maximum. F. Input Voltage: 120-277 volts. June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 3 of 5 Lighting SECTION 265100 PART 3 -EXEC TION 3.1 EXISTI G WORK A. Discon ect and remove abandoned luminaires, lamps,and accessories. B. Extend existing interior luminaire installations using materials and methods compatible with existing installa ions. C. Clean .nd repair existing interior luminaires to remain or to be reinstalled. 3.2 PREIN.TALLATION COORDINATION A. Refer to architectural reflected ceiling plan for exact light fixture locations. B. Exami e the area of installation to verify adequate space and mounting provisions are provided for the specifi:d luminaire prior to order luminaires. C. Verify t at luminaires will not interfere with required clearances for equipment such as HVAC equipment filter re, oval clearance, NEC working space in front of HVAC equipment control panels,etc. D. Coordi ate location of exit lights with structure and other MEP systems to insure that exit signs are clearly visible.' 3.3 INSTA CATION A. Lighting Conductors and Conduit 1. i'rovide ground wire and one neutral conductor per circuit in all lighting conduit. 2. A II conductors serving luminaires shall be routed in conduit. 3. uminare whips may be flexible metal conduit up to 6ft. Secure to structure with listed supports. 4. ake wiring connections to branch circuit using building wire with insulation suitable for temperature onditions within luminaire, B. Label .11 circuit breakers serving emergency lighting C. Install uspended luminaires using pendants supported from swivel hangers. Install pendant length required to suspend luminaire at indicated height. D. Install I minaires plumb,square,and level and aligned with ceilings,walls,and with each other and secure per mai ufacturer's printed instructions.. E. Recesed Luminaire Requirements 1. nstall recessed luminaires to permit removal from below. 2. nstall recessed luminaires using accessories and firestopping materials to meet regulatory equirements for fire rating. 3. nstall clips to secure recessed grid-supported luminaires in place. 4. support luminaires in grid ceiling independent of ceiling framing. F. Batte Pack Installation 1. � nless noted otherwise, lighting with battery packs is to be switched with the adjacent,similar room fighting. 2. n addition to the switched circuit, provide an un-switched leg from the same circuit to all battery sacks for battery pack sensing of power loss. June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 4 of 5 Lighting SECTION 265100 3. Mount in an accessible location if not integral to luminaire. 4. If a remote battery indicator light is provided, install flush in ceiling adjacent to fixture.Coordinate location with architect for lobbys, reception areas, public corridors,conference rooms,classrooms, and other spaces where aesthetic considerations are critical. 5. Coordinate mounting location for remote test switch(if required)with architect. G. Install wall-mounted luminaires at height as indicated on architectural drawings H. Install accessories furnished with each luminaire. I. Install specified lamps in each luminaire. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection. Inspect for proper connection and operation. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Aim and adjust luminaires. B. Position exit sign directional arrows as indicated on Drawings. 3.6 CLEANING A. Remove dirt and debris from enclosures. B. Clean photometric control surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. C. Clean finishes and touch up damage. END OF SECTION June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 5 of 5 SECTION 28 31 00 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM PART 1 -GEN=RAL 1.1 SUMM RY Section includes fire alarm control panels,manual fire alarm stations,automatic smoke and heat detectors,fire alarm signaling applia ces,and auxiliary fire alarm equipment and power and signal wire and cable. A. Relates Sections: 1. II ivision 1 specification requirements shall apply. 2. iliviSion 26 specification requirements shall apply. B. All labor, materials,apparatus,and appliances essential to the complete functioning and commissioning of the fire alarm system described herein,or which may be reasonably implied as essential,shall be furnished and ins:;ailed by the contractor whether specifically mentioned in the contract drawings and specifications or not. C. The col tractor shall be responsible for providing all components and functions required by the authority having jurisdiction. D. Coordi ate with the engineer any conflicts between the specifications and the drawings. E. The ter "provide"shall mean purchase, install,make all terminations,start up,and test. F. All con uit, raceways,device boxes,terminal strips, labeling, 120V power connections, etc required to suppo the fire alarm system shall be provided as part of the general contract. The fire alarm contractor should oordinate this scope of work with the general and electrical contractor prior to bid. Where another contra.or will be performing any portion of the work,e.g.,conduit and j-box installation,the fire alarm contra.or shall be responsible for coordinating the locations and requirements for the work to be performed by oth:rs. 1.2 REFE'ENCES A. Nation.I Fire Protection Association: 1. FPA 72-National Fire Alarm Code.2013 2. FPA 262-Standard Method of Test for Flame Travel and Smoke of Wires and Cables for Use in 4\ir-Handling Spaces.2011 3. FPA 13-Installation of Sprinkler Systems 2013 4. NFPA 14-Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems 2013 5. NFPA 70-National Electrical Code 2014 6. NFPA 90A-Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems 2012 7. NFPA 90B-Installation of Warm Air Heating adn Air-Conditioning Systems 2012 8. FPA 101 -Life Safety Code 2012 B. TAS- exas Accessibility Standard C. UT Design and Construction Standard-Section 5.28.30-Fire Alarm and Signaling Revised January 2013 (referenced below as UT Design and Construction Standard) June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 1 of 8 Electrical General Conditions SECTION 283100 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to and follow all requirements of Division 1 submittal procedures and UT Design and Construction Standard, Section 1.09. B. Shop Drawings: 1. System wiring diagram(riser)showing each appliance,device,and control equipment,and wiring connections between them including HVAC equipment,elevator control panels,etc. 2. Floor plans showing all fire alarm equipment,candela ratings,speaker wattages(where applicable), the approximate pathways for signaling line circuits(SLCs), initiating device circuits(IDCs)and notification appliance circuits(NACs),and circuit identifications. 3. Shop drawings shall conform to the requirements of the UT Design and Construction Standard, Section 5.28.30—Alarm and Signaling C. Complete battery sizing calculations.Battery calculations shall include a 20%derating factor. D. Complete voltage drop and circuit sizing calculations showing 20%spare capacity on each circuit. E. Product Data:Submit annotated catalog data showing manufacturer's name, model,catalog numbers, installation instructions,wiring diagrams,and verification of UL listing for all equipment and components. F. Test Reports: Indicate procedures and results for specified field testing and inspection. G. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Indicate activities on site,adverse findings,and recommendations. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Refer to and follow all requirements of Division 1 submittal procedures. B. Project Record Documents(As Builts): Record actual locations of fire alarm equipment. Record documents shall include all items specified for the shop drawings. C. Provide a copy of all required software. D. Operation and Maintenance Data:Submit manufacturer's standard operating and maintenance instructions. 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer:Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years experience,and with service facilities within 100 miles of project. B. Installation Supervisor:NICET Level III certified. C. Designer:A qualified fire alarm system designer meeting one of the following conditions: 1. A registered professional engineer with a Bachelor or Masters of Science Degree in Fire Protection Engineering from an accredited university engineering program and at least four years of experience in fire protection engineering and/or a profession engineering license in fire protection engineering 2. A registered professional engineer with 4 years of verified experience in the design of fire protection and detection systems. 3. A NICET Level 4 Fire Alarm Technician. June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 2 of 8 Electrical Gener,:I Conditions SECTION 283100 1.6 QUALII ASSURANCE A. Listing :nd Labeling: Where required,all electrical components,devices,and accessories shall be liste and lab*led as defined in NFPA 70,Article 100,by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdic ion and marked for the intended use. Testing agency shall be UL unless noted otherwise or pre- approvd by owner and AHJ. B. Provid:all products required for the complete system from a single manufacture except where components are eit !-r not available from said manufacturer or are required to be from another source for compatibility with ot per systems such as the elevator control panel or a BAS. C. All com.onents shall be suitable and listed for the application including ambient temperature,corrosive,and hazarthus environment. D. All comloonents shall be ADA compliant. E. Provid:wiring materials located in plenums with peak optical density not greater than 0.5,average optical density not greater than 0.15,and flame spread not greater than 5 feet(1.5 m)when tested in accordance with NPPA 262. F. Perfor Work in accordance with NFPA,all national,state,and local codes. Contractor shall follow the most r:cent version of all applicable codes. G. Coordi ate work, including testing,with the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). H. Maintaii one copy of each document on site. I. All mat&rials required for the fire alarm system shall be stored in an interior,dry location designated by the genera contractor. All materials shall be left in their packaging until installation. Installed equipment shall be prot-cted from dust and debris during construction. J. All equpment installed on this project shall be new and unused, UNO. The contractor shall remove all shipping labels,dirt, paint spots,grease,and stains from all equipment. Debris shall be removed as it accum lates. Upon completion of his work,the contractor shall clean all equipment. No loose parts or scraps of equipment shall be left on the premises or the equipment. 1.7 WARR1A NTY A. Provid: manufacturer's standard form clearly stating that manufacturer agrees to repair or replace equip ent, materials,and associated auxiliary components that fail or deteriorate within the specified warran period. B. Provide a three year written warranty against defects in all materials and work to be performed under this contract. Warranty period shall commence upon system acceptance by the AHJ. C. The warranty shall include all materials,work,travel expenses required to correct deficiencies or failures during the warranty period. D. The contractor shall take correction action within 24 hours of notification of a problem. E. If excessive nuisance tripping occurs(more than 2 false alarms in a 48 hour period)the contractor shall provide under the warranty all materials and work necessary to correct the issue. June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 3 of 8 Electrical General Conditions SECTION 283100 F. Refer to UT Design and Construction Standard,Section 6.03 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Fire Alarm System: Existing building is provided with a complete,addressable automatic local fire alarm system with connections to a constantly attended central monitoring station. Fire alarm scope shall include all materials,work and testing described herein and on the contract drawings required to extend the existing system to the new addition, including but not limited to 1. System wiring, raceways,pullboxes,terminal cabinets,outlet and mounting boxes. 2. Control and monitoring equipment 3. Alarm and supervisory signal initiating devices 4. Alarm notification appliances 5. Extension panels 6. All other accessories and miscellaneous items required for a complete operating system. 2.2 ALARM SEQUENCE OF OPERATION A. In addition to the existing systems operations,which shall remain as is,actuation of any new or existing initiating device shall causes the fire alarm signaling devices, both audio and visual,to be activated throughout the new addition. B. Actuation of the new duct smoke sensor shall shut down the appropriate air handler in accordance with NFPA 90A in addition to the other requirements listed here.a duct detector activation shall register as a supervisory condition at the fire alarm control panel and that a supervisory signal shall be transmitted by the fire alarm control panel to the Campus-Wide Proprietary Supervisory Signaling System. See UT Design and Construction Standard,Section 2.02 Remote Monitor. C. Once activated,the system shall remain in supervisory mode until the initiating device is reset and the fire alarm control panel is reset and restored to normal. 2.3 DUCT-MOUNTED SMOKE DETECTOR A. Product Description: 1. Auxiliary SPDT relay contact. 2. Key-operated normal-reset-test switch. 3. Duct sampling tubes extending width of duct. 4. Visual indication of detector actuation. 5. Duct-mounted housing. 6. Comply with UL 268A. 7. Addressable 8. LED remote mounted to indicate sensor status(May be unit mounted in mechanical rooms). B. Sampling tube shall extend across the full width of the duct to be monitored. 2.4 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES A. Product Description 1. UL listed 2. High intensity xenon strobe 3. American with Disabilities Act(ADA)compliant June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 4 of 8 Electrical Gener:I Conditions SECTION 283100 4. exas Accessibility Standard(TAS)compliant 5. isual strobe selectable as 15,30,60,75, or 110 using selection jumper that is secured behind ousing. 6. 6 stalled using a standard electrical box. 7. isual appliances shall be clear or white meeting the requirements of UL 1971 and either have no arking or be marked with the word"ALERT"stamped or imprinted on the appliances and be visible i• the public. B. Notific.tion appliances shall be combination audio and visual except that visual only appliances may be used w ere adequate audio coverage, 15dB above ambient, is provided by other appliances in the area. C. Provid: hazardous area listed appliances where noted on plans D. Provid notification appliances in compliance with TAS standards 1. he maximum pulse duration shall be two-tenths of one second(0.2 sec)with a maximum duty cycle f 40 percent.The pulse duration is defined as the time interval between initial and final points of 10 ercent of maximum signal. 2. he flash rate shall be a minimum of 1 Hz and a maximum of 3 Hz. 2.5 SPRINKLER WATERFLOW AND TAMPER SWITCHES A. Coordinate purchase and installation of water-flow and tamper switches with fire protection contractor. B. Water flow switches shall actuate upon flow from a single sprinkler head. C. Locate in a metal housing with a gasketed cover. 2.6 CONTROL AND MONITOR DEVICES A. Product Description 1. 24V DC low voltage, powered by fire alarm system 2. House in a metal enclosure that is mounted in an accessible location. 3. Provide with quantity of contacts as required for the equipment served,sized for equipment served, and rated for continuous duty. B. Provide control relays/contacts and monitor modules for all equipment noted on the drawings and in the specification to be shutdown,actuated,or supervised. 2.7 WIRE AND CABLE A. Product Description: Power limited fire-protective signaling cable,copper conductor,300 volts insulation rated 105 degrees C. B. Cable Located Exposed in Plenums: Power limited fire-protective signaling cable classified for fire and smoke characteristics,copper conductor,300 volts insulation rated 105 degrees C,suitable for use in air handling ducts, hollow spaces used as ducts,and plenums. C. Fire alarm circuit conductors have insulation color coded to meet the UT Design and Construction Standards,Section 3.12 Wiring, Item D. June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 5 of 8 Electrical General Conditions SECTION 283100 PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements:Coordination and project conditions. B. Verify products and systems receiving devices are ready for installation. 3.2 EXISTING WORK A. Remove exposed abandoned fire alarm wiring[, including abandoned wiring above accessible ceiling finishes].Cut cable flush with walls and floors,and patch surfaces. B. Disconnect and remove abandoned fire alarm equipment. C. Maintain access to existing fire alarm equipment and other installations remaining active and requiring access.Modify installation or provide access panel. D. Extend existing fire alarm installations using materials and methods[compatible with existing installations, or]as specified. E. Clean and repair existing fire alarm equipment to remain or to be reinstalled. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Follow all national and local codes,including ADA,for mounting devices and installing wire. 1. Manual controls shall be mounted such that the operable part of the manually actuated initiating device shall be not less than 42 in.and not more than 48 in.from the finished floor. 2. Pull stations shall be mounted within 5'of doors. 3. Ceiling mounted smoke detection devices shall be mounted at a maximum of 20'and a minimum of 4"from side walls,spaced at 30'maximum, located a minimum of 12"from light fixtures,and a minimum of 36"from fans and diffusers. 4. Visual notification appliance shall conform to the mounting requirements of NFPA 72(2013 edition), Chapter 18,Section 18.5.5.1 which states"Wall-mounted appliances shall be mounted such that the entire lens is not less than 80 in.(2.03 m)and not greater than 96 in. (2.44 m)above the finished floor or at the mounting height specified using the performance-based alternative of 18.5.5.E". 5. Audible notification appliance shall conform to the mounting requirements of NFPA 72(2013 edition), Chapter 18,Section 18.4.8.1 which states"If ceiling heights allow,and unless otherwise permitted by 18.4.8.2 through 18.4.8.5,wall mounted appliances shall have their tops above the finished floors at heights of not less than 90 in.(2.29 m)and below the finished ceilings at distances of not less than 6 in.(150 mm)". 6. Combination devices: Per Section 18.4.8.3,"If combination audible/visible appliances are installed, the location of the installed appliance shall be determined by the requirements of 18.5.5". B. All FA wiring shall be installed as follows 1. Neatly train and bundle all wiring 2. Securely attach to structure 3. Separate from 120V or higher wiring by a minimum of 12. 4. Make connections with approved pressure type terminal blocks 5. Label conductors at terminal blocks, FACP, remote units,appliances and devices. 6. Color code conductors. 7. Install 16 AWG minimum size conductors for fire alarm detection and signal circuit conductors. Use larger wire gauge where appropriate and as directed by AHJ. June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 6 of 8 Electrical Generl Conditions SECTION 283100 C. Install 're alarm wiring in 3/<"(min)conduit where noted below 1. ''iser wiring and wiring between floors. 2. : xposed below lay in ceiling 3. In mechanical spaces 4. In walls and other inaccessible spaces 5. i here routed below 7 feet above finished grade D. Raceway installation requirements: 1. Install per Section 26 05 33—Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems 2. Install insulated bushings on the ends of all conduits 3. "rovide pull string in all empty conduits to be used by others 4. ! onduit and junction boxes that are exposed to moisture shall be rated NEMA 3R. 5. "rovide UL listed fire stopping at floor and fire wall penetrations and at other locations as required. Install fire stopping per manufacturer's instructions. E. Box in-tallation requirement. 1. 1 ach device shown on the plans requires a 4"square by 2-1/8"deep junction box with conduit to an ccessible,concealed above ceiling space or nearest interface device specified by fire alarm system ontractor. 2. ( oordinate rough in requirements for junction boxes(mud rings,etc.),conduits,cabling,etc.for each sire alarm device with fire alarm system installer prior to rough in. 3. ! eiling mounted devices,such as smoke detectors, may require octagon type junction boxes. 4. 'II boxes shall be recessed mounted. 5. ! oordinate with architect for any devices that must be surface mounted because of code or site equirements. 6. 'II fire alarm boxes shall be clearly marked red and be labeled with the circuit numbers. F. Fire al.rm wiring not installed in conduit shall be rated for the application(plenum rated). Support every 48". Suppo s may not be used for any other trade's work other than fire alarm system. G. Conner t conduit and wire to all auxiliary components such as door release devices,sprinkler flow switches, sprinkle r valve tamper switches,duct smoke detectors and magnetic door locks H. Autom.tic Detector Installation:Conform to NFPA 72. I. Install :ngraved plastic nameplates on all control panels,terminal boxes,and extension panels. J. Paint j nction boxes serving fire alarm system conduit red and clearly label circuit type and number on outside.of box using permanent method. K. Grouns and bond fire alarm equipment and circuits. L. Duct d:tectors shall be installed ahead of any branches in the ductwork and at the manufacturer's minimum recom ended distance from the fan. M. All fire :larm circuits shall meet manufacturer's requirements for maximum resistance and voltage drop. 3.4 HVAC i.YSTEM INTERFACES A. Coordi ate fire alarm connections to HVAC equipment with mechanical contractor. All equipment requiring shutdo n shall be interfaced with the FA system. June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 7 of 8 Electrical General Conditions SECTION 283100 B. Provide fire alarm control modules for interface with fire smoke dampers(FSD's). Provide one control module for each HVAC unit to allow fire alarm system to close FSD upon fire alarm system shutdown of their respective HVAC unit. C. Provide duct mounted smoke detector in air duct of HVAC units. Duct detector to be wired to shut down unit upon detection of smoke and send supervisory signal to fire alarm panel. Provide duct detector with LED alarm indicator remote mounted to bottom of ceiling below unit served. Provide DC power for duct detector from unit served. Coordinate requirements and installation with mechanical contractor. 3.5 LABELING A. Labeling for fire alarm system panels and equipment shall be a permanent method such as phenolic label or engraving. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test the complete system in accordance with NFPA 72 and local AHJ requirements. 1. Perform a pre test prior to the acceptance testing and provide a test report to the owner. 2. Measure all circuits and record resistance,voltage,and other items as required by NFPA 72. 3. Measure and adjust initiating devices prior to acceptance testing. 4. Acceptance test shall include,but shall not be limited to,the following: a. Test for grounded,open,and shorted circuits. b. Test each initiating device functionality and system response. c. Test smoke detector sensing chamber. d. Test system supervisory capabilities. e. Test emergency power supply and battery charger. f. Verify functionality and visibility of all visual alarms. g. Test audible sound level coverage throughout the building. h. Test remote station signal transmitter. B. Provide test report certified by installer 1. Include all recorded measurements. 2. Provide an outline of each test performed. 3. Describe all testing procedures. 4. Describe each system failure and corrective action taken. 5. Use NFPA standard forms where applicable. C. Coordinate the acceptance testing with owner and AHJ to allow for witnessing at their discretion. D. All testing shall be accomplished according to the requirements of the UT Design and Construction Standards,Section 5.28.30—Alarm and Signaling, Part 5 Testing and Part 6 Documentation. 3.7 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A. Include services of certified technician to supervise installation,adjustments,final connections,and system testing. END OF SECTION June 02,2021 KINNINGHAM HOUSE Page 8 of 8 �Pmu"n anew. r j xo!-i Competitive Sealed Proposal Ranking for: Kinningham House co u - 10 CL LLJ > > 3 �_ o O- Q c 0. O o r+ Z Contractor Name c cc cc Base Price Alternates Totals Total Cost '� .°', °; W `'= c +� a O (U *r Total Points Z Q m rl N QJ O C O a N cfl '� O a 7 N M +r J 'm M M a N a C7 a E Z_ Q Q cv a a oc E x M w QJ a M •o c M E O o � L a V LL John King Y Y Y $2,306,116.00 $0.00 1 $2,306,116.00 (Lowest Priced Proposal/ Proposer's Price) X 40 = Price Score 40.00 16.50 15.25 12.25 -2.00 82.00 1 Novak Y Y Y $2,359,587.00 $0.00 F-.,$2,359,587.00 (Lowest Priced Proposal/ Proposer's Price) X 40 = Price Score 39.09 9.50 8.25 9.25 -3.25 62.84 3 Pfluger Y Y Y $2,530,000.001 $0.00 1 $2,530,000.00 (Lowest Priced Proposal/ Proposer's Price) X 40 = Price Score 36.46 16.25 16.25 11.00 -1.75 78.21 2 Selection Committee: Richard Will, Eric Dady, Katie Baker, Ryan Hansanuwat Date: 17-Aug-21 in This Page is too large to OCR CERTIFICATE OF INTERESTED PARTIES FORM 1295 10fl Complete Nos. i - 4 and 6 if there are interested parties. OFFICE USE ONLY Complete Nos, 1, 2, 31 5, and 6 if there are no interested parties. CERTIFICATION OF FILING 1 Name of business entity filing form, and the city, state and country of the business entity's place Certificate Number: of business. 2021-793785 John King Construction, Ltd Round Rock, TX United States Date Filed: 2 Name of governmental entity or state agency that is a party to the contract for which the form is 08/23/2021 being filed. City of Round Rock Date Acknowledged: 08/23/2021 g Provide the identification number used by the governmental entity or state agency to track or identify the contract, and provide a description of the services, goods, or other property to be provided under the contract. 000000 General Construction Nature of interest 4 Name of Interested PartyCILY,State Count(place of business) rY a licable PP Controlling Intermediary king, John Austin, TX United States X 5 Check only if there is NO Interested Party. ❑ 6 UNSWORN DECLARATION My name is ,and my date of birth is My address is �1 --- - �9 I �-- --- -- (street) (city) (state) (zip code) (country) declare under penalty of perjury that the foregoing is true and correct. Executed in County, State of , on the day of , 20 (month) (year) Signature of authorized agent of contracting business entity (Declarant) Forms provided by Texas Ethics Commission www,ethi-cs,.state.tx.us version vl.i.ialo5cac